Mercedes - E Class Estate - Owners Manual - 2021 - 2021

Disclaimer All of the für following PDF document for this sich vehicle model Daslanguage folgende versions PDF-Dokument dieses Fahrzeugmodell bezieht in allen relate solely toversion vehicles intended for sale on the German which Sprachversionen nur aufofdie die für den deutschen Marktand bestimmt The following theFahrzeuge, Owner‘s Manual describes allmarket models, series and correspond to German regulations. sind undequipment die den deutschen Vorschriften entsprechen. Bitte wenden Sie sich an special of your vehicle. Country-specific language variations are Ihren autorisierten Mercedes-Benz Servicestützpunkt, um equipped ein gedrucktes possible. Please note that your vehicle might not be withExemplar all the Please contact your authorised Mercedes-Benz Service Centreand to obtain für andere Fahrzeugmodelle und affects Fahrzeugmodelljahre zu erhalten. described functions. This also safety-relevant systems functions. a printed version forauthorised other vehicle models and vehicle model years. Thislike PDF Please contact your Mercedes-Benz dealership if you would document the latest version. Possible variations to your vehicle mayzu not Dieses PDF-Dokument stellt die Manual aktuelle Version dar. Mögliche Abweichungen to receive aisprinted Owner‘s for other vehicle models and vehicle be taken into account askönnten Mercedes-Benz constantlysein, updates their vehicles to Ihrem konkreten Fahrzeug nicht berücksichtigt da Mercedes-Benz model years. the state of the art and introduces changes design andanpasst, equipment. seine Fahrzeuge ständig dem neuesten Standinder Technik sowiePlease therefore that this PDF is document in no way replaces the version Änderungen in Form und Ausstattung vornimmt. Bitte beachten Sie daher, dass The onlinenote Owner‘s Manual the current and valid version. Itprinted is possible that which was affecting deliveredyour with yourFall vehicle. dieses PDF-Dokument in keinem das gedruckte ersetzt, mit deviations specific vehicle could Exemplar not be taken intodas account dem Fahrzeug ausgeliefert wurde. as Mercedes-Benz constantly adapts its vehicles according to the latest technology and makes changes to the form and the equipment. Please also read the printed Owner‘s Manual, supplementary documents and the digital Owner‘s Manual in the vehicle. Copyright All rights reserved. All texts, images and graphics are subject to copyright and other laws for the protection of intellectual property. They may not be copied or changed for any commercial use or for the purpose of being passed on nor used on other webistes. Internal use only Thank you you for for buying Mercedes-Benz Mercedes-Benz Before you rst drive o , read this Owner's Manual carefully and familiarise yourself with your vehicle. For your own safety and a longer operating lifespan of the vehicle, follow the instructions and warning notices in this Owner's Manual. Disregarding them may lead to damage to the vehicle or injury to people. The standard equipment and product description of your vehicle may vary and depends on the following factors: R model R order R national version R availability Your vehicle may therefore di er, in individual cases, from that shown in the descriptions and illustrations. The illustrations in this Owner's Manual show a le -hand drive vehicle. On right-hand-drive vehicles, the layout of car parts and control elements di ers accordingly. Mercedes-Benz is constantly developing its vehicles further. Mercedes-Benz therefore reserves the right to introduce changes in the following areas: R design R equipment R technical features The following documents are integral parts of the vehicle: R Digital Owner's Manual R printed Owner's Manual R service booklet R equipment-dependent supplements R supplementary documents Keep these documents in the vehicle at all times. Ensure that all documents are in the vehicle or passed on in the event of sale or rental. 2135845921Z102 2135845921Z102 2 Contents Symbols .......................................................... 5 At a glance ...................................................... 6 Cockpit ........................................................... 6 Cockpit (Plug-in-Hybrid) ................................. 10 Indicator and warning lamps .......................... 12 Overhead control panel ................................. 14 Door operating unit and seat adjustment ....... 16 Emergencies and breakdowns ....................... 18 Digital Digit al Owner's Manual ................................. 20 Calling up the Digital Owner's Manual ............ 20 Calling up the Digital Owner's Manual ............ 21 General Gener al notes notes ............................................... Protection of the environment ....................... Take-back of end-of-life vehicles .................... Mercedes-Benz GenuineParts ........................ Owner's Manual ............................................ Operating safety ............................................ Declarations of conformity and notes on driving in di erent countries .......................... Diagnostics connection ................................. 23 23 23 24 25 25 28 35 Quali ed specialist workshop ........................ Vehicle registration ....................................... Correct use of the vehicle ............................. Information on the REACH regulation ............. Notes for persons with electronic medical aids .............................................................. Implied warranty ........................................... QR code for rescue card ............................... Data storage ................................................. Copyright ...................................................... 37 37 37 38 Sliding sunroof .............................................. 97 Roller sunblinds ........................................... 101 Anti-the protection .................................... 102 38 39 39 39 42 Occupant safety safety ............................................ Restraint system ........................................... Seat belts ..................................................... Airbags ......................................................... PRE-SAFE® system ........................................ Safely transporting children in the vehicle ...... Notes on pets in the vehicle .......................... 43 43 45 50 56 58 78 Seats and stowing stowing ....................................... Notes on the correct driver's seat position .. Seats .......................................................... Steering wheel ............................................ Easy entry and exit feature .......................... Memory function ......................................... Stowage areas ............................................ Sockets ....................................................... Wireless charging of the mobile phone and connection with the exterior aerial ........ Fitting and removing the oor mats ............. 105 105 106 119 121 122 123 138 Opening and closing ...................................... Key ............................................................... Doors ............................................................ Load compartment ........................................ Side windows ................................................ 79 79 82 87 93 Light and sight ............................................ Exterior lighting ........................................... Interior lighting ............................................ Windscreen wipers and windscreen washer system ............................................ Mirrors ........................................................ Area permeable to radio waves on the windscreen ................................................. 142 142 150 139 141 152 156 159 Infrared-re ective windscreen function ........ 159 Climate control Climate control ........................................... 160 Overview of climate control systems ............ 160 Operating the climate control system .......... 161 Driving and parking Driving parking ..................................... Driving ........................................................ DYNAMIC SELECT switch ............................ Automatic transmission ............................... Function of the 4MATIC ............................... Refuelling .................................................... Charging the high-voltage battery (plug-in hybrid) ........................................................ Parking ....................................................... Driving and driving safety systems ............... Trailer hitch ................................................. Bicycle rack function ................................... Vehicle towing instructions .......................... 174 174 195 199 203 203 210 222 229 287 293 295 Instrument Instr ument display display and on-board on-board computer put er ........................................................... Notes on the instrument display and onboard computer .......................................... Overview of instrument display .................... Overview of buttons on the steering wheel ... Operating the on-board computer ................ Function of the power meter (plug-in hybrid) ........................................................ Function of the electric motor power availability display (plug-in hybrid) ................ Displaying the power meter (plug-in hybrid) ........................................................ Overview of displays on the instrument display ........................................................ Head-up display .......................................... LINGUATR LINGUA TRONIC ONIC ........................................... Notes on operating safety ........................... Operation .................................................... Using LINGUATRONIC e ectively ................. Essential voice commands .......................... 296 296 297 298 298 300 300 301 301 302 305 305 305 307 308 Contents 3 MBUX multimedia system system ............................ Overview and operation ............................... System settings .......................................... Plug-in hybrid settings ................................. Navigation ................................................... Telephone ................................................... Mercedes me app ....................................... Mercedes-Benz emergency call system ....... Radio, media & TV ....................................... Sound settings ............................................ 326 326 336 341 342 350 353 362 366 372 Maintenance Maint enance and care care ................................. ASSYST PLUS service interval display .......... Engine compartment ................................... Cleaning and care ....................................... 374 374 375 382 Breakdo Br eakdown wn assistance assistance ................................. Emergency .................................................. Flat tyre ...................................................... Battery (vehicle) .......................................... Tow-starting or towing away ........................ Electrical fuses ............................................ 389 389 391 396 402 407 4 Contents Wheels and tyres tyres ......................................... Notes on noise or unusual handling characteristics ................................................... Notes on regularly inspecting wheels and tyres ........................................................... Notes on snow chains ................................. Tyre pressure .............................................. Wheel change ............................................. Emergency spare wheel ............................... 411 Tec echnical hnical data data ............................................. Notes on technical data .............................. On-board electronics ................................... Regulatory radio identi cation and notes ..... Vehicle identi cation plate, VIN and engine number overview .............................. Operating uids ........................................... Vehicle data ................................................ Trailer hitch ................................................. 428 428 428 430 411 411 411 412 416 426 431 433 442 446 Displayy messages Displa messages and war warning/indicat ning/indicator or lamps .......................................................... 449 lamps Display messages ........................................ 449 Warning and indicator lamps ....................... 517 Indexx .......................................................... 534 Inde Symbols In this Owner's Manual, you will nd the following symbols: & DAN ANGER GER Danger due to not observing the warning notices Warning notices draw your attention to hazards that may endanger your health or life, or the health or life of others. # Observe the warning notices. + ENVIRONMENTAL ENVIRONMENT AL NOTE NOTE Environmental damage due to failure to observe environmental notes Environmental notes include information on environmentally responsible behaviour or environmentally responsible disposal. # Observe environmental notes. * NOTE Damage to property due to failure to observe notes on material damage Notes on material damage inform you of risks which may lead to your vehicle being damaged. # Observe notes on material damage. % These symbols indicate useful instructions or further information that could be helpful to you. # Instruction (/ page) Further information on a topic Display Display eld in the Instrument Display/media display 4 Highest menu level, which is to be selected in the multimedia system 5 Relevant submenus, which are to be selected in the multimedia system * Indicates a cause 5 6 At a glance – Cockpit At a glance – Cockpit 1 Steering wheel gearshi paddles → 201 G è ECO start/stop function → 189 2 Combination switch → 144 H c Active Parking Assist → 281 3 Instrument display → 297 I É Sets the vehicle level → 266 4 DIRECT SELECT lever → 199 J DYNAMIC SELECT switch → 197 5 Media display → 326 K PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps → 54 6 Start/stop button → 178 L Control panel for the MBUX multimedia system → 298 7 Calls up MBUX multimedia system applications → 329 M Adjusts the steering wheel manually → 119 8 Climate control systems → 160 N Adjusts the steering wheel electrically → 120 9 Glove compartment → 126 → 120 A £ Hazard warning light system → 144 B Stowage compartment → 126 C Touchpad → 329 On-board computer → 298 D 8 Controller for volume and switching sound on/o → 326 Cruise control or variable limiter → 239 I Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC → 244 E Ü Switches the MBUX multimedia system on/o → 326 F ü Lowers the head restraints → 111 ý Switches the steering wheel heater on/o O Control panel: P Diagnostics connection → 35 Q Opens the bonnet → 375 7 8 At a glance – Cockpit R ! Electric parking brake → 226 S Light switch → 142 10 At a glance – Cockpit (Plug-in-Hybrid) Le -hand-drive vehicles At a glance – Cockpit (Plug-in-Hybrid) 1 Instrument display: õ Operational readiness → 296 Power availability display → 300 Power meter → 300 Trip computer → 296 ECO Assist → 190 Plug-in hybrid settings → 341 Energy ow display → 341 2 Media display: 3 ! Sets pre-entry climate control for departure time → 167 4 & Switches immediate pre-entry climate control on/o → 167 5 DYNAMIC SELECT switch → 195 6 ° Haptic accelerator pedal → 195 7 q Reduces recuperation → 192 8 ± Increases recuperation → 192 9 6 Depressurises the fuel tank → 203 11 12 At a glance – Indicator and warning lamps Instrument display At a glance – Indicator and warning lamps 1 #! Turn signal lights → 144 C # Electrical fault → 523 2 ï Trailer hitch → 521 D Ù Electric power steering → 521 3 6 Restraint system → 519 E ! ABS → 529 → → 532 4 å ESP® ÷ ESP® 529 F h Tyre pressure monitoring system → 529 G % Diesel engine: preglow 5 R Rear fog light → 143 → 523 6 K High beam → 144 H 8 Reserve fuel with fuel ller ap location indicator L Low beam → 142 I Fuel level → 297 T Standing lights → 142 J ! Electric parking brake (red) → 526 7 ÿ Coolant temperature → 523 K J Brakes (red) → 526 8 Coolant temperature display → 297 L ü Seat belt → 519 9 ! Electric parking brake (yellow) → 526 M ; Engine diagnostics → 523 A J Brakes (yellow) → 526 N ä Suspension → 528 B L Distance warning → 528 OFF 13 14 At a glance – Overhead control panel At a glance – Overhead control panel 1 Sun visors 7 u Switches the rear interior lighting on/o → 150 → 150 → 97 → 97 → 157 2 p Switches the le -hand reading lamp on/o → 150 8 p Switches the right-hand reading lamp on/o 3 S Switches the automatic interior lighting control on/o → 150 9 Spectacles compartment 4 G SOS button → 353 A 3 Opens/closes the panorama sliding sunroof 5 c Switches the front interior lighting on/o → 150 6 ; me button → 353 3 Opens/closes the roller sunblind B Inside rearview mirror 15 16 At a glance – Door operating unit and seat adjustment At a glance – Door operating unit and seat adjustment 1 Adjusts the seats electrically → 109 C Opens the door → 83 2 w Switches the seat heating on/o → 114 D V Operates the memory function → 123 3 s Switches the seat ventilation on/o → 115 E Adjusts the head restraints → 110 112 4 & % Locks/unlocks the vehicle → 83 F Con gures the seat settings → 5 q Opens/closes the tailgate → 87 G Adjusts the seat fore-and-a position → 108 6 Í Operates the outside mirrors → 156 H Adjusts the seat cushion length → 108 109 7 W Opens/closes the right side window → 93 I Adjusts the 4-way lumbar support → 8 W Opens/closes the rear right side window → 93 J Adjusts the seat backrest inclination → 108 9 T Child safety lock for the rear side windows → 77 K Adjusts the seat height → 108 → → A W Opens/closes the rear le side window 93 L Adjusts the seat cushion inclination 108 B W Opens/closes the le side window → 93 17 18 At a glance – Emergencies and breakdowns At a glance – Emergencies and breakdowns 1 B-pillar with: → 390 information label on fuel type → 203 413 8 Fire extinguisher → 39 2 Safety vests → 389 3 ; me button → 353 information label on tyre pressure → → 353 QR code for accessing the rescue card → 39 → QR code for accessing the rescue card G SOS button 4 To check and top up operating uids Starting assistance 5 Tow-starting or towing away 9 Fuel ller ap with: 433 A Tow-starting or towing away → 403 → 400 B Warning triangle → 389 → 403 C TIREFIT kit → 393 D First-aid kit (so sided) → 390 6 Flat tyre → 391 7 £ Hazard warning light system → 144 19 20 Digital Owner's Manual Calling up the the Digital Digital Owner's Manual Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Owner's Manual R R R R R The Digital Owner's Manual describes the functions and operation of the vehicle and the multimedia system. # Select one of the following menu items in the Digital Owner's Manual: R Search: search for keywords in order to nd quick answers to questions about the operation of the vehicle. R Quick start: here is where you nd the rst steps towards setting up your vehicle. Tips: nd information that prepares you for certain everyday situations with your vehicle. Animations: watch animations of the vehicle functions. Messages: receive additional information about the messages in the Instrument Display. Bookmarks: gain access to your personally saved bookmarks. Language: select the language for the Digital Owner's Manual. 1 Back 2 Adds bookmarks 3 Picture 4 Contents section 5 Directions of movement of contents section 6 Menu Some sections in the Digital Owner's Manual, such as warning notes, can be expanded and collapsed. Additional methods methods of calling up the the Digital Digital Owner's Manual: Direct Dir ect access: open the required content in the Digital Owner's Manual by pressing and holding an entry on the tab bar in the multimedia system: Instrument Instr ument Display: Display: call up brief information as display messages in the instrument cluster Digital Owner's Manual LINGUATR LINGUA TRONIC: ONIC: call up via the voice control system For safety reasons, the Digital Owner's Manual is deactivated while driving. R Calling up the the Digital Digital Owner's Manual Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Info 5 Owner's Manual R 5 Õ R R R R R The Digital Owner's Manual describes the functions and operation of the vehicle and the multimedia system. # Select one of the following menu items in the Digital Owner's Manual: Search: search for keywords in order to nd quick answers to questions about the operation of the vehicle. Quick start: here is where you nd the rst steps towards setting up your vehicle. Tips: nd information that prepares you for certain everyday situations with your vehicle. Animations: watch animations of the vehicle functions. Messages: receive additional information about the messages in the Instrument Display. Bookmarks: gain access to your personally saved bookmarks. Language: select the language for the Digital Owner's Manual. 1 2 3 4 5 6 21 Back Adds bookmarks Picture Contents section Directions of movement of contents section Menu Some sections in the Digital Owner's Manual, such as warning notes, can be expanded and collapsed. Additional methods methods of calling up the the Digital Digital Owner's Manual: 22 Digital Owner's Manual Direct Dir ect access: open the required content in the Digital Owner's Manual by pressing and holding an entry on the tab bar in the multimedia system: Instr Ins trument ument Display: Display: call up brief information as display messages in the instrument cluster LINGUA LIN GUATR TRONIC: ONIC: call up via the voice control system For safety reasons, the Digital Owner's Manual is deactivated while driving. General notes Protection Prot ection of the the envir environment onment + ENVIRONMENTAL ENVIRONMENT AL NOTE NOTE Environmental damage due to operating conditions and personal driving style The pollutant emission of the vehicle is directly related to the way you operate the vehicle. Operate your vehicle in an environmentally responsible manner to help protect the environment. Please observe the following recommendations on operating conditions and personal driving style. Operating Oper ating conditions: # Make sure that the tyre pressure is correct. # Do not carry any unnecessary weight (e.g. roof luggage racks once you no longer need them). # Adhere to the service intervals. A regularly serviced vehicle will contribute to environmental protection. # Always have maintenance work carried out at a quali ed specialist workshop. Per ersonal sonal driving driving sty style: le: # Do not depress the accelerator pedal when starting the engine. # Do not warm up the vehicle while stationary. # Drive carefully and maintain a suitable distance from the vehicle in front. # Avoid frequent, sudden acceleration and braking. # Change gear in good time and use each gear only up to Ô of its maximum engine speed. # Switch o the vehicle in stationary traffic, e.g. by using the ECO start/stop function. # Drive in a fuel-e cient manner. Observe the ECO display for an economical driving style. 23 Plug-in hybr hybrid id + ENVIRONMENT ENVIR ONMENTAL AL NOTE NOTE Environmental pollution caused by irresponsible disposal of the high-voltage battery A high-voltage battery contains materials which are harmful to the environment. # Dispose of faulty high-voltage batteries at a quali ed specialist workshop. Tak ake-bac e-backk of end-of-life end-of-life vehicles vehicles EU countries countries only: Mercedes-Benz will take back your end-of-life vehicle for environment-friendly disposal in accordance with the European Union (EU) End-ofLife Vehicles Directive. A network of vehicle take-back points and dismantlers has been established for you to return your vehicle. You can leave it at any of these points free of charge. This makes an important contribution to closing the recycling circle and conserving resources. 24 General notes For further information about the recycling and disposal of end-of-life vehicles, and the take-back conditions, please visit the national Mercedes-Benz website for your country. Mercedes-Benz Mer cedes-Benz GenuinePar GenuineParts ts + ENVIRONMENTAL ENVIRONMENT AL NOTE NOTE Environmental damage caused by not using recycled reconditioned components Mercedes‑Benz AG o ers recycled reconditioned components and parts with the same quality as new parts. The same entitlement from the implied warranty is valid as for new parts. # Recycled reconditioned components and parts from Mercedes‑Benz AG. * NOTE Impairment of the operating e ciency of the restraint systems from installing accessory parts or from repairs or welding Airbags and seat belt tensioners, as well as control units and sensors for the restraint systems, may be installed in the following areas of your vehicle: R Doors R Door pillars R Door sills R Seats R Cockpit R Instrument cluster R Centre console R Lateral roof frame # # # Do not install accessory parts such as audio systems in these areas. Do not carry out repairs or welding. Have accessory parts retro tted at a quali ed specialist workshop. You could jeopardise the operating safety of your vehicle if you use parts, tyres and wheels as well as accessories relevant to safety which have not been approved by Mercedes-Benz. Safety-relevant systems, e.g. the brake system, may malfunction. Only use Mercedes-Benz GenuineParts or parts of equal quality. Only use tyres, wheels and accessory parts that have been speci cally approved for your vehicle model. Mercedes-Benz tests original parts and conversion parts and accessory parts that have been speci cally approved for your vehicle model for their reliability, safety and suitability. Despite ongoing market research, Mercedes-Benz is unable to assess other parts. Mercedes-Benz therefore accepts no responsibility for the use of such parts in Mercedes-Benz vehicles, even if they have been o cially approved or independently approved by a testing centre. Certain parts are only o cially approved for installation or modi cation if they comply with legal requirements. All Mercedes-Benz GenuineParts meet the approval requirements. The use of non-approved parts may invalidate the vehicle's general operating permit. General notes This is the case in the following situations: R The vehicle type is di erent from that for which the vehicle's general operating permit was granted. R Other road users could be endangered. R The exhaust gas or noise level gets worse. Always specify the vehicle identi cation number (VIN) (/ page 431) when ordering MercedesBenz GenuineParts. Owner's Manual This Owner's Manual and the Digital Owner's Manual in the vehicle describe the following models and the standard and special equipment for your vehicle: R The models and the standard and special equipment available at the time of this Owner's Manual going to press. R The models and the standard and special equipment only available in certain countries. R The models and the standard and special equipment, which will only be available at a later date. Note that your vehicle may not be tted with all features described. This is also the case for systems relevant to safety. Therefore, the equipment on your vehicle may di er from that in the descriptions and illustrations. The original purchase agreement for your vehicle contains a list of the equipment in your vehicle at the time of delivery. Should you have any questions concerning equipment and operation, please consult a MercedesBenz Service Centre. The Owner's Manual, Supplement, further supplementary documents and Service Booklet are important documents and should be kept in the vehicle. 25 Operating Oper ating safety safety & WARNING Risk of injury due to malfunctions or system failure In order to avoid malfunctions or system failures: # Always have the speci ed service/maintenance work as well as any necessary repairs carried out at a quali ed specialist workshop. & WARNING Risk of accident or injury due to improper modi cations to electronic components Modi cations to electronic components, their so ware or wiring can impair their functionality and/or the functionality of other networked components or safety-relevant systems. This can endanger the vehicle's operating safety. # You must not tamper with wiring, electronic components, or their so ware. 26 # General notes Always have work on electrical and electronic devices carried out at a quali ed specialist workshop. If you modify the on-board electronics, the general operating permit is rendered invalid. Observe the "On-board electronics" section in "Technical data". & WARNING Risk of re due to ammable materials on hot parts of the exhaust system Flammable material such as leaves, grass or twigs may ignite if they come into contact with hot parts of the exhaust system. # When driving on unpaved roads or o road, regularly check the vehicle underside. # Remove trapped plants or other ammable material, in particular. # If there is damage, consult a quali ed specialist workshop immediately. * NOTE Damage to the vehicle due to driving too fast and due to impacts to the vehicle underbody or suspension components In the following situations, in particular, there is a risk of damage to the vehicle: R the vehicle becomes grounded, e.g. on a high kerb or an unpaved road R the vehicle is driven too fast over an obstacle, e.g. a kerb, speed bump or pothole R a heavy object strikes the underbody or suspension components In situations such as these, damage to the body, underbody, suspension components, wheels or tyres may not be visible. Components damaged in this way can unexpectedly fail or, in the case of an accident, may no longer absorb the resulting force as intended. If the underbody panelling is damaged, ammable materials such as leaves, grass or twigs can collect between the underbody and the underbody panelling. These materials may ignite if they come into contact with hot parts of the exhaust system. # Have the vehicle checked and repaired immediately at a quali ed specialist workshop. or # If driving safety is impaired while continuing your journey, pull over and stop the vehicle immediately, while paying attention to road and tra c conditions, and contact a quali ed specialist workshop. Plug-in hybr hybrid id Hybrid vehicles have a combustion engine and an electric motor. The energy supply for operating the vehicle electrically is provided by the highvoltage on-board electrical system. General notes & DAN ANGER GER Risk of death and re due to modi ed and/or damaged components of the high-voltage on-board electrical system The vehicle's high-voltage on-board electrical system is under high voltage. If you modify component parts in the vehicle's high-voltage on-board electrical system or touch damaged component parts, you may be electrocuted. In addition, modi ed and/or damaged components may cause a re. In the event of an accident or impact to the vehicle underbody, components of the highvoltage electrical system may be damaged although the damage is not visible. # Never make any modi cations to the high-voltage on-board electrical system. # Do not switch on or use the vehicle if its high-voltage on-board electrical system components have been modi ed or damaged. # # # # Never touch damaged components of the high-voltage on-board electrical system. A er an accident, do not touch any components of the high-voltage on-board electrical system. A er an accident, have the vehicle transported away. Have the components of the high-voltage on-board electrical system checked at a quali ed specialist workshop and replaced if necessary. The components of the high-voltage on-board electrical system are marked with yellow warning stickers. The cables of the high-voltage on-board electrical system are orange. Vehicles with hybrid systems generate signi cantly less noise when stationary and when being driven than vehicles with combustion engines. When driving in electric mode, the vehicle may not be heard by other road users due to the significantly reduced noise generated. 27 It is for this reason that the vehicle is equipped with a sound generator, which serves as an acoustic vehicle alerting system (AVAS). Vehicles with with a 48 V on-board on-board electrical electrical system system & DAN ANGER GER Risk of fatal injury by touching damaged high-voltage components Vehicles with a 48 V on-board electrical system contain individual high-voltage components. These high-voltage components are under high voltage. If you modify component parts of these highvoltage components or touch damaged component parts, you may be electrocuted. High voltage components may be damaged in an accident, although the damage may not be visible. # Never perform modi cations to component parts of high-voltage components. # Never touch damaged component parts of high-voltage components. # Never touch component parts of highvoltage components a er an accident. 28 General notes Vehicles with a 48 V on-board electrical system contain high voltage components. These components are marked with a high voltage label: vehicle installed installed radio radio components components Only for Only for EU and EFTA EFTA countries countries and countries countries that that recognise the the EU manufactur manufacturer's er's declaration declaration of confor conf ormity: mity: You can obtain further information from a Mercedes-Benz service centre. Unit nited ed Kingdom only: All work on high voltage components must be carried out at a quali ed specialist workshop. Declarations Declar ations of confor conformity mity and notes notes on driving driving in di erent erent countr countries ies Electromagne Electr omagnetic tic compatibility compatibility The electromagnetic compatibility of the vehicle components has been checked and certi ed according to the currently valid version of Regulation UN R10. The following information applies to all wireless components of the vehicle and of the information systems and communication devices integrated in the vehicle: The manufacturers of the wireless components ensure that all wireless components installed in the vehicle comply with Directive 2014/53/EU. The full texts of the EU declarations of conformity are available at the following web address: https://moba.i.daimler.com/markets/ece-row/ baix/cars/certi cates-of-conformity/en_GB/ index.html The following information applies to all wireless components of the vehicle and of the information systems and communication devices integrated in the vehicle: The manufacturers of the wireless components installed in the vehicle hereby declare that all wireless components installed in the vehicle comply with the Radio Regulations 2017 directive. The full texts of the declarations of conformity are available at the following web address: https://moba.i.daimler.com/markets/ece-row/ baix/cars/certi cates-of-conformity/en_GB/ index.html General notes Delaware Drive, Tongwell Milton Keynes, MK15 8BA England 29 For Niger Nigeria ia only: For Brazil Brazil only: Note on two-way radio systems in the vehicle: These systems are not protected against harmful interference and must not cause interference in properly approved systems. Importer Import er Mercedes-Benz Cars UK Limited Delaware Drive, Tongwell Milton Keynes, MK15 8BA England Import Im porter er of Mercedes-Benz Mercedes-Benz replacement replacement parts par ts Mercedes-Benz Parts Logistics For Jamaica only: All wireless vehicle components have received type approval from the SMA. For Moldova Moldova only: Import Im porter er S.C. GRAND PREMIUM S.R.L. Moldova mun. Chisinau, str. Hîncesti sos., 2/2 Connection and use of the radio communications equipment in this vehicle is permitted by the Nigerian Communications Commission 30 General notes For Russia Russia only: For Turke Turkeyy only: Import Im porter er Mercedes Benz Otomotiv Ticaret ve Hizmetler A.Ş. Genel Merkez Akçaburgaz Mah. Süleyman Şah Cad. No: 6/1 34522 Esenyurt/İstanbul Ukraine Ukr aine only: The manufacturers of the wireless components installed in the vehicle hereby declare that all wireless components installed in the vehicle comply with the technical regulations for two-way radios. You can obtain further information from a Mercedes-Benz service centre. radios. You can obtain further information from a Mercedes-Benz service centre. Import Im porter er PJSC “AUTOCAPITAL” Velyka Vasylkivska str. 15/2 01004 Kyiv Ukraine Wir ireless eless applications in the the vehicle vehicle Besides the typical frequencies for mobile communication cars by Mercedes-Benz make use of the following automotive radio applications. The manufacturers of the wireless components installed in the vehicle hereby declare that the wireless components installed in the vehicle comply with the technical regulations for two-way Wir ireless eless applications in the the vehicle vehicle Tec echnology hnology Frequency Freq uency range range Tr Transmission ansmission output/magnetic output/magnetic eld str trength ength Remote Keyless Entry 20 kHz (9–90 kHz) ≤ 72 dBμA/m at 10m Wireless Power Transmission 105 kHz (90–119 kHz) ≤ 42 dBμA/m at 10m General notes 31 Tec echnology hnology Frequency Freq uency range range Transmission output/magnetic Transmission output/magnetic eld str trength ength Remote Keyless Entry 120 kHz (119–135 kHz) ≤ 42 dBμA/m at 10m Wireless Power Transmission 127 kHz (119–135 kHz) ≤ 66 dBμA/m at 10m with the magnetic eld strength level decreasing 3dB/octave above 119 kHz Near- eld communication 13.553–13.567 MHz ≤ 42 dBμA/m at 10m Remote Keyless Entry, Garage Door Opener, Tire Pressure Monitoring 433 MHz (433.05–434.79 MHz) ≤ 10 mW ERP Block Heater Remote Control, Garage Door Opener 868 MHz (868.0–868.6 MHz) ≤ 25 mW ERP Block Heater Remote Control, Garage Door Opener 869 MHz (868.7–869.2 MHz) ≤ 25 mW ERP Bluetooth, Kleer, RLAN, wireless Headphones 2.4 GHz ISM band (2400–2483.5 MHz) ≤ 100 mW EIRP RLAN 5.1 GHz UNII-1 (5150–5250 MHz) ≤ 25 mW EIRP Interior Monitoring Radar, RLAN 5.8 GHz UNII-3 (5725–5875 MHz) ≤ 25 mW EIRP Remote Keyless Entry 7.25 GHz UWB (6.0–8.5 GHz) ≤ -41.3 dBm/MHz EIRP mean ≤ 0 dBm/MHz EIRP peak 32 General notes Tec echnology hnology Frequency Freq uency range range Tr Transmission ansmission output/magnetic output/magnetic eld str trength ength 76 GHz radar 76–77 GHz ≤ 55 dBm peak EIRP Carsharing Module NFC: 13.553–13.567 MHz Bluetooth Bluet ooth®: 2402–2480 MHz NFC: ≤ 42 dBμA/m at 10 m Bluetooth Bluet ooth®: ≤ +4 dBm (class 2) Rear Seat Entertainment System Bluetooth®: Bluetooth 2400–2483.5 MHz WLAN WL AN 2.4 GHZ: 2400–2483.5 MHz WLAN WL AN 5 GHz: 5150–5250 MHz 5725–5875 MHz Bluetooth®: Bluetooth -0.8 dBm WLAN WL AN 2.4 GHZ: 14.5 dBm WLAN WL AN 5 GHz: 20.5 dBm 13.3 dBm Two-way radio (Tel7 telephone control unit) E-GSM (900 MHz) GSM (1800 MHz) +33 dBm +30 dBm UMTS (Band I, III, VIII) +24 dBm (+1/-3 dB) LTE (Band 1, 3, 7, 8, 20, 28) +23 dBm (±2 dB) General notes Tec echnology hnology Frequency Freq uency range range Transmission output/magnetic Transmission output/magnetic eld str trength ength RAMSES (Router And Mobile SErviceS) GSM (E-GSM 850 / E-GSM 900, Class 4) GSM (E-GSM 1800 / E-GSM 1900, Class 4) < +32.5 dBm (±1 dB) < +29.5 dBm (±1 dB) UMTS (WCDMA FDD I, II, III, IV, V, VIII, XIX, Class 3) < +23.5 dBm (±1 dB) LTE (FDD B1, B2, B3, B4, B5, B7, B8, B9, B18, B19, B21, B28, Class 3) < +23 dBm (±1 dB) LTE (TDD B38, B40, B41, Class 3) < +23 dBm (±1 dB) GNSS (1559–1610 MHz) Receiving only Information Infor mation about the the speci c absorp absorption tion rate rate For France only: The values were determined and tested in accordance with the Décret n° 2019-1186 guideline 33 regarding the indication of the speci c absorption rate (SAR) of wireless vehicle components. Infor Inf ormation mation about the the speci c absorp absorption tion rate rate Vehicle component component (designation in accordance accor dance with with EU DoC) SAR value value in W/kg Applicable limit value value Radio data transmission telephone system 0.24 W/kg 2 W/kg Hermes 2.1 < 0.4 W/kg 2 W/kg 34 General notes Vehicle component component (designation in accordance accor dance with with EU DoC) SAR value value in W/kg Applicable limit value value Compensator ECE DE003 & ECE DE004 < 0.2 W/kg 2 W/kg DAI RSE 1.8 W/kg 2 W/kg Tablet PC SM-T230NZ 0.7 W/kg 4 W/kg NRCS2P 0.003 W/kg 2 W/kg NTG7RSU 0.07 W/kg 2 W/kg NTG7 0.08 W/kg 2 W/kg RAMSES 1.0 and 1.1 0.036 W/kg 2 W/kg Jack Copy and translation of the original declaration of conformity: EC declaration declaration of confor conformity mity 1. The undersigned, representing Manufacturer: BRANO a.s. 747 41 Hradec nad Moravicí, Opavská 1000, The Czech Republic ID No.: 64-387-5933 VAT No.: CZ64-387-5933 herewith declares under our sole responsibility that the product: 2. a) Name: Jack Type, Number: A) A 164 580 02 18, A 166 580 01 18 B) A 240 580 00 18 C) A 639 580 02 18 D) A 639 580 03 18 E) A 910 580 00 00 F) A 247 580 00 00, A 293 580 00 00 General notes Year of manufacture: 2020 Complies with all relevant provisions Directive No. 2006/42/EC b) Description and purpose of use: Car jack is intended solely for li ing of the concrete car, in accordance with the instruction label on the car jack. 3. References of harmonized and other standards or speci cations ISO 4063, EN ISO 14341-A, AS 2693, DBL 8230.10, DBL 7382.20, DBL 7392.10, DBL 8451.15, MBN 10435, Technical documentation of the product is stored at the premise of the manufacturer. The person responsible for assembling the technical documentation of the product: Head of the Technical Department Brano a.s. 4. Hradec nad Moravicí Place 5. 05.10.2020 Date Engineer Petr Petr [Signature] Director of division ZZ TIREFIT kit Copy and translation of the original declaration of conformity: EC declaration declaration of confor conformity mity In accordance with EC Directive 2006/42/EC We hereby declare that the product Product designation: Daimler electric air pump Model designation: 0851ve, DT/UW 200046 IBK-LK2 MB part no.: A 000 583 8200 complies with the following relevant regulations: 2014/30/EU Applied harmonised standards, in particular: 35 DIN EN 55014-1: 2012 DIN EN 55014-2: 2016 Manufacturer: Dunlop Tech GmbH Address: O enbacher Landstrasse 8, 63456 Hanau Authorised representative: IMS dept. Date: December 2019 Signature: IMS-AE, IMS-AE-L Diagnostics Diagnos tics connection The diagnostics connection is a technical interface in the vehicle. It is used, for example, in the context of repair and maintenance work or for reading out vehicle data by a specialist workshop. Diagnostic devices should therefore only be connected by a quali ed specialist workshop. & WARNING Risk of accident due to connecting devices to the diagnostics connection If you connect devices to the diagnostics connection of the vehicle, the function of vehicle 36 General notes systems and operating safety may be impaired. # For safety reasons, we recommend that you only use and connect products approved by your Mercedes-Benz service centre. & WARNING Risk of accident due to objects in the driver's footwell Objects in the driver's footwell may impede pedal travel or block a depressed pedal. This jeopardises the operating and road safety of the vehicle. # Stow all objects in the vehicle securely so that they cannot get into the driver's footwell. # Always t the oor mats securely and as prescribed in order to ensure that there is always su cient room for the pedals. # Do not use loose oor mats and do not place oor mats on top of one another. * NOTE Battery discharging from using devices connected to the diagnostics connection Using devices at the diagnostics connection drains the battery. # Check the charge level of the battery. # If the charge level is low, charge the battery, e.g. by driving a considerable distance. Please also note the information about the 12 V battery and short-distance trips in the "Driving and Parking" chapter (/ page 182). Connecting and using another device with the diagnostics connection can have the following e ects: R malfunctions in the vehicle system R permanent damage to vehicle components Please refer to the warranty terms and conditions for this matter. General notes Moreover, connecting equipment to the diagnostics connection can lead to emissions monitoring information being reset, for example. This may lead to the vehicle failing to meet the requirements of the next emissions inspection during the main inspection. Quali ed specialis specialistt work workshop shop A quali ed specialist workshop has the necessary special skills, tools and quali cations to correctly carry out any necessary work on your vehicle. This particularly applies to safety-relevant works. Always have the following work carried out on your vehicle at a quali ed specialist workshop: R Safety-relevant works R Service and maintenance work R Repair work R Modi cations as well as installations and conversions R Work on electronic components R R Vehicles with with 48 V on-board on-board electrical electrical system: system: work on the high-voltage component of the 48 V on-board electrical system Plug-in hybr hybrid: id: work on the hybrid system Mercedes‑Benz recommends a Mercedes‑Benz service centre. Vehicle regis registr tration ation Mercedes-Benz may ask its service centres to carry out technical inspections on certain vehicles. The quality or safety of the vehicle is improved as a result of the inspection. Mercedes-Benz can only inform you about vehicle checks if Mercedes-Benz has your registration data. It is possible that your vehicle has not yet been registered in your name in the following cases: R if your vehicle was not purchased at an authorised specialist dealer. R if your vehicle has not yet been examined at a Mercedes-Benz service centre. 37 It is advisable to register your vehicle with a Mercedes-Benz service centre. Inform Mercedes-Benz as soon as possible about any change in address or vehicle ownership. You can do this at a Mercedes-Benz service centre, for example. Correct Corr ect use of the the vehicle vehicle If you remove any warning stickers, you or others could fail to recognise certain dangers. Leave warning stickers in position. Observe the following information in particular when driving your vehicle: R the safety notes in this Owner's Manual, vehicle-speci c supplements and further supplementary documents R technical data for the vehicle R tra c rules and regulations R laws and safety standards pertaining to motor vehicles 38 General notes Information Infor mation on the the REACH REACH regulation regulation EU and EFTA EFTA countries countries only: the REACH regulation (Regulation (EC) No. 1907/2006, Article 33) stipulates a duty to supply information about substances of very high concern (SVHCs). Mercedes‑Benz AG acts to the best of its knowledge to prevent these SVHCs from being used and to enable customers to safely handle these substances. There are SVHCs known to Mercedes‑Benz AG, according to supplier information and internal product information, found in individual components of this vehicle in quantities of over 0.1 percent by weight. Further information can be obtained at the following addresses: R https://reach.daimler.com/de/home/ R https://reach.daimler.com/en/home/ Notes for for persons persons with with electronic electronic medical aids Mercedes-Benz AG cannot, despite carefully developing vehicle systems, completely rule out the interaction of vehicle systems with electronic medical aids such as cardiac pacemakers. In addition, there are components installed in the vehicle that, regardless of the operating status of the vehicle, can generate magnetic elds on a par with permanent magnets. These elds can be found, for example, in the area around the multimedia and sound system or also in the area of the seats, depending on the vehicle equipment. For this reason, the following can occur in isolated cases, depending on the aids used: R Medical aids malfunctioning R Adverse health e ects Observe the notes and warnings of the manufacturer of the medical aids; if in doubt, contact the device manufacturer and/or your doctor. If there is continuing uncertainty concerning the possibility of medical aids malfunctioning, MercedesBenz AG recommends using only few electrical vehicle systems and/or maintaining a distance from the components. Plug-in hybr hybrid id When charging the high-voltage battery, keep a distance of at least an arm's length between the medical aid and the following components: R the power supply equipment This includes charging stations in the form of a wallbox or a public charging point, for example. R vehicle components carrying live voltage This includes the charging cable and the charging control box, for example. Only have repairs and maintenance work in the area of the following components carried out by a quali ed specialist workshop: R vehicle components carrying live voltage R transmission aerials R multimedia system and sound system If you have any queries or suggestions, consult a quali ed specialist workshop. General notes Implied Im plied warr warranty anty * NOTE NOTE Damage to the vehicle arising from violation of these operating instructions. Damage to the vehicle can arise from violation of these operating instructions. This damage is not covered either by the Mercedes-Benz implied warranty or by the New‑ or Used-Vehicle Warranty. # Follow the instructions in these operating instructions on proper operation of your vehicle as well as on possible vehicle damage. QR code for for rescue rescue card QR codes are attached in the fuel ller ap and on the opposite side on the B-pillar. In the event of an accident, rescue services can use the QR code to quickly nd the appropriate rescue card for your vehicle. The current rescue card contains the most important information about your vehicle in a compact form, e.g. the routing of the electric lines. Further information can be obtained at https:// www.mercedes-benz.de/qr-code. Data stor Data storage age Dataa processing Dat processing in the the vehicle vehicle Electronic control Electronic control units Electronic control units are tted in your vehicle. Control units process data which, for example, they receive from vehicle sensors, generate themselves or exchange between themselves. Some control units are required for the safe operation of your vehicle, some assist you when driving, such as driver assistance systems, while others enable convenience or infotainment functions. The following provides you with general information regarding data processing in the vehicle. Additional information regarding exactly which data in your vehicle are collected, saved and transmitted to third parties, and for what purpose, can be found in the information directly related to the functional characteristics in question in their respective operating instructions. This information is also available online and, depending on the vehicle equipment, digitally. 39 Per ersonal sonal data Every vehicle is identi ed by a unique vehicle identi cation number. Depending on the country, this vehicle identi cation number can be used by, for example, governmental authorities to determine the identity of the owner. There are other possibilities to use data collected from the vehicle to identify the owner or driver, such as the licence plate number. Therefore, data generated or processed by control units may be attributable to a person or, under certain conditions, become attributable to a person. Depending on which vehicle data are available, it may be possible to make inferences about, for example, your driving behaviour, your location, your route or your use patterns. Legal req Legal requir uirements ements reg regar arding ding the the disclosure disclosure of data If legally required to do so, manufacturers are, in individual cases, legally obliged to provide governmental entities, upon request and to the extent required, data stored by the manufacturer. For example, this may be the case during the investigation of a criminal o ence. 40 General notes Governmental entities are themselves, in individual cases and within the applicable legal framework, authorised to read out data from the vehicle. In the case of an accident, information that can help with an investigation can, therefore, be taken from the airbag control unit, for example. Operational data Operational data in the the vehicle vehicle This is data regarding the operation of the vehicle, which have been processed by control units. This includes the following data, for example: R vehicle status information such as the speed, longitudinal acceleration, lateral acceleration, number of wheel revolutions or the fastened seat belts display R ambient conditions, such as temperature, rain sensor or distance sensor Generally, the use of these data is temporary; they will not be stored beyond the period of operation and will only be processed within the vehicle itself. Control units o en contain data memories for vehicle keys, for example. Their use permits the temporary or permanent documentation of technical information about the vehicle's operat- ing state, component loads, maintenance requirements and technical events or faults. Depending on the vehicle equipment, the following data are stored: R operating status of system components, such as ll levels, tyre pressure or battery status R malfunctions or faults in important system components, such as lights or brakes R system reactions in special driving situations, such as airbag deployment or the intervention of stability control systems R information on events leading to vehicle damage In certain cases, it may be required to store data that would have otherwise been used only temporarily. This may be the case if the vehicle has detected a malfunction, for example. If you use services, such as repair services and maintenance work, stored operational data as well as the vehicle identi cation number can be read out and used. They can be read out by service network employees, such as workshops and manufacturers or third parties, such as break- down services. The same is true in the case of warranty claims and quality assurance measures. In general, the readout is performed via the legally prescribed port for the diagnostics connection in the vehicle. The operational data that are read out document technical states of the vehicle or of individual components and assist in the diagnosis of malfunctions, compliance with warranty obligations and quality improvement. To that end, these data, in particular information about component loads, technical events, malfunctions and other faults may be transmitted along with the vehicle identi cation number to the manufacturer. Furthermore, the manufacturer is subject to product liability. For this reason the manufacturer also uses operational data from the vehicle, for example, for recalls. These data can also be used to examine the customer's warranty and guarantee claims. Fault memories in the vehicle can be reset by a service outlet or at your request as part of repair or maintenance work. General notes Convenience and infot Convenience infotainment ainment functions You can store convenience settings and individual settings in the vehicle and change or reset them at any time. Depending on the vehicle equipment, this includes the following settings, for example: R seat and steering wheel positions R suspension and climate control settings R individual settings, such as interior lighting Depending on the selected equipment, you can import data into vehicle infotainment functions yourself. Depending on the vehicle equipment, this includes the following data, for example: R multimedia data, such as music, lms or photos for playback in an integrated multimedia system R address book data for use in connection with an integrated hands-free system or an integrated navigation system R entered navigation destinations R data about the use of Internet services 41 These data for convenience and infotainment functions may be saved locally in the vehicle or they may be located on a device which you have connected to the vehicle, such as a smartphone, USB ash drive or MP3 player. If you have entered these data yourself, you can delete them at any time. This data is transmitted from the vehicle to third parties only at your request. This applies, in particular, when you use online services in accordance with the settings that you have selected. This integration allows the use of selected smartphone apps, such as navigation or music player apps. There is no further interaction between the smartphone and the vehicle; in particular, vehicle data is not directly accessible. The type of additional data processing is determined by the provider of the app being used. Which settings you can make, if any, depends on the speci c app and the operating system of your smartphone. Smartphone Smar tphone integr integration ation (e.g. Android Android Aut Autoo or Apple CarPlay®) If your vehicle is accordingly equipped, you can connect your smartphone or another mobile end device to the vehicle. You can then control them by means of the control elements integrated in the vehicle. Images and audio from the smartphone can be output via the multimedia system. Certain information is simultaneously transferred to your smartphone. Depending on the type and integration, this includes position data, day/night mode and other general vehicle statuses. For more information please consult the Owner's Manual of the vehicle/infotainment system. Wir ireless eless netw networ orkk connection If your vehicle has a wireless network connection, it enables data to be exchanged between your vehicle and additional systems. The wireless network connection is made possible by the vehicle's own transmitter and receiver or by a mobile end device that you have brought into the vehicle, for example, a smartphone. Online functions can be used via the wireless network connection. This includes online services and applications/apps provided to you by the manufacturer or by other providers. Online services ser vices 42 General notes Manufacturer's Manufactur er's services ser vices Regarding the manufacturer's online services, the individual functions are described by the manufacturer in a suitable place, for example, in the Owner's Manual or on the manufacturer's website, where the relevant data protection information is also given. Personal data may be used for the provision of online services. Data are exchanged via a secure connection, such as the manufacturer's designated IT systems. Any personal data which are collected, processed and used, other than for the provision of services, is done so exclusively on the basis of legal permission. This is the case, for example, for a legally prescribed emergency call system, a contractual agreement or when consent has been given. You can have services and functions, some of which are subject to a fee, activated or deactivated. This excludes legally prescribed functions and services, such as an emergency call system. Third party Third par ty services ser vices If you use online services from other providers (third parties), these services are the responsibility of the provider in question and subject to that provider's data protection conditions and terms of use. As a general rule, the manufacturer has no in uence on the content exchanged. For this reason, when services are provided by third parties, please ask the service provider in question for information about the type, extent and purpose of the collection and use of personal data. Dataa protection Dat protection rights rights Depending on your country or the equipment and range of functions of your vehicle as well as the services you use and the services on o er, you are entitled to di erent data protection rights. Further information on data protection and your data protection rights can either be found on the manufacturer's website or you will receive this information as part of the various services and service o ers. There you will also nd the contact information for the manufacturer and its data protection o cers. At a workshop, for example, with the support of a specialist and possibly for a fee, you can have data read out which is stored only locally in the vehicle. Copyr Cop yright ight Information on licences for free and open-source so ware used in your vehicle can be found on the data carrier in your vehicle document wallet and with updates on the following website: https://www.mercedes-benz.com/opensource Occupant safety Res estr traint aint system system Protection Prot ection provided provided by by the the res restr traint aint system system The restraint system includes the following components: R Seat belt system R Airbags R Child restraint system R Child seat securing systems The restraint system can help prevent the vehicle occupants from coming into contact with parts of the vehicle interior in the event of an accident. In the event of an accident, the restraint system can also reduce the forces to which the vehicle occupants are subjected. A seat belt can only provide the best level of protection if it is worn correctly. Depending on the detected accident situation, seat belt tensioners and/or airbags supplement the protection o ered by a correctly worn seat belt. Seat belt tensioners and/or airbags are not deployed in every accident. In order for the restraint system to provide the intended level of protection, each vehicle occupant must observe the following information: R Fasten seat belts correctly. R Sit in an almost upright seat position with their back against the seat backrest. R Sit with their feet resting on the oor, if possible. R Always secure persons under 1.50 m tall in an additional restraint system suitable for Mercedes-Benz vehicles. However, no system available today can completely eliminate injuries and fatalities in every accident situation. In particular, the seat belt and airbag generally do not protect against objects penetrating the vehicle from the outside. It is also not possible to completely rule out the risk of injury caused by the airbag deploying. 43 Reduced res restr traint aint system system protection protection & WARNING Risk of injury or death due to modi cations to the restraint system Vehicle occupants may no longer be protected as intended if alterations are made to the restraint system. # Never alter the parts of the restraint system. # Never tamper with the wiring or any electronic component parts or their so ware. If it is necessary to modify the vehicle to accommodate a person with disabilities, contact a qualied specialist workshop. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use driving aids which have been approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz. Res estr traint aint system system functionality When the vehicle is switched on, a self-test is performed, during which the 6 restraint system 44 Occupant safety warning lamp lights up. It goes out no later than a few seconds a er the vehicle is started. The components of the restraint system are then functional. Malfunctioning res restr traint aint system system A malfunction has occurred in the restraint system if: R the 6 restraint system warning lamp does not light up when the vehicle is switched on R the 6 restraint system warning lamp lights up continuously or repeatedly during a journey All vehicles, vehicles, excep exceptt PLUG-IN PLUG-IN HYBRID: & WARNING Risk of injury due to malfunctions in the restraint system Components in the restraint system may be activated unintentionally or not deploy as intended in an accident. # Have the restraint system checked and repaired immediately at a quali ed specialist workshop. Plug-in hybr hybrid: id: & DAN ANGER GER Risk of fatal injuries due to restraint system malfunctions Components in the restraint system may be activated unintentionally or not deploy as planned in an accident. In the event of an accident, the high-voltage on-board electrical system may not be deactivated as intended. You may su er an electric shock if you touch the damaged components of the high-voltage on-board electrical system. # Have the restraint system checked and repaired immediately at a quali ed specialist workshop. # A er an accident, switch o the vehicle immediately. Function of the the res restr traint aint system system in an accident How the restraint system works is determined by the severity of the impact detected and the type of accident anticipated: R Frontal impact R R R Rear impact Side impact Rollover The activation thresholds for the components of the restraint system are determined based on the evaluation of the sensor values measured at various points in the vehicle. This process is pre-emptive in nature. The triggering/deployment of the components of the restraint system must take place in good time at the start of the collision. Factors which can only be seen and measured a er a collision has occurred do not play a decisive role in the deployment of an airbag. Nor do they provide an indication of airbag deployment. The vehicle may be deformed signi cantly without an airbag being deployed. This is the case if only parts which are relatively easily deformed are a ected and the rate of vehicle deceleration is not high. Conversely, an airbag may be deployed even though the vehicle su ers only minor deformation. If very rigid vehicle parts such as longitudinal members are hit, this may result in su ciently high levels of vehicle deceleration. Occupant safety Depending on the detected deployment situation, the components of the restraint system can be activated or deployed independently of each other: R Seat belt tensioner: frontal impact, rear impact, side impact, rollover R Driver's airbag, front passenger airbag: frontal impact R Knee airbag: frontal impact R Side airbag: side impact R Window airbag: side impact, rollover, frontal impact R PRE-SAFE® Impulse Side: side impact The front passenger airbag can only be deployed in an accident if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is o . If the front passenger seat is occupied, make sure, both before and during the journey, that the status of the front passenger airbag is correct (/ page 54). & WARNING Risk of burns from hot airbag components The airbag parts are hot a er an airbag has been deployed. # Do not touch the airbag parts. # Have a deployed airbag replaced at a quali ed specialist workshop as soon as possible. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the vehicle towed to a quali ed specialist workshop a er an accident. Take this into account, particularly if a seat belt tensioner is triggered or an airbag deployed. If the seat belt tensioners are triggered or an airbag is deployed, you will hear a bang, and a small amount of powder may also be released: R The bang will not generally a ect your hearing. R In general, the powder released is not hazardous to health but may cause short-term breathing di culties to persons su ering from asthma or other pulmonary conditions. 45 Provided it is safe to do so, leave the vehicle immediately or open the window in order to prevent breathing di culties. Seat belts Protection provided Protection provided by by the the seat belt Always fasten your seat belt correctly before starting a journey. A seat belt can only provide the best level of protection if it is worn correctly. & WARNING Risk of injury or death due to incorrectly fastened seat belt If the seat belt is not worn correctly, it cannot perform its intended protective function. In addition, an incorrectly fastened seat belt can also cause injuries, for example, in the event of an accident or when braking or changing direction suddenly. # Always ensure that all vehicle occupants have their seat belts fastened correctly and are sitting properly. 46 Occupant safety Always observe the instructions about the correct driver's seat position and adjusting the seat (/ page 105). In order for the correctly worn seat belt to provide the intended level of protection, each vehicle occupant must observe the following information: R The seat belt must not be twisted and must t tightly and snugly across the body. R The seat belt must be routed across the centre of the shoulder and as low down across the hips as possible. R The shoulder section of the seat belt should not touch your neck nor be routed under your arm or behind your back. R Avoid wearing bulky clothing, e.g. a winter coat. R Push the lap belt down as far as possible across your hips and pull tight with the shoulder section of the belt. Never route the lap belt across your abdomen. Pregnant women must also take particular care with this. R R R Never route the seat belt across sharp, pointed, abrasive or fragile objects. Only one person should use each seat belt at any one time. Never allow babies and children to travel sitting on the lap of another vehicle occupant. Never secure objects with a seat belt if the seat belt is also being used by one of the vehicle's occupants. Always observe the instructions for loading the vehicle when securing objects, luggage or loads (/ page 123). Also ensure that no objects, e.g. a cushion, are ever placed between a person and the seat. If children are travelling in the vehicle, be sure to observe the instructions and safety notes on "Children in the vehicle" (/ page 59). Limitations of the Limitations the protection protection provided provided by by the the seat belt & WARNING Risk of injury or death due to incorrect seat position The seat belt will not o er the intended level of protection if you have not moved the seat backrest to an almost vertical position. In particular, you may slip under the seatbelt and injure yourself. # Adjust the seat properly before beginning your journey. # Always ensure that the seat backrest is in an almost vertical position and that the shoulder section of your seat belt is routed across the centre of your shoulder. Occupant safety & WARNING Risk of injury or death when additional restraint systems are not used for persons with a smaller stature Persons under 1.50 m tall cannot wear the seat belt correctly without a suitable additional restraint system. # Always secure persons under 1.50 m tall in a suitable restraint system. & WARNING Danger of injury or death due to blocked seat belt anchorage The restraint e ect of the seat belt is impaired if objects between the front seat and the door are blocking the movable seat belt anchorage on the front seat. # Before starting a journey, make sure that there are no objects between the front seat and the door. & WARNING Risk of injury or death due to damaged or modi ed seat belts Seat belts cannot provide protection in the following situations: R the seat belt is damaged, has been modied, is extremely dirty, bleached or dyed R the seat belt buckle is damaged or extremely dirty R modi cations have been made to the seat belt tensioner, seat belt anchorage or seat belt retractor Seat belts may sustain non-visible damage in an accident, e.g. due to glass splinters. Modi ed or damaged seat belts could tear or fail in the event of an accident, for example. Modi ed seat belt tensioners could accidentally trigger or fail to function as intended. # Never modify the seat belt system, for example the seat belt, seat belt buckle, seat belt tensioner, seat belt anchorage and seat belt retractor. # # 47 Make sure that the seat belts are undamaged, not worn and clean. Always have the seat belts checked immediately a er an accident at a qualied specialist workshop. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use seat belts which have been approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz. & WARNING Risk of injury or death from deployed pyrotechnic seat belt tensioners Pyrotechnic seat belt tensioners that have been deployed are no longer operational and are unable to perform their intended protective function. # Therefore, have deployed pyrotechnic seat belt tensioners immediately replaced at a quali ed specialist workshop. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the vehicle towed to a quali ed specialist workshop a er an accident. 48 Occupant safety % A seat belt can only provide the best level of protection if it is worn correctly. Observe the notes on fastening the seat belt (/ page 45). * NOTE Damage caused by trapping the seat belt If an unused seat belt is not fully retracted, it may become trapped in the door or in the seat mechanism. # Always ensure that an unused seat belt is fully retracted. * NOTE Deployment of components of the restraint system when the front passenger seat is unoccupied and a seat belt is buckled Fast astening ening and adjusting adjusting seat belts If the seat belt is pulled quickly or sharply, the seat belt retractor locks. The seat belt strap cannot be pulled out any further. # # # Always engage seat belt tongue 2 of the seat belt into seat belt buckle 1 of the corresponding seat. To adjust adjust the the seat belt height: height: press and hold the belt guide release and slide seat belt outlet 3 into the desired position. To engag engagee the the seat belt outlet: outlet: let go of the belt guide release and ensure that seat belt outlet 3 locks into position. When the front passenger seat is unoccupied and the seat belt tongue of the seat belt is engaged in the seat belt buckle, components of the restraint system may deploy unnecessarily on the front passenger side, e.g. the seat belt tensioner. # Only buckle the seat belts as intended. % Observe the notes on stowage areas (/ page 123). Information on tting a child restraint system and on children travelling in the vehicle can be found in the "Children in the vehicle" section (/ page 62). Occupant safety Seat belt adjustment adjustment function Vehicles with with PRE-SAFE PRE-SAFE®: a er a front seat belt has been fastened, the automatic seat belt adjustment may apply a certain tightening force. Do not hold the seat belt tightly while it is adjusting. You can activate and deactivate the seat belt adjustment function using the multimedia system (/ page 49). Activ ctivating/deactiv ating/deactivating ating seat belt adjustment adjustment via the multimedia system system Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Vehicle # Activate or deactivate Belt adjustment. Releasing seat belts # Press the release button in the seat belt buckle and guide the seat belt back with the seat belt tongue. Seat belt war warning ning function for for the the driv driver er and front front passenger passenger The ü seat belt warning lamp in the Instrument Display is a reminder that all vehicle occupants must wear their seat belts correctly. In addition, a warning tone may sound. As soon as the driver and front passenger fasten their seat belts, the seat belt warning goes out. Function of the the rear rear seat belt status status display The rear seat belt status display is only available for certain countries. 49 When the vehicle is switched on, the rear seat belt status display informs you for a certain amount of time which rear seat belt is not fastened. You can immediately dismiss the rear seat belt status display using the back button on the le hand side of the steering wheel (/ page 298). If a vehicle occupant unfastens a seat belt in the rear while the vehicle is motion, the rear seat belt status display appears again. In addition, a warning tone may sound. In this case, the rear seat belt status display cannot be hidden using the back button on the le -hand side of the steering wheel. 50 Occupant safety Airbags Over Ov ervie view w of airbags Potential protection provided by each airbag: R Knee airbag: thigh, knee and lower leg R Driver's airbag, front passenger airbag: head and ribcage R Side airbag: ribcage, also pelvis for front seat occupants R Window airbag: head * NOTE Mercedes-AMG vehicles # 1 2 3 4 5 Knee airbag Driver's airbag Front passenger airbag Window airbag Side airbag The installation location of an airbag is identi ed by the AIRBAG symbol. When enabled, an airbag can provide additional protection for the respective vehicle occupant. Observe the notes in the Supplement. You could otherwise fail to recognise dangers. & WARNING Risk of injury or death if the codriver airbag is enabled If the co-driver airbag is enabled, a child on the co-driver seat may be struck by the codriver airbag during an accident. NEVER use a rearward-facing child restraint system on a seat with an ENABLED FRONT AIRBAG; DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY to the CHILD can occur. When tting a child restraint system to the front passenger seat, observe the vehicle-speci c information (/ page 74). Also, always observe the notes on rearward-facing or forward-facing child restraint systems on the front passenger seat. Information Infor mation on automatic automatic front front passenger passenger airbag shutoo shut The front passenger airbag can only be deployed in an accident if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is o . If the front passenger seat is occupied, make sure, both before and during the journey, that the status of the front passenger airbag is correct (/ page 54). * NOTE NOTE Deployment of components of the restraint system when the front passenger seat is unoccupied In an accident, the components of the restraint system may deploy unnecessarily on the front passenger side if: R There are heavy objects on the front passenger seat. Occupant safety R The seat belt tongue is engaged in the seat belt buckle of the front passenger seat and the front passenger seat is unoccupied. # Stow objects in a suitable place. Only one person should use each seat belt at any one time. # Depending on the detected accident situation, the window airbag on the front passenger side may deploy. The airbag is deployed regardless of whether the front passenger seat is occupied. Protectiv Prot ectivee capacity of the the airbags Depending on the accident situation, an airbag may supplement the protection o ered by a correctly fastened seat belt. & WARNING Risk of injury or death due to an incorrect seat position If you deviate from the correct seat position, the airbag cannot perform its intended protective function. Each vehicle occupant must make sure of the following: R Fasten seat belts correctly. Pregnant women must take particular care to ensure that the lap belt never lies across the abdomen. R Adopt the correct seat position and keep as far away as possible from the airbags. R Observe the following information. # Always make sure that there are no objects between the airbag and vehicle occupant. To avoid the risks resulting from the deployment of an airbag, each vehicle occupant must observe the following information in particular: R Before starting your journey, adjust your seat correctly; the driver's seat and front passenger seat should be moved as far back as possible. When doing so, always observe the information on the correct driver's seat position (/ page 105). R R R R R 51 Only hold the steering wheel by the steering wheel rim. This allows the airbag to be fully deployed. Always lean against the seat backrest when the vehicle is in motion. Do not lean forwards or against the door or side window. You may otherwise be in the deployment area of the airbags. The occupants must always keep their feet on the oor. Do not put your feet on the cockpit, for example. Your feet may otherwise be in the deployment area of the airbag. If children are travelling in the vehicle, observe the additional notes (/ page 59). Always stow and secure objects correctly. Objects in the vehicle interior may prevent an airbag from functioning correctly. Each vehicle occupant must always make sure of the following in particular: R There are no people, animals or objects between the vehicle occupants and an airbag. R There are no objects between the seat, door and door pillar (B-pillar). 52 R R R Occupant safety There are no hard objects, e.g. coat hangers, hanging on the grab handles or coat hooks. There are no accessory parts, such as mobile navigation devices, mobile phones or cup holders, within the deployment area of an airbag, e.g. on the cockpit, on the door, on the side window or on the side trim. In addition, no connecting cables, tensioning straps or retaining straps must be routed or attached to the vehicle within the deployment area of an airbag. Always comply with the accessory manufacturer's installation instructions and, in particular, the notes on suitable places for installation. There are no heavy, sharp-edged or fragile objects in the pockets of your clothing. Store such objects in a suitable place. Limitations Limit ations of the the prot protection ection provided provided by by airbags & WARNING Risk of injury due to modi cations to the cover of an airbag & WARNING Risk of injury due to malfunctioning sensors in the door The installation location of an airbag is identi ed by the AIRBAG symbol (/ page 50). The function of the airbags can be impaired due to modi cations or incorrect work performed on the doors or door trim, or if the doors are damaged. # Never modify the doors or parts of the doors. # Always have work on the doors or door trim carried out at a quali ed specialist workshop. & WARNING Risk of injury or death due to the use of unsuitable seat covers & WARNING Risk of injury due to deployed airbag If you modify the cover of an airbag or a x objects such as stickers to it, the airbag may no longer function correctly. # Never modify the cover of an airbag and do not a x objects to it. Due to unsuitable seat covers, the airbags cannot protect vehicle occupants as intended. In addition, the operation of the automatic front passenger airbag shuto could be restricted. # You should only use seat covers that have been approved for the corresponding seats by Mercedes-Benz. A deployed airbag no longer o ers any protection. # Have the vehicle towed to a quali ed specialist workshop in order to have the deployed airbag replaced. Have deployed airbags replaced immediately. Occupant safety Status of the the front front passenger passenger front front airbag Function of the the automatic automatic front front passenger passenger airbag shutoo shut The automatic front passenger airbag shuto is able to detect whether the front passenger seat is occupied by a person or a child restraint system. The front passenger airbag is enabled or disabled accordingly. & WARNING Risk of injury or death due to objects under the co-driver seat Objects trapped under the co-driver seat can interfere with the function of the automatic co-driver airbag shuto or damage the system. # Do not store any objects under the codriver seat. # When the co-driver seat is occupied, make sure that no objects are trapped under the co-driver seat. When tting a child restraint system to the front passenger seat, observe the vehicle-speci c information (/ page 75). Also, always observe the notes on rearward-facing or forward-facing child restraint systems on the front passenger seat (/ page 74). A person on the front passenger seat must observe the following information: R Fasten seat belts correctly (/ page 45). R Sit in an almost upright seat position with their back against the seat backrest. R Sit with their feet resting on the oor, if possible. The front passenger airbag may otherwise be disabled by mistake, for example, in the following situations: R The front passenger transfers their weight by supporting themselves on a vehicle armrest. R The front passenger sits in such a way that their weight is raised from the seat surface. & WARNING Risk of injury or death due to a disabled front passenger airbag The front passenger airbag is disabled when the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is lit. 53 A person in the front passenger seat could then, for example, come into contact with the vehicle interior, especially if the person is sitting too close to the cockpit. If the front passenger seat is occupied, always ensure that: R the classi cation of the person in the front passenger seat is correct and the front passenger airbag is enabled or disabled in accordance with the person in the front passenger seat. R the front passenger seat has been moved as far back as possible. R the person is seated correctly. # Both before and during the journey, ensure that the status of the front passenger airbag is correct. If the front passenger seat is occupied, the classication of the person or child restraint system on the front passenger seat takes place a er the front passenger airbag shuto self-test. The PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps display the status of the front passenger airbag. 54 Occupant safety Always observe the notes on the function of the PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps (/ page 54). Function of the the PASSEN PASSENGER GER AIR BAG BAG indicator indicator lamps lam ps Vehicles without automatic front passenger airbag shuto have a special sticker a xed to the side of the cockpit on the front passenger side (/ page 73). Self-tes Self-t estt of automatic automatic front front passenger passenger airbag shuto When the vehicle is switched on, a self-test is performed during which the two PASSENGER AIR BAG ON and OFF indicator lamps light up simultaneously. The status of the front passenger airbag is displayed via the PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps a er the self-test: R ON is lit: the front passenger airbag may deploy during an accident. The indicator lamp goes out a er 60 seconds. R ON and OFF are are not not lit: the front passenger airbag may deploy during an accident. R OFF is lit: the front passenger airbag is disabled. It will then not be deployed in the event of an accident. If the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp is o , only the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp shows the status of the front passenger air- bag. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp may be lit continuously or be o . If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp and the 6 restraint system warning lamp light up simultaneously, the front passenger seat may not be used. Also in this case, do not t a child restraint system to the front passenger seat. Have the automatic front passenger airbag shuto checked and repaired immediately at a quali ed specialist workshop. Status display If the front passenger seat is occupied, ensure, both before and during the journey, that the status of the front passenger airbag is correct for the current situation. A er tting a rearw rearwar ard-f d-facing acing child child res restr traint aint syssystem to to the the front front passenger passenger seat: seat: PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF must be lit continuously. Occupant safety & WARNING Risk of injury or death when using a rearward-facing child restraint system while the front passenger airbag is enabled If you secure a child in a rearward-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat and the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is o , the front passenger airbag can deploy in the event of an accident. The child could be struck by the airbag. # Always ensure that the front passenger airbag is disabled. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must be lit. # NEVER use a rearward-facing child restraint system on a seat with an ENABLED FRONT AIRBAG. This can result in the DEATH of or SERIOUS INJURY to the CHILD. When tting a child restraint system to the front passenger seat, observe the vehicle-speci c information (/ page 74). Depending on the child restraint system and the stature of the child, the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp may be o . In this case, do not t the rearward-facing child restraint system to the front passenger seat. Instead, t the rearward-facing child restraint system to a suitable rear seat. A er tting a forw forwar ard-f d-facing acing child child res restr traint aint syssystem to to the the front front passenger passenger seat: seat: depending on the child restraint system and the stature of the child, PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF may be lit continuously or be o . Always observe the following information. & WARNING Risk of injury or death due to incorrect positioning of the forward-facing child restraint system If you secure a child in a forward-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat that is positioned too close to the cockpit, in the event of an accident, the child could: R come into contact with the vehicle interior if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is lit, for example R be struck by the airbag if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is o . # # 55 Always move the front passenger seat as far back as possible and fully retract the seat cushion length adjustment. While doing so, always make sure that the shoulder belt strap is correctly routed from the seat belt outlet of the vehicle to the shoulder belt guide on the child restraint system. The shoulder belt strap must be routed forwards and downwards from the seat belt outlet. If necessary, adjust the seat belt outlet and the front passenger seat accordingly. Always comply with the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions. When tting a child restraint system to the front passenger seat, observe the vehicle-speci c information (/ page 74). If a person person is sitting on the the front front passenger passenger seat: seat: PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF may be lit continuously or be o , depending on the person's stature. 56 Occupant safety A person on the front passenger seat must always observe the following information: R If the front passenger seat is occupied by an adult or a person with a stature corresponding to that of an adult, the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must be o . This indicates that the front passenger airbag is enabled. If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is lit continuously, an adult or person with a build corresponding to that of an adult must not use the front passenger seat. Instead, they should use a rear seat. R If the front passenger seat is occupied by a person of smaller stature (e.g. a teenager or small adult), the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is either lit continuously or remains o , depending on the classi cation. If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is o : move the front passenger seat as far back as possible, or the person of smaller stature should use a rear seat. If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is lit continuously: the person of smaller stature should not use the front passenger seat. & WARNING Risk of injury or death when the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is lit If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp remains lit a er the self-test, the front passenger airbag is disabled. If the front passenger seat is occupied, always ensure that: R The classi cation of the person in the front passenger seat is correct and the front passenger airbag is enabled or disabled in accordance with the person in the front passenger seat. R The person is seated properly with a correctly fastened seat belt. R The front passenger seat has been moved as far back as possible. Be sure to also observe the following further related subjects: R Child restraint system on the front passenger seat (/ page 74) R Suitable positioning of the child restraint system (/ page 62) PRE-SAFE® syst PRE-SAFE system em Function of PRE-SAFE PRE-SAFE® (anticipat (anticipator oryy occupant protection) prot ection) PRE-SAFE® is able to detect certain critical driving situations and implement pre-emptive measures to protect the vehicle occupants. PRE-SAFE® can implement the following measures independently of each other: R Tightening the seat belts on the driver's seat and front passenger seat. R Closing the side windows. R Vehicles with with sliding sunroof: sunroof: closing the sliding sunroof. Occupant safety R R R Vehicles with with memory memor y function: moving the front passenger seat to a more favourable seat position. Vehicles with with multicontour multicontour seat: seat: increasing the air pressure in the seat side bolsters of the seat backrest. PRE-SAFE® Sound: provided that the multimedia system is switched on, generating a brief noise signal to stimulate the innate protective mechanism of a person's hearing. * NOTE NOTE Damage caused by objects in the footwell or behind the seat The automatic adjustment of the seat position may result in damage to the seat and/or the object. # Stow objects in a suitable place. Rever ersing sing the the PRE-SAFE® PRE-SAFE system syst em measures measures If an accident did not occur, the pre-emptive measures that were taken are reversed. You will need to perform certain settings yourself. # If the seat belt pre-tensioning is not reduced, move the seat backrest back slightly. The locking mechanism releases. Function of PRE-SAFE PRE-SAFE® PL PLUS US (anticipator (anticipatoryy occupant prot protection ection plus) PRE-SAFE® PLUS can detect certain impacts, particularly an imminent rear impact, and take preemptive measures to protect the vehicle occupants. These measures cannot necessarily prevent an imminent impact. PRE-SAFE® PLUS can implement the following measures independently of each other: R Tightening the seat belts on the driver's seat and front passenger seat. R Activating the rear hazard warning lights at a higher ashing frequency. R Increasing brake pressure when the vehicle is stationary. This brake application is cancelled automatically when the vehicle pulls away. If an accident did not occur, the pre-emptive measures that were taken are reversed. 57 System limits System The system will not initiate any action in the following situations: R when reversing or R when the vehicle is towing a trailer and there is a risk of a rear impact The system will not initiate any braking application in the following situations: R whilst driving or R when entering or exiting a parking space while using Active Parking Assist Function of PRE-SAFE PRE-SAFE® Im Impulse pulse Side If an imminent side impact is detected, PRESAFE® Impulse Side can pre-emptively move the front seat vehicle occupant's upper body towards the centre of the vehicle. It does this by rapidly in ating an air cushion in the outer seat side bolster of the seat backrest on the side on which the 58 Occupant safety impact is anticipated. This increases the distance between the door and the vehicle occupant. If PRE-SAFE® Impulse Side has been deployed or is faulty, the PRE-SAFE impulse side inoperative See Owner's Manual(/ page 450) display message appears. Safelyy transpor Safel transporting ting childr children en in the the vehicle vehicle Always Always observe observe when childr children en are are trav travelling elling in the the vehicle % Also strictly observe the safety notes for the speci c situation. In this way you can recognise potential risks and avoid dangers if children are travelling in the vehicle (/ page 59). Be diligent diligent Bear in mind that negligence when securing a child in the child restraint system may have serious consequences. Always be diligent in securing a child carefully before every journey. Never allow babies and children to travel sitting on the lap of another vehicle occupant. To improve protection for children younger than 12 years old or under 1.50 m in height, Mercedes-Benz recommends you observe the following information: R Always secure the child in a child restraint system suitable for this Mercedes-Benz vehicle. R The child restraint system must be appropriate to the age, weight and size of the child. R The vehicle seat must be suitable for tting a child restraint system (/ page 62). Accident statistics show that children secured on the rear seats are generally safer than children secured on the front seats. For this reason, Mercedes-Benz strongly advises that you t a child restraint system to a rear seat. The gener generic ic ter term m child child res restr traint aint system system The generic term child restraint system is used in this Owner's Manual. A child restraint system is, for example: R a baby car seat R a rearward-facing child seat R a forward-facing child seat R a child booster seat with a backrest and seat belt guide Mercedes-Benz recommends using a child booster seat with a backrest. The child restraint system must be appropriate to the age, weight and size of the child. Observe laws Observe laws and legal legal req requir uirements ements Always observe the legal requirements when using a child restraint system in the vehicle. Make sure that the child restraint system is approved in accordance with the valid test speci cations and guidelines. Further information can be obtained at a quali ed specialist workshop. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this purpose. Only use approved Only approved child child res restr traint aint systems systems Only child restraint systems that meet the following UNECE standards are permitted for use in the vehicle: R UN-R44 R UN-R129 (i-Size child restraint systems) Occupant safety Information on child restraint system approval categories and details on the approval label on the child restraint system (/ page 63). Detecting Det ecting risk risks, s, avoiding avoiding danger danger Securing systems Securing systems for for child child res restr traint aint systems systems in the vehicle vehicle Only use the following securing systems for child restraint systems: R the ISOFIX or i-Size securing rings R the vehicle's seat belt system R the Top Tether anchorages Fitting an ISOFIX or an i-Size child restraint system is preferred. Simply attaching to the securing rings on the vehicle can reduce the risk of tting the child restraint system incorrectly. When securing a child with the integrated seat belt of the ISOFIX or i-Size child restraint system, always comply with the permissible gross weight for the child and child restraint system (/ page 66). Adv dvant antag agee of a rearw rearwar ard-f d-facing acing child child res restr traint aint syssystem It is preferable to transport a baby or a small child in a suitable rearward-facing child restraint system. In this case, the child sits in the opposite direction to the direction of travel and faces backwards. Babies and small children have comparatively weak neck muscles in relation to the size and weight of their head. The risk of injury to the cervical spine during an accident can be reduced in a rearward-facing child restraint system. Alwayss secure Alway secure a child child res restr traint aint system system correctly correctly & WARNING Risk of injury or death due to incorrect installation of the child restraint system The child can then not be protected or restrained as intended. # Be sure to comply with the manufacturer's installation instructions for the child restraint system and its correct use. # # # # 59 Make sure that the entire base of the child restraint system always rests on the sitting surface of the seat. Never place objects (e.g. cushions) under or behind the child restraint system. Use child restraint systems only with the original cover designed for them. Always replace damaged covers with genuine covers. & WARNING Risk of injury or death due to unsecured child restraint systems in the vehicle If the child restraint system is incorrectly tted or not secured, it can come loose. The child restraint system could be ung around and hit vehicle occupants. # Always install child restraint systems correctly, even when not in use. Occupant safety 60 # R Always comply with the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions. Always observe the child restraint system manufacturer's installation and operating instructions as well as the vehicle-speci c information: Fitting the ISOFIX or i-Size child restraint system to the rear seat (/ page 66). Securing the child restraint system with the seat belt on the rear seat (/ page 72). Securing the child restraint system with the seat belt on the front passenger seat (/ page 75). Observe the speci c instructions for the rearward-facing and forward-facing child restraint systems (/ page 74). If the front passenger seat is occupied, ensure, both before and during the journey, that the status of the front passenger airbag is correct for the current situation (/ page 54). R R Observe the warning labels in the vehicle interior and on the child restraint system. Also secure Top Tether if present. Do not not modify the the child child res restr traint aint system system & WARNING Risk of injury due to modi cations to the child restraint system The child restraint system can no longer function properly. This poses an increased risk of injury. # Never modify a child restraint system. # Only a x accessories which have been specially approved for this child restraint system by the child restraint system's manufacturer. Mercedes‑Benz recommends Mercedes-Benz care products for cleaning child restraint systems recommended by Mercedes-Benz. Only use child Only child res restr traint aint systems systems which which are are in proper pr oper wor working king condition & WARNING Risk of injury or death caused by the use of damaged child restraint systems Child restraint systems or their retaining systems that have been subjected to stress in an accident may not be able to perform their intended protective function. It may be the case that the child cannot be properly restrained. # Always immediately replace child restraint systems that have been damaged or involved in an accident. # Have the securing systems for the child restraint systems checked at a quali ed specialist workshop before installing a child restraint system again. Occupant safety Avoid direct direct sunlight & WARNING Risk of burns when the child seat is exposed to direct sunlight If the child restraint system is exposed to direct sunlight or heat, parts could heat up. Children could su er burns from these parts, particularly on metallic parts of the child restraint system. # Always make sure that the child restraint system is not exposed to direct sunlight. # Protect the child restraint system with a blanket, for example. # If the child restraint system has been exposed to direct sunlight, allow it to cool before securing a child into it. # Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. Observee when stopping Observ stopping or parking parking & WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to leaving children unattended in the vehicle If children are le unattended in the vehicle, they could, in particular: R open doors, thereby endangering other persons or road users. R get out and be struck by oncoming tra c. R operate vehicle equipment and become trapped, for example. In addition, the children could also set the vehicle in motion by, for example: R releasing the parking brake. R changing the transmission position. R starting the vehicle. # # Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. # 61 Keep the vehicle key out of the reach of children. & WARNING Danger to life due to exposure to extreme heat or cold in the vehicle If people, particularly children, are exposed to extreme temperatures over an extended period of time, there is a risk of serious injury or danger to life. # Never leave persons, children in particular, unattended in the vehicle. Over Ov ervie view w of recommended recommended child child res restr traint aint systems systems % Further information on the correct child restraint system can be obtained at a qualied specialist workshop. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this purpose. 62 Occupant safety Securing Secur ing with with ISOFIX Securing Secur ing with with the the vehicle vehicle seat belt Weight categor categoryy 0+ (up to to 13 kg kg and up to approx. appro x. 15 months) months) Weight categor categoryy 0 (up to to 10 kg kg and appro approximat ximately ely 6 months) months) and weight weight categor categoryy 0+ (up to to 13 kg and approximat approximatel elyy 15 months) months) Type1 BAB ABYY SAFE SAFE plus Size category E Approval E1 04 301 146 Order number2 B6 6 86 8224 1 Manufacturer: Britax Römer. 2 With colour code 9H95. Weight categor categoryy I (9 to to 18 kg kg and fr from om approxapproximatelyy 9 months imatel months to to 4 year years) s) Type1 DUO plus Size category B1 Approval E1 04 301 133 Order number2 A 000 970 43 02 1 Manufacturer: Britax Römer. 2 With colour code 9H95. Type1 BAB ABYY SAFE SAFE plus II Approval E1 04 301 146 Order number2 A 000 970 38 02 1 Manufacturer: Britax Römer. 2 With colour code 9H95. Weight categor categoryy I (9 to to 18 kg kg and fr from om approxapproximatel imat elyy 9 months months to to 4 year years) s) Type1 DUO plus Approval E1 04 301 133 Order number2 A 000 970 43 02 1 Manufacturer: Britax Römer. 2 With colour code 9H95. Weight categor categoryy II/III (15 to to 36 kg kg and fr from om approximatel approximat elyy 3 to to 12 year years) s) Type1 KIDFIX XP Approval E1 04 301 304 Order number2 A 000 970 49 02 Type1 AMG KIDFIX XP Approval E1 04 301 304 number2 A 000 970 33 02 1 Manufacturer: Britax Römer. 2 With colour code 9H95. Order Overvie Over view w of suitable suitable seats in the the vehicle vehicle for for tting a child child res restr traint aint system system Le /right /right rear seat Preferred securing system: ® ISOFIX child seat securing system (/ page 65) or Occupant safety ° i-Size child seat securing system (/ page 66) ¯ Also secure Top Tether if present (/ page 69). Alternative securing system: 7 Vehicle seat belt (/ page 70) Also secure Top Tether if present (/ page 69). Front passenger passenger seat Securing system: 7 Vehicle seat belt (/ page 70) Be sure to observe: R If the front passenger seat is occupied, ensure, both before and during the journey, that the status of the front passenger airbag is correct for the current situation (/ page 54). R Notes on automatic front passenger airbag shuto (/ page 53). Centre rear Centre rear seat Securing system: 7 Vehicle seat belt (/ page 70) Approval Approv al categor categories ies for for child child res restr traint aint systems systems 63 Approval Approv al categor categories ies in accordance accordance with with UN-R44 Only use approved Only approved cchild hild res restr traint aint systems systems Only child restraint systems that meet the following UNECE standards are permitted for use in the vehicle: R UN-R44 R UN-R129 (i-Size child restraint systems) Identi cation on the the child child res restr traint aint system system Information about the approval category, weight category and approval number, for example, is on the approval label on the child restraint system. There may be further information such as the ISOFIX size categories, depending on the approval category of the child restraint system. Example of an approval label R Univ niver ersal: sal: child restraint systems in the "Universal" category are approved for installation in vehicles. They can be used, in accordance with overviews of the suitability of seats for securing child restraint systems, on seats labelled U, UF or IUF. 64 R R Occupant safety The identi cation IUF refers to ISOFIX child restraint systems in the "Universal" category. These child restraint systems must also be secured using Top Tether or support points. Semi-Univ Semi-U niver ersal: sal: child restraint systems in the "Semi-Universal" category may only be used if the vehicle and vehicle seat are listed in the child restraint system manufacturer's vehicle model list. Vehicle-speci c: child restraint systems in the "vehicle-speci c" category may only be used if the vehicle and vehicle seat are listed in the child restraint system manufacturer's vehicle model list. Approval Approv al categor categories ies in accordance accordance with with UN-R129 The identi cation i‑U refers to i‑Size child restraint systems in the "Universal" category. These child restraint systems must also be secured using Top Tether or support points. Observe the Observe the suitability suitability of vehicle vehicle seats Depending on the approval category, there are forward-facing and rearward-facing child restraint systems. Their use can be restricted for certain vehicle seats: R Suitability of seats for attaching ISOFIX child restraint systems (/ page 65) R Suitability of seats for securing i‑Size child restraint systems (/ page 66). R Suitability of seats for attaching belt-secured child restraint systems (/ page 70) Example of an approval label R i‑Size: child restraint systems in the "i‑Size" category are approved for installation in vehicles with i‑Size mounting brackets. They can be used, in accordance with overviews of the suitability of seats for securing child restraint systems, on seats labelled i‑U. Occupant safety Fitting an ISOFIX or i-Size child child res restr traint aint system system on the the le and right right rear rear seats Overvie Over view w of suitability suitability of the the seats for for attac attaching hing ISOFIX child child res restr traint aint systems systems ISOFIX is a standardised securing system for specially designed child restraint systems. ® The symbol indicates seats suitable for attaching an ISOFIX child restraint system in accordance with UN R44 (/ page 63). Attach only child restraint systems that are approved in accordance with UN R44 as per the following ISOFIX tables. Carryy cot Carr Size class – Equipment Eq uipment Le /right /right rear seat F – ISO/L1 X G – ISO/L2 X X Not suitable for an ISOFIX child restraint system in this weight group and/or size class. Weight group group 0 (up to to 10 kg kg and up ttoo approx. approx. 6 months) months) Size class – Equipment Eq uipment E – ISO/R1 Le /right /right rear seat IL Size class – Equipment Eq uipment Le /right /right rear seat C – ISO/R3 IL (1) IL Suitable for ISOFIX child restraint systems according to the table in "Overview of the recommended child restraint systems", or if the IL Suitable for ISOFIX child restraint systems according to the table vehicle and the seat are listed on the child restraint system manu- in "Overview of the recommended child restraint systems", or if the facturer's vehicle model list. vehicle and the seat are listed on the child restraint system manufacturer's vehicle model list. 65 (1) When using a child restraint system of size class (ISO/R3), move the front seat into the highest position. Make sure that the Weight group group 0+ (up to to 13 kg kg and up ttoo approx. approx. 15 months) months) Size class – Equipment Eq uipment Le /right /right rear seat E – ISO/R1 IL D – ISO/R2 IL seat backrest of the front seat does not rest against the child restraint system. Weight group group 1 (9–18 kg kg and approx. approx. 9 months months to 4 year years) s) Size class – Equipment Eq uipment Le /right /right rear seat D – ISO/R2 IL C – ISO/R3 IL (1) B – ISO/F2 IUF 66 Occupant safety Size class – Equipment Eq uipment Le /right /right rear seat B1 – ISO/F2X IUF A – ISO/F3 IUF IL Suitable for ISOFIX child restraint systems according to the table in "Overview of the recommended child restraint systems", or if the vehicle and the seat are listed on the child restraint system manufacturer's vehicle model list. IUF Suitable for forward-facing ISOFIX child restraint systems of the "Universal" category in this weight group. (1) When using a child restraint system of size class (ISO/R3), move the front seat into the highest position. Make sure that the seat backrest of the front seat does not rest against the child restraint system. Overvie Over view w of suitability suitability of the the seats for for attac attaching hing i‑Size child child res restr traint aint systems systems i‑Size is a standardised securing system for specially designed child restraint systems. ° The symbol indicates seats suitable for attaching an i‑Size child restraint system in accordance with UN R129 (/ page 63). Child restraint systems that are permitted in accordance with UN R44 as per the ISOFIX tables (/ page 65) or UN R129 as per the following i‑Size tables may be attached. Fitting the the ISOFIX or i‑Size child child res restr traint aint system system on the the le and right right rear rear seats & WARNING Risk of accident if the rear bench seat, rear seat and seat backrest are not engaged i-U Suitable for forward-facing The rear bench seat, rear seat and seat backrest may fold forwards, even while the vehicle is in motion. R As a result, the vehicle occupant will be pressed into the seat belt with increased force. The seat belt will not be able to protect as intended and could cause additional injury. R Objects or loads in the boot or load compartment cannot be restrained by the seat backrest. restraint system in the "Univer- and rearward-facing i-Size child # sal" category. restraint systems in the "Univer- i‑Size child child res restr traint aint systems systems (ISO/R2, ISO/F2X) Front passenger passenger seat Le /right /right rear seat X i‑U X Not suitable for an i-Size child sal" category. Make sure that the rear bench seat, the rear seat and the seat backrest are engaged before every trip. If the le and right seat backrests are not engaged and locked in place, this will be shown on the display on the instrument cluster. Occupant safety If the centre seat backrest is not engaged and locked in place, the red lock veri cation indicator will be visible. & WARNING Risk of injury or death if the permissible gross mass of the child and child restraint system together is exceeded. Too much load may be placed on the ISOFIX or i‑Size child restraint systems and the child may not be restrained correctly in the event of an accident, for example. # If the child and the child restraint system together weigh more than 33 kg, only use an ISOFIX or i‑Size child restraint system with which the child is secured with the vehicle seat belt. # Also secure the child restraint system with the Top Tether belt, if available. Always comply with the information about the mass of the child restraint system: R in the manufacturer's installation and operating instructions for the child restraint system used R on a label on the child restraint system, if present Regularly check that the permissible gross mass of the child and child restraint system is still complied with. When tting a child restraint system, observe the following: O Always observe the correct use of the seats and consider their suitability for attaching a child restraint system. ISOFIX child seat securing system (/ page 65) or i‑Size child seat securing system (/ page 66) 67 O Always comply with the manufacturer's installation and operating instructions for the child restraint system used. O Make sure that the child's feet do not touch the front seat. If necessary, move the front seat slightly forwards. ® When tting an ISOFIX child restraint system, also observe the following: O When using a baby baby car seat in weight weight group group 0/0+ and a rearw rearwar ard-f d-facing acing child child res restr traint aint system syst em in weight weight group group 1 on a rear rear seat: seat: adjust the front seat so that the seat does not touch the child restraint system. O When using a forw forwar ard-f d-facing acing child child res restr traint aint system syst em in weight weight group group 1: remove the head restraint from the respective seat, if possible. In addition, the backrest of the child restraint system must lie as at as possible against the backrest of the vehicle seat. A er the child restraint system has been removed, replace the head restraint immediately and adjust all head restraints correctly. 68 Occupant safety O If the head restraint of the child seat cannot be fully extended when it is installed in the vehicle, this will result in restrictions on the maximum size setting for child restraint systems in weight group 2 or 3. Contact with the roof when the head restraint is fully extended and locked in place will not result in any restrictions on use. O The child restraint system must not be put under strain between the roof and the seat cushion and/or be tted facing the wrong direction. Where possible, adjust the seat cushion inclination accordingly. O The child restraint system must not be put under strain by the head restraint. Adjust the head restraints as appropriate. ° When tting an i‑Size child restraint system, also observe the following: O When using a rearw rearwar ard-f d-facing acing child child res restr traint aint system: syst em: adjust the front seat so that it does not touch the child restraint system. O When using a forw forwar ard-f d-facing acing child child res restr traint aint system: syst em: remove the head restraint from the respective seat, if possible. In addition, the backrest of the child restraint system must lie as at as possible against the backrest of the vehicle seat. A er the child restraint system has been removed, replace the head restraint immediately and adjust all head restraints correctly. 1 ISOFIX mounting bracket 2 i‑Size mounting bracket Before every journey, make sure that the ISOFIX child restraint system or the i‑Size child restraint system is engaged correctly in both mounting brackets in the vehicle. Occupant safety * NOTE Damage to the seat belt for the centre seat during installation of the child restraint system # # # # Make sure that the seat belt is not trapped. Remove and stow away covers 1 or 2. Attach the ISOFIX or i‑Size child restraint system to both mounting brackets in the vehicle. A er removing the child seat, reattach covers 1 or 2. Fast astening ening a Top Top Tether Tether & WARNING Risk of injury or death if the rear seat backrests are not locked a er Top Tether belts are tted The rear seat backrests may fold forwards when you are driving. As a result, child restraint systems will no longer be able to perform their intended protective function. This may also cause additional injuries. # # Always lock rear seat backrests a er tting Top Tether belts. Observe the lock veri cation indicator. If the le and right seat backrests are not engaged and locked in place, this will be shown on the display on the instrument cluster. If the centre seat backrest is not engaged and locked in place, the red lock veri cation indicator will be visible. ¯ If the child restraint system is equipped with a Top Tether belt: The risk of injury may be reduced by Top Tether. The Top Tether belt enables an additional connection between the child restraint system attached with ISOFIX or i‑Size and the vehicle. 69 70 # # # # # # # Occupant safety If necessary, slide head restraint 1 upwards (/ page 111). Fit the ISOFIX or i‑Size child restraint system with Top Tether. In doing so, comply with the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions. Guide Top Tether belt 5 under head restraint 1 between the two head restraint bars. Guide Top Tether belt 5 downwards between combined luggage cover and net 3 and seat backrest 2. Hook Top Tether hook 6 of Top Tether belt 5 into Top Tether anchorage 4 without twisting. Tension Top Tether belt 5. In doing so, comply with the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions. If necessary, slide head restraint 1 downwards (/ page 111). Make sure that you do not interfere with the correct routing of Top Tether belt 5. Securing the Securing the child child res restr traint aint system system with with the the seat belt Notes on the the suitability suitability of seats for for attac attaching hing beltsecured child secured child res restr traint aint systems systems Rear seats Le /right rear seat U, L Centre rear seat1 U, L U Weight categor categoryy III: 22 to to 36 kg Le /right rear seat Centre rear Weight categor categoryy 0: up to to 10 kg seat1 U, L U 1 Child restraint systems with a supporting bracket are not suitable for this seat. U Suitable for child restraint systems of the "Universal" category in this weight category. Weight categor categoryy 0+: up to to 13 kg kg Le /right rear seat U, L Centre rear seat1 U, L L Suitable for semi-universal child restraint systems according to the table in "Recommended child restraint systems", or if the vehicle and the seat are listed in the child restraint system manufacturer's vehicle model list. Weight categor categoryy I: 9 to to 18 kg Le /right rear seat U, L Centre rear seat1 U, L Weight categor categoryy II: 15 to to 25 kg kg Le /right rear seat Centre rear seat1 U, L Folding bench bench seat (thir (thirdd row row of seats) Weight categor categoryy 0: up to to 10 kg Le /right rear seat1 Weight categor categoryy 0+: up to to 13 kg kg X Occupant safety Le /right rear seat1 X Weight categor categoryy I: 9 to to 18 kg Le /right rear seat1 L Suitable for semi-universal child restraint systems L2 L3 Weight categor categoryy III: 22 to to 36 kg Le /right rear seat 1 1 Do not, under any circumstances, use a rearwardfacing child seat on the folding bench seat (third row of seats). 2 Only use the approved child seat MB Duo plus. 3 Only use the approved child seats KIDFIX XP for children up to the age of approx. 6 years and not taller than 1.15 m/4 . according to the table in "Recommended child restraint systems", or if the vehicle and the seat are listed in the child restraint system manufacturer's vehicle model list. Weight categor categoryy II: 15 to to 25 kg kg Le /right rear seat1 X Not suitable for children in this weight category. X Notes on child child res restr traint aint systems systems on the the front front passenger passeng er seat R If it is absolutely necessary for you to t a child restraint system to the front passenger seat, be sure to observe the information on child restraint systems on the front passenger seat (/ page 75). R Observe the speci c instructions for the rearward-facing and forward-facing child restraint systems. If the front passenger seat is occupied, ensure, both before and during the journey, that the status of the front passenger airbag is correct for the current situation (/ page 54). 71 Front passenger passenger seat Weight categor categoryy 0: up to to 10 kg Front passenger airbag enabled1 X Front passenger airbag disabled1, 2 U, L Weight categor categoryy 0+: up to to 13 kg kg Front passenger airbag enabled1 X Front passenger airbag disabled1, 2 U, L Weight categor categoryy I: 9 to to 18 kg Front passenger airbag enabled1 Front passenger airbag disabled1, 2 UF, L U, L Weight categor categoryy II: 15 to to 25 kg kg Front passenger airbag enabled1 UF, L Front passenger airbag disabled1, 2 U, L Weight categor categoryy III: 22 to to 36 kg Front passenger airbag enabled1 UF, L 72 Occupant safety Front passenger airbag disabled1, 2 1 Adjust the seat cushion inclination so that the front edge of the seat cushion is in the highest position and the rear edge of the seat cushion is in the lowest position. 2 The vehicle is equipped with automatic front passenger airbag shuto . The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must be lit. X Not suitable for children in this weight category. U Suitable for child restraint systems of the "Universal" category in this weight category. L Suitable for semi-universal child restraint systems according to the table in "Recommended child restraint systems", or if the vehicle and the seat are listed in the child restraint system manufacturer's vehicle model list. UF Suitable for forward-facing child restraint systems of the "Universal" category in this weight category. U, L Securing the Securing the child child res restr traint aint system system with with the the seat belt on the the rear rear seat & WARNING Risk of accident if the rear bench seat, rear seat and seat backrest are not engaged The rear bench seat, rear seat and seat backrest may fold forwards, even while the vehicle is in motion. R As a result, the vehicle occupant will be pressed into the seat belt with increased force. The seat belt will not be able to protect as intended and could cause additional injury. R Objects or loads in the boot or load compartment cannot be restrained by the seat backrest. # Make sure that the rear bench seat, the rear seat and the seat backrest are engaged before every trip. If the le and right seat backrests are not engaged and locked in place, this will be shown on the display on the instrument cluster. If the centre seat backrest is not engaged and locked in place, the red lock veri cation indicator will be visible. When tting a belt-secured belt-secured child child res restr traint aint system, system, observee the observ the follo following: wing: O Always comply with the manufacturer's installation and operating instructions for the child restraint system used. O For a child restraint system in the "Universal" or "Semi-Universal" category, make sure that the system has been approved for the vehicle seat. Observe the notes under "Suitability of seats for attaching belt-secured child restraint systems" (/ page 70). O When using a weight weight categor categoryy 0/0+ baby baby car seat and a weight weight categor categoryy I rearw rearwar arddfacing child child res restr traint aint system system on a rear rear seat: adjust the front seat so that the seat does not touch the child restraint system. O When using a weight weight categor categoryy I forw forwar arddfacing child child res restr traint aint syst system: em: remove the head restraint from the respective seat, if possible. Occupant safety O O O O A er the child restraint system has been removed, replace the head restraint immediately and adjust all head restraints correctly. The backrest of the forward-facing child restraint system must, as far as possible, be resting on the seat backrest of the rear seat. If the head restraint of the child seat cannot be fully extended when it is installed in the vehicle, this will result in restrictions on the maximum size setting for child restraint systems in weight category II or III. Contact with the roof when the head restraint is fully extended and locked in place will not result in any restrictions on use. The child restraint system must not be put under strain between the roof and the seat cushion and/or be tted facing the wrong direction. Where possible, adjust the seat cushion inclination accordingly. The child restraint system must not be put under strain by the head restraint. Adjust the head restraints as appropriate. O Make sure that the child's feet do not touch the front seat. If necessary, move the front seat slightly forwards. # # 73 Notes on vehicles vehicles without without automatic automatic front front passenger passeng er airbag shut shutoo Install the child restraint system. The entire base of the child restraint system must always rest on the seat surface of the rear seat. Always make sure that the shoulder belt strap is correctly routed from the seat belt outlet of the vehicle to the shoulder belt guide on the child restraint system. The shoulder belt strap must be routed forward from the seat belt outlet. Sticker visible when the front passenger door is open Vehicles without automatic front passenger airbag shuto have a special sticker a xed to the side of the cockpit on the front passenger side. 74 Occupant safety Make sure you observe the following information: R Never t a rearward-facing child restraint system to the front passenger seat R Always t a rearward-facing child restraint system to a suitable rear seat Seats suitable for attaching belted child restraint systems (/ page 70). Secure the child restraint system with the seat belt on the rear seat (/ page 72). R Notes on rearward-facing and forward-facing child restraint systems on the front passenger seat (/ page 74) Notes on rearw rearwar ard-f d-facing acing and forw forwar ard-f d-facing acing child child res estr traint aint systems systems on the the front front passenger passenger seat & WARNING Risk of injury or death when using a rearward-facing child restraint system while the front passenger airbag is enabled If you secure a child in a rearward-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat and the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is o , the front passenger airbag can deploy in the event of an accident. The child could be struck by the airbag. # Always ensure that the front passenger airbag is disabled. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must be lit. # NEVER use a rearward-facing child restraint system on a seat with an ENABLED FRONT AIRBAG. This can result in the DEATH of or SERIOUS INJURY to the CHILD. Observe the speci c instructions for the rearward-facing and forward-facing child restraint systems (/ page 75). Warning notice on the front passenger sun visor Always observe the status of the front passenger airbag on the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp: R If it is absolutely necessary to t a child restraint system to the front passenger seat, always observe the information on automatic front passenger airbag shuto (/ page 53). R When using a rearward-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat, the front passenger airbag must always be disabled. This is only the case if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is lit continuously (/ page 54). Occupant safety R If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is o , the front passenger airbag is enabled. The front passenger airbag may deploy during an accident. Securing the Securing the child child res restr traint aint system system with with the the seat belt on the the front front passenger passenger seat When tting a belt-secured child restraint system on the front passenger seat, always observe the following: O Observe the notes on rearward-facing and forward-facing child restraint systems on the front passenger seat (/ page 74). O Observe the child restraint system manufacturer's installation and operating instructions. O For a child restraint system in the "Universal" or "Semi-Universal" category, make sure that the system has been approved for the vehicle seat. Observe the notes under "Suitability of seats for attaching belt-secured child restraint systems" (/ page 70). O When using a forward-facing child restraint system in weight category I: remove the head restraint from the respective seat, if possible. A er the child restraint system has been removed, replace the head restraint immediately and adjust all head restraints correctly. O The backrest of the forward-facing child restraint system must, as far as possible, be resting on the seat backrest of the front passenger seat. O If the head restraint of the child seat cannot be fully extended when it is installed in the vehicle, this will result in restrictions on the maximum size setting for child restraint systems in weight category II or III. Contact with the roof when the head restraint is fully extended and locked in place will not result in any restrictions on use. O The child restraint system must not be put under strain between the roof and the seat cushion and/or be tted facing the wrong direction. 75 O The child restraint system must not be put under strain by the head restraint. Adjust the head restraints as appropriate. O Never place objects (e.g. cushions) under or behind the child restraint system. & WARNING Risk of injury or death due to objects between the seat surface and the child restraint system Objects between the seat surface and the child restraint system could a ect the function of the automatic front passenger airbag shuto . # Do not place any objects between the seat surface and the child restraint system. # Always make sure that the child restraint system is correctly tted. # Set the front passenger seat as far back as possible and move the seat into the highest position if possible. 76 # # # # # # Occupant safety Fully retract the seat cushion length adjustment. Adjust the seat cushion inclination so that the front edge of the seat cushion is in the highest position and the rear edge of the seat cushion is in the lowest position. Set the seat backrest to the most vertical position possible. Install the child restraint system. The entire base of the child restraint system must always rest on the sitting surface of the front passenger seat. Always make sure that the shoulder belt strap is correctly routed from the seat belt outlet of the vehicle to the shoulder belt guide on the child restraint system. The shoulder belt strap must be routed forwards and downwards from the seat belt outlet. If necessary, adjust the seat belt outlet and the front passenger seat accordingly. Child safety safety locks # Activ ctivating ating or deactivating deactivating the the child child safety safety lock lock for for the rear rear doors # & WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to leaving children unattended in the vehicle If children are le unattended in the vehicle, they could, in particular: R open doors, thereby endangering other persons or road users. R get out and be struck by oncoming tra c. R operate vehicle equipment and become trapped, for example. In addition, the children could also set the vehicle in motion by, for example: R releasing the parking brake. R changing the transmission position. R starting the vehicle. # Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. Keep the vehicle key out of the reach of children. & WARNING Danger to life due to exposure to extreme heat or cold in the vehicle If people, particularly children, are exposed to extreme temperatures over an extended period of time, there is a risk of serious injury or danger to life. # Never leave persons, children in particular, unattended in the vehicle. & WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to children le unattended in the vehicle If children are travelling in the vehicle, they could, in particular: R open doors, thereby endangering other persons or road users. R get out and be struck by oncoming tra c. Occupant safety R operate vehicle equipment and become trapped, for example. # Always activate the installed child safety locks if children are travelling in the vehicle. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. # # Vehicles for the United Kingdom: observe the important safety notes in the "Notes on the additional door lock" section. There are child safety locks for the rear doors and the rear side windows. The child safety lock on the rear doors secures each door separately. The doors can no longer be opened from the inside. 77 Activ ctivating ating and deactivating deactivating the the child child safety safety lock for the the rear rear side windows # # Press the lever in direction 1 (activate) or 2 (deactivate). Make sure that the child safety locks are working properly. # To activat activate/deactiv e/deactivat ate: e: press button 2. The rear side window can be opened or closed in the following cases: R indicator lamp 1 is lit: via the switch on the driver's door Occupant safety 78 indicator lamp 1 is o : via the switch on the corresponding rear door or driver's door % Vehicles with with folding folding bench bench seat: the switch for opening the tailgate which is located on the right-hand wheel arch when viewed in the direction of travel is also secured. R Notes on pets pets in the the vehicle vehicle & WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to animals le unsecured or unattended in the vehicle If you leave animals in the vehicle unattended or unsecured, they could press buttons or switches, for instance. An animal may: R activate vehicle equipment and become trapped, for example R switch systems on or o and endanger other road users Unsecured animals may be thrown about the vehicle in the event of an accident, or sudden steering and braking manoeuvres, and injure vehicle occupants. # Never leave animals unattended in the vehicle. # Always correctly secure animals while driving, e.g. using a suitable animal carrier. Opening and closing Key Overvie Over view w of key key functions & WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to leaving children unattended in the vehicle If children are le unattended in the vehicle, they could, in particular: R open doors, thereby endangering other persons or road users. R get out and be struck by oncoming tra c. R operate vehicle equipment and become trapped, for example. # # When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. Keep the vehicle key out of the reach of children. * NOTE Damage to the key caused by magnetic elds # Keep the key away from strong magnetic elds. In addition, the children could also set the vehicle in motion by, for example: R releasing the parking brake. R changing the transmission position. R starting the vehicle. # Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. Vehicle key 1 Locks 2 Indicator lamp 79 3 Unlocks 4 Opens/closes the tailgate % If indicator lamp 2 does not light up a er pressing the Ü or ß button, the battery is weak or possibly discharged. Replace the battery as soon as possible. Replace the key battery (/ page 81). The key locks and unlocks the following components: R Doors R Fuel ller ap R Socket ap (plug-in hybrid) R Tailgate If the vehicle is not opened within approximately 40 seconds a er unlocking, it locks again. Antithe protection is primed again. Do not keep the key together with electronic devices or metal objects. This can a ect the key's functionality. 80 Opening and closing Activ ctivating/deactiv ating/deactivating ating the the acoustic acoustic locking locking ver erii cation signal R Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Vehicle # Activate or deactivate Acoustic lock. % Please observe: observe: The selected setting for the acoustic locking veri cation signal must comply with the relevant national road and tra c regulations. In some countries, including Germany, using the acoustic locking veri cation signal is forbidden by tra c laws (in accordance with §16 Para. 1 and §30 Para. 1 of the German national road tra c regulations). The driver of the vehicle must comply with these regulations. In countries where the use of this function is forbidden, this function is not activated in the vehicle and must not be activated. To switch switch betw between een settings: settings: press the Ü and ß buttons simultaneously for approximately six seconds until the indicator lamp ashes twice. Options if the unlocking function for the driver's door and fuel ller ap has been selected: R To unlock unlock the the vehicle vehicle centrally: centrally: press the Ü button twice. R Vehicles with with KEYLESS-GO: if you touch the inner surface of the door handle on the driver's door, only the driver's door and the fuel ller ap are unlocked. Changing the the unlocking unlocking settings settings Possible unlocking functions of the key: R Central unlocking R Unlocking the driver's door and fuel ller ap Plug-in hybr hybrid: id: unlocking the driver's door and fuel ller ap/socket ap # Options if the unlocking function for the driver's door and fuel ller ap/socket ap has been selected (plug-in-hybrid): R To unlock unlock the the vehicle vehicle centrally: centrally: press the Ü button twice. R Vehicles with with KEYLESS-GO: if you touch the inner surface of the door handle on the driver's door, only the driver's door and the fuel ller ap/socket ap are unlocked. Deactivating Deactiv ating the the function of the the key Vehicles with with KEYLESS-GO: if you deactivate the function of the key, the KEYLESS-GO functions are also deactivated. Access or drive authorization by KEYLESS-GO is then no longer possible with that particular key. Activate the function of the key so that all its functions will again be available. You can also deactivate the function of the key to reduce the energy consumption of the key if you do not use the vehicle or a key for an extended period of time. # To deactivat deactivate: e: press the ß button on the key twice in quick succession. The key indicator lamp ashes twice brie y and lights up once. # To activat activate: e: press any button on the key. % When the vehicle is started with the key in the stowage compartment of the centre console, the function of the key is automatically activated (/ page 178). Opening and closing Remo emoving/inser ving/inserting ting the the emergency emergency key Remo emoving ving the the emergency emergency key % You can use the intermediate position of emergency key 2 to attach the key to a key ring. + ENVIRONMENT ENVIR ONMENTAL AL NOTE NOTE Environmental damage due to improper disposal of batteries Replacing the the key key battery battery & DAN ANGER GER Risk of fatal injuries due to swallowing batteries # # # Press release button 1. Emergency key 2 is pushed out slightly. Pull out emergency key 2 until it engages in the intermediate position. Press release button 1 again and fully remove emergency key 2. Inser ting the Inserting the emergency emergency key # Press release button 1. # Insert emergency key 2 to the intermediate position or fully until it engages. Batteries contain toxic and corrosive substances. Swallowing batteries may cause severe internal burns to occur within two hours. There is a risk of fatal injury. # Keep batteries out of the reach of children. # If the cap and/or the battery compartment does not close securely, do not use the key any longer and keep it out of the reach of children. # If batteries are swallowed, seek medical attention immediately. Batteries contain pollutants. It is illegal to dispose of them with the household rubbish. # Dispose of batteries in an environmentally responsible manner. Take discharged batteries to a quali ed specialist workshop or to a collection point for used batteries. Req equir uirements: ements: R You require a CR 2032 3 V cell battery. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the battery replaced at a quali ed specialist workshop. # Remove the emergency key (/ page 81). 81 82 Opening and closing Problems Pr oblems with with the the key, key, troubleshoo troubleshooting ting You can no longer longer lock lock or unlock unlock the the vehicle vehicle Possible causes: R The key battery is weak or discharged. # # # # # # # # Press release knob 2 down fully and slide cover 1 in the direction of the arrow. Fold out cover 1 in the direction of the arrow and remove. Remove battery compartment 3 and take out the discharged battery. Insert the new battery into battery compartment 3. Observe the positive pole marking in the battery compartment and on the battery when doing this. Push in battery compartment 3. Re-attach cover 1 and push it until it engages. # # # Check the battery using the indicator lamp (/ page 79). Replace the key battery, if necessary (/ page 81). Use the replacement key. Use the emergency key to lock or unlock (/ page 86). Have the key checked at a quali ed specialist workshop. There is interf There interfer erence ence from from a power powerful ful radio radio signal source sour ce Possible causes if the function of the key is impaired: R high voltage power lines R mobile phones R electronic devices (notebooks, tablets) R shielding due to metal objects or induction loops for electrical gate systems or automatic barriers # Make sure that there is su cient distance between the key and the potential source of interference. You have have lost lost a key # Have the key deactivated at a quali ed specialist workshop. # If necessary, have the mechanical lock replaced as well. Doors Notes on the the additional door lock The additional door lock is only available for vehicles for the United Kingdom. Opening and closing & WARNING Risk of injury to persons inside the vehicle when the additional door lock is activated If the additional door lock is activated, the doors can no longer be opened from the inside. # Never leave persons, in particular children, unattended in the vehicle. # If there are persons in the vehicle, do not activate the additional door lock. You can prevent the additional door lock from being activated by deactivating interior protection before locking the vehicle (/ page 104). # Unloc nlocking/opening king/opening the the doors doors from from the the inside Centrallyy locking Centrall locking and unlocking unlocking the the vehicle vehicle from from the inside # Unit nited ed Kingdom only: only: observe the notes on the additional door lock (/ page 82). Pull door handle 2. Locking pin 1 pops up when the door is unlocked. The additional door lock is automatically activated in the following situations: R The vehicle is locked using the key. R The vehicle is locked using KEYLESS-GO. If the vehicle has been locked via Mercedes me connect, the additional door lock is not activated (/ page 357). If the additional door lock is activated, the doors cannot be opened from the inside. % A er locking you can issue a signal with the horn. 83 # # To unlock: unlock: press button 1. To lock: lock: press button 2. 84 Opening and closing This does not lock or unlock the fuel ller ap. Plug-in hybr hybrid: id: the socket ap is also locked and unlocked. The socket ap can be opened even if a key is detected in the car. The vehicle is not unlocked: R if you have locked the vehicle using the key R if you have locked the vehicle using KEYLESSGO Locking/unloc Loc king/unlocking king the the vehicle vehicle with with KEYLESS-GO Req equir uirements: ements: R The key is outside the vehicle. R The distance between the key and the vehicle does not exceed 1 m. R The driver's door and the door on which the door handle is used are closed. * NOTE NOTE Vehicle damage due to unintentional opening of the tailgate R R when using an automatic car wash when using a high pressure cleaner # Deactivate the function of the key in these situations. or # Make sure that the key is at a minimum distance of 3 m away from the vehicle. Observe the notes: on washing the vehicle in a car wash (/ page 382) R on using a high pressure cleaner (/ page 383) R # # # To unlock unlock the the vehicle: vehicle: touch the inner surface of the door handle. To lock lock the the vehicle: vehicle: touch sensor surface 1 or 2. Convenience Conv enience closing: touch recessed sensor surface 2 until the closing process has been completed. Opening and closing % Further information on convenience closing (/ page 95). If you open the tailgate from outside, it is automatically unlocked. Problems Pr oblems with with KEYLESS-GO, troubleshoo troubleshooting ting You can no longer longer lock lock or unlock unlock the the vehicle vehicle using KEYLESS-GO Possible causes: R The function of the key has been deactivated. R The key battery is weak or discharged. # # # # # # Activate the function of the key (/ page 80). Check the battery using the indicator lamp (/ page 79). Replace the key battery, if necessary (/ page 81). Use the replacement key. Use the emergency key to lock or unlock (/ page 86). Have the vehicle and key checked at a qualied specialist workshop. 85 There is interf There interfer erence ence from from a power powerful ful radio radio signal source sour ce Possible causes if the function of KEYLESS-GO is impaired: R high voltage power lines R mobile phones R electronic devices (notebooks, tablets) R shielding due to metal objects or induction loops for electrical gate systems or automatic barriers # Make sure that there is su cient distance between the key and the potential source of interference. Activ ctivating/deactiv ating/deactivating ating the the automatic automatic locking locking feafeature The vehicle is locked automatically when the vehicle is switched on and the wheels are turning faster than walking pace. # # To activat activate: e: press and hold button 2 for approximately ve seconds until an acoustic signal sounds. To deactivat deactivate: e: press and hold button 1 for approximately ve seconds until an acoustic signal sounds. 86 Opening and closing In the following situations, there is a danger of being locked out when the function is activated: R while the vehicle is being tow-started or pushed R if the vehicle is being tested on a roller dynamometer Locking/unlocking Locking/unloc king the the driv driver's er's door with with the the emergency emerg ency key # % If you wish to lock the vehicle entirely using the emergency key, rst press the button for locking from the inside while the driver's door is open. Then proceed to lock the driver's door using the emergency key. # Power closing function & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when the doors close automatically Body parts or objects can become trapped, causing injuries. # Ensure that no body parts or objects are in the closing area. # Automatic closing of the doors can be cancelled by pulling the outer or inner door handle. If you push the door into the lock to the rst detent position, the power closing function will automatically pull the door into the lock. # Remove the emergency key (/ page 81). # # Insert the emergency key as far as it will go into opening 1 in the cover. Pull and hold the door handle. Pull the cover on the emergency key as straight as possible away from the vehicle until it releases. Release the door handle. Opening and closing # # # To unlock: unlock: turn the emergency key anti-clockwise to position 1. To lock: lock: turn the emergency key clockwise to position 1. Carefully press the cover onto the lock cylinder until it engages and is seated rmly. Load compar compartment tment Opening the the tailg tailgate ate & DAN ANGER GER Risk of poisoning from exhaust gases Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases, such as carbon monoxide. Exhaust gases can enter the vehicle interior if the tailgate is open when the vehicle is running, especially if the vehicle is in motion. # Always switch o the vehicle before opening the tailgate. # Never drive with the tailgate open. 87 * NOTE Damage to the tailgate caused by obstacles above the vehicle The tailgate swings rearwards and upwards when it is opened. # Make sure that there is su cient space behind and above the tailgate. # # If the tailgate is unlocked, pull the tailgate handle and release it again immediately. Vehicles with with HANDS-FREE ACCESS: ACCESS: make a kicking movement with your foot below the bumper (/ page 90). # Pull remote operating switch 1 until the tailgate opens. or # # Press and hold the p button on the key. If the tailgate is stopped in an intermediate position, pull it upwards. Release it as soon as it begins to open. 88 Opening and closing If an obstacle obstructs the tailgate during the automatic opening process, blockage detection will stop the tailgate. The automatic blockage detection function is only an aid. It is not a substitute for your attentiveness. If the tailgate has been locked from the outside, or the child safety lock has been activated, the tailgate cannot be unlocked from the inside using button 1. Closing the the tailg tailgate ate & WARNING Risk of injury from unsecured items in the vehicle # Vehicles with with folding folding bench bench seat: pull button 1 for the tailgate twice. The tailgate will be unlocked. If objects, luggage or loads are not secured or not secured su ciently, they could slip, tip over or be thrown around and thereby hit vehicle occupants. There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction. # Always stow objects in such a way that they cannot be thrown around. # Before the journey, secure objects, luggage or loads against slipping or tipping over. Observe the notes on loading the vehicle. Notes on closing the the tailg tailgat ate: e: your vehicle is equipped with automatic key recognition. If a key belonging to the vehicle is detected in the vehicle, the tailgate will not be locked. Note that the tailgate will not be locked in the following situation: R You have locked the vehicle and close the tailgate while a key belonging to the vehicle is inside the vehicle. and R A second key belonging to the vehicle is not detected outside the vehicle. Automatic key recognition is only an aid and is not a substitute for your attentiveness. # Before locking, ensure that at least one key belonging to the vehicle is outside the vehicle. # To close the the tailg tailgat ate: e: pull the tailgate downwards slightly. Release it as soon as it begins to close. Opening and closing 89 & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped during automatic closing of the tailgate Body parts may become trapped. There may be people in the closing area. # Make sure that nobody is in the vicinity of the closing area during the closing process. Use one of the following options to stop the closing process: R Press the p button on the key. R Press or pull the remote operating switch on the driver's door. R Press the closing or locking button on the tailgate. R Pull the tailgate handle. Vehicles with with HANDS-FREE ACCESS: ACCESS: it is also possible to stop the closing process by making a kicking movement below the rear bumper. # # Switch on the power supply or the vehicle. Push remote operating switch 1 until the tailgate is fully closed. # Press closing button 1 on the tailgate. Vehicles with with KEYLESS-GO # Press locking button 2 on the tailgate. If a key is detected outside the vehicle, the tailgate will close and the vehicle will be locked. # Press and hold the p button on the key. The key must be in the vicinity of the vehicle. 90 Opening and closing Vehicles with with HANDS-FREE ACCESS ACCESS # Make a kicking movement with your foot below the bumper (/ page 90). Aut utomatic omatic rever reversing sing function for for the the tailg tailgate ate The tailgate is equipped with automatic blockage detection with a reversing function. If an obstacle obstructs the tailgate during the automatic closing process, it will automatically open again slightly. Automatic blockage detection with the reversing function is only an aid and is not a substitute for your attentiveness. # During the closing process, make sure that no body parts are in the closing area. Ensure that no body parts are in the closing area. If someone is trapped, either: R Press the p button on the key. R Press or pull the remote operating switch on the driver's door. R Press the closing or locking button on the tailgate. R Pull the tailgate handle. # HANDS-FREE ACCESS ACCESS function & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped despite reversing function The reversing function will not react: to so , light and thin objects, e.g. ngers R towards the end of the closing procedure R In these situations in particular, the reversing function cannot prevent someone being trapped. With HANDS-FREE ACCESS you can open, close or stop the closing process of the tailgate by performing a kicking movement under the rear bumper. The kicking movement triggers the opening or closing process alternately. Opening and closing Observe the notes when opening (/ page 87) and closing (/ page 88) the tailgate. % Two warning tones sound when the tailgate is opening or closing. & WARNING Risk of burns caused by a hot exhaust system The vehicle exhaust system can become very hot. If you use HANDS-FREE ACCESS, you could burn yourself by touching the exhaust system. # Always ensure that you only make a kicking movement within the detection range of the sensors. * NOTE Vehicle damage due to unintentional opening of the tailgate R R # or when using an automatic car wash when using a high pressure cleaner Deactivate the function of the key in these situations. # 91 Make sure that the key is at a minimum distance of 3 m away from the vehicle. When making the kicking movement, make sure that you are standing rmly on the ground. You could otherwise lose your balance, e.g. on ice. Observe the following notes: R The key is behind the vehicle. R Stand at least 30 cm away from the vehicle while performing the kicking movement. R Do not come into contact with the bumper while making the kicking movement. R Do not carry out the kicking movement too slowly. R The kicking movement must be towards the vehicle and back again. 1 Detection range of the sensors If several consecutive kicking movements are not successful, wait ten seconds. System limits System The system may be impaired or may not function in the following cases: R The sensors are dirty, e.g. due to road salt or snow. R The kicking movement is made using a prosthetic leg. 92 Opening and closing The tailgate can open or close unintentionally in the following situations: R A person's arms or legs are moving in the sensor detection range, e.g. when polishing the vehicle or picking up objects. R Objects are moved or placed behind the vehicle, e.g. the hose of a fuel dispenser, a charging cable, or luggage R Clamping straps, tarpaulins or other coverings are pulled over the bumper. R A protective mat with a length reaching over the boot sill down into the detection range of the sensors is used. R The protective mat is not secured correctly. R Work is being done on the trailer hitch, trailers or rear bicycle racks. Deactivate the function of the key (/ page 80) or do not carry the key about your person in such situations. Limiting the the opening angle of the the tailg tailgate ate Unloc nlocking king the the tailg tailgat atee with with the the emergency emergency key Activ ctivating ating the the opening angle limiter limiter You can limit the opening angle of the tailgate in the top half of its opening range up to a point shortly before the end position. # Stop the opening procedure of the tailgate at the desired position. # Press and hold the closing button on the tailgate until you hear a short acoustic signal. The opening angle limiter will be activated. The tailgate will then stop in the stored position when opened. Req equir uirements: ements: R The rear seat backrest has been folded forward. R The combined luggage cover and net has been removed. To open the tailgate fully, pull the handle on the outside of the tailgate again a er it has stopped automatically. Deactivating the Deactivating the opening angle limiter limiter # Press and hold the closing button on the tailgate until two short acoustic signals sound. # Remove the emergency key (/ page 81). Opening and closing # Insert emergency key 2 into opening 1 in the trim and push it in. The tailgate will be unlocked. # # Emergency Emerg ency release release of the the tailg tailgat atee from from inside (vehicles with (vehicles with a folding folding bench bench seat) Press the cover down in the direction of arrow 1 and pull in the direction of arrow 2 to remove it. Pull the emergency release lever in the direction of arrow 3. The tailgate will be unlocked. Side windows Opening and closing the the side windows & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when opening a side window When you open a side window, parts of the body could be drawn in or become trapped between the side window and window frame. # When opening, make sure that nobody is touching the side window. # If someone is trapped, release the button immediately or pull it in order to close the side window again. 93 & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when closing a side window When closing a side window, body parts could be trapped in the closing area in the process. # When closing, make sure that no body parts are in the closing area. # If someone is trapped, release the button immediately or press the button in order to reopen the side window. & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when children operate the side windows Children could become trapped if they operate the side windows, particularly when unattended. # Activate the child safety lock for the rear side windows. # When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. # Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. 94 Opening and closing Req equir uirements: ements: R The power supply or the vehicle has been switched on. # # To star startt automatic automatic operation: operation: press the W button beyond the point of resistance or pull and release it. To interr interrup uptt automatic automatic operation: operation: press or pull the W button again. When the vehicle is switched o , you can continue to operate the side windows. This function is available for around four minutes or until a front door is opened. Aut utomatic omatic rever reversing sing function of the the side windows If an obstacle impedes a side window during the closing process, the side window will open again automatically. The automatic reversing function is only an aid and is not a substitute for your attentiveness. # During the closing process, make sure that no body parts are in the closing area. 1 Closing 2 To open The buttons on the driver's door take precedence. & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped despite there being reversing protection on the side window The reversing function does not react: R to so , light and thin objects, e.g. ngers. R during resetting. The reversing function cannot prevent someone from becoming trapped in these situations. # During the closing process, make sure that no body parts are in the closing area. # If someone becomes trapped, press the W button to open the side window again. Aut utomatic omatic function of the the side windows In the following cases, the side windows will be closed automatically when the vehicle is switched o : R if it starts to rain Opening and closing R R R Rain is detected by a rain sensor on the windscreen. in extreme temperatures a er a certain time (depending on the onboard electrical system voltage) if there is a malfunction in the power supply The side windows will be closed as far as the ventilation position. Vehicles with with a sliding sunroof: sunroof: the side windows will be closed completely if the sliding sunroof is open. If the side windows are obstructed during automatic closing, the side window concerned will open again slightly. A er another automatic closing process, the automatic function for the sunroof and side windows may be deactivated. The automatic function will be active again the next time the vehicle is started. Convenience opening (ventilating Convenience (ventilating the the vehicle vehicle befor bef oree star starting ting a journe journey) y) & WARNING Risk of entrapment when opening a side window When opening a side window, parts of the body could be drawn in or become trapped between the side window and window frame. # When opening, make sure that nobody is touching the side window. # Release the button immediately if somebody becomes trapped. Req equir uirements: ements: R The key is in the immediate vicinity of the vehicle. # Press and hold the Ü button on the key. The following functions are performed: R The vehicle is unlocked. R The side windows are opened. R The sliding sunroof is opened. R The panoramic sliding roof is opened. R 95 The seat ventilation of the driver's seat is switched on. % If the roller sunblind of the panoramic sliding sunroof is closed, the roller sunblind is opened rst. # To interr interrup uptt convenience convenience opening: release the Ü button. # To continue convenience convenience opening: press and hold the Ü button again. Convenience closing (closing the Convenience the vehicle vehicle from from outside) & WARNING Risk of entrapment due to not paying attention during convenience closing When the convenience closing feature is operating, parts of the body could become trapped in the closing area of the side window and the sliding sunroof. # When the convenience closing feature is operating, monitor the entire closing 96 Opening and closing process and make sure that no body parts are in the closing area. Req equir uirements: ements: R The key is in the immediate vicinity of the vehicle. Press and hold the ß button on the key. The following functions are performed: R The vehicle is locked. R The side windows are closed. R The sliding sunroof is closed. R The panoramic sliding roof is closed. # To interr interrup uptt convenience convenience closing: release the ß button. # To continue convenience convenience closing: press and hold the ß button again. % Convenience closing also functions with KEYLESS-GO (/ page 84). # Resol esolving ving problems problems with with the the side windows & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped or fatally injured if reversing protection is not activated If you close a side window again immediately a er it has been blocked, the side window will close with increased or maximum force. The reversing function is then not active and body parts may become trapped. # Make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area. # To stop the closing process, release the button or press the button again to reopen the side window. A side window window cannot cannot be closed and you you cannot see the the cause. # Check to see whether any objects are in the window guide. # Adjust the side windows. Adjus djusting ting the the side windows windows If a side window is obstructed during closing and reopens again immediately: # Immediately a er this, pull and hold the corresponding button again until the side window has closed and hold the button for at least one more second (re-adjustment). The side window will be closed without the automatic reversing function. If the side window is obstructed again and reopens again immediately: # Immediately a er this, pull and hold the corresponding button again until the side window has closed and hold the button for at least one more second (follow-up adjustment). The side window will be closed without the automatic reversing function. The side windows windows cannot cannot be opened or closed using the the convenience convenience opening featur feature. e. Possible causes: R The key battery is weak or discharged. # Check the battery using the indicator lamp (/ page 79). Opening and closing # Replace the key battery, if necessary (/ page 81). Sliding sunroof sunroof Opening and closing the the sliding sunroof sunroof % The term "sliding sunroof" also refers to the panorama sliding sunroof. & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when the sliding sunroof is being opened and closed Body parts may become trapped in the range of movement. # During opening and closing, make sure that no body parts are in the range of movement. # Release the button immediately if somebody becomes trapped. or # Brie y press the button in any direction during automatic operation. The opening or closing process will be stopped. & WARNING Risk of entrapment if the sliding sunroof is operated by children Children operating the sliding sunroof could get caught in the moving parts, particularly if unattended. # Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. # When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when the roller sunblind is being opened and closed Body parts may become trapped between the roller sunblind and frame or sliding roof. # # 97 When opening or closing, make sure that no body parts are in the roller sunblind's range of movement. Release the button immediately if somebody becomes trapped. or # Brie y press the button in any direction during automatic operation. The opening or closing process will be stopped. * NOTE Malfunction due to snow and ice Snow and ice may cause the sliding sunroof to malfunction. # Open the sliding sunroof only if it is free of snow and ice. * NOTE Damage caused by protruding objects Objects that protrude from the sliding sunroof may damage the seals. 98 Opening and closing Do not allow anything to protrude from the sliding sunroof. # * NOTE Damage to the sliding sunroof when a roof luggage rack is tted # # When a roof luggage rack is tted, raising or opening the sliding sunroof may be restricted. # Check whether the sliding sunroof can be raised or opened when a roof luggage rack is tted. # If in doubt, do not raise or open the sliding sunroof. # 1 To raise 2 To open 3 To close/lower Use the 3 button to operate the panorama sliding sunroof and the roller sunblind. The panorama sliding sunroof can be operated only when the roller sunblind is open. Check whether the sliding sunroof can be raised or opened when a roof luggage rack is tted. To star startt automatic automatic operation: operation: press the 3 button beyond the point of resistance or pull and release it. To interr interrup uptt automatic automatic operation: operation: brie y press the 3 button in any direction. The opening/closing process will be stopped. Aut utomatic omatic rever reversing sing function of the the sliding sunroof If an obstacle obstructs the sliding sunroof during the closing process, the sliding sunroof will open again automatically. The automatic reversing function is only an aid and is not a substitute for your attentiveness. # During the closing process, make sure that no body parts are in the closing area. Opening and closing & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped despite the reversing function being active In particular, the reversing function does not react: R to so , light and thin objects, e.g. ngers. R towards the end of the closing procedure. R during resetting. # # During the closing process, make sure that no body parts are in the closing area. Release the button immediately if somebody becomes trapped. or # Brie y press the button in any direction during automatic operation. The closing process will be stopped. Aut utomatic omatic rever reversing sing function of the the roller roller sunblind If an obstacle obstructs the roller sunblind during the closing process, the roller sunblind will open again automatically. The automatic reversing function is only an aid and is not a substitute for your attentiveness. # When closing the roller sunblind, make sure that no body parts are in the range of movement. & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped despite reversing function In particular, the reversing function does not react to so , light and thin objects, e.g. ngers. # When closing the roller sunblind, make sure that no body parts are in the range of movement. # Release the button immediately if somebody becomes trapped. or # Brie y press the button in any direction during the automatic closing process. The closing process will be stopped. Aut utomatic omatic functions of the the sliding sunroof sunroof % The term "sliding sunroof" also refers to the panorama sliding sunroof. 99 The sliding sunroof will be closed automatically when the vehicle has been switched o in the following situations: R if it starts to rain Rain is detected by a rain sensor on the windscreen. R in extreme temperatures R a er a certain time (depending on the onboard electrical system voltage) R if there is a malfunction in the power supply The sliding sunroof will rise at the rear in order to continue ventilating the vehicle interior. If the sliding sunroof is obstructed during an automatic closing procedure, the roof will be opened again slightly. The automatic function for the sliding sunroof and the side windows will then be deactivated. Rain-closing featur featuree when driving driving Vehicles with with a panorama panorama sliding sunroof: sunroof: if it starts to rain, the raised sliding sunroof will automatically be lowered while the vehicle is in motion. 100 Opening and closing Aut utomatic omatic lower lowering ing function Vehicles with with a panorama panorama sliding sunroof: sunroof: if the sliding sunroof is raised at the rear, it will automatically be lowered slightly at higher speeds. At low speeds, it will be raised again automatically. & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped by automatic lowering of the sliding sunroof At higher speeds, the raised sliding sunroof will automatically be lowered slightly at the rear. # Make sure that nobody reaches into the sliding sunroof's range of movement while the vehicle is in motion. # If somebody becomes trapped, brie y push the sliding sunroof button forwards or backwards. % By pushing or pulling the 3 button, you can interrupt the automatic functions "Rain closing function when driving" and "Automatic lowering". Rectifying problems problems with with the the sliding sunroof sunroof & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped or fatal injuries when the sliding sunroof is closed again If the sliding sunroof is closed again immediately a er it has been blocked or reset, it will close with increased force. # Make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area. # Release the button immediately if somebody becomes trapped. or # Brie y press the button in any direction during the automatic closing process. The closing process will be stopped. The sliding sunroof sunroof cannot cannot be closed and you you cannott see the no the cause. % The term "sliding sunroof" also refers to the panorama sliding sunroof. If the sliding sunroof is obstructed during closing and reopens again slightly: # Immediately a er automatic reversing, pull and hold the 3 button down again to the point of resistance until the sliding sunroof is closed. The sliding sunroof will be closed with increased force. If the sliding sunroof is obstructed again and opens again slightly: # Repeat the previous step. The sliding sunroof will be closed again with increased force. Vehicles without without a panorama panorama sliding sunroof: sunroof: the the sliding sunroof sunroof is not not operating operating smoothly smoothly.. # Reset the sliding sunroof. Rese esetting tting the the sliding sunroof sunroof # Push the 3 button up to the point of resistance repeatedly until the sliding sunroof is fully open. # Press the 3 button for another second. # Close the sliding sunroof. Opening and closing 101 Vehicles with with a panorama panorama sliding sunroof: sunroof: the the sliding sunroof sunroof or the the roller roller sunblind is not not operating operating smoothly smoot hly.. # Reset the sliding sunroof and the roller sunblind. # # Always move the roller sun blind by hand. Do not drive with the roller sun blind hooked in and rear side windows opened at the same time. Rese esetting tting the the sliding sunroof sunroof and the the roller roller sunblind # Pull and hold the 3 button little by little until the sliding sunroof is fully closed. # Pull and hold the 3 button little by little until the roller sunblind is fully closed. # Use automatic operation to fully open and then close the sliding sunroof. & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when extending or retracting the roller sunblind Body parts may become trapped in the roller sunblind's range of movement. # Ensure there are no body parts in the range of movement. # If someone becomes trapped, brie y press the button again. The opening or closing process will brie y be stopped. The roller sunblind will then return to its starting position. * NOTE Damage caused by objects Roller sunblinds Extending Ext ending the the rear rear side window window roller roller sunblinds Objects can cause the roller sunblind to malfunction. # Ensure that the roller sunblind can move freely. * NOTE Damage to the inertia reel due to it snapping back If suddenly snapped back, the inertia reel may be damaged. Extending or retr Extending retracting acting the the rear rear-windo -window w roller roller sunblind # Pull the roller sunblind out by tab 1 and hook it onto brackets 2 at the top of the window. 102 Opening and closing The immobiliser is automatically activated when the vehicle is switched o , and deactivated when the vehicle is switched on. ATA (Anti(Anti-The The Alar Alarm m system) system) # To ext extend end or retr retract act:: press button 1. Anti-the prot Anti-the protection ection Function of the the immobiliser The immobiliser prevents your vehicle from being started without the correct key. Function of the the ATA ATA syst system em If the ATA system is primed, a visual and audible alarm is triggered in the following situations: R when a door is opened R when the tailgate is opened R when the bonnet is opened R when interior protection is triggered (/ page 103) R when tow-away protection is triggered (/ page 103) The ATA system is primed automatically a er approximately ten seconds in the following situations: R a er locking the vehicle with the key R a er locking the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO Indicator lamp 1 ashes when the ATA system is primed. The ATA system is deactivated automatically in the following situations: R a er unlocking the vehicle with the key R a er unlocking the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO Opening and closing 103 R a er pressing the start/stop button with the key in the stowage compartment (/ page 178) % When the Mercedes‑Benz emergency call system is active and the alarm stays on for more than 30 seconds, a message is automatically sent to the Customer Assistance Centre (/ page 362). Deactivating the Deactivating the ATA # Press the Ü, ß or p button on the key. or # Press the start/stop button with the key in the stowage compartment (/ page 178) Tow-away protection is automatically primed a er approximately 60 seconds: R a er locking the vehicle with the key R a er locking the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO Tow-away protection is only primed when the following components are closed: R doors R tailgate Deactivating the Deactivating the alarm alarm using KEYLESS-GO Grasp the outside door handle with the key outside the vehicle. Tow-away protection is automatically deactivated: R a er pressing the Ü or p button on the key R a er pressing the start/stop button with the key in the stowage compartment (/ page 178) R a er unlocking the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO R when using HANDS-FREE ACCESS Function of tow-awa tow -awayy protection protection Information on collision detection on a parked vehicle (/ page 228). # An audible and visual alarm is triggered if an alteration to your vehicle's angle of inclination is detected while tow-away protection is primed. Priming/deactiv Pr iming/deactivating ating tow-awa tow -awayy protection protection Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Quick access # Prime or deactivate Tow-away protection. Tow-away protection is primed again in the following cases: R The vehicle is unlocked again. R A door is opened. R The vehicle is locked again. % If quick access is unavailable, select the Vehicle submenu in the Settings main menu to prime or deactivate tow-away protection. Function of inter interior ior prot protection ection When interior protection is primed, a visual and audible alarm is triggered if movement is detected in the vehicle interior. Interior protection is primed automatically a er approximately ten seconds: R a er locking the vehicle with the key R a er locking the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO 104 Opening and closing Interior protection is only primed when the following components are closed: R doors R tailgate Interior protection is automatically deactivated: R a er pressing the Ü or p button on the key R a er pressing the start/stop button with the key in the stowage compartment (/ page 178) R a er unlocking the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO R when using HANDS-FREE ACCESS The following situations can lead to a false alarm: when there are moving objects such as mascots in the vehicle interior R when a side window is open R when a sliding sunroof is open R when a panoramic sliding sunroof is open R Priming/deactiv Pr iming/deactivating ating inter interior ior protection protection Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Quick access # Prime or deactivate Interior motion sensor. Interior protection is primed again in the following cases: R The vehicle is unlocked again. R A door is opened. R The vehicle is locked again. % If quick access is unavailable, select the Vehicle menu under Settings to prime or deactivate interior protection. Seats and stowing 105 Notes on the the correct correct driv driver's er's seat position R & WARNING Risk of accident due to adjusting the vehicle settings while the vehicle is in motion R R You could lose control of the vehicle in the following situations in particular: R if you adjust the driver's seat, the head restraint, the steering wheel or the mirror while the vehicle is in motion R if you fasten your seat belt while the vehicle is in motion # Before starting the vehicle: in particular, adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel and mirror, and fasten your seat belt. R R R R Ensure the following when adjusting the steering wheel 1, seat belt 2 and driver's seat 3: R You are sitting as far away from the driver's airbag as possible, taking the following points into consideration: R You are sitting in an upright position R Your thighs are slightly supported by the seat cushion Your legs are not fully extended and you can depress the pedals properly The back of your head is supported at eye level by the centre of the head restraint You can hold the steering wheel with your arms slightly bent You can move your legs freely You can see all the displays on the instrument cluster clearly You have a good overview of the tra c conditions Your seat belt sits snugly against your body and passes across the centre of your shoulder and across your hips in the pelvic area 106 Seats and stowing Seats Adjus djusting ting the the front front seat manually manually and electrically electrically (without (wit hout Seat Comfor Comfortt Pack Packag age) e) & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped if the seats are adjusted by children Children could become trapped if they adjust the seats, particularly when unattended. # When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. # Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. You can adjust the seats when the vehicle is switched o . & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped during seat adjustment When you adjust a seat, you or other vehicle occupants could become trapped, e.g. on the seat guide rail. # Make sure when adjusting a seat that no one has any body parts in the sweep of the seat. Observe the safety notes on "Airbags" and "Children in the vehicle". & WARNING Risk of accident due to the driver's seat not being engaged The driver's seat may move unexpectedly while driving. This could cause you to lose control of the vehicle. # Always make sure that the driver's seat is engaged before starting the vehicle. & WARNING Risk of accident due to adjusting the vehicle settings while the vehicle is in motion You could lose control of the vehicle in the following situations in particular: R if you adjust the driver's seat, the head restraint, the steering wheel or the mirror while the vehicle is in motion R if you fasten your seat belt while the vehicle is in motion # Before starting the vehicle: in particular, adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel and mirror, and fasten your seat belt. & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped if the seat height is adjusted carelessly If you adjust the seat height carelessly, you or other vehicle occupants could be trapped and thereby injured. Seats and stowing 107 Children in particular could accidentally press the electrical seat adjustment buttons and become trapped. # While moving the seats, make sure that hands or other body parts do not get under the lever assembly of the seat adjustment system. & WARNING Risk of injury due to head restraints not being tted or being adjusted incorrectly If head restraints have not been installed or have not been adjusted correctly, there is an increased risk of injury in the head and neck area, e.g. in the event of an accident or when braking. # Always drive with the head restraints tted. # Before driving o , make sure for every vehicle occupant that the centre of the head restraint supports the back of the head at about eye level. Do not interchange the head restraints of the front and rear seats. Otherwise, you will not be able to adjust the height and angle of the head restraints correctly. Adjust the head restraint fore-and-a position so that it is as close as possible to the back of your head. & WARNING Risk of injury or death due to incorrect seat position The seat belt will not o er the intended level of protection if you have not moved the seat backrest to an almost vertical position. In particular, you may slip under the seatbelt and injure yourself. # Adjust the seat properly before beginning your journey. # Always ensure that the seat backrest is in an almost vertical position and that the shoulder section of your seat belt is routed across the centre of your shoulder. & WARNING Risk of injury due to excessive strain on the grab handle If you apply your full body weight to the grab handle or pull it abruptly, the grab handle may be damaged or become loose from its anchorage. # Use the grab handles only to stabilise the seating position or to assist in getting in and out of the seat. & WARNING Risk of injury or death due to objects under the co-driver seat Objects trapped under the co-driver seat can interfere with the function of the automatic co-driver airbag shuto or damage the system. # Do not store any objects under the codriver seat. # When the co-driver seat is occupied, make sure that no objects are trapped under the co-driver seat. 108 Seats and stowing Adjus djusting ting the the front front seat manually manually and electrically electrically (with Seat Comfor (with Comfortt Pack Packag age) e) * NOTE Damage to the seats when moving the seats back The seats may be damaged by objects when moving the seats back. # When moving the seats back, make sure that there are no objects in the footwell, under or behind the seats. 1 Seat backrest inclination 2 Seat height 3 Seat fore-and-a position # # To adjust adjust the the seat for ore-and-a e-and-a position: li lever 3 and slide the seat into the desired position. Make sure that the seat is engaged. 1 2 3 4 5 Seat backrest inclination Seat height Seat cushion inclination Seat fore-and-a position Seat cushion length Seats and stowing 109 # # # To adjust adjust the the seat for ore-and-a e-and-a position: li lever 4 and slide the seat into the desired position. Make sure that the seat is engaged. To adjust adjust the the seat cushion length: length: li lever 5 and slide the front section of the seat cushion forwards or backwards. Adjus djusting ting the the front front seat electrically electrically # Save the settings with the memory function (/ page 123). Adjus djusting ting the the 4-way 4-way lumbar support 1 2 3 4 5 6 Head restraint height Seat backrest inclination Seat height Seat cushion length Seat cushion inclination Seat fore-and-a position 1 2 3 4 Higher So er Lower Firmer 110 Seats and stowing # Use buttons 1 to 4 to adjust the contour of the backrest. Head res restr traints aints Adjus djusting ting the the front front seat head res restr traints aints manually & WARNING Risk of accident due to adjusting the vehicle settings while the vehicle is in motion You could lose control of the vehicle in the following situations in particular: R if you adjust the driver's seat, the head restraint, the steering wheel or the mirror while the vehicle is in motion R if you fasten your seat belt while the vehicle is in motion # Before starting the vehicle: in particular, adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel and mirror, and fasten your seat belt. & WARNING Risk of injury due to head restraints not being tted or being adjusted incorrectly If head restraints have not been installed or have not been adjusted correctly, there is an increased risk of injury in the head and neck area, e.g. in the event of an accident or when braking. # Always drive with the head restraints tted. # Before driving o , make sure for every vehicle occupant that the centre of the head restraint supports the back of the head at about eye level. Do not interchange the head restraints of the front and rear seats. Otherwise, you will not be able to adjust the height and angle of the head restraints correctly. Adjust the head restraint fore-and-a position so that it is as close as possible to the back of your head. # # # # To raise: raise: pull the head restraint up. To lower: lower: press release knob 1 in the direction of the arrow and push the head restraint down. To move move forw forwar ards: ds: pull the head restraint forwards. To move move backw backwar ards: ds: press release knob 2 and push the head restraint backwards. Seats and stowing 111 Lowering Lower ing the the rear rear seat head res restr traints aints from from the the front fr ont Adjus djusting ting tthe he head res restr traints aints of the the rear rear seats mechanically mechanically Fitting/r itting/remo emoving ving the the outer outer rear rear seat head res estr traints aints Remo emoving ving # Press button 1. # # To raise: raise: pull the head restraint up. To lower lower:: press release knob 1 in the direction of the arrow and push the head restraint down. # # Release the rear seat backrest and fold it forwards slightly (/ page 127). Pull the head restraint upwards as far as it will go. 112 Seats and stowing # Push release knob 1 in the direction of the arrow and pull out the head restraint. Fitting Insert the head restraint such that the notches on the bar are on the le when viewed in the direction of travel. # Push the head restraint down until it engages. # Fold the rear seat backrest back until it engages. # Con guring guring the seat settings settings Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Comfort 5 Seat comfort Adjus djusting ting the the backr backres estt contour contour in the the lumbar region of the the seat backr backres estt (lumbar) # Select Lumbar. # Select the settings Z for the desired seat. # Adjust the air cushions. Adjus djusting ting the the backr backres estt side bolsters bolsters # Select Side bolsters. # Adjust the air cushion for the desired seat. Setting Se tting the the seat heating balance # Select Seat heating balance. # Adjust the heat distribution for the desired seat. Setting Se tting automatic automatic seat adjustment adjustment & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped during adjustment of the driver's seat a er calling up a driver pro le Selecting a user pro le may trigger an adjustment of the driver's seat to the position saved under the user pro le. You or other vehicle occupants could be injured in the process. # Make sure that when the position of the driver's seat is being adjusted via the multimedia system, no people or body parts are in the seat's range of movement. If there is a risk of someone becoming trapped, stop the adjustment process immediately: # a) Tap the warning message on the media display. or # b) Press a memory function position button or a seat adjustment switch on the driver's door. The adjustment process will be stopped. Req equir uirements: ements: R Adapting the driver's seat position to body size: automatic seat adjustment has been switched on. Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Vehicle 5 Automatic seat adjustment Switching automatic Switching automatic seat adjustment adjustment on/o When the active user pro le is changed while the vehicle is stationary, the driver's seat, outside mirrors and seat contour will automatically be adapted to the driver. Seats and stowing 113 Select On or Off. % This setting is available only for individual user pro les. For the guest pro le, automatic seat adjustment cannot be switched on or o . synchronising the pro les in the vehicle and the Mercedes me connect pro les, you can carry over these settings for your vehicle. Further information about synchronising user pro les . # Adjus djusting ting the the driv driver's er's seat position to to body size The vehicle will calculate a suitable driver's seat position on the basis of the driver's body size and set this directly. # To set set the the unit of measurement measurement:: select cm or ft/in. # Set the size using the scale. # Select Start positioning. The driver's seat position will be adjusted to the body size that has been set. % If the driver's seat position calculated by the vehicle is not practical or comfortable, it can be changed manually at any time via the buttons. The exterior mirrors are not set via this function. Instead, they have to be set manually via the switches. % You can also con gure these settings via the Mercedes me portal for your user pro le. By Setting Se tting the the easy entry entr y and exit exit feature feature # Switch the function on or o . % If you use an individual user pro le and have set your body size, this information is carried over for the easy entry and exit feature. This causes the driver's seat to automatically move into the correct position . Over Ov ervie view w of massage massage progr programmes ammes R R Hot Relaxing back Combination of heat and massage. It starts by massaging the back. In addition, warm pressure points become noticeable, starting in the pelvic area. Hot Relaxing shoulder Combination of heat and massage. It starts by massaging the shoulders. In addition, warm pressure points become noticeable, starting in the pelvic area. R R R R R Activating Massage Activating massage with upward-moving massage waves. Classic Massage Relaxing back massage. Wave Massage Regenerating massage via massage waves across the back and in the seat cushion. Mobilizing Massage Mobilising massage with upward-moving massage waves. Can promote slower, deeper respiration. This can improve the supply of oxygen to cells and the brain. Active Workout backrest and Active Workout cushion These programmes require your cooperation. Alternating between tensing and releasing helps to improve blood ow to your muscles. Press against a pressure point as soon as you feel it. Selecting the the massage massage progr programme amme for for the the front front seats Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Comfort 5 Massage # Select a massage programme (/ page 113). 114 Seats and stowing # # Start the program for the desired seat ;. To set set the the massage massage intensity intensity:: switch switch High intensity on or o . Rese esetting tting seat settings settings Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Comfort 5 Seat comfort # Select Î for the desired seat. # Con rm the prompt. Switching Switc hing the the seat heating on/o & WARNING Risk of burns due to repeatedly switching on the seat heating Repeatedly switching on the seat heating can cause the seat cushion and seat backrest padding to become very hot. In particular, the health of persons with limited temperature sensitivity or a limited ability to react to high temperatures may be a ected or they may even su er burn-like injuries. # Do not repeatedly switch on the seat heating. To protect against overheating, the seat heating may be temporarily deactivated a er it has been switched on repeatedly. * NOTE Damage to the seats caused by objects or documents when the seat heater is switched on When the seat heater is switched on, overheating may occur due to objects or documents placed on the seats e.g. seat cushions or child seats. This could cause damage to the seat surface. # Make sure that no objects or documents are on the seats when the seat heater is switched on. Req equir uirements: ements: R The power supply is switched on. Seats and stowing 115 Setting Se tting the the panel heating Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Vehicle 5 Panel heating When the seat heater is switched on, the armrests and the centre console can be heated. # Switch the function for the desired seats on or o . Switching Switc hing the the seat ventilation ventilation on/o Req equir uirements: ements: R The power supply is switched on. Press button 1 repeatedly until the desired heating level is set. Depending on the heating level, up to three indicator lamps will light up. If all indicator lamps are o , the seat heating is switched o . % The seat heating will automatically switch down from the three heating levels a er 8, 10 and 20 minutes until the seat heating is switched o . # # Press button 1 repeatedly until the desired blower setting has been reached. Depending on the blower setting, up to three indicator lamps will light up. If all indicator lamps are o , the seat ventilation is switched o . 116 Seats and stowing Folding bench bench seat in the the load compar compartment tment Notes on the the folding folding bench bench seat & WARNING Risk of injury when the seat backrest is not upright and locked in position The seat backrest of the folding bench seat may fold down while the vehicle is in motion. In this case, the seat belts may not perform their intended protective function. # Make sure that the seat backrests of the rear bench seat are locked in the upright position. Observe the notes on "Seat belts" (/ page 49), "Head restraints" (/ page 110) and "Children in the vehicle" (/ page 59). The folding bench seat is approved for use only with child seats designed for children up to six years old (/ page 70). Information on suitable child restraint systems on the folding bench seat can be obtained at a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. The folding bench seat may be used only when the combined luggage cover and net is installed. The tailgate can be opened from the folding bench seat. The switch is located on the wheel arch on the right-hand side when viewed in the direction of travel. Folding out the the folding folding bench bench seat Req equir uirements: ements: The seat backrests of the rear bench seat are locked in the upright position. R The handle for the combined luggage cover and net has been moved up. To improve the rear view, the upper part of the plate has been folded down. R Seats and stowing 117 # # Push down the seat cushion until the seat backrest engages fully. Fold the head restraints upwards. Folding back back the the folding folding bench bench seat # # # # Pull release handle 1 and fold the seat backrest of the folding bench seat upwards. Hook the seat belts into retainers 3. Secure the seat belt buckles in the back of the seat backrest. Pull release 2 and fold the seat cushion of the folding bench seat into the seat position. # Pull the seat cushion upwards by tab 1 and fold it back into its starting position until it engages. * NOTE Damage to the folding bench seat when folding back The folding bench seat may be damaged when it is folded back. # Fully insert the head restraints into the guides. # Make sure that the seat belt buckles engages in their guides. 118 Seats and stowing # # # Press the release knob 3 and fold the head restraints down. Press the release knob 4 and push the head restraints all the way in. Fold back seat backrest 2 of the folding bench seat into its starting position. Opening/closing the the load compar compartment tment oor & WARNING Risk of injury due to an open load compartment oor If you drive with the load compartment oor open, objects could be ung around and hit vehicle occupants as a result. There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction. # Always close the load compartment oor before a journey. Opening # Press the release knob in the middle of the load compartment oor and turn it to the OPEN position. Pull the loop on the load compartment oor and fold the load compartment oor up. % When the seat cushion is removed (/ page 118), you can remove the load compartment oor completely. # Closing # Reinsert the load compartment oor, if necessary, and fold it down. # Press the release knob and turn it to the CLOSE position. Remo emoving ving or tting the seat cushion If you want to open the load compartment oor while the folding bench seat is folded back, you must rst of all remove the seat cushion. # To remov remove: e: fold seat cushion 2 vertically upwards and remove it from seat cushion guide 1. Seats and stowing 119 Fitting Steer eering ing wheel Adjus djusting ting the the steer steering ing wheel manually & WARNING Risk of accident due to adjusting the vehicle settings while the vehicle is in motion # # Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. You could lose control of the vehicle in the following situations in particular: R if you adjust the driver's seat, the head restraint, the steering wheel or the mirror while the vehicle is in motion R if you fasten your seat belt while the vehicle is in motion # # # Push seat cushion 2 into seat cushion guide 1 at a slight angle from the rear 3. Fold seat cushion 2 back into its starting position 4 until it engages. Before starting the vehicle: in particular, adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel and mirror, and fasten your seat belt. & WARNING Risk of entrapment for children when adjusting the steering wheel Children could injure themselves if they adjust the steering wheel. # # To unlock: unlock: push release lever 1 down as far as it will go. Adjust height 2 and distance 3 to the steering wheel. 120 Seats and stowing Locking Loc king # Fold release lever 1 up as far as it will go. # Check and make sure that the steering column is locked by moving the steering wheel. Switching Switc hing the the steer steering ing wheel heater heater on/o Req equir uirements: ements: R The power supply or the vehicle has been switched on. Adjus djusting ting the the steer steering ing wheel electrically electrically The steering wheel can be adjusted when the power supply is disconnected. 1 To adjust the distance to the steering wheel 2 To adjust the height # Save the settings with the memory function (/ page 123). # Turn the lever in the direction of arrow 1 or 2. If indicator lamp 3 lights up, the steering wheel heater is switched on. Seats and stowing 121 When you switch the vehicle o , the steering wheel heater will switch o . Easy entry entr y and exit exit feature feature Using the the easy entry entr y and exit exit feature feature & WARNING Risk of accident when pulling away during the adjustment process of the easy entry and exit feature You could lose control of the vehicle. # Always wait until the adjustment process is complete before driving o . & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped during adjustment of the easy entry and exit feature You and other vehicle occupants – particularly children – could become trapped. # Ensure that no one has a body part in the sweep of the steering wheel or driver's seat. If there is a risk of becoming trapped by the steering wheel: # Move the adjustment lever of the steering wheel. The adjustment process will be stopped. If there is a risk of becoming trapped by the driver's seat: # Press the seat adjustment switch. The adjustment process will be stopped. # Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. # When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. Vehicles with with memory memor y function: you can stop the adjustment process by pressing one of the memory function position switches. & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped if children activate the easy entry and exit feature‑ Children could become trapped if they activate the easy entry‑ and exit feature, particularly when unattended. # Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. # When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. If the easy entry and exit feature is active, the steering wheel will move upwards and the driver's seat will move back in the following situations: R You switch o the vehicle when the driver's door is open. R You open the driver's door when the vehicle is switched o . % The steering wheel will then move upwards only if it is not already as high as it will go. The driver's seat will then move backwards only if it is not already at the rear of the seat adjustment range. 122 Seats and stowing The steering wheel and the driver's seat will move back to the last drive position in the following cases: R You switch the power supply or the vehicle on when the driver's door is closed R You close the driver's door when the vehicle is switched on. The last drive position will be saved when: You switch o the vehicle. R Vehicles with with memory memor y function: you call up the seat settings via the memory function. R Vehicles with with memory memor y function: you save the seat settings via the memory function. R Vehicles with with memory memor y function: press one of the memory function position switches to stop the adjustment process. Setting Se tting the the easy entry entr y and exit exit feature feature Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Vehicle 5 Automatic seat adjustment 5 Easy Entry/Exit # Activate or deactivate the function. Memoryy function Memor Function of the the memory memor y function & WARNING Risk of an accident if the memory function is used while driving If you use the memory function on the driver's side while driving, you could lose control of the vehicle as a result of the adjustments being made. # Only use the memory function on the driver's side when the vehicle is stationary. & WARNING Risk of entrapment when adjusting the seat with the memory function When the memory function adjusts the seat, you and other vehicle occupants – particularly children – could become trapped. # During the adjustment process of the memory function, make sure that no one has any body parts in the sweep of the seat. # If someone becomes trapped, press a preset position button or seat adjustment switch immediately. & WARNING Risk of entrapment if the memory function is activated by children Children could become trapped if they activate the memory function, particularly when unattended. # Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. Seats and stowing 123 # When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. Operating Oper ating the the memory memor y function Stor oring ing You can use the memory function when the vehicle is switched o . Seat adjustments for up to three people can be stored and called up using the memory function. You can save settings for the following systems: R Seat, backrest and head restraint R Steering wheel R Outside mirrors R Head-up display # To call up: press or brie y hold preset position button 4, T or U. A er releasing the button, all systems are moved into the stored position. Stowag agee areas areas Notes on loading the the vehicle vehicle & DAN ANGER GER Risk of exhaust gas poisoning # # Set the desired position for all systems. Brie y press the V memory button and then press preset position button 4, T or U within three seconds. An acoustic signal sounds. The settings are stored. Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaust gases can enter the vehicle interior if the tailgate is open when the engine is running, especially if the vehicle is in motion. # Always switch o the engine before opening the tailgate. # Never drive with the tailgate open. & WARNING Risk of injury from unsecured items in the vehicle If objects, luggage or loads are not secured or not secured su ciently, they could slip, tip 124 Seats and stowing over or be thrown around and thereby hit vehicle occupants. There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction. # Always stow objects in such a way that they cannot be thrown around. # Before the journey, secure objects, luggage or loads against slipping or tipping over. & WARNING Risk of injury due to objects being stowed incorrectly If objects in the vehicle interior are stowed incorrectly, they can slide or be thrown around and hit vehicle occupants. In addition, cup holders, open stowage spaces and mobile phone brackets cannot always retain all objects they contain. There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of braking manoeuvres or abrupt changes in direction. # # # # Always stow objects so that they cannot be thrown around in such situations. Always make sure that objects do not protrude from stowage spaces, luggage nets or stowage nets. Close the lockable stowage spaces before starting a journey. Stow and secure objects that are heavy, hard, pointed, sharp-edged, fragile or too large in the load compartment. & WARNING Risk of accident from objects in the driver's footwell and front-passenger footwell Objects in the driver's footwell and frontpassenger footwell may impede pedal travel or block a depressed pedal. This jeopardises the operating and road safety of the vehicle. # Stow all objects in the vehicle securely so that they cannot get into the driver's footwell or front-passenger footwell. # # Always t the oor mats securely and as prescribed in order to ensure that there is always su cient clearance for the pedals. Do not use loose oor mats and do not lay multiple oor mats on top of one another. Vehicles with with automatic automatic front front passenger passenger airbag shutoo : objects trapped under the front shut passenger seat may interfere with the function of the automatic front passenger airbag shuto or damage the system. Please observe the notes on the function of the automatic front passenger airbag shuto (/ page 53). & WARNING ‑ Risk of accident or injury when using the cup holder while the vehicle is in motion The cup holder cannot hold a container secure while the vehicle is in motion. If you use a cup holder while the vehicle is in motion, the container may be ung around and liquids could be spilled. The vehicle occu- Seats and stowing 125 pants may come into contact with the liquid and if it is hot, they could be scalded. You could be distracted from tra c conditions and you may lose control of the vehicle. # Only use the cup holder when the vehicle is stationary. # Only use the cup holder for containers of the right size. # Always close the container, particularly if the liquid is hot. * NOTE Damage to the cup holder When the rear armrest is folded back the cup holder could become damaged. # Only fold the rear armrest back when the cup holder is closed. & WARNING Risk of injury due to an open load compartment oor If you drive with the load compartment oor open, objects could be ung around and hit vehicle occupants as a result. There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction. # Always close the load compartment oor before a journey. * NOTE Damage to the stowage compartment under the ashtray due to intense heat The stowage compartment under the ashtray is not heat resistant and could be damaged if you rest a lit cigarette on it. # Make sure that the ashtray is fully engaged. & WARNING ‑ Risk of re and injury from the hot cigarette lighter You can burn yourself if you touch the hot heating element or the socket of the cigarette lighter. In addition, ammable materials may ignite if: R you drop the hot cigarette lighter R a child holds the hot cigarette lighter to objects, for example # Always hold the cigarette lighter by the knob. Always make sure that the cigarette lighter is out of reach of children. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. # # & WARNING Risk of burns from the tailpipe and tailpipe trims The exhaust tailpipe and tailpipe trims can become very hot. If you come into contact with these parts of the vehicle, you could burn yourself. # Always be particularly careful around the tailpipe and the tailpipe trims and supervise children especially closely in this area. # Allow vehicle parts to cool down before touching them. 126 Seats and stowing The driving characteristics of your vehicle are dependent on the distribution of the load within the vehicle. You should bear the following in mind when loading the vehicle: R never exceed the permissible gross mass or the permissible axle loads for the vehicle (including occupants). Information can be found on the vehicle identication plate (/ page 431). R the load must not protrude above the upper edge of the seat backrests. R when transporting objects in the load compartment, always install the combined luggage cover and net (load compartment cover and partitioning net). R always place the load behind unoccupied seats if possible. R secure the load using the tie-down eyes and distribute the load evenly. Notes on driving with a roof load R Evenly distribute the roof load, and place heavy objects at the bottom. Also comply with R R the notes on loading the vehicle (/ page 123). Drive attentively, and avoid suddenly pulling away, braking and steering as well as rapid cornering. When transporting roof loads and when the vehicle is fully loaded or fully occupied, select drive programs ; and A. These are designed to focus on stability (/ page 195). Stowag agee spaces in the the vehicle vehicle inter interior ior Over Ov ervie view w of the the front front stowag stowagee compar compartments tments % For more information on stowage compartments and stowage areas, please refer to the Digital Owner's Manual. 1 Stowage spaces in the doors 2 Stowage compartment in the armrest with USB ports and stowage space, e.g. for an MP3 player 3 Stowage compartment in the front centre console with a USB port 4 Glove compartment Seats and stowing 127 Through-loading ffeatur Through-loading eaturee in the the rear rear bench bench seat (EASY-PAC (EASY -PACK K Quickf Quickfold) old) If the seat backrest is not engaged and locked, this will be shown on the driver's display. Folding the the rear rear seat backr backres estt forw forwar ards ds Req equir uirements: ements: R The rear seat backrest head restraints are fully inserted. & WARNING Risk of accident if the rear bench seat, rear seat and seat backrest are not engaged The rear bench seat, rear seat and seat backrest may fold forwards, even while the vehicle is in motion. R As a result, the vehicle occupant will be pressed into the seat belt with increased force. The seat belt will not be able to protect as intended and could cause additional injury. R Objects or loads in the boot or load compartment cannot be restrained by the seat backrest. # Make sure that the rear bench seat, the rear seat and the seat backrest are engaged before every trip. You can fold the centre and outer seat backrests forwards separately. The right seat backrest can be folded forwards only together with the centre seat backrest. The outer seat backrests are unlocked electrically. # # Vehicles without without a memory memor y function: move the driver's or front passenger seat forwards, if necessary. Vehicles with with a memory memor y function: if at least one section of the rear seat backrest is folded forwards, the corresponding front seat will move forwards slightly, if necessary, to avoid a collision. 128 Seats and stowing # To fold fold the the le and right right seat backr backres ests ts forw orwar ard: d: pull right or le button 1. Folding the the rear rear seat backr backres estt backw backwar ards ds * NOTE NOTE Damage caused by trapping the seat belt when folding back the seat backrest The seat belt could become trapped and thus be damaged when the seat backrest is folded back. # Make sure that the seat belt is not trapped when folding back the seat backrest. # # # # To fold fold the the centre centre seat backr backres estt fforw orwar ards: ds: pull release catch 3 of seat backrest 2 forwards. Fold seat backrest 2 forwards. Vehicles without without a memory memor y function: move the driver's or front passenger seat forwards, if necessary. Vehicles with with a memory memor y function: if at least one part of the seat backrest in the rear is folded back, the corresponding front seat will automatically return to the most recent original position. # Fold the corresponding seat backrest 1 back until it engages. Le and right right seat backr backres ests: ts: if the seat backrest is not engaged and locked, this will be shown on the driver's display. Centree seat backr Centr backrest: est: if the seat backrest is not engaged and locked, the red lock veri cation indicator 2 will be visible. Seats and stowing 129 Adjus djusting ting the the angle of the the rear rear seat backr backres ests ts (cargo position) (cargo To enlarge the load compartment, you can adjust the seat backrests so that they are ten degrees steeper (cargo position). Locking the Locking the release release catch catch of the the centre centre rear rear seat backr bac krest est Req equir uirements: ements: R The le and centre seat backrests are engaged and joined together. Lock the centre seat backrest release catch if you want to secure the load compartment against unauthorised access. The centre seat backrest can then be folded forwards only together with the le seat backrest. # # # Fold the centre and le seat backrests forwards. To lock: lock: slide catch 1 upwards. The release catch of the centre seat backrest will be locked. To unlock: unlock: slide catch 1 downwards. # # Fold the seat backrest forwards (/ page 127). Move bracket 1 in the direction of the arrow. 130 Seats and stowing # Push seat backrest 2 back to bracket 1 until the backrest engages. Load compar compartment tment cover cover with with partition par tition net net (combined cargo cargo cover cover and net) net) Notes on the the load compar compartment tment cover cover & WARNING Risk of injury or death due to poorly secured objects The load compartment cover alone cannot secure or restrain heavy objects, items of luggage or heavy loads. You could be hit by an unsecured load, particularly in the event of abrupt changes in direction, sudden braking or an accident. # Always stow objects in such a way that they cannot be thrown around. # Secure objects, luggage or loads against slipping or tipping over, e.g. by using lashing material, even if you are using the load compartment cover. * NOTE Damage to the load compartment cover when loading the vehicle Extending/re Ext ending/retr tracting acting the the load compar compartment tment cover cover The load compartment cover may be damaged when the vehicle is being loaded. # Do not place any objects above the lower edge of the side windows or on the load compartment cover. The load compartment cover and the partitioning net form the combined luggage cover and net. When the load compartment cover is clipped in, no objects in the load compartment should obstruct the lowering movement of the cover when the tailgate is closed. The load compartment cover will otherwise be raised again automatically. # To ext extend: end: pull load compartment cover 1 back by handle 2 and clip it into the brackets on the le and right. The load compartment cover raises automatically when the tailgate is opened and lowers again when the tailgate is closed. Retr Re tracting acting # Remove load compartment cover 1 from the brackets on the le and right. # Guide load compartment cover 1 forwards by handle 2 until it is fully retracted. Seats and stowing 131 The handle strip of the retracted load compartment cover 1 can be used in the following positions: Remo emoving ving Remove the combined luggage cover and net from the load compartment, or from the le -hand rear door if the seat backrests are folded forwards. Installing Installing # Slide the combined luggage cover and net into right-hand bracket 4 as far as it will go. # Place the combined luggage cover and net into the le -hand bracket and slide it into catch 1 until the combined luggage cover and net engages audibly. Red lock veri cation indicator 3 must no longer be visible. * NOTE NOTE Damage to the combined luggage cover and net when attaching it to the seat backrest position when driving) Req equir uirements: ements: R The load compartment cover and partition net are retracted. First, detach the combined luggage cover and net from le -hand catch 1 and then remove it from right-hand bracket 4. Att ttac aching hing the the combined luggag luggagee cover cover and net net to the rear rear seat backr backrest est 1 Folded up by 45° (loading position) 2 Horizontal position (driving position) 3 Folded down and locked in place (rattle-free Installing/r Inst alling/remo emoving ving the the combined luggag luggagee cover cover and net # # # Press button 2. Fold the combined luggage cover and net backwards with the seat backrest folded up. When the combined luggage cover and net is attached to the seat backrest, it may be damaged when the seat backrest is folded back. # Do not fold the seat backrests back. 132 Seats and stowing Req equir uirements: ements: R The seat backrests are folded forwards. Att ttac aching hing the the partitioning par titioning net & WARNING Risk of injury or death due to poorly secured objects Par artitioning titioning net net without without load compar compartment tment enlargement enlarg ement The partitioning net alone cannot secure or restrain heavy objects, items of luggage or heavy loads. You could be hit by an unsecured load, particularly in the event of abrupt changes in direction, sudden braking or an accident. # Always stow objects in such a way that they cannot be thrown around. # Secure objects, luggage or loads against slipping or tipping over, e.g. by using lashing material, even if you are using the partitioning net. # Insert combined luggage cover and net 2 into both guides 1 and push it as far as it will go in the direction of the arrow. To disassemble the combined luggage cover and net, follow the instructions in reverse order. For safety reasons, always use a partitioning net when transporting a load. Damaged partitioning nets can no longer ful l their protective functions and must be replaced. Visit a quali ed specialist workshop. # # Pull the partitioning net far out towards the rear from the rear bench seat using tab 1. Hook the partitioning net into eyelets 2, rst on the le , then on the right. Seats and stowing 133 Par artitioning titioning net net with with load compar compartment tment enlargeenlargement Over Ov ervie view w of the the tie-down tie-down eyes eyes Observe the notes on loading the vehicle (/ page 123). Over Ov ervie view w of bag hooks & WARNING Risk of injury when using bag hooks with heavy objects The bag hooks cannot restrain heavy objects or items of luggage. Objects or items of luggage may be ung around and hit vehicle occupants. # Only hang light objects on the bag hooks. # Never hang hard, sharp-edged or fragile objects on the bag hooks. # # Guide the partitioning net upwards using tab 1. Hook the partitioning net into eyelets 2. Observe the notes on loading the vehicle (/ page 123). Subject the bag hooks to a maximum load of 3 kg and do not attach any goods to them. 1 Tie-down eyes 134 Seats and stowing 1 Bag hook Att ttac aching hing the the luggag luggagee net & WARNING Risk of injury due to objects being stowed incorrectly If objects in the vehicle interior are stowed incorrectly, they can slide or be thrown around and hit vehicle occupants. In addition, cup holders, open stowage spaces and mobile phone brackets cannot always retain all objects they contain. There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of braking manoeuvres or abrupt changes in direction. # Always stow objects so that they cannot be thrown around in such situations. # Always make sure that objects do not protrude from stowage spaces, luggage nets or stowage nets. # Close the lockable stowage spaces before starting a journey. # Stow and secure objects that are heavy, hard, pointed, sharp-edged, fragile or too large in the load compartment. Observe the notes on loading the vehicle. The luggage net is available for all vehicles except hybrid vehicles. # # # Vehicles with a load compartment package: insert the brackets with the tie-down eyes into the load rails (/ page 135). Fold up the tie-down eyes. Hook luggage net 1 into the front and rear tie-down eyes. EASY-PAC EASY -PACK K load-securing load-securing kit Notes on the the EASY-PAC EASY-PACK K load-securing load-securing kit The EASY-PACK load-securing kit allows you to use your load compartment for a variety of purposes. The components are located in the stowage space under the load compartment oor. Seats and stowing 135 Inserting Inser ting the the bracke brackets ts into into the the load rail rail # # Press locking button 4. The bracket 1 has been secured in the selected position in the load rail 5. If necessary, fold tie-down eye 2 upwards. Installing Inst alling or remo removing ving the the luggag luggagee holder Req equir uirements: ements: R Select a load size that can be secured by the luggage holder. The luggage holder is used to secure loads against the side wall of the load compartment to prevent them from moving around. You can subject the load holder to a maximum load of 7 kg. 1 Bag containing the brackets and luggage holder 2 Telescopic rod # # # Insert bracket 1 into the centre of load rail 5. Press release knob 3 and slide bracket 1 into the desired position in load rail 5. Let go of release knob 3. 136 Seats and stowing Fitting # Press and hold the release knob 3 of the rst bracket 5. # Insert the luggage holder 2 into the rst bracket 5 and slide it downwards until it engages. # Let go of release knob 3. # Repeat the process with the second bracket 5 and the handle. # # # # Insert two brackets 5 into the load rail (/ page 135). Press and hold the release knob 1 on the luggage holder 2. Pull the belt on the handle out slightly. Let go of release knob 1. Loading # Press and hold the release knob 1 on the luggage holder 2. # Pull the belt on the handle out. # Place the load between the strap and the load compartment side wall. # Press and hold the release knob 1 on the luggage holder 2. # Hold the belt on the handle rmly and slowly guide it back until the load has been secured. # Let go of release knob 1. # # On both brackets 5, press the locking button 4. To remov remove: e: press release knob 3 on the bracket 5 and remove luggage holder 2 by pulling it out. Installing Inst alling or remo removing ving the the telescopic telescopic rod rod Installing Installing The telescopic rod is used to secure loads against the rear seats to prevent them from moving around. Seats and stowing 137 # To remov remove: e: press the release knob 3 on the respective bracket 2 and remove the telescopic rod 1 by pulling it upwards and out. Att ttac aching hing a roof roof luggag luggagee rack rack & WARNING Risk of accident due to exceeding the maximum roof load # # # # Insert one bracket 2 into both the le and right load rails and slide it to the desired position. Press and hold the release knob 3. Insert the telescopic rod 1 into the brackets 2 and slide it downwards until it engages. On both brackets, press locking button 4. The vehicle centre of gravity and the usual driving characteristics as well as the steering and braking characteristics alter. If you exceed the maximum roof load, the driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, will be greatly impaired. # Never exceed the maximum roof load and adjust your driving style. You will nd information on the maximum roof load in the "Technical data" section. * NOTE Damage to the vehicle due to not observing the maximum permitted headroom clearance If the vehicle height is greater than the maximum permitted headroom clearance, the roof and other parts of the vehicle may be damaged. # Observe the signposted headroom clearance. # If the vehicle height is greater than the permitted headroom clearance, do not enter. # Observe the changed vehicle height with add-on roof equipment. * NOTE Vehicle damage from non-approved roof luggage racks The vehicle could be damaged by roof luggage racks that have not been tested and approved for Mercedes-Benz. # Use only roof luggage racks tested and approved for Mercedes-Benz. 138 Seats and stowing # # # Depending on the vehicle equipment, ensure that the sliding sunroof can be fully raised when the roof luggage rack is tted. Depending on the vehicle equipment, ensure that the tailgate can be fully opened when the roof luggage rack is tted. Position the load on the roof luggage rack in such a way that the vehicle will not sustain damage even when it is in motion. * NOTE Damage to the panorama sliding sunroof due to non-approved roof luggage racks The panorama sliding sunroof may be damaged by the roof luggage rack if you attempt to open it when using a roof luggage rack not tested and approved for Mercedes-Benz. # When a roof luggage rack is tted, open the panorama sliding sunroof only if this has been tested and approved for Mercedes-Benz. The panorama sliding sunroof may be raised to allow ventilation of the vehicle interior. Notes on driving with a roof load R Evenly distribute the roof load, and place heavy objects at the bottom. Also comply with the notes on loading the vehicle (/ page 123). R Drive attentively, and avoid suddenly pulling away, braking and steering as well as rapid cornering. R When transporting roof loads and when the vehicle is fully loaded or fully occupied, select drive programs ; and A. These are designed to focus on stability (/ page 195). # # Secure the roof luggage rack to the roof railing. Observe the manufacturer's installation instructions. Sockets Socke ts Using the the 12 V socket Req equir uirements: ements: R Only connect devices up to a maximum of 180 W (15 A). Depending on the vehicle equipment, the vehicle has the following 12 V sockets: R In the stowage compartment in the front centre console R In the stowage compartment in the centre console of the rear passenger compartment R In the load compartment Seats and stowing 139 USB port por t in the the rear rear passenger passenger compar compartment tment You can charge a USB device, such as a mobile phone, at the USB ports using a suitable charging cable. When the vehicle is switched on, the devices can be charged with 5 V (up to 3 A). Example: 12 V socket in the stowage compartment in the front centre console # # Brie y press the trim element of the cover on the front. The cover opens in the direction of the arrow. Li up cap 1 of the socket and insert the plug of the device. If you have connected a device to the 12 V socket, leave the cover of the stowage compartment open. Wir ireless eless char charging ging of the the mobile phone and connection with with the the ext exter erior ior aerial aerial Notes on wirelessl wirelesslyy char charging ging the the mobile phone & WARNING Risk of injury due to objects being stowed incorrectly If objects in the vehicle interior are stowed incorrectly, they can slide or be thrown around and hit vehicle occupants. In addition, cup holders, open stowage spaces and mobile phone receptacles cannot always retain all objects within. There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction. # # # # Always stow objects so that they cannot be thrown around in such situations. Always make sure that objects do not protrude from stowage spaces, luggage nets or stowage nets. Close the lockable stowage spaces before starting a journey. Always stow and secure heavy, hard, pointed, sharp-edged, fragile or bulky objects in the boot/load compartment. Observe the notes on loading the vehicle. & WARNING Risk of re from placing objects in the mobile phone stowage compartment Placing other objects in the mobile phone stowage compartment could constitute a re hazard. # Apart from a mobile phone, do not place any other objects in the mobile phone stowage compartment, especially those made of metal. 140 Seats and stowing * NOTE Damage to objects caused by placing them in the mobile phone stowage compartment If objects are placed in the mobile phone stowage compartment, these may be damaged by electromagnetic elds. # Do not place credit cards, storage media, ski passes or other objects sensitive to electromagnetic elds in the mobile phone stowage compartment. * NOTE Damage to the mobile phone stowage compartment caused by liquids R R R R If liquids enter the mobile phone stowage compartment, the compartment may be damaged. # Ensure that no liquids enter the mobile phone stowage compartment. R Depending on the vehicle equipment, the mobile phone is connected to the vehicle's exterior aerial via the charging module. R The charging function and wireless connection of the mobile phone to the vehicle's exterior aerial are only available if the vehicle is switched on. Small mobile phones may not be able to be charged in every position of the mobile phone stowage compartment. Large mobile phones which do not rest at in the mobile phone stowage compartment may not be able to be charged or connected with the vehicle's exterior aerial. The mobile phone may heat up during the charging process. This depends on the applications (apps) currently running. The mobile phone can be cooled in the mobile phone stowage compartment when the air conditioning system is switched on. The cooling output in the mobile phone stowage compartment is highest when the controller in the glove box is closed. To ensure more e cient charging and connection with the vehicle's exterior aerial, remove the protective cover from the mobile phone. R Protective covers which are designed for wireless charging are excluded. When charging, the mat should be used if possible. Charging Char ging a mobile phone wirelessly wirelessly Req equir uirements: ements: R The mobile phone is suitable for wireless charging (Qi-compatible mobile phone). A list of Qi-compatible mobile phones can be found at: https://www.mercedes-benzmobile.com. Seats and stowing 141 Place the mobile phone as close to the centre of mat 1 as possible with the display facing upwards. When the charging symbol is shown in the multimedia system, the mobile phone is being charged. Malfunctions during the charging process are shown in the central display. % The mat can be removed for cleaning, e.g. using clean, lukewarm water. # Radio equipment equipment approval approval numbers numbers for for Brazil Brazil This device operates on a secondary basis, that is to say it has no protection against harmful interference, not even from the same type of stations, and must not cause interference with systems operating on a primary basis. This product is permitted in accordance with the procedure de ned in Directive 242/2000 by the Brazilian telecommunications agency ANATEL and meets the applicable technical requirements. Further information is available on the ANATEL website. www.anatel.gov.br # Further information on the declaration of conformity for vehicle components which receive and/or transmit radio waves. Fitting and remo removing ving the the oor mats & WARNING Risk of accident due to objects in the driver's footwell Objects in the driver's footwell may impede pedal travel or block a depressed pedal. This jeopardises the operating and road safety of the vehicle. # Stow all objects in the vehicle securely so that they cannot get into the driver's footwell. # Always t the oor mats securely and as prescribed in order to ensure that there is always su cient room for the pedals. # Do not use loose oor mats and do not place oor mats on top of one another. # # To t: press studs 1 onto holders 2. To remov remove: e: pull the oor mat o holders 2. 142 Light and sight Exterior Exter ior lighting Notes on adjusting adjusting the the lights when driving driving abroad abroad Vehicles with with static static LED headlamps: headlamps: It is not necessary to convert the headlamps. The legal requirements are also met in countries in which tra c drives on the other side of the road. Vehicles with with Intellig Intelligent ent Light System: System: before crossing the border into countries in which tra c drives on the other side of the road, it is necessary to set the headlamps to symmetrical low beam (/ page 150). Once the headlamps have been converted: R Oncoming tra c will not be dazzled. R The edge of the road will not be illuminated as far or as high. R The "motorway mode" and "enhanced fog light" functions will not be available. The headlamps must be reset to asymmetrical low beam when you return from abroad. Infor Inf ormation mation about lighting systems systems and your your responsibility The various lighting systems of the vehicle are only aids. The driver of the vehicle is responsible for correct vehicle illumination in accordance with the prevailing light and visibility conditions, legal requirements and tra c situation. Light switch Operating Oper ating the the light switch 1 W Le -hand parking lights 2 X Right-hand parking lights 3 T Standing lights and licence plate light- ing 4 à Automatic driving lights (preferred light switch position) Light and sight 143 5 L Low beam/high beam 6 R Switches the rear fog light on/o When low beam is activated, the T indicator lamp for the standing lights will be deactivated and replaced by the L low-beam indicator lamp. # Always park your vehicle safely using su cient lighting, in accordance with the relevant legal stipulations. * NOTE Battery discharging by operating the standing lights Operating the standing lights over a period of hours puts a strain on the battery. # Where possible, switch on the right X or le W parking light. For vehicles that are wider than 2 m or longer than 6 m, single-sided parking lighting is not permitted in some countries. In this case, the standing lights are also switched on in the parking lights position. If the battery is insu ciently charged, the standing lights or parking lights will be switched o automatically to facilitate the next engine start. The exterior lighting (except standing and parking lights) will switch o automatically when the driver's door is opened. R Observe the notes on surround lighting (/ page 150). The automatic driving lights are only an aid. You are responsible for vehicle lighting. Aut utomatic omatic driving driving lights function When the vehicle is switched on, the standing lights, low beam and daytime running lights are switched on automatically depending on the light conditions. Please observe the country-speci c laws on the use of rear fog lamps. & WARNING Risk of accident when the dipped beam is switched o in poor visibility When the light switch is set to Ã, the dipped beam may not be switched on automatically if there is fog, snow or other causes of poor visibility such as spray. # In such cases, turn the light switch to L. Switching Switc hing the the rear rear fog fog lights on or o Req equir uirements: ements: R The light switch is in the L or à position. # Press the R button. 144 Light and sight Operating Oper ating the the combination switch switch for for the the lights Switching on high beam Switching # Turn the light switch to the L or à position. # Push the combination switch beyond the point of resistance in the direction of arrow 1. When the high beam is activated, the indicator lamp for low beam L will be deactivated and replaced by the indicator lamp for high beam K. # To indicate indicate permanently: permanently: push the combination switch beyond the point of resistance in the direction of arrow 2 or 4. Activ ctivating/deactiv ating/deactivating ating the the hazard hazard war warning ning lights Switching o high beam Switching # Move the combination switch back to its starting position. Headlamp ashing Headlamp # Pull the combination switch in the direction of arrow 3. 1 2 3 4 High beam Turn signal light, right Headlamp ashing Turn signal light, le # Use the combination switch to activate the desired function. Tur urnn signal light # To indicate indicate br brie ie y: push the combination switch brie y to the point of resistance in the direction of arrow 2 or 4. The corresponding turn signal light will ash three times. # Press button 1. Light and sight 145 The hazard warning lights will switch on automatically if: R the airbag has been deployed. R the vehicle is heavily braked from a speed of more than 70 km/h to a standstill. R R Bad weather light (/ page 146) City lighting (/ page 146) The system is active only when it is dark. evaluated and the active headlamps function will adjust the light in advance. Corner Cor nering ing light function Activ ctivee headlamps headlamps function When you pull away again, the hazard warning light system will switch o automatically at approximately 10 km/h. You can also switch o the hazard warning light system using button 1. Adap daptiv tivee functions, MULTIBEAM MULTIBEAM LED Intelligent Intellig ent Light System System function The MULTIBEAM LED headlamps adapt to the driving and weather situation and provide extended functions for improved illumination of the road. The system comprises the following functions: R Active headlamps (/ page 145) R Cornering light (/ page 145) R Motorway mode (/ page 146) R Enhanced fog light function (/ page 146) R R The headlamps follow the steering movements. Relevant areas are better illuminated during a journey. The functions are active when the low beam is switched on. Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the course of the lane in which you are driving will also be The cornering light improves the illumination of the carriageway over a wide angle in the turning direction, enabling better visibility on tight bends, for example. It can be activated only when the low beam is switched on. The function is active in the following cases: R At speeds below 40 km/h when the turn signal light is switched on or the steering wheel is turned 146 Light and sight R At speeds between 40 km/h and 70 km/h and when the steering wheel is turned Roundabout and junction function: the cornering light will be activated on both sides based on an evaluation of the vehicle's current GPS position. It will remain active until a er the vehicle has le the roundabout or the junction. Motorwayy mode function Motorwa Motorway mode increases the range and brightness of the cone of light, enabling better visibility. R R the multifunction camera the navigation system The function is not active in the following cases: at speeds below 80 km/h R Enhanced fog fog light function The enhanced fog light function reduces self-dazzling and improves the illumination of the edge of the carriageway. The function is automatically deactivated under the following conditions: R When speeds greater than 100 km/h are reached. R When the rear fog light is switched o . Function of the the bad weat weather her light The bad weather light reduces re ections in rainy conditions by dimming individual LEDs in the headlamps. The driver and other road users are dazzled less as a result. The city lighting function City lighting improves the illumination of roadsides in urban areas using a broad distribution of light. The function is active in the following cases: R At low speeds R In illuminated parts of urban areas Switching Switc hing the the Intellig Intelligent ent Light System System on/o The function will be active if a motorway journey is detected by means of: R the vehicle's speed The function is automatically activated under the following conditions: R At speeds below 70 km/h and when the rear fog light is switched on. Req equir uirements: ements: R The vehicle is switched on. Light and sight 147 Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Lights 5 Intelligent Light System # Switch the function on or o . Adap daptiv tivee Highbeam Assist Adap daptiv tivee Highbeam Assist Assist function & WARNING Risk of accident despite Adaptive Highbeam Assist Adaptive Highbeam Assist does not react to: road users without lights, e.g. pedestrians R road users with poor lighting, e.g. cyclists R road users whose lighting is obstructed, e.g. by a barrier R On very rare occasions, Adaptive Highbeam Assist may fail to recognise other road users with their own lighting, or may recognise them too late. In these, or in similar situations, the automatic high beam will not be deactivated or will be activated despite the presence of other road users. # Always observe the road and tra c conditions carefully and switch o the high beam in good time. Adaptive Highbeam Assist cannot take into account road, weather or tra c conditions. Detection may be restricted in the following cases: R In poor visibility, e.g. fog, heavy rain or snow R If there is dirt on the sensors or the sensors are obscured Adaptive Highbeam Assist is only an aid. You are responsible for adjusting the vehicle's lighting to the prevailing light, visibility and tra c conditions. Adaptive Highbeam Assist automatically switches between the following types of light: R Low beam R High beam At speeds greater than 30 km/h: R If no other road users are detected, the high beam will switch on automatically. 148 Light and sight The high beam will switch o automatically in the following cases: R At speeds below 25 km/h R If other road users are detected R If street lighting is su cient % The system's optical sensor is located behind the windscreen near the overhead control panel. Switching Switc hing Adap Adaptiv tivee Highbeam Assist Assist on/o Switching on Switching # Turn the light switch to the à position. # Switch on the high beam using the combination switch. If Adaptive Highbeam Assist is activated, the _ indicator lamp will light up on the central display section of the instrument display. Switching o Switching Switch o the high beam using the combination switch. # Adap daptiv tivee Highbeam Assist Assist Plus Adap daptiv tivee Highbeam Assist Assist Plus function & WARNING Risk of accident despite Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus does not react to: R road users without lights, e.g. pedestrians R road users with poor lighting, e.g. cyclists R road users whose lighting is obstructed, e.g. by a barrier On very rare occasions, Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus may fail to recognise other road users with their own lighting, or may recognise them too late. In these, or in similar situations, the automatic high beam will not be deactivated or will be activated despite the presence of other road users. # Always observe the road and tra c conditions carefully and switch o the high beam in good time. Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus cannot take into account road, weather or tra c conditions. Detection may be restricted in the following cases: R in poor visibility, e.g. fog, heavy rain or snow R if there is dirt on the sensors or the sensors are obscured Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus is only an aid. You are responsible for adjusting the vehicle's lighting to the prevailing light, visibility and tra c conditions. Light and sight 149 ULTRA RANGE Highbeam increases the brightness of the cone of light to the legally permitted maximum. Partial high beam does not include other road users in the high beam area. It does not dazzle them but enables full high beam illumination for the driver apart from the excluded vehicles. At speeds below 25 km/h or when there is su cient street lighting: R The partial high beam and the high beam will be switched o automatically. Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus automatically switches between the following types of light: R Low beam R Partial high beam R High beam R ULTRA RANGE Highbeam At speeds greater than 30 km/h: R If no other road users are detected, the high beam will switch on automatically. R If other road users are detected, the partial high beam will switch on automatically. At speeds above 40 km/h: R If no other road users are detected on a straight road, ULTRA RANGE Highbeam will be switched on automatically. R If other road users are detected, the partial high beam will switch on automatically. R If highly re ective signs are detected, ULTRA RANGE Highbeam will be switched o automatically. % The system's optical sensor is located behind the windscreen near the overhead control panel. Switching Switc hing Adap Adaptiv tivee Highbeam Assist Assist Plus on/o Switching on Switching # Turn the light switch to the à position. # Switch on the high beam using the combination switch. When the high beam is switched on automatically in the dark, the _ indicator lamp will light up on the central display section of the instrument display. Switching o Switching # Switch o the high beam using the combination switch. 150 Light and sight Setting Se tting the the low low beam (vehicles (vehicles with with MULTIBEAM MULTIBEAM LED headlamps headlamps only) only) Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Lights 5 Dipped-beams # Select Right-side traffic, Left-side traffic or Automatic. Setting Se tting the the ext exter erior ior lighting switc switch-o h-o dela delayy time Req equir uirements: ements: R The light switch is in the à position. Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Lights 5 Ext. light. del. sw. off # Set the switch-o delay time. When the vehicle engine is switched o , the exterior lighting will be activated for the set time. Switching Switc hing the the surround surround lighting on/o Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Lights 5 Surround lighting When Surround lighting is active, the exterior lighting lights up for 40 seconds a er the vehicle is unlocked. When you start the vehicle, the surround lighting is deactivated and the automatic driving lights are activated. # Activate or deactivate the function. Inter Int erior ior lighting Adjus djusting ting the the inter interior ior lighting Front over overhead head control control panel 1 2 3 4 5 p Front le reading lamp S Automatic interior lighting control c Front interior lighting u Rear interior lighting p Front right reading lamp # To switch switch on/o : press button 1 – 5 accordingly. Light and sight 151 Control Contr ol panel in the the grab grab handle Adjus djusting ting the the brightness brightness # Select Brightness. # Adjust the brightness. Activ ctivating ating the the brightness brightness for for zones # Select Brightness. # Select Brightness zones. # Switch the function on or o . or # Set the brightness for the desired zones. 1 p Rear reading lamp # To switch switch on/o : press button 1. Adjus djusting ting the the ambient lighting Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Comfort 5 Setting Se tting the the colour # Select Colour. # Set the desired colour. Ambient lighting Activ ctivating ating multi-coloured multi-coloured lighting # Select Colour. # Select Multi-colour. # Select a colour combination. Activ ctivating ating multi-coloured multi-coloured animation # Select Colour. # Select Multi-colour animat.. The chosen colour combination will change at prede ned intervals. Activ ctivating ating welcome welcome lighting # Select Colour. # Select Welcome. When the vehicle is unlocked, a special ambient lighting sequence will run. Activ ctivating ating dependency on air conditioning setsettings # Select Colour. # Select Climate. If changes are made to the temperature setting in the vehicle, the colour of the ambient lighting will change brie y. Switching Switc hing the the inter interior ior lighting switc switch-o h-o delay time on/o Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Lights 5 Int. light. del. sw. off # Switch the switch-o delay time on or o . When this function is active, the interior lighting lights up for a short time a er the vehicle is locked. 152 Light and sight Windscr indscreen een wipers wipers and windscreen windscreen washer washer syssystem Switching Switc hing the the windscreen windscreen wipers wipers on/o 1 g Windscreen wipers o 2 Ä Intermittent wiping, normal 3 Å Intermittent wiping, frequent 4 ° Continuous wiping, slow 5 ¯ Continuous wiping, fast Switching Switc hing the the rear rear window window wiper on/o Turn the combination switch to the corresponding position 1 - 5. # Single wipe/washing: wipe/washing: push the button on the combination switch in the direction of arrow 1. R í Single wipe R î Wiping with washer uid % Observe the notes on washing the vehicle in a car wash (/ page 382). # 1 2 3 4 ô Wipes with washer uid ° Switches on intermittent wiping g Switches o intermittent wiping ô Wipes with washer uid Light and sight 153 # Turn switch 1 è to the correct position 1 - 4. The è symbol will appear on the instrument cluster when the rear window wiper is switched on. Replacing the the windscreen windscreen wiper blades & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped if the windscreen wipers are switched on while wiper blades are being replaced If the windscreen wipers begin to move while you are changing the wiper blades, you can be trapped by the wiper arm. # Always switch o the windscreen wipers and vehicle before changing the wiper blades. Moving the Moving the wiper arms arms into into the the replacement replacement position # Switch the vehicle on and then o again immediately. # Within around 15 seconds, press and hold the î button on the combination switch for approximately three seconds (/ page 152). The wiper arms will move into the replacement position. Remo emoving ving the the wiper blades # Fold the wiper arms away from the windscreen. # # # Hold the wiper arm with one hand. With the other hand, turn the wiper blade away from the wiper arm in the direction of arrow 1 as far as it will go. Slide catch 2 in the direction of arrow 3 until it engages in the removal position. Remove the wiper blade from the wiper arm in the direction of arrow 4. 154 Light and sight Fitting the the wiper blades # # # Insert the new wiper blade into the wiper arm in the direction of arrow 1. Slide catch 2 in the direction of arrow 3 until it engages in the locking position. Make sure that the wiper blade is seated correctly. Fold the wiper arms back onto the windscreen. # Switch on the vehicle. # Press the î button on the combination switch. The wiper arms will return to their original positions. # Switch o the vehicle. % Check the condition of the wiper blades regularly and replace them in the event of visible damage or ongoing smearing. # Maintenance Maint enance display # Remove protective lm 1 from the maintenance displays on the tips of the newly tted wiper blades. When the colour of the maintenance displays changes from black to yellow, replace the wiper blades. Light and sight 155 % The duration until the colour changes varies depending on the usage conditions. Fitting the the wiper blade Replacing the the rear rear window window wiper blade & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped if the windscreen wipers are switched on while wiper blades are being replaced If the windscreen wipers begin to move while you are changing the wiper blades, you can be trapped by the wiper arm. # Always switch o the windscreen wipers and vehicle before changing the wiper blades. Remo emoving ving the the wiper blade # Switch the vehicle o . # # Fold wiper arm 2 away from the rear window until it engages in the replacement position. Unclip wiper blade 1 from wiper arm 2 and remove it in the direction of arrow 3. # # # Position wiper blade 1 with both lugs 3 on holder 2 on the wiper arm. Push wiper blade 1 in the direction of arrow 4 until it engages in holder 2. Make sure that wiper blade 1 is seated correctly. 156 Light and sight # Fold the wiper arm from the replacement position back onto the rear window. Mirrors Mirrors Operating Oper ating the the outside mirrors mirrors & WARNING Risk of accident due to adjusting the vehicle settings while the vehicle is in motion You could lose control of the vehicle in the following situations in particular: R if you adjust the driver's seat, the head restraint, the steering wheel or the mirror while the vehicle is in motion R if you fasten your seat belt while the vehicle is in motion # Before starting the vehicle: in particular, adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel and mirror, and fasten your seat belt. & WARNING Risk of accident due to misjudgement of distance when using the outside mirror Folding the the outside mirror mirrorss in/out The outside mirrors re ect objects on a smaller scale. The objects in view are in fact closer than they appear. # Therefore, always look over your shoulder in order to ensure that you are aware of the actual distance between you and the road users driving behind you. # Brie y press button 1. Rese esetting tting the the outside mirrors mirrors % If the battery has been disconnected or completely discharged, the outside mirrors must be reset. Only then will the automatic mirror folding function work properly. # Brie y press button 1. Light and sight 157 Adjus djusting ting the the outside mirrors mirrors # Press button 3 or 4 to select the outside mirror to be adjusted. # Press button 2 to adjust the position of the mirror glass. Engaging the Engaging the outside mirrors mirrors # Vehicles without electrically folding outside mirrors: manually move the outside mirror into the correct position. # Vehicles with electrically folding outside mirrors: press and hold button 1. You will hear a click and the mirror will audibly click into place. The outside mirror will now be set to the correct position. Aut utomatic omatic anti-dazzle mirror mirrorss function & WARNING Risk of acid burns and poisoning due to the anti-dazzle mirror electrolyte Electrolyte may escape if the glass in an automatic anti-dazzle mirror breaks. The electrolyte is hazardous to health and causes irritation. It must not come into contact with your skin, eyes, respiratory organs or clothing or be swallowed. # If you come into contact with electrolyte, observe the following: R Immediately rinse the electrolyte from your skin with water and seek medical attention. R If electrolyte comes into contact with your eyes, immediately rinse them thoroughly with clean water and seek medical attention. R If the electrolyte is swallowed, immediately rinse your mouth out thoroughly. Do not induce vomiting. Seek medical attention immediately. R Immediately change out of clothing which has been contaminated with electrolyte. R If an allergic reaction occurs, seek medical attention immediately. The inside rear-view mirror and the outside mirror on the driver's side will automatically go into antidazzle mode if light from a headlamp hits the sensor on the inside rear-view mirror. System limits System The system will not go into anti-dazzle mode if: R the vehicle is switched o . R Reverse gear is engaged. R The interior lighting is switched on. Front-passeng ont-passenger er outside mirror mirror parking parking position function The parking position makes parking easier. The front-passenger outside mirror will swivel downwards in the direction of the rear wheel on the front passenger's side when: R the parking position is stored (/ page 158). R the front-passenger mirror is selected. R reverse gear is engaged. 158 Light and sight The front-passenger outside mirror will move back to its original position when: R you shi the transmission to another transmission position. R you are travelling at a speed greater than 15 km/h. R you press the button for the outside mirror on the driver's side. Stor oring ing the the parking parking position of the the frontfrontpassenger passeng er outside mirror mirror using rever reverse se gear gear Stor oring ing Calling up # Select the front-passenger outside mirror using button 2. # Engage reverse gear. The front-passenger outside mirror will move to the stored parking position. Activ ctivating/deactiv ating/deactivating ating the the automatic automatic mirror mirror foldfolding function Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Vehicle # Switch Automatic fold-in on or o . # # # Select the front-passenger outside mirror using button 2. Engage reverse gear. Move the front-passenger outside mirror into the desired parking position using button 1. Light and sight 159 Area permeable Area permeable to to radio radio waves waves on the the windscreen scr een Radio-controlled equipment, e.g. toll systems, can be mounted only on areas of the windscreen that are permeable to radio waves 1. The area permeable to radio waves 1 is best visible from outside the vehicle when the windscreen is illuminated with an additional light source. Infrar Infr ared-r ed-ree ective windscr windscreen een function The infrared-re ective windscreen is coated and reduces the build-up of heat in the vehicle interior. The coating shields the vehicle interior from radio waves. 160 Climate control 6 Vehicles with THERMATIC air conditioning Over Ov ervie view w of climate climate control control systems systems Notes on climate climate control control An interior air lter in combination with the pre lter in the engine compartment must always be used so that the air conditioning system, pollution level monitoring and the air ltration work correctly. Use lters recommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz. Always have maintenance work carried out at a quali ed specialist workshop. Over Ov ervie view w of the the air conditioning control control panel The indicator lamps on the buttons indicate that the corresponding function is activated. THERMATIC air conditioning control panel with/without stationary heater (example) 1 w Sets the temperature, le 2 _ Sets the air distribution 3 H Sets the air ow or switches o climate control 4 à Sets climate control to automatic mode (/ page 162) 5 ¬ Demists the windscreen control panel (without stationary heater): t calls up the air conditioning menu Vehicles with THERMATIC air conditioning control panel (with stationary heater, plug-in hybrid) or THERMOTRONIC air conditioning control panel (with/without stationary heater, plug-in hybrid): ! calls up the air conditioning menu, switches residual heat on/o (/ page 163) 7 ¤ Switches the rear window heater on/o 8 Vehicles with THERMATIC air conditioning control panel without stationary heater: 0 switches synchronisation on/o (/ page 162) Vehicles with THERMOTRONIC air conditioning control panel without stationary heater: ¿ switches the A/C function on/o (/ page 161) Vehicles with a stationary heater: & switches the stationary heater on/o (/ page 168) Climate control 161 Plug-in hybrid: & activates/deactivates "Immediate pre-entry climate control" (/ page 167) 9 g Switches air-recirculation mode on/o (/ page 163) A Vehicles with THERMATIC air conditioning control panel: ¿ switches the A/C function on/o (/ page 161) Vehicles with THERMOTRONIC air conditioning control panel: _ adjusts the air distribution, right B w Sets the temperature, right Rear operating operating unit in vehicles vehicles with THERMOTR THERMO TRONIC ONIC air conditioning control control panel If climate control is switched o , the windows may mist up more quickly. Switch climate control o only brie y. Switching Switc hing the the A/C function on/o using the the air conditioning control control panel The A/C function heats, cools and dehumidi es the vehicle's interior air. # Press the ¿ button. 1 Sets the temperature 2 Display 3 Sets the air ow Operating the Operating the climate climate control control system system Switching Switc hing climate climate control control on/o # # To switch switch on: set the air ow to level 1 or higher using the H button. To switch switch o : set the air ow to level 0 using the H button. Switch o the A/C function only brie y; otherwise, the windows may mist up more quickly. Condensation may drip from the underside of the vehicle when cooling mode is active. This is not indicative of a fault. Calling up the the air conditioning menu Calling up the the air conditioning menu using the the multimedia system system # Select one of the temperature displays at the lower edge of the media display. 162 Climate control Calling up the the air-conditioning air-conditioning menu using the the button butt on on the the climate climate control control panel # Press the ! button on the climate control panel. Activ ctivating/deactiv ating/deactivating ating the the A/C function via the the multimedia system system The A/C function heats, cools and dehumidi es the vehicle's interior air. # Call up the air-conditioning menu (/ page 161). # Select First row of seats. # Select A/C. Setting Se tting climate climate control control to to automatic automatic mode In automatic mode, the set temperature is controlled and maintained at a constant level by the air supply. # Press the à button. # To switch switch to to manual mode: press the H or _ button. Climatee sty Climat style le Climatee sty Climat style le function The following climate styles are available in automatic mode: R FOCUS: high air ow, slightly cooler setting R MEDIUM: medium air ow, standard setting R DIFFUSE: low air ow, slightly warmer and draught-free setting Setting Se tting the the climate climate sty style le # Call up the air conditioning menu (/ page 161). # Select First row of seats or Second row of seats. # Call up the CLIMATE MODE menu. # Select a climate style. Setting Se tting the the air distr distribution ibution # # Call up the air conditioning menu (/ page 161). Select a row of seats. To set set the the air distr distribution: ibution: select ¯, P or O. # Set the air ow. % Several air distribution options can be selected at the same time, for example to set the climate control for the windscreen and the footwells simultaneously. The ¯ climate control for the windscreen can only be selected for the rst seat row. # Activ ctivating/deactiv ating/deactivating ating the the climate climate control control synchr hronisation onisation function via the the air conditioning control tr ol panel Climate control can be set centrally using the synchronisation function. The temperature and air distribution settings for the driver's side will be adopted automatically for the front passenger side. # Press the 0 button. The synchronisation function will be deactivated if the settings for one of the other climate control zones are changed. Climate control 163 Activ ctivating/deactiv ating/deactivating ating the the climate climate control control synchr hronisation onisation function via the the multimedia system system Switching Switc hing air-r air-recir ecirculation culation mode on/o Activ ctivating/deactiv ating/deactivating ating ionisation Climate control can be set centrally using the synchronisation function. The driver's settings for temperature, air quantity and air distribution are adopted automatically for all climate zones. # Call up the air conditioning menu (/ page 161). # Select First row of seats. # Select SYNC. Air-recirculation mode automatically switches to fresh air mode a er a while. % If air-recirculation mode is switched on, the windows may mist up more quickly. Switch on air-recirculation mode only brie y. Ionisation improves the quality of the vehicle's interior air. Ionisation of the interior air is odourless. # Call up the air conditioning menu (/ page 161). # Select Air quality. # Select IONISATION. Switching Switc hing the the residual residual heat on/o Fragr agrance ance system system Demisting Demis ting the the windows Req equir uirements: ements: R The vehicle is parked. Setting Se tting the the fragr fragrance ance system system Window indowss misted misted up on the the inside # Press the à button. # If the windows continue to mist up: press the ¬ button. Window indowss misted misted up on the the outside # Switch on the windscreen wipers. # Press the à button. # Press the g button. The interior air will be recirculated. It is possible to make use of the residual heat from the engine to continue heating or ventilating the front compartment of the vehicle for approximately 30 minutes. # To switch switch on: press the ! button. Residual heat is switched o automatically. Req equir uirements: ements: R Automatic climate control is activated. R The glove compartment is closed. The fragrance system distributes a pleasant fragrance throughout the vehicle interior from a acon located in the glove box. # Call up the air conditioning menu (/ page 161). # Select Air quality. 164 Climate control # # Select AIR FRESHENER. Keep pressing until the desired intensity is reached. + ENVIRONMENTAL ENVIRONMENT AL NOTE NOTE Environmental damage due to improper disposal of full acons Inser ting or remo Inserting removing ving the the acon of the the fragr fragrance ance system syst em & WARNING Risk of injury from liquid perfume If children open the acon, they could drink the liquid perfume or it could come into contact with their eyes. # Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle. # Consult a doctor immediately if liquid perfume has been drunk. # If liquid perfume comes into contact with your eyes or skin, rinse your eyes with clean water. # If symptoms continue, consult a doctor. Full acons must not be disposed of with household waste. # Full acons must be taken to a harmful substance collection point. 1 Cap 2 Flacon # # To insert: insert: slide the acon into the holder as far as it will go. To remov remove: e: pull out the acon. If you do not use genuine Mercedes-Benz interior perfumes, observe the manufacturers' safety notices on the perfume packaging. Climate control 165 Dispose of the genuine Mercedes-Benz interior perfume acon when it is empty and do not re ll it. Re llable acon # Unscrew the cap of the empty acon. # Fill the acon with a maximum of 15 ml. # Screw the cap back on to the acon. Always re ll the empty re llable acon with the same perfume. Observe the separate information sheet with the acon. Infor Inf ormation mation on the the windscreen windscreen heater heater The windscreen heater is switched on automatically if the ¬ button is activated. A er the vehicle is started, the windscreen heater will be switched on automatically as required. Pre-entr Pr e-entryy climate climate control control using the the key R Function of pre-entr pre-entryy climate climate control control using the the key Before entering the vehicle, the driver's seat area or the whole vehicle interior can be brie y prewarmed or pre-cooled. When pre-cooling, the following functions are activated as needed: R Automatic climate control R Blower R Seat ventilation Setting Se tting pre-entr pre-entryy climate climate control control via key # Call up the air conditioning menu. # Select Pre-entry climate ctrl. When pre-heating, the following functions are activated as needed: R Automatic climate control R Blower R Seat heater R Steering wheel heater R Panel heating R Mirror heater R Rear window heater R Fragrancing Ionisation Tur urning ning on/o # Select Z. # Select Pre-entry climate control via key. Switching pre-entr Switching pre-entryy climate climate control control via the the key on/o Req equir uirements: ements: R The high-voltage battery is charged su ciently. R The function has been activated via the multimedia system. # To switch switch on: unlock the vehicle. The climate control functions are activated for up to ve minutes for pre-heating and precooling. 166 Climate control Pre-entry climate control via the key cannot be activated more than twice when the vehicle is switched o . # To switch switch o : push the & button up or down. The following functions will remain active once the vehicle has been started: R Seat heating R Seat ventilation R Panel heating R Fragrancing R Ionisation Pre-entr Pr e-entryy climate climate control control at departur depar turee time Pre-entryy climate Pre-entr climate control control for for departur depar turee time function & WARNING Danger to life due to exposure to extreme heat or cold in the vehicle If people, particularly children, are exposed to extreme temperatures over an extended period of time, there is a risk of serious injury or danger to life. # Never leave persons, children in particular, unattended in the vehicle. The vehicle interior can be air conditioned when the vehicle is parked. When the vehicle is connected to power supply equipment, priority is given to charging the highvoltage battery to a speci ed minimum charge. The running time of pre-entry climate control may be reduced under the following conditions: R The vehicle is not connected to power supply equipment. R The high-voltage battery is not charged su ciently. With active pre-entry climate control, the charge level of the high-voltage battery may be reduced, even if the charging cable connector is connected. For cooling, the following functions are activated as needed: R Automatic climate control R R Blower Seat ventilation For heating, the following functions are activated as needed: R Automatic climate control R Blower R Seat heating R Steering wheel heater R Panel heating R Mirror heater R Rear window heater R Fragrancing R Ionisation Setting pre-entr Setting pre-entryy climate climate control control for for departure depar ture time # Call up the air conditioning menu. # Select Pre-entry climate ctrl. Setting Se tting a single departur depar turee time # Select ONCE. # Set a departure time. Climate control 167 Changing the the active active departur depar turee time # Select the pen icon next to the displayed departure time. # Set a departure time. Setting Se tting the the week week pr proo le # Select WEEK PROFILE. # Set the desired departure times, e.g. every day at 08:00. Selecting the the zone # Select Z. # Select Driver's seat only. If the Driver's seat only setting is deactivated, pre-entry climate control takes place for the entire vehicle. Activ ctivating/deactiv ating/deactivating ating pre-entr pre-entryy climate climate control control for departur depar turee time Req equir uirements: ements: R The high-voltage battery is charged su ciently. R The function has been activated via the multimedia system. To activat activate: e: set the departure time (/ page 166). Pre-entry climate control for departure time switches on a maximum of 55 minutes before the selected departure time. It will remain active for another ve minutes if the departure is delayed. # To deactivat deactivate: e: push the & button up or down. The following functions will remain active once the vehicle has been started: R Seat heating R Seat ventilation R Panel heating R Fragrancing R Ionisation # Activ ctivating/deactiv ating/deactivating ating immediate immediate pre-entr pre-entryy climate control mate control & WARNING Danger to life due to exposure to extreme heat or cold in the vehicle If people, particularly children, are exposed to extreme temperatures over an extended period of time, there is a risk of serious injury or danger to life. # Never leave persons, children in particular, unattended in the vehicle. Air conditioning of the vehicle interior can continue for up to 50 minutes, e.g. if the journey is interrupted. 168 Climate control # Press button 1. The red or blue indicator lamp on button1 will light up or go out. Stationar ationaryy heater/v heater/ventilation entilation The colours of the indicator lamp have the following meanings: R Blue: cooling is activated. R Red: heating is activated. R Yellow: the departure time has been preselected. # Set the desired temperature using thew button. Stationar ationaryy heater/st heater/stationar ationaryy ventilation ventilation function The following functions are performed: R The air inside the vehicle is heated or ventilated to the set temperature. R The air inside the vehicle cannot be cooled down to temperatures below the outside temperature. R If the outside temperature changes, ventilation mode automatically switches to heating mode or heating mode automatically switches to ventilation mode. The stationary heater and the exhaust gas outlet are situated at the right-hand front wheel. Switching the Switching the stationar stationaryy heater/v heater/ventilation entilation on/o via the the operating operating unit & DAN ANGER GER Risk of fatal injury due to poisonous exhaust gases If the tailpipe is blocked or su cient ventilation is not possible, poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide may enter the vehicle. This is the case in enclosed spaces or if the vehicle gets stuck in snow, for example. # Always switch the stationary heater o in enclosed spaces without an air extraction system, e.g. in garages. # Keep the tailpipe and the area around the vehicle free from snow when the vehicle or the auxiliary heating is running. # Open a door or a roof hatch on the windward side of the vehicle to ensure an adequate supply of fresh air. Climate control 169 & WARNING Risk of re due to hot stationary heater components and exhaust gases Flammable materials such as leaves, grass or twigs may ignite. # When the stationary heater is switched on, make sure that: R hot vehicle parts do not come into contact with ammable materials. R the exhaust gas can ow out of the stationary heater exhaust pipe unhindered. R the exhaust gas does not come into contact with ammable materials. * NOTE Battery discharge caused by stationary heater or stationary ventilation operation Operating the stationary heater or stationary ventilation drains the battery. # A er heating or ventilating the vehicle twice, drive for a longer period of time. Req equir uirements: ements: R The fuel tank is lled to at least the reserve level. Set the desired temperature using the w button. # Press the & button. The red or blue indicator lamp on the button will light up or go out. The colours of the indicator lamp have the following meanings: R Blue: stationary ventilation is switched on. R Red: the stationary heater is switched on. R Yellow: the departure time is preselected. # The stationary heater/ventilation will switch o automatically a er 50 minutes. Operation Oper ation using the the app: the stationary heater/ ventilation can also be operated via the Mercedes me connect app. You can nd further information in the separate Owner's Manual at https:// moba.i.daimler.com/markets/ece-row/baix/ cars/connectme/en_GB/#emotions/ Startseite.html. Setting the Setting the stationar stationaryy heater/v heater/ventilation entilation via the the multimedia system system # To call up the air conditioning menu (/ page 161). # Select Auxiliary heating. Selecting the the departur depar turee time Select the time TIME A: XX, TIME B: XX or TIME C: XX. # Setting Se tting the the departur depar turee time # Select the time TIME A: XX, TIME B: XX or TIME C: XX. # Select the pen beside the time. # Set a time. Setting the Setting the stationar stationaryy heater/v heater/ventilation entilation via remot emotee control control Req equir uirements: ements: R The fuel tank is lled to at least the reserve level. 170 Climate control Switching Switc hing on immediately immediately # # # Press the u and ^ buttons simultaneously. The Î symbol on the remote control display will ash. Use the , and . buttons to set the desired departure time. Press the u and ^ buttons simultaneously. The new departure time will be stored. Up to three departure times can be stored. To activat activatee the the departur depar turee time: select the desired departure time and press and hold the u button. The Í symbol, the departure time and, depending on the selected departure time, the letter A, B or C will appear on the display. # To deactivat deactivatee the the departur depar turee time: select the desired departure time and press and hold the ^ button. OFF will appear on the display. # To chec checkk the the status status of the the active active stationar stationaryy heater heat er:: brie y press the u button. Switching o immediat Switching immediately ely # Press and hold the ^ button. Over Ov ervie view w of the the remot remotee control control displays displays (station(stationar y heater/v ary heater/ventilation) entilation) # # Press and hold the u button. Setting Se tting the the departur depar turee time Brie y press button u . # Press the , or . button repeatedly until the time to be changed appears on the display. # 1 2 3 4 Stationary ventilation switched on Stationary heater switched on Selected departure time Remaining time for the stationary heater/ ventilation (in minutes) 5 Stationary heater/ventilation active 6 Departure time activated 7 Signal strength Climate control 171 Further possible displays: R Time: the activated departure time. R Zer Zeroo minutes: minutes: the running time for the stationary heater is extended because the engine has not yet reached operating temperature when it is started. R OFF: the stationary heater/ventilation is switched o . # + do not use the key and keep it away from children. If batteries are swallowed, seek medical attention immediately. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the battery replaced at a quali ed specialist workshop. ENVIRONMENTAL ENVIRONMENT AL NOTE NOTE Environmental damage due to improper disposal of batteries Replacing the the remot remotee control control batter batteryy (stationary (stationary heater) heater) & DAN ANGER GER Risk of fatal injuries if batteries are swallowed Batteries contain toxic and corrosive substances. Swallowing batteries may cause severe internal burns within two hours. There is a risk of fatal injury. # Keep batteries out of the reach of children. # If the cover and/or lid of the battery compartment does not close securely, Batteries contain toxic and corrosive substances. # # # Take discharged batteries to a quali ed specialist workshop or to a collection point for used batteries. Req equir uirements: ements: R One CR2450 lithium battery # # Push a pointed object into recess 1. Slide battery cover 2 backwards in the direction of the arrow and remove the empty battery. Insert new battery 3 with the lettering facing upwards. Slide battery cover 2 in the opposite direction to the arrow onto the remote control until the battery cover engages. 172 Climate control Rectifying problems problems with with the the remot remotee control control for for the stationar stationaryy heater/v heater/ventilation entilation FAIL ¨ appear appearss on the the remot remotee control control display Possible cause: R The signal transmission between the transmitter and receiver is malfunctioning. # Change your position in relation to the vehicle, moving closer if necessary. FAIL appears appears on the the remot remotee control control display Possible cause: R The starter battery is not su ciently charged. R Charge the starter battery. The fuel tank content is below the reserve fuel level. # Refuel at the nearest lling station. # FAIL ¯ appear appearss on the the remot remotee control control display Possible cause: R There is a malfunction in the stationary heater. # Have the stationary heater checked at a qualied specialist workshop. Air vents vents Adjus djusting ting the the front front air vents vents & WARNING Risk of burns or frostbite due to being too close to the air vents Very hot or very cold air can ow from the air vents. # Make sure that all vehicle occupants always maintain a su cient distance from the air vents. # If necessary, direct the air ow to another area of the vehicle interior. To guarantee the ow of fresh air through the air vents into the vehicle interior, comply with the following: R Always keep the vents and ventilation grilles in the vehicle interior clear. R Keep the air inlet free of deposits (/ page 382). # # To open or close: turn controller 2 to the le or right as far as it will go. To adjust adjust the the air direction: direction: hold air vent 1 in the centre and move it up or down or to the le or right. Climate control 173 Adjus djusting ting the the rear rear air vents vents # # Close the air vent when you heat the vehicle. At high outside temperatures, open the air vent and switch on the A/C function. The automatic climate control must be switched on to cool the glove box. # # To open or close: turn controller 2 to the le or right as far as it will go. To set set the the air ow dir direction: ection: hold air vent 1 in the centre and move it up or down or to the le or right. Opening or closing the the air vent vent in the the glove glove box * NOTE NOTE Damage to temperature-sensitive objects in the glove box Temperature-sensitive objects stored in the glove box may be damaged by the air vent located inside the glove compartment. 1 Air vent controller 2 Air vent # To open or close: turn controller 1 to the right or le . 174 Driving and parking Driving Driving Notes on MercedesMercedes-AMG AMG vehicles vehicles Observe the notes on the following topics in the Supplement, otherwise you may fail to recognise dangers. % The availability of certain functions depends on the equipment and model of the vehicle. R Emotion Start R AMG performance exhaust system R AMG ceramic high-performance composite brake system R RACE START R DRIFT MODE R AMG RIDE CONTROL + R AMG steering-wheel buttons Notes on plug-in hybr hybrids ids # Notes on plug-in hybr hybrid id operation operation & WARNING Risk of chemical burns and poisoning from damaged high-voltage battery If the housing of the high-voltage battery has been damaged, electrolyte and gases may leak out. # Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing. # Immediately rinse electrolyte splashes o with water and seek medical attention straight away. & DAN ANGER GER Risk of explosion from excessive internal pressure of the high-voltage battery Flammable gas may escape and ignite in the event of a vehicle re. # Stop the charging process immediately in case of unusual odours, smoke or burn marks. # Leave the danger zone immediately. Secure the danger zone at a su cient distance. Call the re brigade. The hybrid system combines a combustion engine with an electric motor. Characteristics when the vehicle is at a standstill: R The combustion engine is generally switched o . R Idle speed only occurs in certain instances. Characteristics when starting the vehicle: R If the high-voltage battery is su ciently charged, the vehicle can be started with the electric drive without the combustion engine (noiseless start). R If the high-voltage battery for the electrical drive is not su ciently charged or the operating temperature of the combustion engine has not been reached, the vehicle can start with the combustion engine. Driving and parking 175 % Depending on the system, it may happen that even though the high-voltage battery is charged, electric mode has restricted or no availability. Once the combustion engine has been operated for long enough, electric mode is again available without restriction. Characteristics with moderate power output requests: R The combustion engine is switched o as o en as possible during the journey. R The vehicle can, depending on the drive program selected and the battery charge level, be accelerated electrically up to speeds of about 140 km/h. Characteristics with high power output requests: R The electric motor supports the combustion engine (boost e ect), e.g. when pulling away or accelerating. R The high-voltage battery is discharging. Characteristics when releasing the accelerator pedal during the journey: R The electric motor is operated as a alternator when in overrun mode and during braking. R The high-voltage battery is charging. Notes on electric mode: R Vehicles with hybrid systems generate signi cantly less noise when stationary and when being driven than vehicles with combustion engines. R When driving in electric mode, the vehicle may not be heard by other road users due to the signi cantly reduced noise generated. It is for this reason that the vehicle is equipped with a sound generator, which serves as an acoustic vehicle warning system (AVAS). R If not all of the vehicle conditions for electric mode are met, then the combustion engine is switched on. % Vehicles with with diesel particulat par ticulatee lt lter ers: s: During the regeneration of the diesel particulate lter, the drive programmes are not available or are restricted and the battery charge level may change. Notes on the acoustic vehicle warning system: R The sound generator generates speed-dependent vehicle noise emissions when driving R R R forward or backing up at a speed of up to around 30 km/h. This helps other road users, particularly pedestrians and cyclists, to hear your vehicle better. When driving at speeds above 20 km/h The vehicle acoustic warning system gradually switches o . The sound generator is o when the vehicle is stationary. Manual disconnection of the the high-volt high-voltag agee onboardd electrical boar electrical system system & DAN ANGER GER Risk of death and re due to modi ed and/or damaged components of the high-voltage on-board electrical system The vehicle's high-voltage on-board electrical system is under high voltage. If you modify component parts in the vehicle's high-voltage on-board electrical system or touch damaged component parts, you may be electrocuted. In addition, modi ed and/or damaged components may cause a re. 176 Driving and parking In the event of an accident or impact to the vehicle underbody, components of the highvoltage electrical system may be damaged although the damage is not visible. # Never make any modi cations to the high-voltage on-board electrical system. # Do not switch on or use the vehicle if its high-voltage on-board electrical system components have been modi ed or damaged. # Never touch damaged components of the high-voltage on-board electrical system. # A er an accident, do not touch any components of the high-voltage on-board electrical system. # A er an accident, have the vehicle transported away. # Have the components of the high-voltage on-board electrical system checked at a quali ed specialist workshop and replaced if necessary. Req equir uirements: ements: Only disconnect the high-voltage on-board electrical system manually in the following situations: R The 6 restraint system warning lamp lights up in the Instrument Display, e.g. a er an accident. R The vehicle is badly damaged, e.g. a er an accident, and the restraint system components have not been triggered. Operating Oper ating the the high-volt high-voltag agee disconnect device device # # # # # Switch o the vehicle. Shi the transmission to position j. Apply the electric parking brake. Secure the vehicle against rolling away. Open the bonnet. Driving and parking 177 # # Press release tab 1 in the direction of the arrow and pull it out. Pull high-voltage disconnect device 2 in the direction of the arrow until it engages. The high-voltage on-board electrical system is switched o . All work on the hybrid drive system (including a er disconnecting the high-voltage on-board electrical system manually) may only be carried out by a quali ed specialist workshop. Switching Switc hing on the the power power supply supply or the the vehicle vehicle & WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to leaving children unattended in the vehicle If children are le unattended in the vehicle, they could, in particular: R open doors, thereby endangering other persons or road users. R get out and be struck by oncoming tra c. R operate vehicle equipment and become trapped, for example. In addition, the children could also set the vehicle in motion by, for example: R releasing the parking brake. R changing the transmission position. R starting the vehicle. # # # Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. Keep the vehicle key out of the reach of children. Req equir uirements: ements: R the key is in the vehicle and is recognised. R the brake pedal is not depressed. # To switch switch on the the power power supply: supply: press button 1 once. You can, for example, activate the windscreen wiper. The power supply is switched o again if the following conditions are met: R you open the driver's door. R you press button 1 twice more. 178 Driving and parking To switch switch on the the vehicle: vehicle: press button 1 twice. Indicator and warning lamps go on in the instrument cluster. The vehicle is switched o again if one of the following conditions is met: R you do not start the vehicle within 15 minutes and the transmission is in position j or the electric parking brake is applied. R you press button 1 once. # Star arting ting the the vehicle vehicle Star arting ting the the vehicle vehicle with with the the star start/st t/stop op button button & DAN ANGER GER Risk of fatal injuries caused by exhaust gases Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling these exhaust gases is hazardous to health and leads to poisoning. # Never leave the vehicle or, if present, the stationary heater running in an enclosed space without su cient ventilation. & WARNING Risk of re due to ammable material in the engine compartment or the exhaust system Flammable materials may ignite. # Therefore, check regularly that there are no ammable materials in the engine compartment or on the exhaust system. Req equir uirements: ements: R the key is in the vehicle and is recognised. # # # # Shi the transmission to position j or i. Depress the brake pedal and press button 1 once. If the vehicle does not start: switch o nonessential consumers and press button 1 once. If the vehicle still does not start and the display message Place the key in the marked space See Owner's Manual appears in the instrument display: start the vehicle with the key in the marked space (emergency operation mode) (/ page 178). % You can switch o the vehicle while driving. To do this, press button 1 for about three seconds or by pressing button 1 three times within three seconds. Be sure to observe the safety notes under "Driving tips" (/ page 182). Observe any information regarding display messages that can be displayed on the instrument display. Star arting ting the the vehicle vehicle with with the the key key in the the marked marked space (emergency (emergency operation operation mode) If the vehicle does not start and the Place the key in the marked space See Owner's Manual message appears in the instrument display, you can start the vehicle in emergency operation mode. Driving and parking 179 # # # # Make sure that the marked space 2 is empty. Remove the key 1 from the key ring. Place the key 1 in the marked space 2. The vehicle will start a er a short time. When you remove the key 1 from the marked space 2, the vehicle can be driven. For further engine starts however, the key 1 must be located in the marked space 2 during the entire journey. Have the key 1 checked at a quali ed specialist workshop. If the the vehicle vehicle does not not start: start: # Place the key 1 in the marked space 2 and leave it there. # Depress the brake pedal and start the vehicle using the start/stop button. % You can switch on the power supply or the vehicle with the start/stop button. Observe any information regarding display messages that can be displayed on the instrument display. Star arting ting the the vehicle vehicle via Remot Remotee Online Services Ser vices Cooling or heating the the vehicle vehicle inter interior ior before before starting star ting the the journey journey Ensure the following before starting the engine: R The legal stipulations in the area where your vehicle is parked allow engine starting via smartphone. R It is safe to start and run the engine where your vehicle is parked. R The fuel tank is su ciently full. R The starter battery is su ciently charged. Charging the Charging the start starter er batter batteryy befor beforee star starting ting the the journey jour ney You can receive a message on your smartphone when the state of charge of the starter battery is low. You can then start the vehicle with the smartphone to charge the battery. The vehicle is automatically switched o a er ten minutes. Ensure the following before starting the engine: R The legal stipulations in the area where your vehicle is parked allow engine starting via smartphone. R It is safe to start and run the engine where your vehicle is parked. R The fuel tank is su ciently full. Star St arting ting the the vehicle vehicle (Remot (Remotee Online) & WARNING Risk of crushing or entrapment due to unintentional starting of the engine Limbs could be crushed or trapped if the engine is started unintentionally during service or maintenance work. 180 Driving and parking # Always secure the engine against unintentional starting before carrying out maintenance or repair work. Req equir uirements: ements: R Park position j is selected. R The anti-the alarm system is not activated. R The hazard warning light system is switched o . R The bonnet is closed. R The doors are closed and locked. R The windows and sliding sunroof are closed. # Start the vehicle using the smartphone. A er every engine start, the engine runs for ten minutes. You can carry out a maximum of two consecutive starting attempts. You must start the engine with the key before trying to start the vehicle again with the smartphone. You can switch o the vehicle at any time as follows: R Via the Smartphone App R By pressing the Ü or ß button on the key % Further information can be found in the smartphone app. Securing the Securing the vehicle vehicle agains againstt star starting ting befor beforee carrying out maintenance maintenance or repair repair wor work: k: # Switch on the hazard warning light system. or # Unlock the doors. or # Open a side window or the sliding sunroof. Running-in notes notes To preserve the engine during the rst 1,500 km: Drive at varying road speeds and engine speeds. R Do not drive at speeds greater than 140 km/h. R Drive the vehicle in drive program A or ;. R R R R R R Shi to the next highest gear at the very latest when the needle reaches the last third before the red area in the rev counter. Do not shi down manually in order to brake. Avoid overstraining the vehicle, e.g. driving at full throttle. do not depress the accelerator pedal past the pressure point (kickdown). Only increase the engine speed gradually and accelerate the vehicle to full speed a er 1,500 km. This also applies when the engine or parts of the drivetrain have been replaced. Please also observe the following running-in notes: R In certain driving and driving safety systems, the sensors adjust automatically while a certain distance is being driven a er the vehicle has been delivered or a er repairs. Full system e ectiveness is not reached until the end of this teach-in process. R Brakepads, brake disks and tyres that are either new or have been replaced only achieve Driving and parking 181 optimum braking e ect and grip a er several hundred kilometres of driving. Compensate for the reduced braking e ect by applying greater force to the brake pedal. Notes on optimised optimised acceleration acceleration If all necessary requirements and activation conditions are ful lled, the best possible acceleration can be achieved from a standstill. Do not use the optimised acceleration on public roads. Individual wheels could spin and you could lose control of the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and/or accident. Be sure to observe the safety notes and information on ESP® (/ page 232). Moving Mo ving away away with with optimised optimised acceleration acceleration & WARNING Risk of skidding and having an accident from wheels spinning When you use optimised acceleration, individual wheels could spin and you could lose control of the vehicle. If ESP® is deactivated, there is a risk of skidding and accident! # Make sure that no persons or obstacles are in the close vicinity of your vehicle. Req equir uirements: ements: R the vehicle is run in (/ page 180). R the vehicle and tyres are in good condition. R you are on a high-grip roadway. R the engine and transmission are at normal operating temperature. # # # # # # * NOTE NOTE Increased wear due to optimised acceleration When pulling away with optimised acceleration, all components of the drivetrain are subjected to a very high load. This can lead to increased component wear. # Do not always pull away with optimised acceleration. # Engage the h drive position (/ page 201). # Move the steering wheel to the straight-ahead position. Select the sportiest available drive program B or C(/ page 197). Deactivating ESP® (/ page 234). Depress and hold the brake pedal rmly with your le foot. With your right foot, fully depress the accelerator pedal. A er no more than ve seconds, take your le foot quickly o the brake, but keep the accelerator pedal depressed. The vehicle pulls away at maximum acceleration. Switch on ESP® once the acceleration procedure is complete. Ending optimised optimised acceleration acceleration Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. # Reactivate the ESP®. # 182 Driving and parking % A er you pull away with optimised acceleration, components of the drivetrain can become very hot, which means that optimised acceleration values may be reached again only a er a few minutes. Notes on driving driving & WARNING Risk of accident due to objects in the driver's footwell Objects in the driver's footwell may impede pedal travel or block a depressed pedal. This jeopardises the operating and road safety of the vehicle. # Stow all objects in the vehicle securely so that they cannot get into the driver's footwell. # Always t the oor mats securely and as prescribed in order to ensure that there is always su cient room for the pedals. # Do not use loose oor mats and do not place oor mats on top of one another. & WARNING Risk of accident due to incorrect footwear Incorrect footwear includes, for example: R shoes with platform soles R shoes with high heels R slippers There is a risk of an accident. # Always wear suitable footwear so that you can operate the pedals safely. & WARNING Risk of accident if the vehicle is switched o while driving If you switch o the vehicle while driving, safety functions are restricted or no longer available. This may a ect the power steering system and the brake force boosting, for example. You will need to use considerably more force to steer and brake, for example. # Do not switch o the vehicle while driving. & DAN ANGER GER Risk of fatal injuries caused by exhaust gases Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling these exhaust gases is hazardous to health and leads to poisoning. # Never leave the vehicle or, if present, the stationary heater running in an enclosed space without su cient ventilation. & WARNING Risk of skidding and of an accident due to shi ing down on slippery road surfaces If you shi down on slippery road surfaces to increase the engine braking e ect, the drive wheels may lose traction. # Do not shi down on slippery road surfaces to increase the engine braking e ect. Driving and parking 183 & DAN ANGER GER Risk of fatal injury due to poisonous exhaust gases If the tailpipe is blocked or su cient ventilation is not possible, poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide may enter the vehicle. This is the case if the vehicle gets stuck in snow, for example. # Keep the tailpipe and the area around the vehicle free from snow when the vehicle or the stationary heater is running. # Open a window on the side of the vehicle facing away from the wind to ensure an adequate supply of fresh air. & WARNING Risk of accident due to the brake system overheating If you leave your foot on the brake pedal when driving, the brake system may overheat. This increases the braking distance and the brake system can even fail. # Never use the brake pedal as a footrest. # Do not depress the brake pedal and the accelerator pedal at the same time while driving. * NOTE Engine damage due to excessively high engine speeds The engine will be damaged if you drive with the engine in the overrevving range. # Do not drive with the engine in the overrevving range. * NOTE Causing wear to the brake linings by permanently depressing the brake pedal # # Do not permanently depress the brake pedal while driving. To use braking e ect of the engine, shi to a lower gear in good time. * NOTE Damage to the drivetrain and engine when pulling away # # Do not warm up the engine while the vehicle is stationary. Pull away immediately. Avoid high engine speeds and driving at full throttle until the engine has reached its operating temperature. * NOTE Damage to the catalytic converter due to non-combusted fuel The engine is not running smoothly and is misring. Non-combusted fuel may get into the catalytic converter. # Only depress the accelerator pedal slightly. # Have the cause recti ed immediately at a quali ed specialist workshop. 184 Driving and parking * NOTE Reduced battery life due to frequent short-distance trips The 12 V battery may not be su ciently charged when the vehicle is used only for short-distance trips. This reduces the life of the battery. # Drive longer distances regularly to charge the battery. * NOTE Damage to the vehicle due to not observing the maximum permitted headroom clearance If the vehicle height is greater than the maximum permitted headroom clearance, the roof and other parts of the vehicle may be damaged. # Observe the signposted headroom clearance. # If the vehicle height is greater than the permitted headroom clearance, do not enter. # Observe the changed vehicle height with add-on roof equipment. Notes on driving driving with with a roof roof load, trailer trailer or fully laden vehicle vehicle When driving with a loaded roof luggage rack or trailer as well as with a fully laden or fully occupied vehicle, the vehicle's driving and steering characteristics change. You should bear the following in mind: R Do not exceed the permissible roof load and towing capacity. Also observe the technical data in the printed Owner's Manual. R Evenly distribute the roof load, and place heavy objects at the bottom. Also comply with the notes on loading the vehicle (/ page 123). R Drive attentively, and avoid suddenly pulling away, braking and steering as well as rapid cornering. Notes on driving Notes driving on salt-treat salt-treated ed roads roads The braking e ect is limited on salt-treated roads. Therefore, observe the following notes: R due to salt build-up on the brake disks and brakepads, the braking distance can increase considerably or result in braking only on one side R maintain a much greater safe distance to the vehicle in front To remove salt build-up: R brake occasionally while paying attention to the tra c conditions R carefully depress the brake pedal at the end of the journey and when starting the next journey Notes on aquaplaning aquaplaning Aquaplaning can take place once a certain amount of water has accumulated on the road surface. Observe the following notes during heavy precipitation or in conditions in which aquaplaning may occur: R reduce speed R avoid tyre ruts Driving and parking 185 R R avoid sudden steering movements brake carefully % Also observe the notes on regularly checking wheels and tyres (/ page 411). Notes on driving driving thr through ough wat water er on the the road road surface Water which has entered into the vehicle can damage the engine, electrics and transmission. Water can also enter the air intake of the engine and cause engine damage. Observe the following if you must drive through water: R The water, when calm, may only reach the lower edge of the vehicle body. R Drive at a maximum speed of 10 km/h; water can otherwise enter the vehicle interior or engine compartment. R Vehicles travelling in front, or oncoming vehicles, can create waves which may exceed the maximum permissible depth of the water. The braking e ect of the brakes is reduced a er fording. Brake carefully while paying attention to the tra c conditions until braking power has been fully restored. Notes on o -road -road dr driving iving & WARNING Risk of accident if you do not keep to line of fall on inclines If you drive at an angle or turn on an incline, the vehicle could slip sideways, tip and rollover. # Always drive on inclines in the line of fall (straight up or down) and do not turn. & WARNING Risk of re due to ammable materials on hot parts of the exhaust system Flammable material such as leaves, grass or twigs may ignite if they come into contact with hot parts of the exhaust system. # When driving on unpaved roads or o road, regularly check the vehicle underside. # # Remove trapped plants or other ammable material, in particular. If there is damage, consult a quali ed specialist workshop immediately. When driving o -road, sand, mud and water or water mixed with oil may get into the brakes. This may lead to a reduction in braking e ect or total brake failure as a result of increased wear. The braking characteristics will vary depending on the material that has entered the system. Clean the brakes a er driving o -road. If you then notice reduced braking e ect or hear scraping noises, have the brake system checked at a quali ed specialist workshop. Adapt your driving style to the changed braking characteristics. * NOTE Damage caused by driving over obstacles The vehicle can be damaged by: R driving onto high kerbs or unpaved roads. R quickly driving over obstacles such as kerbs, speed bumps or potholes. 186 Driving and parking R heavy objects hitting the underbody or chassis components. # Do not drive over obstacles that could damage the vehicle. Check the vehicle regularly for damage during o -road driving. Adjust the vehicle speed to suit the road surface conditions. If there is damage, consult a quali ed specialist workshop immediately. # # # + ENVIRONMENTAL ENVIRONMENT AL NOTE NOTE Environmental damage due to non-observance of prohibition signs Environmental protection has priority. Treat nature with respect. # Be sure to observe prohibition signs. % The vehicle is designed for easily negotiable and moderate o -road terrain. When driving o -road, make sure there is su cient ground clearance. Checklistt befor Checklis beforee driving driving o -road -road Check the following points before driving o -road: R Fuel level R Vehicles with with a diesel engine: AdBlue® level R Engine oil level: ll engine oil to the maximum level to ensure full gradeability (/ page 378). R Tyre-change tool kit and spare wheel R Tyres and wheels R Select a vehicle level suitable for o -road terrain (/ page 266). To avoid damaging the vehicle, make sure there is always su cient ground clearance. R % Further information about special all-terrain tyres for retro tting can be obtained from a quali ed specialist workshop. R Always keep the engine running and in gear when driving on downhill gradients and slopes. Observe the notes on driving in mountainous terrain. Do not drive on unknown terrain that is not easily visible and stay on marked routes. Always keep the doors and windows closed while the vehicle is in motion. Deactivate Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC, cruise control and the variable limiter. Adapt your driving style to the terrain. Do not use the HOLD function on steep downhill or uphill gradients with slippery or loose surfaces. O -road -road dr driving iving Read this section before driving your vehicle o road. Practise by driving over more gentle o -road terrain rst. R Observe the notes on the cross-country ABS (/ page 232). R If necessary, select the F or G (/ page 197) drive program before driving o -road. R R R R Driving on sand Driving When driving on sand, also observe the following instructions: R Select the F drive program. Driving and parking 187 R R R R Select a higher vehicle level. Shi to a lower gear. Drive quickly to overcome the rolling resistance; the vehicle may otherwise dig itself in. Drive in the tracks of other vehicles if possible. Make sure that the following prerequisites are met: the tyre ruts are not too deep the sand is rm enough the ground clearance is su cient For ording ding Also observe the following information when fording: R Drive no faster than 10 km/h. R The water, when calm, may only reach the lower edge of the vehicle body. R Switch o automatic climate control (/ page 162). R Vehicles with with stationar stationaryy heater/v heater/ventilation: entilation: switch the stationary heater/ventilation o (/ page 168). R R Ensure that a bow wave does not form as you drive. Do not stop in the water and do not switch o the engine. Ensure the ECO start/stop function is switched o (/ page 189). Driving in mountainous Driving mountainous terr terrain ain Also observe the following information when driving in mountainous terrain: R Avoid high engine speeds. R Use the braking power of the engine when driving downhill. R Shi to a lower gear on uphill gradients and on long, steep downhill gradients. R Activate DSR before driving downhill, if necessary (/ page 249). Checklis Chec klistt a er dr driving iving o -road -road Driving o -road places greater demands on your vehicle than driving on normal roads. Check the entire vehicle for damage and foreign bodies every time a er driving o -road. Foreign bodies in the wheels or drivetrain can lead to imbalances and therefore vibrations. R R R R R R R If the F or G drive program is selected: select another drive program. Deactivate DSR. Lower the vehicle level again to a level suitable to the road conditions, e.g. to the normal level. Apply the brakes to dry them a er fording. Check that the service brake is working normally a er a long downhill stretch. Clean the following components every time a er driving o -road: licence plate number headlamps and tail lamps tyres, wheels and wheel arches underbody A er driving through sand, mud, water or gravel, have the following components checked and cleaned: brake disks and brakepads tyres and wheels axle joints 188 Driving and parking ECO EC O star start/st t/stop op function ECO star ECO start/st t/stop op function % Depending on the engine, the ECO start/stop function is not available in all drive programs. Observe the status display in the instrument display for this. The engine is switched o automatically in the following situations if all vehicle conditions for an automatic engine stop are met: R you brake the vehicle to a standstill in transmission position h or i. R Vehicles with with a 48 V on-board on-board electrical electrical syssystem: you depress the brake pedal when travelling at a low speed. If the system has detected one of the following situations, the engine will not stop: R you stop at a stop sign and there is no vehicle in front of you. R the vehicle that stopped in front of you starts up again. R you manoeuvre, turn the steering wheel sharply or engage reverse gear. % If the system detects an intelligent stop inhibitor, for example, a stop sign, the engine will not stop. If you activate the HOLD function or engage the park position j, the engine can be switched o in spite of an intelligent stop inhibitor. The engine restarts automatically in the following cases: R you engage transmission position h or k. R you depress the accelerator pedal. R an automatic vehicle engine start is required. R you release the brake pedal. R Vehicles with with a 48 V on-board on-board electrical electrical syssystem: you release the brake pedal on a downhill gradient and the vehicle does not roll. the vehicle rolls on a downhill gradient and does not automatically enter glide mode at 20 km/h. ECO start/stop function symbols in the instrument display: R the symbol è (green) appears when the vehicle is at a standstill: the engine was switched o by the ECO start/stop function. R the symbol ç (yellow) appears when the vehicle is at a standstill: not all vehicle conditions for an engine stop have been met. R neither the symbol è nor ç appears when the vehicle is at a standstill: an intelligent stop inhibitor was detected, e.g. a stop sign. R the symbol s appears: the ECO start/stop function is deactivated or there is a malfunction. If the engine was switched o by the ECO start/ stop function and you leave the vehicle, a warning tone sounds and the engine is not restarted. In addition, the following display message appears in the instrument display: Vehicle is operational Switch off ignition before exiting Driving and parking 189 If you do not switch o the vehicle, it is automatically switched o a er three minutes. Deactivating Deactiv ating or activating activating the the ECO ECO star start/st t/stop op function % Depending on the model and the vehicle equipment, the button may also be located at a di erent position in the centre console. ECO EC O display display function The ECO display summarises your driving characteristics from the start of the journey to its completion and assists you in achieving the most economical driving style. You can in uence consumption by doing the following: R driving with particular care. R following the gearshi recommendations. # Press button 1. If indicator lamp 2 lights up, the ECO start/ stop function is activated. The lettering in the segment will light up brightly, the outer edge will light up and the segment will ll up when the following driving style is adopted: R 1 Steady speed R 2 Gentle deceleration and rolling R 3 Moderate acceleration The lettering in the segment will be grey, the outer edge will be dark and the segment will empty when the following driving style is adopted: R 1 Fluctuations in speed R 2 Heavy braking R 3 Sporty acceleration The ECO display will show you when you have driven economically: R The three segments will ll up completely at the same time R The edges around all three segments will light up The additional range achieved as a result of your driving style in comparison with a driver with a very sporty driving style will be shown in the 190 Driving and parking centre of display 4. The range displayed does not indicate a xed reduction in consumption. The segments of distance display 2 show the distance to the event ahead as follows: R A few segments light up: the event ahead is near. R Many segments light up: the event ahead is further away. ECO Assist ECO Assist function (vehicles (vehicles with with 48 V on-board electrical electr ical system) system) For plug-in hybrids, note the ECO Assist information (/ page 193). ECO Assist analyses data for the vehicle's expected route. This allows the system to optimally adjust the driving style for the route ahead, save fuel and recuperate. ECO Assist is displayed on the Assistance menu(/ page 298). 1 Event ahead 2 Distance display for the event ahead 3 "Foot o the accelerator" prompt Displayable route events 1 When the vehicle nears the event, ECO Assist will calculate the optimal speed for maximum fuel economy and recuperative energy based on the distance, speed and gradient. The Foot off the accelerator 3 message appears in the Instrument Display. The rst segments in front of the vehicle will turn green. The remaining segments will initially stay white. If you take your foot o the accelerator pedal in good time, the remaining segments on the display will successively turn green until the event shown is reached. The drivetrain will be set for maximum fuel economy. Recuperation will charge the battery. Recuperation will be adapted to the selected drive program. The event will be shown for a short time a er it has been passed. If there is no response to the Foot off the accelerator prompt, the segments will remain white. Driving and parking 191 If the event involves a vehicle in front, all segments will immediately turn green once there is a response to the Foot off the accelerator prompt. For active ECO Assist in drive program ;, symbol 3 will appear on the instrument display and on the head-up display beside transmission position h. Symbol 3 will also appear when the assistant display is not selected. If the system does not intervene during the event ahead, nothing will be displayed. The system will be passive. ECO Assist is active only in drive programs ; and A. System limits System ECO Assist can function even more precisely if the route is adhered to when route guidance is active. The basic function is also available without active route guidance. Not all information and tra c situations can be foreseen. The quality depends on the map data. ECO Assist is only an aid. The driver is responsible for keeping a safe distance from the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed and for braking in good time. The driver must be ready to brake at all times irrespective of whether the system intervenes. The system may be impaired or may not function in the following situations: R If visibility is poor, e.g. due to insu cient illumination of the road, highly variable shade conditions, rain, snow, fog or heavy spray. R If there is glare, e.g. from oncoming tra c, direct sunlight or re ections. R If there is dirt on the windscreen in the area of the multifunction camera or the camera is misted up, damaged or obscured. R If road signs are hard to detect, e.g. due to dirt, snow or insu cient lighting, or because they are obscured. R If the information on the navigation system's digital map is incorrect or out of date. R If signs are ambiguous, e.g. road signs in roadworks or in adjacent lanes. Reg egener enerativ ativee brak brakee system system (plug-in hybr hybrid) id) Function of the the reg regener enerativ ativee brak brakee system system Depending on the selected recuperation level, the electric motor is operated as an alternator when in overrun mode and during braking in order to charge the high-voltage battery while driving. As soon as you release the accelerator pedal when the vehicle is in motion, recuperation in overrun mode is initiated. The higher the recuperation, the more sharply the vehicle is braked when coasting and the more electrical energy is fed into the high-voltage battery. The regenerative brake system has the following characteristics: R supports braking with electronically controlled brake force boosting R converts the kinetic energy of the vehicle into electric energy 192 Driving and parking % If you brake hard, the mechanical brake is also used. This means that the maximum recuperative energy cannot be recovered. The more you drive and brake in an anticipatory manner, the more e ciently energy can be recuperated. System limits System The braking e ect of the electric motor during recuperation in overrun mode may be reduced or may not be available at all in the following situations: R when the high-voltage battery charge level increases R if the high-voltage battery is not yet at a normal operating temperature R when driving at speeds close to zero R in transmission position i R during and a er ESP® intervenes In these cases, the desired deceleration is set by the brake control system. Also brake with the service brake if necessary. Manually setting Manually setting recuper recuperativ ativee deceleration deceleration % In the Î drive program, you can use the steering wheel gearshi paddles to manually adjust the intensity of recuperation in overrun mode. R R R # # # % When the vehicle is started again or transmission position h is engaged again, the standard setting is automatically set: The following recuperation levels are available: R hà Intelligent, anticipatory recuperation with ECO Assist (standard setting) (/ page 190, 193) R hq No recuperation: the vehicle rolls freely h Normal recuperation h± Increased recuperation: strong deceleration in overrun mode, e.g. for driving on downhill gradients h±± Maximum recuperation: maximum deceleration in overrun mode To increase increase recuper recuperation: ation: brie y pull gearshi paddle 1. To reduce reduce recuper recuperation: ation: brie y pull gearshi paddle 2. Standar andardd setting: setting: pull and hold gearshi paddle 1 or 2 or engage transmission position h again. Driving and parking 193 The Instrument Display shows currently set recuperation level 1, for example, hÃ. The following events 1 can be detected and displayed for the route section ahead: R Vehicle in front R Speed limit R Downhill and uphill gradients R Junctions and roundabouts R Bends Eco Assist Assist function (plug-in hybr hybrid) id) % The following function is country-dependent and available only in conjunction with an integrated hard drive navigation system. ECO Assist is active only in drive programs A, Î, Ï and ;, and only in transmission positions h or hÃ. Permanent manual gearshi ing p must be switched o (/ page 201). ECO Assist analyses data for the vehicle's expected route. This allows the system to optimally adjust the driving style for the route ahead, save fuel and recuperate. ECO Assist is displayed on the Assistance menu(/ page 298). 1 Event ahead, e.g. roundabout 2 Distance display for the event ahead 3 "Foot o the accelerator" prompt Displayable previous events 1 The segments of distance display 2 show the distance to the event ahead as follows: R A few segments light up: the event ahead is near. R Many segments light up: the event ahead is further away. If ECO Assist is active, the "Foot o the accelerator" symbol 3 will appear on the instrument display and on the head-up display beside the transmission position display. When the vehicle nears an event, ECO Assist will calculate the optimal speed for minimal energy consumption based on the distance, speed and gradient. The "Foot o the accelerator" symbol 3 will appear on the instrument display. 194 Driving and parking If you take your foot o the accelerator pedal in good time, the remaining segments on the display will successively turn green until the event shown is reached. The drivetrain will be set for minimal energy consumption. The vehicle will recuperate autonomously and thus charge the battery. % You can also manually increase or reduce the recuperation in drive program Î. However, ECO Assist is available only in the hà setting (/ page 192). If there is no response to the "Foot o the accelerator" prompt 3, the segments will remain white. The event will be shown for a short time a er it has been passed. If the event involves a vehicle in front, the symbol will be shown in green as soon as there is a response to "Foot o the accelerator" prompt 3. If the system does not intervene during the event ahead, nothing will be displayed. The system will be passive. System limits System ECO Assist can function even more precisely if the route is adhered to when route guidance is active. The basic function is also available without active route guidance. Not all information and tra c situations can be foreseen. The quality depends on the map data. ECO Assist is only an aid. The driver is responsible for keeping a safe distance from the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed and for braking in good time. The driver must be ready to brake at all times irrespective of whether the system intervenes. The system may be impaired or may not function in the following situations: R If visibility is poor, e.g. due to insu cient illumination of the road, highly variable shade conditions, rain, snow, fog or heavy spray. R If there is glare, e.g. from oncoming tra c, direct sunlight or re ections. R If there is dirt on the windscreen in the area of the multifunction camera or the camera is misted up, damaged or obscured. R R R If road signs are hard to detect, e.g. due to dirt, snow or insu cient lighting, or because they are obscured. If the information on the navigation system's digital map is incorrect, insu cient or out of date. If signs are ambiguous, e.g. road signs in roadworks or in adjacent lanes. Function of the the rout route-based e-based operating-mode operating-mode str stratategy (plug-in hybr hybrid) id) % The following function is country-dependent and available only in conjunction with an integrated navigation system. The route-based operating-mode strategy is active only in drive programs A and ;. When route guidance is active, data on the planned route is analysed. This function can be activated and deactivated in the multimedia system (/ page 341). If the function is active, data on the further course of the route is evaluated. This includes, e.g. road type, speed limitations and altitude data. Driving and parking 195 The hybrid system then adapts the operating strategy to the further course of the route: R Use of electrical energy and the combustion engine are adapted. R State of charge of the high-voltage battery is controlled accordingly. R Electrical energy is reserved especially for electric mode, e.g. urban route sections and low emission zones. R The vehicle automatically selects the operating mode. When the route-based operating-mode strategy is activated, the energy ow display shows the status of the function as – active or passive (/ page 342). The route-based operating-mode strategy is switched to passive under the following conditions: R You are driving in a drive program other than A or ;. R Route guidance is active. R High-voltage battery's state of charge is too low. Function of the the haptic haptic accelerat accelerator or pedal (plug-in hybr ybrid) id) The haptic accelerator pedal has an additional point of resistance followed by increased pedal resistance to help you drive fully electrically. Characteristics of the additional point of resistance: R Available only in drive program Î R Is used when the electric motor power availability display (POWER) is full R Indicates the maximum available electric performance The subsequent increased pedal resistance indicates that the journey is being continued with the combustion engine. DYN YNAMIC AMIC SELECT switch Function of the the DYN DYNAMIC AMIC SELECT switch * NOTE Mercedes-AMG vehicles # Observe the notes in the Supplement. You could otherwise fail to recognise dangers. % Depending on the engine and equipment, the vehicle has di erent drive programs. Use the DYNAMIC SELECT switch to change between the following drive programs. The drive program selected appears in the multifunction display of the on-board computer. = Individual R Individual settings B Sport+ R Particularly sporty driving R Driving with the combustion engine and reinforced boost e ect (plug-in hybrid) 196 Driving and parking R R Emphasises the vehicle's own oversteering and understeering characteristics for a more active driving style Only suitable for good road conditions, a dry road surface and a clear stretch of road C Sport Continues to o er stability but with a sporty setup R Allows the sporty driver a more active driving style R Driving with the combustion engine and reinforced boost e ect (plug-in hybrid) R Only suitable for good road conditions, a dry road surface and a clear stretch of road R A Comfort R Comfortable and economical driving R Balance between traction and stability R The selection of the matching drive type by the hybrid system depends on the driving conditions and the distance (plug-in hybrid) R Recommended for all road conditions Î Electric (plug-in hybrid) electric mode – driving without the combustion engine is possible up to approx. 160 km/h R Adjustable recuperation in overrun mode R Adaptation of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC for electric mode R Limiting the maximum set speed for cruise control, limiter and Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC to the maximum electrically drivable speed R activation of the combustion engine via the pressure point of the haptic accelerator pedal R Ï Battery Level (plug-in hybrid) R Prioritised maintenance of the state of charge of the high-voltage battery, e.g. for subsequent journeys in the inner city/low emission zones R The selection of the matching drive type by the hybrid system depends on the driving conditions and the distance ; Eco R Particularly economical driving R Balance between traction and stability R Recommended for all road conditions R Full development of all intelligent hybrid functions and adaptation of the coasting characteristics of the vehicle to tra c (plug-in hybrid) R The selection of the matching drive type by the hybrid system depends on the driving conditions and the distance (plug-in hybrid) F Offroad R Intervenes later if there is oversteering or understeering, thus improving traction R Suitable for easily negotiable o -road terrain, such as dirt tracks, gravel or sandy surfaces R Not suitable for use on public roads G Offroad+ R Intervenes later if there is oversteering or understeering, thus improving traction Driving and parking 197 R R Suitable for rough terrain, such as steep and/or uneven terrain or for driving on rocky terrain Not suitable for use on public roads % The ESP® settings in the drive programs ; and A are designed for stability. Therefore, choose one of these driving programs, especially when transporting roof loads, in trailer operation and when the vehicle is fully loaded or fully occupied. % Plug-in hybr hybrids ids with with diesel particulat par ticulatee lt lter ers: s: during the regeneration of the diesel particulate lter, the drive programs are not available or are restricted and state of charge of the high-voltage battery may change. Depending on the drive program, the following systems change their characteristics: R drive engine and transmission management Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC R ESP® R R Vehicles with with AIR BODY BODY CONTR CONTROL OL or DYN YNAMIC AMIC BODY BODY CONTR CONTROL: OL: suspension electric power steering Selecting the the driv drivee progr program am # Press DYNAMIC SELECT switch 1 forwards or backwards. The drive program selected appears in the instrument display. Con guring guring DYN YNAMIC AMIC SELECT (multimedia syssystem) Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 DYNAMIC SELECT 5 Vehicle Setting Se tting driv drivee progr program am I # Select Individual configuration. # Select and set a category. Switching the Switching the rest restor oration ation display display on or o # Switch Ask when starting on or o . Function on: the next time the vehicle is started a prompt appears asking whether the last active drive program should be restored. Function on: the next time the vehicle is started a prompt appears asking whether the last active drive program should be restored. If the ECO 198 Driving and parking start/stop function was deactivated, an additional prompt appears asking if the function should remain deactivated. % The prompt appears only if the previously active settings deviate from the standard settings. Function o : the next time the vehicle is started the A drive program is set automatically. The ECO start/stop function is activated automatically. Function o : if the Î drive program was the last one active, and all requirements for the drive program are ful lled, this will be automatically selected the next time the vehicle is started. If another program was active, then the A drive program is set automatically. % This function must be activated for each user pro le separately. Only when this function is activated will the drive program and Eco start/stop setting for the previous journey be saved for the respective user pro le. % This function must be activated for each user pro le separately. The drive program for the respective user pro le of the last driver is only stored if this function is activated. Displaying Displa ying vehicle vehicle data Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Info # Select Vehicle. The vehicle data is displayed. Displaying Displa ying engine data Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Info # Select Engine. The engine data is displayed. % The actual (maximum) values that can be achieved for engine output and engine torque may deviate from the certi ed values within the country-speci c guidelines for permissible tolerances (basis: UN-ECE No. 85 or countryspeci c guidelines). In uencing variables that can in uence this are, for example: R Sea level R Fuel quality R Outside temperature R Operating temperature of the engine % The values displayed serve only as orientation. The values for engine output and engine torque shown on the media display may deviate from the actual values. Calling up the the fuel consumption consumption indicator indicator Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Info # Select Consumption. The current and average fuel consumption is displayed. Driving and parking 199 Displaying Displa ying the the O road road Score Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Info Use the O road Score only for o -road driving and not on public roads. When choosing the route, take into account the vehicle characteristics, the ground conditions and your driving skills. Do not let the system distract you from what is happening on the route. # Select Offroad score. A menu appears. You can start a new trip. Further functions are available in the lower menu bar: R Display the current trip via the route symbol. R Display a list of all notes for the current trip using the list icon. In the list, a note is displayed with a time stamp, the number of points currently achieved and the note text. R Display the ranking by clicking on the symbol for the winner's podium. The ranking list shows the following information: Pro le name and pro le picture (if available) The number of points obtained Date and time of the completed trip The places for gold, silver and bronze Star arting ting or ending a new new trip trip The "Start new trip" function is available when the vehicle is stationary and the engine is running. # Select Start new trip. The display "Trip and tips" appears. The following information is displayed: R the vehicle inclination in longitudinal direction in percent (%) R the lateral inclination of the vehicle in degrees (°) R the currently achieved score for the ongoing trip R a tip for the upcoming driving manoeuvre # To stop stop the the display: display: select End trip. An evaluation of the trip is displayed. It shows the achieved score and a message, for example Great job!. Aut utomatic omatic transmission transmission DIRECT SELECT lever lever Function of the the DIRECT SELECT lever lever & WARNING Risk of accident due to incorrect gearshi ing If the engine speed is higher than the idle speed and you engage the transmission position h or k, the vehicle may accelerate sharply. # If you engage the transmission position h or k when the vehicle is at a standstill, always depress the brake pedal rmly and do not accelerate at the same time. 200 Driving and parking & WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to leaving children unattended in the vehicle Use the DIRECT SELECT lever to switch the transmission position. The current transmission position is displayed in the instrument display. If children are le unattended in the vehicle, they could, in particular: R open doors, thereby endangering other persons or road users. R get out and be struck by oncoming tra c. R operate vehicle equipment and become trapped, for example. Engaging neutral Engaging neutral N # Depress the brake pedal and push the DIRECT SELECT lever up or down to the rst point of resistance. % To shi into neutral i with the vehicle switched on, push the selector lever up or down for several seconds to the rst point of resistance. Subsequently releasing the brake pedal will allow you to move the vehicle freely, e.g. to push it or tow it away. In addition, the children could also set the vehicle in motion by, for example: R releasing the parking brake. R changing the transmission position. R starting the vehicle. # # # Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. Keep the vehicle key out of the reach of children. Engaging rever Engaging reverse se gear gear R # Depress the brake pedal and push the DIRECT SELECT lever upwards past the rst point of resistance. j k i h Park position Reverse gear Neutral Drive position Proceed as follow Proceed followss if you you want want the the automatic automatic transmission tr ansmission to to remain remain in neutral neutral i ev even en if the the vehicle is switched switched o or the the driv driver's er's door is opened: # Depress the brake pedal and engage neutral i when the car is stationary. # Release the brake pedal. # Switch o the vehicle. Driving and parking 201 % If you then exit the vehicle leaving the key in the vehicle, the automatic transmission remains in neutral i. Engaging park Engaging park position P # Observe the notes on parking the vehicle (/ page 222). # Depress the brake pedal until the vehicle comes to a standstill. # When the vehicle is at a standstill, press button j. When the transmission position display shows j, the park position is engaged. If no transmission position display j appears, secure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling away. % Depending on the situation, it may take a short time until j is engaged. Therefore, always pay attention to the transmission position display. Park position j is engaged automatically if one of the following conditions is met: R You switch the stationary vehicle o in transmission position h or k. R You open the driver's door when the vehicle is at a standstill or when driving at a very low speed and the transmission position is h or k. % To manoeuvre with an open driver's door, open the driver's door while at a standstill and engage transmission position h or k again. Engaging driv Engaging drivee position D # Depress the brake pedal and push the DIRECT SELECT lever down past the rst point of resistance. When the automatic transmission is in transmission position h, it shi s the gears automatically. This depends, among other things, on the following factors: R The selected drive program R The position of the accelerator pedal R The driving speed Manual gear earshi shi ing % For plug-in hybrids, observe the information regarding the regenerative brake system (/ page 191). When the automatic transmission is shi ed to position h, you can manually shi it with the steering wheel gearshi paddle. If permitted, the automatic transmission shi s to a higher or lower gear depending on the steering wheel gearshi paddle being pulled. You have two options to manually shi the automatic transmission: R temporary setting 202 Driving and parking R permanent setting The gears shi automatically when manual shi ing is deactivated. Tem empor porar aryy setting: setting: # To activat activate: e: pull steering wheel gearshi paddle 1 or 2. Manual shi ing is activated for a short time. The transmission position display shows p and the current gear. % How long the manual shi ing stays activated is dependant on various factors. Manual shi ing can be automatically deactivated in the following cases: R changing the drive program R restarting the vehicle R when the transmission position h is engaged again R driving style # To shi up: pull steering wheel gearshi paddle 2. # # To shi do down: wn: pull steering wheel gearshi paddle 1. To deactivat deactivate: e: pull steering wheel gearshi paddle 2 and hold it in place. The transmission position display shows h. Per ermanent manent setting: setting: # Change to drive program =(/ page 197). # Select drive setting p (/ page 197). Gearshi Gear shi recommendation The gearshi recommendation assists you in adopting an economical driving style. # If the gearshi recommendation 1 appears next to the transmission position display, shi to the recommended gear. Using kickdo kickdown wn # Maximum acceleration: acceleration: depress the accelerator pedal beyond the pressure point. To protect against engine overrev, the automatic transmission shi s up to the next gear when maximum engine speed has been reached. Glide mode function * NOTE Mercedes-AMG vehicles # Observe the notes in the Supplement. You could otherwise fail to recognise dangers. With an anticipatory driving style, Glide mode helps you to reduce fuel consumption. Driving and parking 203 Glide mode is characterised by the following: R The combustion engine is disconnected from the drivetrain and continues to run in neutral. R The transmission position display h is shown in green. R Vehicles with with 48 V on-board on-board electrical electrical system: system: the combustion engine can be switched o . All of the vehicle functions remain active. Glide mode is activated if the following conditions are met: R Drive program ; is selected. R The speed is within a suitable range. R The road's course is suitable, e.g. no steep uphill or downhill inclines or tight bends. R There is no trailer hitched up to the trailer hitch, and no bicycle rack Fitted. R You do not depress the accelerator or brake pedal (except for light brake applications). % Glide mode can also be activated if you have selected the "Eco" setting for the drive in the drive program =. Glide mode is deactivated again if one of the conditions is no longer met. Glide mode can also be prevented by the following parameters: R Incline R Downhill gradient R Temperature R Height R Speed R Operating status of the engine R Tra c situation Function of the the 4MATIC 4MATIC 4MATIC ensures that all four wheels are driven. Together with ESP® and 4ETS, 4MATIC improves the traction of your vehicle whenever a driven wheel spins due to insu cient traction. If you fail to adapt your driving style, 4MATIC can neither reduce the risk of an accident nor override the laws of physics. 4MATIC cannot take account of road, weather and tra c conditions. 4MATIC is only an aid. You are responsible especially for maintaining a safe distance from the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good time and for staying in lane. % In wintry road conditions, the maximum e ect of 4MATIC can be achieved only if you use winter tyres (M+S tyres), with snow chains if necessary. Refuelling Refuelling the the vehicle vehicle & WARNING Risk of re or explosion from fuel Fuels are highly ammable. # Fire, naked ames, smoking and creating sparks must be avoided. # Before refuelling, switch o the vehicle and, if tted, the stationary heater and keep switched o during lling. 204 Driving and parking & WARNING Risk of injury from fuels Fuels are poisonous and hazardous to your health. # Do not swallow fuel or let it come into contact with skin, eyes or clothing. # Do not inhale fuel vapour. # Keep children away from fuel. # Keep doors and windows closed during the refuelling process. If you or other people come into contact with fuel, observe the following: # Immediately rinse fuel o your skin with soap and water. # If fuel comes into contact with your eyes, immediately rinse them thoroughly with clean water. Seek medical attention immediately. # If you swallow fuel, seek medical attention immediately. Do not induce vomiting. # Change immediately out of clothing that has come into contact with fuel. & WARNING Risk of re and explosion due to electrostatic charge Electrostatic charge can ignite fuel vapour. # Before you open the fuel ller cap or take hold of the pump nozzle, touch the metallic vehicle body. # To avoid creating another electrostatic charge, do not get into the vehicle again during the refuelling process. & WARNING Risk of re from fuel mixture Vehicles with a diesel engine: If you mix diesel fuel with petrol, the ash point of the fuel mixture is lower than that of pure diesel fuel. While the vehicle is running, component parts in the exhaust system may overheat without warning. # # Never refuel using petrol. Never mix petrol with diesel fuel. * NOTE Damage caused by the wrong fuel Vehicles with a petrol engine: Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could result in damage to the fuel system, the engine and the emission control system. # Only refuel using unleaded, sulphur-free spark-ignition engine fuel that conforms to European EN 228, or an equivalent speci cation. Fuel of this speci cation may contain up to 10% ethanol. Your vehicle is suitable for use with E10 fuel. Never refuel with one of the following fuels: R Diesel R Regular petrol with an octane number lower than 91 RON Driving and parking 205 R R R Petrol with more than 10% ethanol by volume, e.g. E15, E20, E85, E100 Petrol with more than 3% methanol by volume, e.g. M15, M30 Petrol with additives containing metal If you have accidentally refuelled with the wrong fuel: # Do not switch on the vehicle. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop. * NOTE Damage caused by the wrong fuel Vehicles with a diesel engine: Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could result in damage to the fuel system, the engine and the emission control system. # Only refuel using sulphur-free diesel fuel that conforms to European standard EN 590, or an equivalent speci cation. In countries without sulphur-free diesel fuel, refuel using only low-sulphur diesel # fuel with a sulphur content less than 50 ppm. Vehicles without without diesel particulat par ticulatee lt lter: er: Only refuel using diesel fuel with a sulphur content less than 500 ppm. Never refuel with one of the following fuels: R Petrol R Marine diesel R Heating oil R Pure bio-diesel or vegetable oil R Para n or kerosene If you have accidentally refuelled with the wrong fuel: # Do not switch on the vehicle. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop. * NOTE Do not use diesel to refuel vehicles with a petrol engine If you have accidentally refuelled with the wrong fuel: R Do not switch on the vehicle. Otherwise fuel can enter the engine. Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could result in damage to the fuel system and the engine. The repair costs are high. # # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop. Have the fuel tank and fuel lines drained completely. * NOTE Do not use petrol to refuel vehicles with a diesel engine If you have accidentally refuelled with the wrong fuel: R Do not switch on the vehicle. Otherwise, fuel can enter the fuel system. 206 Driving and parking Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could result in damage to the fuel system and the engine. The repair costs are high. # # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop. Have the fuel tank and fuel lines drained completely. * NOTE Damage to the fuel system caused by over lled fuel tanks # Only ll the fuel tank until the pump nozzle switches o . * NOTE Fuel may spray out when you remove the fuel pump nozzle # Only ll the fuel tank until the pump nozzle switches o . Req equir uirements: ements: R The vehicle is unlocked. R Plug-in hybr hybrid: id: the fuel tank was depressurised by pulling the button before the vehicle was refuelled. This function is country-dependent. % Do not get into the vehicle again during the refuelling process. Otherwise, electrostatic charge could build up again. Observe the notes on operating uids and fuel. The recommended octane number for your vehicle can be found on the information label in the fuel ller ap. Depressur Depr essurising ising the the fuel tank tank (plug-in hybr hybrid) id) Pull button 1. Indicator lamp 2 ashes and the Please wait Depressurising tank message appears in the Instrument Display. When the fuel tank is depressurised, indicator lamp 2 lights up continuously. The Tank is depressurised Ready for refuelling message appears in the Instrument Display. % In the following situations there is a malfunction: R indicator lamp 2 ashes initially and then goes out R the yellow ; engine diagnosis warning lamp lights up The fuel tank can only be bled if the conditions mentioned above are ful lled. Otherwise, drive the vehicle at least 0.5 km and repeat the procedure. % Opening the fuel ller ap may, in exceptional cases, take up to 15 minutes. # Driving and parking 207 # # # # 1 2 3 4 5 6 Fuel ller ap Bracket for fuel ller cap Tyre pressure table QR code for rescue card Stationary heater indication Fuel type # Press on the back area of fuel ller ap 1. Turn the fuel ller cap anti-clockwise and remove it. Insert the fuel ller cap from above into bracket 2. Completely insert the pump nozzle into the tank ller neck, hook in place and refuel. Only ll the fuel tank until the pump nozzle switches o . % Vehicles with with a diesel engine: when the fuel tank is completely empty, top up with at least 5 litres of diesel. # Replace the cap on the ller neck and turn clockwise until it engages audibly. # Close fuel ller ap 1. AdBlue® (v (vehicles ehicles with with a diesel engine only) only) Notes on re lling AdBlue® AdBlue® is a water-soluble uid for the NOx exhaust gas a ertreatment of diesel engines. In order for the exhaust gas a ertreatment to function properly, only use AdBlue® in accordance with ISO 22241. AdBlue® is characterised by the following: R non-toxic R colourless and odourless R non- ammable If you open the AdBlue® tank, small amounts of ammonia vapour may be released. Only ll the AdBlue® tank in well-ventilated areas. Do not let AdBlue® come into contact with skin, eyes or clothes. Keep AdBlue® away from children. Do not ingest AdBlue®. If AdBlue® is swallowed, immediately rinse your mouth out thoroughly. Drink plenty of water. Seek medical attention at once. Observe the notes on operating uids (/ page 433). AdBlue® is available here: R AdBlue® can be topped up by fast service at a quali ed specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. 208 Driving and parking R R AdBlue® is available at many lling stations from AdBlue® lling pumps. Alternatively, AdBlue® is available at quali ed specialist workshops, e.g. Mercedes-Benz Service Centres, and at many lling stations in AdBlue® re ll canisters or AdBlue® re ll bottles. * NOTE Contamination of the vehicle interior due to AdBlue® leakage # # A er topping up, carefully close the AdBlue® re ll container. Avoid carrying AdBlue® re ll containers permanently in the vehicle. % Ensure the connection between the re ll container and vehicle ller neck does not drip. Req equir uirements: ements: R The vehicle is unlocked. Topping up AdBlue AdBlue® The following messages appear in order in the Instrument Display when the AdBlue® tank requires topping up: R Refill AdBlue See Owner’s ManualThe AdBlue® level has fallen below the reserve range. Top up AdBlue® immediately. R Top up AdBlue Emergency op. in XXX miles See Owner's ManualThe low AdBlue® level will lead to limited performance a er the remaining distance displayed has been driven. Top up AdBlue® immediately. R XX,X l Top up AdBlue Emer. op.: max. XXX km/h Start not poss. in XXX kmThe low * NOTE NOTE Engine damage due to AdBlue® being in the fuel # # # AdBlue® must not be used to ll the fuel tank. Only use AdBlue® to ll the AdBlue® tank. Do not over ll the AdBlue® tank. R AdBlue® level will lead to limited performance from the speed displayed. A er the remaining distance displayed has been covered, it will no longer be possible to start the vehicle. Top up with at least the amount of AdBlue® displayed. XX,X l Top up AdBlue Switch on ignition, wait 60 sec. or eng. start not poss.The AdBlue® tank is empty. You can no longer start the vehicle. Top up with at least the amount of AdBlue® displayed. Switch on the vehicle and wait for approximately 60 seconds. Start the vehicle. You can see the AdBlue® range and level in the Service menu in the Instrument Display. % The AdBlue® range shown depends strongly on the driving style and operating conditions. The actual range can therefore deviate from the calculated range. Driving and parking 209 Opening the the AdBlue AdBlue® ller cap available, you can also top up AdBlue® using a canister. # # # # # # # Press on the back area of fuel ller ap 1. # # Turn AdBlue® ller cap 2 anti-clockwise and remove it. # Topping up AdBlue AdBlue® Mercedes-Benz recommends topping up AdBlue® at a lling pump. If no AdBlue® lling pump is Screw on the fastener of AdBlue® re ll canister 4. Screw disposable hose 3 onto the opening of AdBlue® re ll canister 4 until hand-tight. Screw disposable hose 3 onto the ller neck of the vehicle until hand-tight. Li up and tip AdBlue® re ll canister 4. The lling process stops when the AdBlue® tank is completely full. AdBlue® re ll canister 4 can be removed when it has been only partially emptied. Unscrew and close disposable hose 3 and AdBlue® re ll canister 4 in reverse order. Replace AdBlue® ller cap 2 and turn it clockwise until it audibly engages. Close fuel ller ap 1. Switch on the vehicle for at least 60 seconds. % If the vehicle could not be started as the AdBlue® tank was empty, it can take up to 60 seconds for the re ll to be detected. # Start the vehicle. % Avoid storing AdBlue® re ll containers permanently in the vehicle. 210 Driving and parking Charging the Charging the high-volt high-voltag agee batter batteryy (plug-in hybr ybrid) id) Notes on the the high-volt high-voltag agee battery battery * NOTE High-voltage battery damage due to leaving the vehicle idle for lengthy periods of time Lithium-ion batteries experience a natural selfdischarge. Exhaustive discharging can therefore occur if the vehicle is idle for several months. This can damage the high-voltage battery. # To avoid damage, please observe the following recommendations when handling the high-voltage battery. * NOTE Accelerated ageing of the high-voltage battery As a result of its basic characteristics, the storage capacity of and the amount of energy available from the high-voltage battery decreases over the course of its life. Due to this, both the maximum electrical range that can be achieved by the vehicle and its maximum electrical output can be impaired. The following factors could accelerate the ageing of the high-voltage battery: R a high level of charge, especially if the vehicle is idle for a lengthy period of time R leaving the vehicle idle for lengthy periods at high ambient temperatures # To avoid accelerated ageing, please observe the following recommendations when handling the high-voltage battery. Recommendations when handling the high-voltage battery: R If leaving the vehicle idle for lengthy periods, park up the vehicle with a high-voltage battery charge level between 30% and 50%. Do not keep the high-voltage battery continuously connected to power supply equipment. R If leaving the vehicle idle for lengthy periods of time avoid, if possible, high ambient temperatures. R R R Check the high-voltage battery's charge level every six weeks (/ page 341). Charge the high-voltage battery if the charge level is below 20%. Do not disconnect the 12 V battery even if the vehicle is le idle for a lengthy period. Otherwise, the condition of the vehicle's high-voltage battery cannot be monitored. You can contribute to reducing the vehicle's energy consumption in the following ways: R An anticipatory driving style (/ page 189) R Reduced use of electrical consumers R Having the vehicle regularly maintained Charging Char ging options options for for the the high-volt high-voltag agee battery battery (mode 2 and 3) The high-voltage battery will be charged by recuperation while you are driving. The electric motor serves as an alternator when in overrun mode and during braking. You have the following options to charge while stationary: R At a mains socket (mode 2) Driving and parking 211 R At a wallbox or charging station (mode 3) Depending on the country-speci c vehicle equipment and your vehicle's charging cable, single phase AC charging is also possible. Observe the di erent grid requirements of your current location when charging. Only use charging cables which conform to the grid requirements. Consult a quali ed electrician or your local grid operator if you have any questions. It is recommended that you charge the high-voltage battery at a wallbox or charging station due to the improved charging performance and better charging e ciency o ered. Stowing the the char charging ging cable Always stow the vehicle charging cable in the charging cable bag provided and secure it in the boot or load compartment of your vehicle. Otherwise, the charging cable is not su ciently secured. System Syst em limits The power output of the high-voltage battery may be impaired by the following: R High or low outside temperatures R Electrical auxiliary consumers in the vehicle being switched on, e.g. operating the air conditioning system R Extended periods without charging The charging time of the high-voltage battery may be increased by the following: R High or low outside temperatures R Extended periods without charging R The maximum available charging current of the power supply equipment R The charging current set (mode 2) in the multimedia system (/ page 341) Notes on char charging ging the the high-volt high-voltag agee batter batteryy at the the mains socke sockett (mode 2) & DAN ANGER GER Risk of fatal injury from incorrectly installed component parts Connecting the charging cable to a mains socket using incorrectly installed component parts could cause a re or an electric shock, for example. # Only connect the charging cable to a mains socket that: R Has been properly installed and R Has been inspected by a quali ed electrician # For safety reasons, only use the charging cable supplied with the vehicle or an original Mercedes-Benz charging cable. Mercedes-Benz thoroughly tests these original charging cables for their suitability for high-voltage charging of your vehicle. Purchase these parts at a MercedesBenz Service Centre and obtain advice there. 212 Driving and parking # # R R R # # Never use a damaged charging cable. Do not use: Extension cables Extension reels Multiple sockets Never use socket adapters to connect the charging cable to the mains socket. The only exception being if the adapter has been tested and approved by the manufacturer for charging the high-voltage battery of an electric vehicle. Observe the safety notes in the operating instructions for the socket adapter. Only the following charging cables may be used: R The charging cable supplied with the vehicle. R A charging cable that has been approved for the vehicle. The charging process can vary depending on the power supply equipment. Shorter charging times can be achieved in the following ways: R Charging at a wallbox. R Charging at a charging station. Notes on char charging ging the the high-volt high-voltag agee batter batteryy at a wallbo allboxx or char charging ging station station (mode 3) When doing so, always observe the local information. Do not leave the charging cable controls hanging loose from a mains socket. Do not li the controls by the following component parts: R The charging cable connector. R The mains plug. Connecting the charging cable to a wallbox using incorrectly installed component parts could cause a re or an electric shock, for example. # Only connect the charging cable to a wallbox that: R Has been properly installed and R Has been inspected by a quali ed electrician When charging, protect the charging cable control element from excessive heat such as direct sunlight. Otherwise, the charging process may be cancelled. & DAN ANGER GER Risk of fatal injury from incorrectly installed component parts # # # # For safety reasons, only use charging cables that have been tested and approved by the manufacturer for charging the high-voltage battery in an electric vehicle. Never use damaged charging cables. Do not extend the charging cable. Do not use adapters. Driving and parking 213 # Observe the safety notes in the operating instructions for the wallbox. If charging at a wallbox without pre-installed cable, use the optionally available charging cable for wallbox and charging station (mode 3). The charging cable is stowed in a bag in the boot/ luggage compartment. Only use charging cables that have been tested and approved by the manufacturer for charging the high-voltage battery in an electric vehicle. & DAN ANGER GER Risk of fatal injuries due to damaged components Connecting the charging cable to a charging station using a damaged component part could cause a re or an electric shock, for example. # For charging stations with a preinstalled charging cable: R Perform a visual check of the charging station for obvious faults, such as massive damage to the housing or charging cable. # # For charging stations without a preinstalled charging cable: R For safety reasons, only use charging cables that have been tested and approved by the manufacturer for charging the high-voltage battery in an electric vehicle. R Never use damaged charging cables. R Do not extend the charging cable. R Do not use adapters. Make sure to observe the safety information on the charging station. Most charging stations must be activated before the charging process, e.g. using an RFID card. Observe the on-site operator's instructions for the charging station. The amount of energy dispensed for the charging process, shown by the charging station, may be higher than the amount of energy actually absorbed by the high-voltage battery. This is the result of di erent levels of charging losses and is described as recharge e ciency. Charging losses occur, for example, due to heat that builds up when charging or from auxiliary consumers that are switched on. Further information on recharge e ciency can be obtained at a quali ed specialist workshop. Setting Se tting the the maximum permissible permissible char charging ging current for for char charging ging at a mains socket * NOTE Overloading the mains socket due to excessive charging current If the charging current is too high, the fuse could be tripped or the external mains supply could overheat. # Make sure that the external mains supply has been designed to handle the set charging current. # If necessary, reduce the set charging current or use a di erent mains socket. # For safety reasons, only use the charging cable supplied with the vehicle or an original Mercedes-Benz charging cable. Mercedes-Benz thoroughly tests these original charging cables for their suitabil- 214 Driving and parking # ity for high-voltage charging of your vehicle. Purchase these parts at a MercedesBenz Service Centre and obtain advice there. Check the setting of the maximum charge current using the charging capacity shown in the Instrument Display. Before charging at a mains socket, have the maximum permissible charging current for the relevant mains socket or the building inspected by a qualied electrician. The charging cable supplied is set to a country-speci c maximum charging current value. When charging abroad, the maximum value may exceed the permitted value for that country. When abroad, observe the country-speci c laws when charging. If you have questions concerning setting the charging current or if there is a malfunction, please contact a quali ed specialist workshop. # Set the maximum permissible charging current in the multimedia system menu (/ page 341). If the exact value of the maximum permissible charging current cannot be set, select the next smaller adjustable value. % If the vehicle requires more time than usual to charge the high-voltage battery, check the maximum charging current settings in the multimedia system menu. 3 Temperature monitor indicator 4 Safety system indicator Over Ov ervie view w of the the char charging ging cable control control panel Charging Char ging process process indicator indicator 2 The charging cable control panel shows the current status of the charging process. 1 Supply voltage indicator 2 Charging process indicator Supplyy volt Suppl voltag agee indicator indicator 1 Display Meaning Lights up white The supply voltage is connected. Display Meaning Flashes green The high-voltage battery is charging. Driving and parking 215 Tem emper peratur aturee control control indicator indicator 3 Safety Safe ty system system indicator indicator 4 Display Meaning Display Meaning Lights up red The green LED ashes simultaneously: overtemperature – the charging performance is reduced. The green LED does not ash: overtemperature – the charging process is stopped. Flashes red Charging cable malfunction – cannot carry out the charging process, reset the charging cable operating unit. Lights up red White LED is o : power supply malfunction – cannot carry out the charging process, replace the mains socket. White LED is on: vehicle malfunction – cannot carry out the charging process, reset the charging cable operating unit. Flashes red Overtemperature at the mains plug – the charging process is stopped. When all four displays light up, the charging cable operating unit performs a self-test. If temperature monitor 3 indicates a malfunction, it may help to protect the charging cable from direct sunlight. To rese resett the the char charging ging cable operating operating unit: if safety system 4 indicates a charging cable malfunction or a vehicle malfunction, rst reset the charging cable operating unit. To do this, disconnect the charging cable from the vehicle and from the mains socket and wait for approximately ve seconds. If the malfunction persists a er the charging cable is reconnected, charging at the mains socket is not possible. The charging cable must be replaced or the vehicle plug must be checked at a quali ed specialist workshop, depending on the indicator. Functions of the the indicator indicator lamps lamps on the the vehicle vehicle socket R R Depending on the national version, one of the following vehicle sockets is located on the right-hand side of the rear bumper. The socket ap is centrally locked and unlocked together with the vehicle. 216 Driving and parking Type 1 vehicle vehicle socket 1 Status of the charging process Over Ov ervie view w of the the indicator indicator lamp lamp status status Indicator Indicat or lamp Meaning Flashes orange Connection is being established Flashes green Charging process Lights up orange Interruption in charging Lights up green High-voltage battery fully charged Flashes red Malfunction Type 2 vehicle vehicle socket 1 Locking status 2 Status of the charging process Driving and parking 217 Over Ov ervie view w of the the locking locking status status Locking staLocking status 1 Display Meaning % Lights up white R R The vehicle socket is unlocked Connect or remove charging cable Over Ov ervie view w of the the char charging ging process process status status Status of the the char harging ging process pr ocess 2 Display Meaning # Flashes orange Connection is being established # Flashes green Active energy ow Status of the the char harging ging process pr ocess 2 Display Meaning # Lights up orange Interruption in charging # Lights up green Charging process completed # Flashes red A malfunction has occurred during charging. The indicator lamp goes out a er approximately 90 seconds. % If the indicator lamps are o , lock or unlock the vehicle using the key. The indicator lamps will then display the current status of the charging process. Star arting ting the the char charging ging process process & DAN ANGER GER Risk of death when charging at a damaged socket The charging process uses high voltage. If the charging cable, the vehicle socket or the mains socket are damaged, you could receive an electric shock. # Only use an undamaged charging cable. # Avoid mechanical damage such as crushing, abrading or driving over the cable. # Have a damaged vehicle socket replaced at a quali ed specialist workshop as soon as possible. # Never connect the charging cable to a damaged vehicle socket. * NOTE Damage to the vehicle due to overvoltage in the mains supply The vehicle is equipped with an electrical fuse which protects it against overvoltage in the mains supply. This electrical fuse may trip dur- 218 Driving and parking ing severe thunderstorms, for example, and may cause the fuse in the building to trip or may interrupt the charging process. These functions protect the vehicle. A er the fuse in the building is switched on again, the charging process resumes automatically. Following an interruption in the power supply without the fuse in the building being tripped, it may take up to ten minutes for charging to resume automatically. * NOTE Damage due to overheating of charging cable and charging cable connector During the charging process, the charging cable and charging cable connector can heat up within their permissible limit values. The permissible limit values are in uenced by the following factors: R the power supply system and the charging cable are not damaged R # the instructions for handling the charging cable and the control element on the charging cable have been observed If the charging cable or charging cable connector becomes too hot, have the power supply system checked. R R The vehicle is unlocked. The charging cable is not taut. Type 1 vehicle vehicle socket * NOTE Damaged or dirty vehicle socket when the socket ap is open # # Always keep the socket cover and the socket ap closed when there is no charging cable connected. This protects the vehicle socket from dirt and damage. Make sure that the socket cover is closed properly before closing the socket ap. This can otherwise result in damage which may prevent the socket ap from being opened again. Req equir uirements: ements: R The transmission is in position j. R The hybrid system is not activated. The õ display in the Instrument Display is o . # Press the bottom le of socket ap 1 and swing the socket ap open outwards. Driving and parking 219 % When the hybrid system is activated (the õ display in the Instrument Display), socket ap 1 cannot be opened. # Press catch 3 to the le and fold up socket cover 5. # To charg chargee at a mains socket socket (mode 2): insert the mains plug into the mains socket of the external power source to the stop. # Set the maximum charging current if required. # Insert the charging cable connector into vehicle socket 2 to the stop. Make sure that the charging cable is not taut when inserted. Indicator lamp 4 ashes orange and, as soon as the high-voltage battery is charged, green. # To charg chargee at a wallbo wallbox/c x/char harging ging station station (mode 3): insert the charging cable connector into vehicle socket 2 to the stop. Make sure that the charging cable is not taut when inserted. Indicator lamp 4 ashes orange and, as soon as the high-voltage battery is charged, green. When the charging cable is connected to the vehicle, the vehicle cannot be started or moved. At the start of the charging process, the charging side is shown in the Instrument Display with a charging prediction. The charging prediction either refers to the predicted charge level at the set departure time, or the time at which the highvoltage battery will be fully charged. Type 2 vehicle vehicle socket # Press the bottom le of socket ap 1 and swing the socket ap open outwards. The % indicator lamp 4 lights up. % When the hybrid system is activated (the õ display in the Instrument Display), socket ap 1 cannot be opened. # Press catch 3 to the le and fold up socket cover 6. # To charg chargee at a mains socket socket (mode 2): insert the mains plug into the mains socket of the external power source to the stop. # Set the maximum charging current if required. # Insert the charging cable connector into vehicle socket 2 to the stop. Make sure that the charging cable is not taut when inserted. The # indicator lamp 5 ashes orange and, as soon as the high-voltage battery is charged, green. # Char Charging ging at a wallbo wallbox/c x/char harging ging station station (mode 3) without without pre-inst pre-installed alled cable: insert the 220 Driving and parking # charging cable connector into vehicle socket 2 to the stop. Insert the charging cable connector into the socket of the wallbox to the stop. Make sure that the charging cable is not taut when inserted. The # indicator lamp 5 ashes orange and, as soon as the high-voltage battery is charged, green. When the charging cable is connected to the vehicle, the vehicle cannot be started or moved. At the start of the charging process, the charging side is shown in the Instrument Display with a charging prediction. The charging prediction either refers to the predicted charge level at the set departure time, or the time at which the highvoltage battery will be fully charged. % Depending on the temperature, the fan and battery cooling system may audibly switch on during the charging process. % If the vehicle is idle for lengthy periods and connected to the mains supply, the high-voltage battery will be recharged automatically as needed or when electrical consumers are activated. Ending the the char charging ging process process Type 1 vehicle vehicle socket # Press and hold button 1 on the charging cable connector and remove the charging cable connector from the vehicle socket. % If the charging cable connector is blocked, contact a quali ed specialist workshop. # Char Charging ging at a mains socke sockett (mode 2): disconnect the mains plug from the mains socket and stow the charging cable safely in the vehicle (/ page 210). # Close the socket cover and the socket ap. Driving and parking 221 Type 2 vehicle vehicle socket # Unlock the vehicle. The charging process is ended. The % indicator lamp 1 lights up white. The vehicle socket is unlocked. # Remove the charging cable connector from the vehicle socket within 30 seconds. A er the 30 seconds have elapsed, the vehicle socket will be locked again and the charging process will resume. % If you cannot remove the charging cable connector, repeat the unlocking procedure. If the charging cable connector is still locked, contact a quali ed specialist workshop. # Char Charging ging at a mains socke sockett (mode 2): disconnect the mains plug from the mains socket and stow the charging cable safely in the vehicle (/ page 210). # Char Charging ging at a wallbo wallbox/c x/char harging ging station station (mode 3) without without pre-inst pre-installed alled char charging ging cable: remove the charging cable connector from the wallbox socket and stow the charging cable safely in the vehicle (/ page 210). # Close the socket cover and the socket ap. % A er the charging cable connector has been disconnected, the le % indicator lamp 1 on the vehicle socket remains lit for some time before switching o . Function of the the charg chargee level level display display in the the Instr Instruument Display 1 Current charge level 2 Time at which completely charged 3 Predicted charge level at pre-selected depar- ture time 4 Current charging capacity When the vehicle is connected to the mains supply and is switched o , the Instrument Display shows the charge level display for approximately two minutes. The value for current charging capacity 4 may di er from the display on the charging station. At 222 Driving and parking a charging capacity of 10 kW or higher, the value in the charge level display is rounded o and shown without a decimal place. % The value in item 3 varies depending on the setting of the charging process. It displays the charging prediction, e.g. the time at which the selected charge level will be reached or the charge level at the pre-selected departure time. Par arking king Par arking king the the vehicle vehicle & WARNING Risk of accident and injury caused by an insu ciently secured vehicle rolling away If the vehicle is not securely parked su ciently, it can roll away in an uncontrolled way even at a slight downhill gradient. # On uphill or downhill gradients, turn the front wheels so that the vehicle rolls towards the kerb if it starts moving. # # apply the parking brake. Switch the transmission to position j. & WARNING Risk of re caused by hot exhaust system parts Flammable materials such as leaves, grass or twigs may ignite. # Park the vehicle so that no ammable material can come into contact with hot vehicle components. # In particular, do not park on dry grassland or harvested grain elds. & WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to leaving children unattended in the vehicle If children are le unattended in the vehicle, they could, in particular: R open doors, thereby endangering other persons or road users. R get out and be struck by oncoming tra c. R operate vehicle equipment and become trapped, for example. In addition, the children could also set the vehicle in motion by, for example: R releasing the parking brake. R changing the transmission position. R starting the vehicle. # # # Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. Keep the vehicle key out of the reach of children. * NOTE Damage to the vehicle due to it rolling away # Always secure the vehicle against rolling away. Driving and parking 223 Engage transmission position j in a stationary vehicle with the brake pedal applied (/ page 201). # Switch o the vehicle by pressing the 1 button. # Release the service brake slowly. # Get out of the vehicle and lock it. % When you park the vehicle, you can still operate the side windows and the sliding sunroof for approximately four minutes if the driver's door is closed. % When you park the vehicle, you can still operate the side windows and the panoramic sliding sunroof for approximately four minutes if the driver's door is closed. # * NOTE Damage due to the vehicle lowering Vehicles with with AIR BODY BODY CONTR CONTROL OL or level level control: contr ol: The vehicle can lower because of temperature di erences or longer non-operational times. This can cause damage to parts of the body. # When stopping the vehicle and when driving o , make sure that there are no obstacles such as curbs under or in the immediate vicinity of the body. # # # Bring the vehicle to a standstill by pressing the brake pedal. On gradients, turn the front wheels so that the vehicle will roll towards the kerb if it starts moving. Apply the electric parking brake. 224 Driving and parking Garag Gar agee door opener Progr Pr ogramming amming buttons buttons for for the the gar garag agee door opener & DAN ANGER GER Risk of fatal injuries caused by exhaust gases Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling these exhaust gases is hazardous to health and leads to poisoning. # Never leave the vehicle or, if present, the stationary heater running in an enclosed space without su cient ventilation. & WARNING Risk of injury by becoming trapped when opening and closing a garage door When you operate or program a garage door with an integrated garage door opener, persons can become trapped or struck by the garage door if they stand within its range of movement. # Always make sure that nobody is within the range of the garage door's movement. Req equir uirements: ements: R The vehicle has been parked outside the garage or outside the range of movement of the door. R The vehicle is switched on. R The vehicle has not been started. % The garage door opener function is always available when the vehicle is switched on. # Press and hold button 1, 2 or 3 that you wish to program. Indicator lamp 4 ashes yellow. % It can take up to 20 seconds before the indicator lamp ashes yellow. # Release the previously pressed button. Indicator lamp 4 continues to ash yellow. Driving and parking 225 Point remote control 6 from a distance of 1 cm to 8 cm towards button 1, 2 or 3. # Press and hold button 5 of remote control 6 until one of the following signals appears: R Indicator lamp 4 lights up green continuously. Programming is complete. R Indicator lamp 4 ashes green. Programming was successful. Additionally, synchronisation of the rolling code with the door system must be carried out. # If indicator lamp 4 does not light up or ash green: repeat the procedure. # Release all of the buttons. % The remote control for the door drive is not included in the scope of delivery of the garage door opener. # Synchr Sync hronising onising the the rolling rolling code Req equir uirements: ements: R The door system uses a rolling code. R The vehicle must be within range of the garage door or door drive. R The vehicle as well as persons and objects are located outside the range of movement of the door. Press the programming button on the door drive unit. Initiate the next step within approximately 30 seconds. # Press previously programmed button 1, 2 or 3 repeatedly until the door closes. When the door closes, programming is completed. % Please also read the operating instructions for the door drive. # Troubleshoo oubleshooting ting when progr programming amming the the remote remote control contr ol # Check if the transmitter frequency of remote control 6 is supported. # Replace the batteries in remote control 6. # Hold remote control 6 at various angles from a distance of 1 cm to 8 cm front of the inside rearview mirror. You should test every position for at least 25 seconds before trying another position. Hold remote control 6 at the same angles at various distances in front of the inside rear view mirror. You should test every position for at least 25 seconds before trying another position. # On remote controls that transmit only for a limited period, press button 5 on remote control 6 again before transmission ends. # Angle the aerial line of the garage door opener unit towards the remote control. % Support and additional information on programming: R On the HomeLink® Hotline on (0) 08000 466 354 65 or +49 (0) 6838 907-277 R On the Internet at https:// www.homelink.com # Opening or closing the the gar garag agee door Req equir uirements: ements: R The corresponding button is programmed to operate the door. # Press and hold buttons 1, 2 or 3 until the door opens or closes. 226 Driving and parking # If indicator lamp 4 ashes yellow a er approximately 20 seconds: press and hold the previously pressed button again until the door opens or closes. Clearing the Clearing the gar garag agee door opener memory Press and hold buttons 1 and 3. Indicator lamp 4 lights up yellow. # If indicator lamp 4 ashes green: release buttons 1 and 3. The entire memory has been deleted. # Electric Electr ic parking parking brake brake # Function of the the electric electric parking parking brak brakee (applying (applying automaticall aut omatically) y) # & WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to leaving children unattended in the vehicle If children are le unattended in the vehicle, they could, in particular: R open doors, thereby endangering other persons or road users. R get out and be struck by oncoming tra c. R operate vehicle equipment and become trapped, for example. In addition, the children could also set the vehicle in motion by, for example: R releasing the parking brake. R changing the transmission position. R starting the vehicle. # Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. Keep the vehicle key out of the reach of children. The electric electric parking parking brak brakee is applied if the the transtransmission is in position j and one of the the follo following wing conditions is ful lled: R The vehicle is switched o . R The seat belt tongue is not inserted in the seat belt buckle of the driver's seat and the driver's door is opened. % To prevent application: pull the handle of the electric parking brake (/ page 227). In the the follo following wing situations, the the electric electric parking parking brak br akee is also applied: R The HOLD function is keeping the vehicle stationary. R Active Parking Assist is keeping the vehicle stationary. R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is bringing the vehicle to a standstill. Driving and parking 227 R In addition, one of the the follo following wing conditions must be ful lled: must The vehicle is switched o . The seat belt tongue is not inserted in the seat belt buckle of the driver's seat and the driver's door is opened. There is a system malfunction. The power supply is insu cient. The vehicle is stationary for a lengthy period. When the electric parking brake is applied, the red ! indicator lamp lights up in the instrument cluster. % The electric parking brake is not automatically applied if the vehicle is switched o by the ECO start/stop function. Function of the the electric electric parking parking brak brakee (releasing (releasing automatically) automaticall y) The electric electric parking parking brak brakee is released released when the the follo ollowing wing conditions are are ful lled: R The driver's door is closed. R The vehicle has been started. R R R The transmission is in position h or k and you depress the accelerator pedal or you shi from transmission position j to h or k when on level ground. If the transmission is in position k, the tailgate must be closed. The seat belt tongue is inserted into the seat belt buckle of the driver's seat. If the seat belt tongue is not inserted into the seat belt buckle of the driver's seat, one of the following conditions must be ful lled: You shi from transmission position j. or You have previously driven at speeds greater than 3 km/h. When the electric parking brake is released, the red ! indicator lamp in the instrument cluster goes out. Applying/releasing Applying/r eleasing the the electric electric parking parking brake brake manually Applying Appl ying # Push handle 1. The red ! indicator lamp lights up in the instrument cluster. 228 Driving and parking % The electric parking brake is only securely applied if the red ! indicator lamp is lit continuously. Releasing # Switch on the vehicle. # Pull handle 1. The red ! indicator lamp in the instrument cluster goes out. Emergency braking Emergency braking # Press and hold handle 1. As long as the vehicle is in motion, the Release parking brake message is displayed and the red ! indicator lamp ashes. When the vehicle has been braked to a standstill, the electric parking brake is applied. The red ! indicator lamp lights up in the instrument cluster. Infor Inf ormation mation on collision detection detection on a parked parked vehicle If a collision is detected when the tow-away protection is primed on a locked vehicle, you will receive a noti cation in the multimedia system when you switch the vehicle on. You will receive information about the following points: R The area of the vehicle that may have been damaged. R The force of the impact. The following situation can lead to inadvertent activation: R The parked vehicle is moved, for example, in a two-storey garage. % Deactivate tow-away protection in order to prevent inadvertent activation. If you deactivate tow-away protection, collision detection will also be deactivated. System limits System Detection may be restricted in the following situations: R the vehicle is damaged without impact, for example, if an outside mirror is torn o or the paint is damaged by a key R an impact occurs at low speed R the electric parking brake is not applied Notes on parking parking up the the vehicle vehicle If you leave the vehicle parked up for longer than six weeks, it may su er damage through disuse. The 12 V battery may also be impaired or damaged by heavy discharging. % Further information can be obtained at a quali ed specialist workshop. Standb andbyy mode (ext (extension ension of the the start starter er batter battery's y's period per iod out of use) Standb andbyy mode function % This function is not available for all models. If standby mode is activated, energy loss will be minimised during extended periods of non-operation. Standby mode is characterised by the following: R The starter battery is preserved. R The maximum non-operational time appears in the media display. Driving and parking 229 R R R R The connection to online services is interrupted. The ATA (anti-the alarm system) is not available. The interior protection and tow-away protection functions are not available. The function for detecting collisions on a parked vehicle is not available. If the following conditions are ful lled, standby mode can be activated or deactivated using the multimedia system: R The vehicle is switched on. R The vehicle has not been started. Exceeding the vehicle's displayed non-operational time may cause inconvenience; i.e. it cannot be guaranteed that the starter battery will reliably start the vehicle. Charge the starter battery in the following situations: R The vehicle's non-operational time must be extended. R The Battery charge insufficient for standby mode message appears in the media display. % Standby mode is automatically deactivated when the vehicle is switched on. Activ ctivating/deactiv ating/deactivating ating standb standbyy mode (parking (parking up the vehicle) vehicle) Req equir uirements: ements: R The engine is switched o . Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Vehicle # Activate or deactivate Standby mode. # Select Yes. Driving Dr iving and driving driving safety safety syst systems ems Driving systems Driving systems and your your responsibility responsibility Your vehicle is equipped with driving systems which assist you in driving, parking and manoeuvring the vehicle. The driving systems are only aids. They are not a substitute for your attention to the surroundings and do not relieve you of your responsibility pertaining to road tra c law. The driver is always responsible for maintaining a safe distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good time and for staying in lane. Pay attention to the tra c conditions at all times and intervene when necessary. Be aware of the limitations regarding the safe use of these systems. Driving systems can neither reduce the risk of accident if you fail to adapt your driving style nor override the laws of physics. They cannot always take into account road, weather or tra c conditions. Infor Inf ormation mation on vehicle vehicle sensors sensors and cameras cameras Some driving and driving safety systems use cameras as well as radar or ultrasonic sensors to monitor the area in front of, behind or next to the vehicle. 230 Driving and parking & WARNING Risk of accident due to restricted detection performance of vehicle sensors and cameras If the area around vehicle sensors or cameras is covered, damaged or dirty, certain driving and safety systems cannot function correctly. There is a risk of an accident. # Keep the area around vehicle sensors or cameras clear of any obstructions and clean. # Have damage to the bumper, radiator grille or stone chipping in the area of the front and rear windows repaired at a quali ed specialist workshop. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Multifunction camera Cameras in the outside mirrors Front radar Front camera Corner radars Ultrasonic sensors Reversing camera Particularly, keep the areas around the sensors and cameras free of dirt, ice or slush (/ page 385). The sensors and cameras must not be covered and the detection ranges around them must be kept free. Do not attach additional licence plate brackets, advertisements, stickers, foils or foils to protect against stone chippings in the detection range of the sensors and cameras. Make sure that there are no overhanging loads protruding into the detection range. If there is damage to a bumper or the radiator grille, or a er an impact, have the function of the sensors checked at a quali ed specialist workshop. Have damage or stone chipping in the area of the cameras on the front and rear windows repaired at a quali ed specialist workshop. % The reversing camera can extend and retract automatically for the purpose of calibration, even though there is no camera image in the display. Overvie Over view w of driving driving systems systems and driving driving safety safety systems syst ems R R R R R ABS (A Anti-lock Braking System) (/ page 231) BAS (B Brake Assist System) (/ page 232) ESP® (EElectronic Stability Program) (/ page 232) ESP® Crosswind Assist (/ page 233) ESP® trailer stabilisation (/ page 233) Driving and parking 231 R R R R R R R R R R R EBD (EElectronic Brakeforce Distribution) (/ page 234) STEER CONTROL (/ page 234) HOLD function (/ page 235) Hill Start Assist (/ page 236) Adaptive Brake Lights (/ page 236) ATTENTION ASSIST (/ page 236) Cruise control (/ page 238) Limiter (/ page 239) Tra c Sign Assist (/ page 257) AIR BODY CONTROL (/ page 265) Trailer Manoeuvring Assist (/ page 285) Driving Assistance Driving Assistance package package The following functions are part of the Driving Assistance Package. Certain functions are only available in some countries. Some functions are also available without the Driving Assistance Package, albeit with restricted functionality. R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC (/ page 241) R R R R R R R R Active Speed Limit Assist (country-dependent) (/ page 246) Route-based speed adaptation (countrydependent) (/ page 247) Active Brake Assist (/ page 253) Active Steering Assist (country-dependent) (/ page 250) Active Emergency Stop Assist (countrydependent) (/ page 252) Active Stop-and-Go Assist (country-dependent) (/ page 248) Blind Spot Assist and Active Blind Spot Assist with exit warning (/ page 259) Active Lane Keeping Assist (/ page 262) Par arking king Pack Package age R Reversing camera (/ page 268) R 360° Camera (/ page 271) R Parking Assist PARKTRONIC (/ page 275) R Active Parking Assist (/ page 279) Functions of ABS The Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) regulates the brake pressure in critical driving situations: R During braking, for instance, at maximum fullstop braking or if there is insu cient tyre traction, the wheels are prevented from locking. R Vehicle steerability while braking is ensured. If ABS intervenes when braking, you will feel a pulsing in the brake pedal. The pulsating brake pedal can be an indication of hazardous road conditions and can serve as a reminder to take extra care while driving. System limits System ABS is active from speeds of approx. 5 km/h. R ABS may be impaired or may not function if a malfunction has occurred and the yellow ! ABS warning lamp lights up continuously in the instrument cluster a er the vehicle is started. R 232 Driving and parking Functions of O -road -road ABS % O -road ABS is activated automatically when you select the F or G drive program. O -road ABS is specially adapted for driving o road: R The front wheels lock cyclically during braking. R The braking distance is shortened due to the digging-in e ect. System limits System R O -road ABS functions at speeds below 40 km/h. R If O -road ABS intervenes, the ability to steer may be restricted. Function of BAS BAS & WARNING Risk of an accident caused by a malfunction in BAS (Brake Assist System) If BAS is malfunctioning, the braking distance in an emergency braking situation is increased. # Depress the brake pedal with full force in emergency braking situations. ABS prevents the wheels from locking. The Brake Assist System (BAS) supports your emergency braking situation with additional brake force. If you depress the brake pedal quickly, BAS is activated: R BAS automatically boosts the brake pressure. R BAS can shorten the braking distance. R ABS prevents the wheels from locking. The brakes will function as usual once you release the brake pedal. BAS is deactivated. Function of ESP® & WARNING Risk of skidding if ESP® is deactivated If you deactivate ESP®, ESP® cannot carry out vehicle stabilisation. # ESP® should only be deactivated in the following situations. * NOTE Mercedes-AMG vehicles # Observe the notes in the Supplement. You could otherwise fail to recognise dangers. The Electronic Stability Program (ESP®) can monitor and improve driving stability and traction in the following situations within physical limits: R When pulling away on wet or slippery carriageways. R When braking. If the vehicle deviates from the direction desired by the driver, ESP® can stabilise the vehicle by intervening in the following ways: R One or more wheels are braked. R The engine output is adapted according to the situation. Driving and parking 233 When ESP® is deactivated, the å warning lamp lights up continuously: R Driving stability will no longer be improved. R The drive wheels could spin. R ETS/4ETS traction control is still active. % When ESP® is deactivated, you are still assisted by ESP® when braking. When the ÷ warning lamp ashes, one or several wheels has reached its grip limit: R Adapt your driving style to suit the current road and weather conditions. R Do not deactivate ESP®. R Only depress the accelerator pedal as far as is necessary when pulling away. Deactivate ESP® in the following situations to improve traction: R When using snow chains. R In deep snow. R On sand or gravel. % Spinning the wheels results in a cutting action, which enhances traction. If the ÷ ESP® warning lamp lights up continuously, ESP® is not available due to a malfunction. Observe the following information: R Warning and indicator lamps (/ page 517) R Display messages (/ page 449) ETS/4ETS ETS/4ET S (Electronic (Electronic Traction Traction System) System) ETS/4ETS traction control is part of ESP® and makes it possible to pull away and accelerate on a slippery carriageway. ETS/4ETS can improve the vehicle's traction by intervening in the following ways: R The drive wheels are braked individually if they spin. R More drive torque is transferred to the wheel or wheels with traction. In uence of driv drivee progr programs ams on ESP® The drive programs enable ESP® to adapt to different weather and road conditions as well as the driver's preferred driving style. Depending on the selected drive program, the appropriate ESP® mode will be activated. You can select the drive programs using the DYNAMIC SELECT switch (/ page 197). Function of ESP® Cr Crosswind osswind Assist ESP® Crosswind Assist detects sudden gusts of side wind and helps the driver to keep the vehicle in the lane: R ESP® Crosswind Assist is active at vehicle speeds between approx. 75 km/h and 200 km/h when driving straight ahead or cornering slightly. R The vehicle is stabilised by means of individual brake application on one side. Function of ESP® tr trailer ailer stabilisation stabilisation & WARNING Risk of accident in poor road and weather conditions In poor road and weather conditions, the trailer stabilisation cannot prevent lurching of the vehicle/trailer combination. Trailers with a 234 Driving and parking high centre of gravity may tip over before ESP® detects this. # Always adapt your driving style to suit the current road and weather conditions. When driving with a trailer, ESP® can stabilise your vehicle if the trailer begins to swerve from side to side: R ESP® trailer stabilisation is active above speeds of 65 km/h. R Slight swerving is reduced by means of a targeted, individual brake application on one side. R In the event of severe swerving, the engine output is also reduced and all wheels are braked. ESP® trailer stabilisation may be impaired or may not function if: R The trailer is not connected correctly or is not detected properly by the vehicle. Activ ctivating/deactiv ating/deactivating ating ESP® (Electr (Electronic onic Stability Stability Program) Progr am) Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Quick access % ESP® can only be activated/deactivated using quick access when at least one other function is available in quick access. ESP® can otherwise be found in the Assistance menu. * NOTE Mercedes-AMG vehicles # Observe the notes in the Supplement. You could otherwise fail to recognise dangers. Select ESP. Select On or å Off. % If ESP® is deactivated and drive program Î was previously selected, drive program A is automatically activated the next time the engine is started. # # ESP® is deactivated if the å ESP® OFF warning lamp lights up continuously in the instrument cluster. Observe the information on warning lamps and display messages which may be shown in the instrument cluster. Function of EBD Electronic Breakforce Distribution (EBD) is characterised by the following: R Monitoring and regulating the brake pressure on the rear wheels. R Improved driving stability when braking, especially on bends. Function of STEER STEER CONTR CONTROL OL STEER CONTROL assists you by transmitting a noticeable steering force to the steering wheel in the direction required for vehicle stabilisation. Driving and parking 235 This steering recommendation is given in the following situations: R both right wheels or both le wheels are on a wet or slippery road surface when you brake R the vehicle starts to skid System limits System STEER CONTROL may be impaired or may not function in the following situations: R ESP® is deactivated. R ESP® is malfunctioning. R The steering is malfunctioning. If ESP® is malfunctioning, you will be assisted further by the electric power steering. HOLD function HOLD function The HOLD function holds the vehicle at a standstill without requiring you to depress the brake pedal, e.g. while waiting in tra c. The HOLD function is only an aid. The responsibility for the vehicle safely standing still remains with the driver. System limits System The HOLD function is only intended to provide assistance when driving and is not a su cient means of safeguarding the vehicle against rolling away when stationary. R The incline must not be greater than 30%. Activ ctivating/deactiv ating/deactivating ating the the HOLD function & WARNING Risk of an accident due to the HOLD function being active when you leave the vehicle If the vehicle is only braked with the HOLD function it could, in the following situations, roll away: R If there is a malfunction in the system or in the power supply. R If the HOLD function is deactivated by depressing the accelerator pedal or brake pedal, e.g. by a vehicle occupant. # Always secure the vehicle against rolling away before you leave it. Req equir uirements: ements: R The vehicle is stationary. R The driver's door is closed or the seat belt on the driver's side is fastened. R The vehicle has been started or has been automatically switched o by the ECO start/ stop function. R The vehicle has been started. R The electric parking brake is released. R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is deactivated. R The transmission is in position h, k or i. Activ ctivating ating the the HOLD function # Depress the brake pedal, and a er a short time quickly depress further until the ë display appears in the Instrument Display. # Release the brake pedal. 236 Driving and parking Deactivating the Deactivating the HOLD function # Depress the accelerator pedal to pull away. or # Depress the brake pedal until the ë display disappears from the Instrument Display. The HOLD function is deactivated in the following situations: R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is activated. R The transmission is shi ed to position j. R The vehicle is secured with the electric parking brake. In the following situations, the vehicle is held by transmission position j and/or by the electric parking brake: R The seat belt is unfastened and the driver's door is opened. R The vehicle is switched o . R There is a system malfunction. R The power supply is insu cient. Function of Hill Star Startt Assist Function of Adap Adaptiv tivee Brak Brakee Lights Hill Start Assist holds the vehicle for a short time when pulling away on a hill under the following conditions: R The transmission is in position h or k. R The electric parking brake is released. Adaptive Brake Lights warn following tra c in an emergency braking situation with the following actions: R By ashing the brake lamps R By activating the hazard warning lights This gives you enough time to move your foot from the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal and depress it before the vehicle begins to roll away. If the vehicle is braked sharply from speeds above 50 km/h, the brake lamps ash rapidly. This provides tra c travelling behind you with an even more noticeable warning. If the vehicle is travelling at speeds of more than 70 km/h at the beginning of the brake application, the hazard warning lights switch on once the vehicle is stationary. When you pull away again, the hazard warning lights will switch o automatically at approximately 10 km/h. You can also switch o the hazard warning lights using the hazard warning button. & WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to the vehicle rolling away A er a short time, Hill Start Assist no longer holds the vehicle. # Swi ly move your foot from the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal. Do not leave the vehicle when it is being held by Hill Start Assist. ATTENTION ASSIST Function of ATTENTION ATTENTION ASSIST ATTENTION ASSIST assists you on long, monotonous journeys, e.g. on motorways and trunk Driving and parking 237 roads. If ATTENTION ASSIST detects indicators of fatigue or increasing lapses in concentration on the part of the driver, it suggests taking a break. ATTENTION ASSIST is only an aid. It cannot always detect fatigue or lapses in concentration in time. The system is not a substitute for a well-rested and attentive driver. On long journeys, take regular breaks in good time that allow for adequate recuperation. You can choose between two settings: R Standar andard: d: normal system sensitivity. R Sensitiv Sensitive: e: higher system sensitivity. The driver is warned earlier and the attention level detected by ATTENTION ASSIST is adapted accordingly. If drowsiness or increasing lapses in concentration are detected, the ATTENTION ASSIST: Take a break! warning appears in the Instrument Display. You can acknowledge the message and take a break where necessary. If you do not take a break and ATTENTION ASSIST continues to detect increasing lapses in concentration, you will be warned again a er a minimum of 15 minutes. You can have the following status information for ATTENTION ASSIST displayed in the assistance menu of the on-board computer: R The length of the journey since the last break. R The attention level determined by ATTENTION ASSIST: the fuller the circle, the higher the attention level determined as your attention wanes, the circle in the centre of the display becomes smaller If ATTENTION ASSIST is unable to calculate the attention level and cannot issue a warning, the System suspended message appears. If a warning is given in the Instrument Display, the multimedia system o ers to search for a rest area. You can select a rest area and start navigation to this rest area. This function can be activated and deactivated in the multimedia system. If ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated, the Û symbol appears in the assistance graphic in the Instrument Display. A er the vehicle is started, ATTENTION ASSIST is automatically activated. The last selected sensitivity level remains stored. System limits System ATTENTION ASSIST is active in the 60 km/h to 200 km/h speed range. Particularly in the following situations, ATTENTION ASSIST only functions in a restricted manner and warnings may be delayed or not occur: R If you have been driving for less than approximately 30 minutes. R If the road condition is poor (uneven road surface or potholes). R If there is a strong side wind. R If you adopt a sporty driving style (high cornering speeds or high rates of acceleration). 238 Driving and parking R R R If Active Steering Assist is activated and active (/ page 250). If the time has been set incorrectly. If you change lanes and vary your speed frequently in active driving situations. The ATTENTION ASSIST drowsiness or alertness assessment is reset and restarted when continuing the journey in the following situations: R You switch o the vehicle. R If you unfasten your seat belt and open the driver's door (e.g. to change drivers or take a break). Setting ATTENTION Setting ATTENTION ASSIST Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Assistance 5 Attention Assist Setting Se tting options options # Select Standard, Sensitive or Off. Suggesting Sugges ting a rres estt area area Select Suggest rest area. # # # Activate or deactivate the function. If ATTENTION ASSIST detects fatigue or increasing lack of attention, it suggests a rest area in the vicinity. Select the suggested rest area. You are guided to the selected rest area. Cruise Cr uise control control and limiter limiter Function of cruise cruise control control Cruise control regulates the speed to the value selected by the driver. If you accelerate to overtake, for example, the stored speed is not deleted. If you remove your foot from the accelerator pedal a er overtaking, cruise control will resume speed regulation back to the stored speed. You can store any speed above 20 km/h up to the maximum design speed or up to the set winter tyre limit. Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recognise dangers (/ page 229). Mercedes‑AMG Mercedes‑ AMG vehicles: vehicles: cruise control is available up to a maximum speed of 250 km/h. Displays in the Displays the Instr Instrument ument Display R h (grey): cruise control is selected but not yet activated. R h (green): cruise control is active. A stored speed appears along with the h display. % The segments extending from the current stored speed to the end of the scale, or to the set winter tyre limit, light up in the speedometer. System limits System Cruise control may be unable to maintain the stored speed on uphill gradients. The stored speed is resumed when the gradient evens out. Change into a lower gear in good time on long and steep downhill gradients. Take particular note of this when driving a laden vehicle. By doing so, you will make use of the engine's braking e ect. This relieves the load on the brake system and prevents the brakes from overheating and wearing too quickly. Driving and parking 239 Do not use cruise control in the following situations: R in tra c situations which require frequent changes of speed, e.g. in heavy tra c, on winding roads R on slippery roads. Accelerating can cause the drive wheels to lose traction and the vehicle could then skid. R when visibility is poor Function of the the limiter limiter The limiter restricts the speed of the vehicle. To reduce the speed to the set speed, the limiter applies the brakes automatically. You can limit the speed as follows: R Var ariable: iable: for a short-term speed restriction, e.g. in built-up areas R Per ermanent manent:: for a longer-term speed restriction, e.g. in winter tyre mode You can store any speed above 20 km/h up to the maximum design speed or up to the set winter tyre limit. You can also perform settings while the vehicle is stationary if the vehicle has been started. Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recognise dangers (/ page 229). Mercedes‑ Mer cedes‑AMG AMG vehicles: vehicles: the limiter is available up to a maximum speed of 250 km/h. Displays in the Displays the Instr Instrument ument Display R È (grey): variable limiter is selected but not yet activated. R È ( ashes grey): variable limiter is temporarily passive. R È (green): variable limiter is activated. A stored speed appears along with the È display. The segments in the speedometer light up, up to the currently stored speed. If you depress the accelerator pedal beyond the pressure point (kickdown), the variable limiter switches to passive mode. The Limiter passive message appears in the Instrument Display and the È display ashes. The variable limiter is reactivated in the following situations: R If the vehicle speed drops below the stored speed. R If the stored speed is called up. R If you store a new speed. Operating Oper ating cruise cruise control control or the the var variable iable limiter limiter & WARNING Risk of accident due to stored speed If you call up the stored speed and this is lower than your current speed, the vehicle decelerates. # Take into account the tra c situation before calling up the stored speed. Req equir uirements: ements: Cruise control R Cruise control is selected. R ESP® must be activated, but not intervening. R The vehicle speed is at least 20 km/h. R The transmission is in position h. 240 Driving and parking Variable limiter The variable limiter is selected. R È Selects the variable limiter 1 Control panel to increase/decrease speed Operating cruise Operating cruise control control and the the var variable iable limiter limiter Press the corresponding button with only one nger or swipe on the control panel. # Switching Switc hing betw between een cruise cruise control control and the the var variaiable limiter limiter # To select cruise cruise control: control: press h. # To select the the var variable iable limiter limiter:: press È. Steering wheel control panel for cruise control and variable limiter J Adopts the stored/detected speed ± Deactivates cruise control/the variable lim- iter h Selects cruise control % Vehicles with Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC: the variable limiter is selected by a di erent button (/ page 244). Activ ctivating ating cruise cruise control control or the the var variable iable limiter limiter # Press M or N on control panel 1. The current vehicle speed is stored and the vehicle maintains this speed (cruise control) or does not exceed it (variable limiter). or Press J. The last stored speed is called up and the vehicle maintains this speed (cruise control) or does not exceed it (variable limiter). If the last stored speed has previously been deleted, the current vehicle speed is stored. % When you switch o the vehicle, the last speed stored is deleted. When you activate cruise control or Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC, the last speed stored for the variable limiter is deleted. Increasing/decr Incr easing/decreasing easing the the stor stored ed speed # To increase the stored speed: swipe upwards from the bottom of control panel 1. R The stored speed is increased by 1 km/h. # To decrease the stored speed: swipe downwards from the top of control panel 1. R The stored speed is decreased by 1 km/h. or # Driving and parking 241 # Brie y press M or N on control panel 1. The stored speed is increased or decreased to the next increment of ten (e.g. to 50 km/h or 60 km/h). or # Press and hold M or N on control panel 1. The stored speed is increased or decreased to the next increment of ten and a erwards by increments of 10 km/h. or Accelerate the vehicle to the desired speed. # Press M on control panel 1. % When the variable limiter is switched to passive mode, you cannot increase or decrease its stored speed in increments of 1 km/h. Adop dopting ting a detect detected ed speed If cruise control/variable limiter is activated and Tra c Sign Assist has detected a speed restriction sign with a maximum permissible speed and this is displayed in the instrument cluster: # # Press J. The maximum permissible speed shown by the tra c sign is stored and the vehicle maintains or does not exceed this speed. Deactivating cruise Deactivating cruise control control or the the var variable iable limiter limiter # Press ±. % If you brake, deactivate ESP® or if ESP® intervenes, cruise control is deactivated. The variable limiter is not deactivated. Information Infor mation on the the permanent permanent limiter limiter If the vehicle should never exceed a speci c speed (e.g. for driving in winter tyre mode), you can set this speed with the permanent limiter. You do this by limiting the speed between 160 km/h and 240 km/h in the multimedia system (/ page 241). Shortly before the set speed is reached, it appears in the Instrument Display. When you conrm the message, display messages no longer appear until you switch o the vehicle. The speed will only be displayed again once the vehicle has been restarted or if the set speed is changed. The permanent limiter does not switch to passive mode even during kickdown and the driven speed remains below the set speed. Setting the Setting the limit speed for for winter winter tyres tyres Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Vehicle 5 Winter tyres limit # Select a speed or deactivate the function. Activ ctivee Distance Distance Assist Assist DISTR DISTRONIC ONIC Function of Activ Activee Distance Distance Assist Assist DISTR DISTRONIC ONIC Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC maintains the set speed on free- owing roads. If vehicles in front are detected, the set distance is maintained, if necessary, until the vehicle comes to a halt. The vehicle accelerates or brakes depending on the distance to the vehicle in front and the set speed. The speed and distance to the vehicle in front are set and saved using the steering wheel. Available speed range: R Vehicles without without Driving Driving Assistance Assistance Pack Packag age: e: 20 km/h - 200 km/h 242 Driving and parking R Vehicles with with Driving Driving Assistance Assistance Pack Packag age: e: 20 km/h - 210 km/h Other features of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC: R Adjusts the driving style depending on the selected drive program (fuel-saving, comfortable or dynamic) R Initiates acceleration to the stored speed if the turn signal indicator is switched on to change to the overtaking lane R Vehicles with with Driving Driving Assistance Assistance Pack Packag age: e: Reacts to stationary vehicles detected in urban speed ranges (except bicycles and motorcycles) Takes one-sided overtaking restrictions into account on motorways or on multilane roads with separate carriageways (country-dependent) Vehicles with with Driving Driving Assistance Assistance Pack Packag agee and Par arking king Pack Packag age: e: if the vehicle has been braked to a standstill on multi-lane, separate carriageways by Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC, it can automatically follow the vehicle in front when driving o again within 30 seconds. If a critical situation is detected when driving o , a visual and acoustic warning is given indicating that the driver must now take control of the vehicle. The vehicle is not accelerated any further. Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recognise dangers (/ page 229). Activ ctivee Distance Distance Assist Assist DISTR DISTRONIC ONIC displays displays in the the Instr Ins trument ument Display Assistance graphic 1 Route-based speed adaptation: type of route event (/ page 247) 2 Vehicle in front 3 Distance indicator 4 Set speci ed distance Per ermanent manent status status display display of Activ Activee Distance Distance Assistt DISTR Assis DISTRONIC ONIC R k (white): Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC selected, speci ed distance set Driving and parking 243 R R R k (white vehicle, green speedometer): Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC active, speci ed distance set and vehicle detected k (green): Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC active, speci ed distance set and vehicle detected r: Route-based speed adaptation active (/ page 247). speed adjustment for the route event ahead is less than the stored speed, the segments in the speedometer light up. The Instrument Display shows the deactivation of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC, as well as alterations to the speed due to manual or automatic adoption of the maximum permissible speed. The stored speed is shown along with the permanent status display and highlighted on the speedometer. When Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is passive, the speed is greyed out. % On motorways or high-speed major roads, the green ç vehicle symbol is displayed cyclically when the vehicle is ready to pull away. % If you depress the accelerator pedal beyond the setting of the Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC, the system is switched to passive mode. The ç suspended message appears in the Instrument Display. System limits System The system may be impaired or may not function in the following situations, for example: R In snow, rain, fog, heavy spray, if there is glare, in direct sunlight or in greatly varying light conditions. R The windscreen in the area of the camera is dirty, misted up, damaged or covered. R If the radar sensors are dirty or covered. R In multi-storey car parks or on roads with steep uphill or downhill gradients. R If there are narrow vehicles in front, such as bicycles or motorcycles. Display on the Display the speedometer speedometer The stored speed is highlighted on the speedometer. If the speed of the vehicle in front or the In addition, on slippery roads, braking or accelerating can cause one or several wheels to lose traction and the vehicle could then skid. Do not use Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC in these situations. & WARNING Risk of accident from acceleration or braking by Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC may accelerate or brake in the following cases, for example: R If the vehicle pulls away using Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC. R If the stored speed is called up and is considerably faster or slower than the currently driven speed. R If Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC no longer detects a vehicle in front or does not react to relevant objects. # # Always carefully observe the tra c conditions and be ready to brake at all times. Take into account the tra c situation before calling up the stored speed. 244 Driving and parking & WARNING Risk of accident due to insu cient deceleration by Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC brakes your vehicle with up to 50% of the possible deceleration. If this deceleration is not su cient, Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC alerts you with a visual and acoustic warning. # Adjust your speed and maintain a suitable distance from the vehicle in front. # Brake the vehicle yourself and/or take evasive action. & WARNING Risk of accident if detection function of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is impaired Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC does not react or has a limited reaction: R when driving on a di erent lane or when changing lanes R R R to pedestrians, animals, bicycles or stationary vehicles, or unexpected obstacles to complex tra c conditions to oncoming vehicles and crossing tra c R Drive program G is deactivated. Variable limiter: The variable limiter is selected. R As a result, Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC may neither give warnings nor intervene in such situations. # Always observe the tra c conditions carefully and react accordingly. Operating Oper ating Activ Activee Distance Distance Assist Assist DISTR DISTRONIC ONIC and the var variable iable limiter limiter Req equir uirements: ements: Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC: R The electric parking brake is released. R ESP® is activated and is not intervening. R The transmission is in position h. R All the doors are closed. R Check of the radar sensor system has been successfully completed. R DSR is deactivated. J Adopts the stored/detected speed ± Deactivates the variable limiter/Active Dis1 tance Assist DISTRONIC Increases/decreases the speed Driving and parking 245 K Increases/decreases the speci ed distance I Switches between the variable limiter and Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC # To operat operatee Activ Activee Distance Distance Assist Assist DISTR DISTRONIC ONIC or the the var variable iable limiter limiter:: press the respective button with only one nger or swipe on the control panel. Switching Switc hing betw between een the the var variable iable limiter limiter and Active Active Distance Assist Distance Assist DISTR DISTRONIC ONIC # Press I. Activ ctivating ating the the var variable iable limiter limiter or Activ Activee Distance Distance Assist DISTR Assist DISTRONIC ONIC # To activat activatee without without a stor stored ed speed: press M, N or J. Activ ctivee Distance Distance Assist Assist DISTR DIS TRONIC: ONIC: remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. The current vehicle speed is stored and maintained (Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC) or limited (variable limiter) by the vehicle. or To activat activatee with with a stor stored ed speed: press J. Activ ctivee Distance Distance Assist Assist DISTR DISTRONIC: ONIC: remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. The last stored speed is called up and the vehicle maintains this speed (Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC) or does not exceed it (variable limiter). If the stored speed has been deleted, the current vehicle speed is stored. % When you switch o the vehicle, the stored speed is deleted. When you activate Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC, the last speed stored for the variable limiter is deleted. # Increasing or reducing Increasing reducing the the speed # To increase the stored speed: swipe upwards from the bottom of control panel 1. R The stored speed is increased by 1 km/h. # To decrease the stored speed: swipe downwards from the top of control panel 1. R The stored speed is decreased by 1 km/h. or # Brie y press M on the upper section or N on the lower section of control panel 1. The stored speed is increased or reduced by 10 km/h. or # Press and hold M on the upper section or N on the lower section of control panel 1. The stored speed is increased or reduced in increments of 10 km/h. or # # Accelerate the vehicle to the desired speed. Press M on the upper section of control panel 1. Adop dopting ting the the limit speed shown shown in the the instr instrument ument cluster clust er # Activate Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC. # Press J. The limit speed displayed in the instrument cluster is adopted as the stored speed. The 246 Driving and parking vehicle adapts its speed to that of the vehicle in front, but only up to the stored speed. Pulling away away with with Activ Activee Distance Distance Assist DISTR DIS TRONIC ONIC # Activate Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC and remove your foot from the brake pedal. # Press J. or # Depress the accelerator pedal brie y and rmly. The functions of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC continue to be carried out. Reducing or increasing increasing the the speci ed dist distance ance from fr om the the vehicle vehicle in front front # Press K. The h display appears. The speci ed distance is reduced by one level. If the lowest level is already selected, the selection jumps to the highest level. Deactivating Activ Deactivating Activee Distance Distance Assist Assist DISTR DISTRONIC ONIC or the var variable iable limiter limiter & WARNING Risk of an accident due to Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC being active when you leave the driver's seat If you leave the driver's seat while the vehicle is being braked by Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC only, the vehicle can roll away. # Always deactivate Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC and secure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling away before you leave the driver's seat. Press ±. % If you brake, deactivate ESP® or if ESP® intervenes, Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is deactivated. The variable limiter is not deactivated. # Function of Activ Activee Speed Limit Assist If a change in the speed limit of 20 km/h or more is detected and automatic adoption of speed limits is activated, the new speed limit is automatically adopted as the stored speed (/ page 259). The driven speed is adjusted when the vehicle is level with the tra c sign at the latest. In the case of signs indicating entry into an urban area, the speed is adapted according to the speed permitted within the urban area. The speed limit display in the Instrument Display is always updated when the vehicle is level with the tra c sign. If there is no speed restriction on an unlimited stretch of road (e.g. on a motorway), the recommended speed is automatically adopted as the stored speed. The system uses the speed stored on an unlimited stretch of road as the recommended speed. If you do not alter the stored speed on an unlimited stretch of road, the recommended speed is 130 km/h. If Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC has been put into passive mode by pressing the accelerator pedal, only speed limits which are higher than the set speed are adopted. Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recognise dangers (/ page 229). Driving and parking 247 System limits System The system limits of Tra c Sign Assist apply to the detection of tra c signs (/ page 257). Speed limits below 20 km/h are not automatically adopted by the system as the stored speed. Temporary speed restrictions (e.g. for a certain time or due to weather conditions) cannot be properly detected by the system. The maximum permissible speed applying to a vehicle with a trailer is not detected by the system. Adjust the speed in these situations. & WARNING Risk of accident due to Active Speed Limit Assist adapting the vehicle's speed The speed adopted by Active Speed Limit Assist may be too high or incorrect in some individual cases, such as: R at speed limits below 20 km/h R in wet conditions or in fog R when towing a trailer # # Ensure that the driven speed complies with tra c regulations. Adjust the driving speed to suit current tra c and weather conditions. Function of rout route-based e-based speed adaptation adaptation When Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is activated, the vehicle speed will be adapted accordingly to the route events ahead. Depending on the drive program selected, the vehicle negotiates a route event ahead in an economical, comfortable or dynamic manner. When the route event has been passed, the vehicle accelerates again to the stored speed. The set distance to the vehicle in front, vehicles detected ahead and speed restrictions ahead are taken into account. You can activate and deactivate route-based speed adaptation in the multimedia system (/ page 248). The following route events are taken into account: R Bends R T-junctions, roundabouts and toll stations R Turns and exits R Tra c jams ahead (only with Live Tra c Information ) % When the toll station is reached, Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC adopts the speed as the stored speed. Also, the speed is reduced if the turn signal indicator to change lanes is switched on and one of the following situations is detected: R Turning o at junctions R Driving on slowing-down lanes R Driving on lanes adjacent to slowing-down lanes The driver is responsible for choosing the right speed and observing other road users. This applies in particular to junctions, roundabouts and tra c lights, as route-based speed adaptation does not brake the vehicle to a standstill. When route guidance is active, the rst speed adjustment is carried out automatically. If the turn signal indicator is switched on, the selected route is con rmed and further speed adjustment is activated. 248 Driving and parking Speed adaptation is cancelled in the following cases: R If the turn signal indicator is switched o before the route event. R If the driver depresses the accelerator or brake pedal during the process. System limits System Route-based speed adaptation does not take right of way regulations into account. The driver is responsible for complying with road tra c regulations and driving at a suitable speed. The speed adaptation made by the system may not always be suitable, particularly in the following situations: R the road's course not clearly visible R road narrowing R varying maximum permissible speeds in individual lanes, for example at toll stations R wet road surfaces, snow or ice R when towing a trailer In these situations the driver must intervene accordingly. & WARNING Risk of accident in spite of route-based speed adaptation Route-based speed adaptation can malfunction or be temporarily unavailable in the following situations: R If the driver does not follow the calculated route R If map data is not up-to-date or available R In the event of roadworks R In bad weather or road conditions R If the accelerator pedal is depressed R In the event of electronically displayed speed limitations # Adapt the speed to the tra c situation. Setting Se tting rout route-based e-based speed adaptation adaptation Req equir uirements: ements: R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is activated. R ECO Assist is active. Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Assistance 5 Route-based speed adapt. # Activate or deactivate the function. When the function is active, the vehicle speed is adjusted depending on the route events ahead. % Further information on the route-based speed adaptation (/ page 247). Function of Activ Activee Tr Traa c Jam Assist Active Tra c Jam Assist helps you when in tra c jams on multi-lane roads with separate carriageways by automatically pulling away within 60 seconds and with moderate steering manoeuvres. It orients itself using the vehicle in front and lane markings. Active Tra c Jam Assist automatically maintains a safe distance from the vehicle in front and vehicles cutting in. Active Tra c Jam Assist requires you, as the driver, to keep your hands on the steering wheel at all times so that you are able to intervene at any time to correct the course of the vehicle and keep it in lane. Observe the notes on driving sys- Driving and parking 249 tems and your responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recognise dangers (/ page 229). Active Tra c Jam Assist activates automatically as soon as all of the requirements are met: The ¬ status display appears in the instrument cluster when the function is active. Requirements: R You are in a tra c jam on a motorway or highspeed major road. R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is activated and active (/ page 244). R Active Brake Assist is available (/ page 253). R Active Steering Assist is activated and active (/ page 252). R Active Tra c Jam Assist is activated (/ page 249). R You are travelling no faster than 60 km/h. System limits System The system limitations of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC and Active Steering Assist apply to Active Tra c Jam Assist. Activ ctivating/deactiv ating/deactivating ating Activ Activee Tr Traa c Jam Assist Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Quick access # Select ¬. DSR (Downhill (Downhill Speed Regulation) Regulation) Function of DSR (Downhill (Downhill Speed Regulation) Regulation) DSR is an aid to assist you when driving downhill. It keeps the speed of travel at the selected target speed. The steeper the downhill gradient, the greater the DSR braking e ect on the vehicle. On at stretches of road and uphill gradients, the DSR brakes the vehicle minimally or not at all. When DSR is activated and the transmission is in position h, k or i, DSR controls the driving speed. The target speed can be set to a value between 2 km/h and 18 km/h. By braking or accelerating, you can drive at a higher or lower speed than the target speed at any time. DSR is deactivated automatically if you drive at speeds greater than 45 km/h or select drive program C or B. The î off message then appears in the multifunction display. The status indicator in the multifunction display disappears. You also hear a warning tone. Infor Inf ormation mation on DSR & WARNING Risk of skidding and accident when DSR is activated on slippery road surfaces If the driven speed and the target speed di er, the wheels may lose traction. # Take into account the road surface and the di erence between the driving speed and target speed before activating DSR. Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recognise dangers (/ page 229). You are always responsible for keeping control of the vehicle and for assessing whether the downhill gradient can be negotiated. Depending on road surface and tyres, DSR may not always be able to keep to the target speed. Select a target speed suitable for the environmental conditions and also apply the brakes yourself if required. 250 Driving and parking Activ ctivating ating or deactivating deactivating DSR (Downhill (Downhill Speed Regulation) Changing the the targe targett speed Req equir uirements: ements: R You are driving at a speed of 40 km/h or lower. If the current vehicle speed is too high, the Max. speed 40 km/h message appears in the multifunction display. R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is deactivated. Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Quick access # Select î. A status display appears in the multifunction display when the function is activated. % When you switch to the F drive program, the function is automatically activated. The selected target speed appears along with the î status display in the multifunction display. Activ ctivee Steer Steering ing Assist # # To increase increase the the targe targett speed: swipe upwards from the bottom of control panel 1. R The target speed is increased by 1 km/h. To decrease decrease the the targe targett speed: swipe downwards from the top of control panel 1. R The target speed is decreased by 1 km/h. Function of Activ Activee Steer Steering ing Assist Active Steering Assist is only available up to a speed of 210 km/h. The system helps you to stay in the centre of the lane by means of moderate steering interventions. Depending on the speed driven, Active Steering Assist uses the vehicles ahead and lane markings as a reference. % Depending on the country, in the lower speed range Active Steering Assist can use the surrounding tra c as a reference. If necessary, Active Steering Assist can then also provide assistance when driving outside the centre of the lane, for example, to form a rescue lane. If the detection of lane markings and vehicles ahead is impaired, Active Steering Assist switches to passive mode. The system provides no support in this case. Driving and parking 251 Status display display of Activ Activee Steer Steering ing Assist Assist in tthe he Instr Ins trument ument Display R Ø (grey): activated and passive R Ø (green): activated and active R Ø (red): system limits detected R Ø (white, red hands): "hands on the steering wheel" prompt % During the transition from active to passive status, the Ø symbol is shown as enlarged and ashing. Once the system is passive, the Ø symbol is shown as grey in the Instrument Display. % Depending on the selected vehicle settings, Active Steering Assist may be unavailable. Steer St eering ing and touc touchh detection detection The driver is required to keep their hands on the steering wheel at all times and be able to intervene at any time to correct the course of the vehicle and keep it in lane. The driver must expect a change from active to passive mode or vice versa at any time. Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recognise dangers (/ page 229). If the system detects that the driver has not steered the vehicle for a considerable period of time or has removed their hands from the steering wheel, display 1 appears. If the driver still does not steer the vehicle, a warning tone sounds in addition to the visual warning message. If the driver does not react to the warning for a considerable period, the system can initiate an emergency stop (/ page 252). If the driver steers, no warning is issued, or the warning is ended. If Active Steering Assist detects that a system limit has been reached, a visual warning is issued and a warning tone sounds. System limits System Active Steering Assist has a limited steering torque for lateral guidance. In some cases, the steering intervention is not su cient to keep the vehicle in the lane or to drive through exits. The system may be impaired or may not function in the following instances: R There is poor visibility, e.g. due to snow, rain, fog, heavy spray, greatly varying light conditions or strong shadows on the carriageway. R There is glare, e.g. from oncoming tra c, direct sunlight or re ections. R Insu cient road illumination. R The windscreen is dirty, misted up, damaged or covered in the vicinity of the camera, e.g. by a sticker. R No, or several, unclear lane markings are present for one lane, or the markings change quickly, for example, in a construction area or junctions. 252 Driving and parking R R R R The lane markings are worn away, dark or covered up, e.g. by dirt or snow. If the distance to the vehicle in front is too short and thus the lane markings cannot be detected. The road is narrow and winding. There are obstacles on the lane or projecting out into the lane, such as object markers. The system does not provide assistance in the following conditions: R On tight bends and when turning. R When crossing junctions. R At roundabouts or toll stations. R When towing a trailer. R When the tyre pressure is too low. & WARNING Risk of accident if Active Steering Assist unexpectedly stops functioning If the system limits of Active Steering Assist are reached there is no guarantee that the system will remain active or will keep the vehicle in lane. # # Always keep your hands on the steering wheel and observe the tra c carefully. Always steer the vehicle paying attention to tra c conditions. Function of Activ Activee Emergency Emergency Stop Stop Assist & WARNING Risk of accident if Active Steering Assist unexpectedly intervenes The detection of lane markings and objects may malfunction and cause unexpected steering interventions. # Steer according to tra c conditions. Activ ctivating/deactiv ating/deactivating ating Activ Activee Steer Steering ing Assist Req equir uirements: ements: R ESP® is activated, but is not intervening. R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is activated. Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Quick access # Select a Act. Steer. Asst. If the system detects that the driver has not steered the vehicle for a considerable period of time or has removed their hands from the steering wheel, display 1 appears in the Instrument Display. If the driver still does not steer the vehicle, or gives no con rmation to the system, a warning tone sounds in addition to the visual warning message. If the driver still does not respond to the warning, the Beginning emergency stop message appears in the Instrument Display. If the driver still does not respond, Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC Driving and parking 253 reduces the speed. The vehicle is decelerated in stages to a standstill. Depending on the country, at speeds below 60 km/h the hazard warning lights switch on automatically. When the vehicle is stationary, the following actions are carried out: R The vehicle is secured with the electric parking brake. R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is ended. R The vehicle is unlocked. R If possible, an emergency call is placed to the Mercedes-Benz emergency call centre. The driver can cancel the deceleration at any time by performing one of the following actions: R Steering R Braking or accelerating R Deactivating Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC Activ ctivee Brak Brakee Assist Function of Activ Activee Brak Brakee Assist Active Brake Assist consists of the following functions: R Distance warning function R Autonomous braking function R Situation-dependent braking assistance R Vehicles with with Driving Driving Assistance Assistance Pack Packag age: e: Evasive Steering Assist and cornering function Active Brake Assist can help you to minimise the risk of a collision with vehicles, cyclists or pedestrians or to reduce the e ects of such a collision. If Active Brake Assist has detected a risk of collision, a warning tone sounds and the L distance warning lamp lights up in the instrument cluster. If you do not react to the warning, autonomous braking can be initiated in critical situations. In especially critical situations, Active Brake Assist can initiate autonomous braking directly. In this case, the warning lamp and warning tone occur simultaneously with the braking application. If you apply the brake yourself in a critical situation or apply the brake during autonomous braking, situation-dependent braking assistance occurs. The brake pressure increases up to maximum full-stop braking if necessary. Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recognise dangers (/ page 229). If autonomous braking or situation-dependent braking assistance has occurred, display 1 appears in the Instrument Display and then automatically goes out a er a short time. 254 Driving and parking & WARNING Risk of an accident caused by limited detection performance of Active Brake Assist Active Brake Assist cannot always clearly identify objects and complex tra c situations. In such cases, Active Brake Assist might: R Give a warning or brake without reason R Not give a warning or not brake Active Brake Assist is only an aid. The driver is responsible for maintaining a su ciently safe distance to the vehicle in front, vehicle speed and for braking in good time. # Always pay careful attention to the tra c situation; do not rely on Active Brake Assist alone. # Be prepared to brake or swerve if necessary. Also observe the system limits of Active Brake Assist. The individual subfunctions are are available available in var vari-ious speed rang ranges: es: The distance warning function can issue a warning in the following situations: R From approximately 30 km/h, if over several seconds the distance maintained to the vehicle travelling in front is insu cient for the driven speed, the L distance warning lamp lights up in the instrument cluster. R From approximately 7 km/h, if your vehicle is critically close to a vehicle, cyclist or pedestrian, you will hear an intermittent warning tone and the L distance warning lamp lights up in the instrument cluster. Brake immediately or take evasive action, provided it is safe to do so and the tra c situation allows this. Distance war Distance warning ning function (vehicles (vehicles without without DrivDriving Assistance Assistance Pack Packag age) e) The distance warning function can aid you in the following situations with an intermittent warning tone and a warning lamp: R at speeds up to approximately 250 km/h when approaching vehicles ahead R at speeds up to approximately 80 km/h when approaching stationary vehicles, pedestrians walking in the direction of travel and cyclists ahead R at speeds up to approximately 60 km/h when approaching crossing pedestrians Distance Dist ance war warning ning function (vehicles (vehicles with with Driving Driving Assistance Pack Assistance Packag age) e) The distance warning function can aid you in the following situations with an intermittent warning tone and a warning lamp: R at speeds up to approximately 250 km/h when approaching vehicles ahead R at speeds up to approximately 100 km/h when approaching stationary vehicles Driving and parking 255 R R at speeds up to approximately 80 km/h when approaching moving pedestrians and cyclists ahead at speeds up to approximately 70 km/h when approaching stationary pedestrians, crossing vehicles and stationary and crossing cyclists Aut utonomous onomous braking braking function (vehicles (vehicles without without Driving Dr iving Assistance Assistance Pack Packag age) e) If the vehicle is travelling at speeds above approximately 7 km/h, the autonomous braking function may intervene in the following situations: R at speeds up to approximately 200 km/h when approaching vehicles ahead R at speeds up to approximately 80 km/h when approaching cyclists ahead R at speeds up to approximately 60 km/h when approaching stationary vehicles or moving pedestrians Aut utonomous onomous braking braking function (vehicles (vehicles with with DrivDriving Assistance Assistance Pack Packag age) e) If the vehicle is travelling at speeds above approximately 7 km/h, the autonomous braking function may intervene in the following situations: R at speeds up to approximately 250 km/h when approaching vehicles ahead R at speeds up to approximately 100 km/h when approaching stationary vehicles R at speeds up to approximately 80 km/h when approaching cyclists ahead R at speeds up to approximately 70 km/h when approaching stationary and moving pedestrians, crossing vehicles and stationary and crossing cyclists Situation-dependent braking braking assistance assistance (vehicles (vehicles without wit hout Driving Driving Assistance Assistance Pack Packag age) e) The situation-dependent braking assistance can intervene from a speed of approximately 7 km/h in the following situations: R at speeds up to approximately 250 km/h when approaching vehicles ahead R R at speeds up to approximately 80 km/h when approaching stationary vehicles and vehicles ahead at speeds up to approximately 60 km/h when approaching moving pedestrians Situation-dependent braking braking assistance assistance (vehicles (vehicles withh Driving wit Driving Assistance Assistance Pack Packag age) e) The situation-dependent braking assistance can intervene from a speed of approximately 7 km/h in the following situations: R at speeds up to approximately 250 km/h when approaching vehicles ahead R at speeds up to approximately 100 km/h when approaching stationary vehicles R at speeds up to approximately 80 km/h when approaching cyclists ahead R at speeds up to approximately 60 km/h when approaching stationary and moving pedestrians, crossing vehicles, and stationary and crossing cyclists 256 Driving and parking Cancelling a brak brakee application of Activ Activee Brake Brake Assist You can cancel a brake application of Active Brake Assist at any time by: R sharply depressing the accelerator pedal or with kickdown R releasing the brake pedal Active Brake Assist may cancel the brake application when one of the following conditions is ful lled: R you manoeuvre to avoid the obstacle R there is no longer a risk of collision R an obstacle is no longer detected in front of your vehicle Evasivee Steer Evasiv Steering ing Assist (only (only vehicles vehicles with with Driving Driving Assistance Assist ance Pack Packag age) e) Evasive Steering Assist has the following characteristics: R The ability to detect stationary or moving pedestrians. R Assistance through power-assisted steering if it detects a swerving manoeuvre. R R R Activation by an abrupt steering movement during a swerving manoeuvre. Assistance during swerving and straightening of the vehicle. Reaction from a speed of approximately 20 km/h up to a speed of approximately 70 km/h. You can prevent the assistance at any time by actively steering. Cornering Corner ing function (only (only vehicles vehicles with with Driving Driving Assistance Assist ance Pack Packag age) e) If the system detects a risk of a collision with an oncoming vehicle when turning across an oncoming lane, autonomous braking can be initiated at speeds below 15 km/h before you have le the lane in which you are driving. & WARNING Risk of accident despite Evasive Steering Assist Evasive Steering Assist cannot always recognise objects or complex tra c situations clearly. Moreover, the steering support provided by Evasive Steering Assist is not su cient to avoid a collision. # Always pay careful attention to the tra c situation; do not rely on Evasive Steering Assist alone. # Be prepared to brake or swerve if necessary. # End the support by actively steering in non-critical situations. # Drive at an appropriate speed if there are pedestrians close to the path of your vehicle. System limits System Full system performance is not yet available for a few seconds a er switching on the vehicle or a er driving o . If Active Brake Assist is impaired or inoperative due to a malfunction, the Ä warning lamp appears in the Instrument Display. Driving and parking 257 The system may be impaired or may not function, particularly in the following situations: R In snow, rain, fog, heavy spray, if there is glare, in direct sunlight or in greatly varying light conditions. R If the sensors are dirty, misted up, damaged or covered. R If the sensors are impaired due to interference from other radar sources, e.g. strong radar re ections in multi-storey car parks. R If a loss of tyre pressure or a defective tyre has been detected and displayed. R In complex tra c situations where objects cannot always be clearly identi ed. R If pedestrians or vehicles move quickly into the sensor detection range. R If pedestrians are hidden by other objects. R If the typical outline of a pedestrian cannot be distinguished from the background. R If a pedestrian is not detected as such, e.g. due to special clothing or other objects. R If the driver's seat belt is not fastened. R On bends with a tight radius. % The Active Brake Assist sensors adjust automatically while a certain distance is being driven a er the vehicle has been delivered. Active Brake Assist is unavailable or only partially available during the teach-in process. Activ ctivating/deactiv ating/deactivating ating Activ Activee Brak Brakee Assist Req equir uirements: ements: R The vehicle is switched on. Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Assistance 5 Active Brake Assist # Select the desired setting. The setting is retained when the drive system is next started. Deactivating Activ Deactivating Activee Brak Brakee Assist % It is recommended that you always leave Active Brake Assist activated. Select Off. The distance warning function, the autonomous braking function and Evasive Steering Assist are deactivated. When the vehicle is next started, the middle setting is automatically selected. % If Active Brake Assist is deactivated, the æ symbol appears in the status bar of the Instrument Display. # Tra c Sign Assist Function of Tr Traa c Sign Assist Tra c Sign Assist detects tra c signs with the multifunction camera (/ page 229). It assists you by displaying detected speed limits and overtaking restrictions in the Instrument Display. Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recognise dangers (/ page 229). Since Tra c Sign Assist also uses the data stored in the navigation system, it can update the display in the following situations without detecting tra c signs. 258 Driving and parking If the system detects that you are driving onto a section of road in the wrong direction of travel, it triggers a warning. The camera also detects tra c signs with a restriction indicated by an additional sign (e.g. when wet). These are only displayed if a restriction applies or if the system cannot clearly determine whether the restriction applies. War arning ning when the the maximum permissible permissible speed is exceeded ex ceeded The system can warn you if you unintentionally exceed the maximum permissible speed. To do this, you can specify in the multimedia system by how much the maximum permissible speed can be exceeded before a warning is issued. You can specify whether the warning is to be just a visual warning or an acoustic one as well. Displayy in the Displa the Instr Instrument ument Display Instrument Display in the Widescreen Cockpit 1 Maximum permissible speed 2 Maximum permissible speed when there is a restriction 3 Additional sign with restriction % Vehicles with with a standar standardd Instr Instrument ument Display: Display: a + symbol next to a tra c sign in the Instrument Display indicates that additional tra c signs have been detected. These can also be displayed in the media display and optionally in the head-up display. If Tra c Sign Assist cannot determine the maximum permissible speed (e.g. due to missing signs), the following display appears in the Instrument Display: This is displayed continuously if the vehicle is in a country where Tra c Sign Assist is not supported. Tra c Sign Assist is not available in all countries. % Also observe the information on display messages in Tra c Sign Assist (/ page 449). War arning ning when approac approaching hing pedestr pedestrian ian crossings crossings (vehicles (v ehicles with with Driving Driving Assistance Assistance Pack Packag age) e) The system can warn you if you approach a pedestrian crossing with your vehicle. The ¯ Watch for pedestrians message appears in the instrument cluster. The warning occurs only if appropriate tra c signs or lane markings are detected and pedestrians are present in the danger zone. Driving and parking 259 System limits System The system may be impaired or may not function particularly in the following situations: R If there is poor visibility, e.g. due to insu cient illumination of the road, highly variable shade conditions, rain, snow, fog or heavy spray. R If there is glare, e.g. from oncoming tra c, direct sunlight or re ections. R If the windscreen in the area of the multifunction camera is dirty, or if the camera is misted up, damaged or covered. R If the tra c signs are hard to detect, e.g. due to dirt, snow or insu cient lighting, or because they are covered. R If the information in the navigation system's digital map is incorrect or out-of-date. R If signs are ambiguous, e.g. road signs in roadworks or in adjacent lanes. R If you turn sharply when passing tra c signs outside the camera's eld of vision. Variable limiter Setting Se tting Tr Traa c Sign Assist R Req equir uirements: ements: Onlyy vehicles Onl vehicles with with Driving Driving Assistance Assistance Pack Packag age: e: Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC and ECO Assist must be activated for the automatic adoption of speed limits. Further information about Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC: (/ page 244). R Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Traffic Sign Assist 5 Assistance Activ ctivating ating or deactivating deactivating automatic automatic adoption adoption of speed limits (only (only vehicles vehicles with with Driving Driving Assistance Assistance Pack ackag age) e) # Select Adopt limit. # Switch the function on or o . The speed limits detected by Tra c Sign Assist are automatically adopted by Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC. % If one of the following systems is activated, the detected speed can be manually adopted as the speed limit: R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC R Cruise control Displaying detect Displaying detected ed tr traa c signs in the the media display # Select Display in head unit. # Switch the function on or o . Setting Se tting the the type of war warning ning # Select Visual & audible, Visual or Off. Setting the Setting the war warning ning thr threshold eshold This value determines the speed at which a warning is issued when exceeded. # Select Warning threshold. # Set the desired speed. Blind Spot Spot Assist Assist and Activ Activee Blind Spot Spot Assist Assist with exit war warning ning Function of Blind Spot Spot Assist Assist and Activ Activee Blind Spott Assist Spo Assist with with exit exit war warning ning Blind Spot Assist and Active Blind Spot Assist use two lateral, rear-facing radar sensors to monitor 260 Driving and parking the area up to 40 m behind and 3 m next to your vehicle. If a vehicle is detected at speeds above approximately 12 km/h and this vehicle subsequently enters the monitoring range directly next to your vehicle, the warning lamp in the outside mirror lights up red. Permanent status display in the instrument cluster: R ¸ (grey): system is activated but inoperative R ¸ (green): system is activated and operational If a vehicle is detected close to your vehicle and you switch on the turn signal indicator in the corresponding direction, a double warning tone sounds and the red warning lamp in the outside mirror ashes. If the turn signal indicator remains switched on, all other detected vehicles are indicated only by the ashing of the red warning lamp. If you overtake a vehicle quickly, no warning is given. & WARNING Risk of accident despite Blind Spot Assist Blind Spot Assist does not react to vehicles approaching and overtaking you at a greatly di erent speed. Blind Spot Assist cannot warn drivers in this situation. # Always pay careful attention to the tra c situation and maintain a safe distance at the side of the vehicle. Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recognise dangers (/ page 229). Exit war warning ning The exit warning is an additional function of Blind Spot Assist and can warn vehicle occupants about approaching vehicles when leaving the vehicle when stationary. & WARNING Risk of accident despite exit warning The exit warning neither reacts to stationary objects nor to persons or road users approaching you at a greatly di ering speed. The exit warning cannot warn drivers in these situations. # Always pay particular attention to the tra c situation when opening the doors and make sure there is su cient clearance. If there is a vehicle in the monitoring range, this is indicated in the outside mirror. If a vehicle occupant opens the door on the side with the warning, a warning tone sounds and the warning lamp in the outside mirror starts to ash. This additional function is only available when Blind Spot Assist is active. When the exit warning is activated, it can warn vehicle occupants for up to three minutes a er switching the vehicle o . The exit warning is no longer available once the warning lamp in the outside mirror ashes three times. Driving and parking 261 The exit warning is only an aid and not a substitute for the attention of vehicle occupants. The responsibility for opening and closing the doors and for leaving the vehicle remains with the vehicle occupants. System limits System Blind Spot Assist and Active Blind Spot Assist may be limited in the following situations, in particular: R if there is dirt on the sensors or the sensors are obscured R in poor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy rain or snow R if there are narrow vehicles, e.g. bicycles or motorbikes R if the road has very wide or narrow lanes R if vehicles are not driving in the middle of their lane Warnings may be issued in error when driving close to crash barriers or similar continuous lane borders. Always make sure that there is su cient distance to the side for other tra c or obstacles. Warnings may be interrupted when driving alongside long vehicles, for example lorries, for a prolonged time. Blind Spot Assist is not operational when reverse gear is engaged. Blind Spot Assist and the exit warning are not operational when a trailer is coupled to the vehicle and the electrical connection has been correctly established. The exit warning may be limited in the following situations: R when the sensors are covered by adjacent vehicles in narrow parking spaces R when people approach the vehicle R in the event of stationary or slowly moving objects Function of brak brakee application (Activ (Activee Blind Spot Assist) Assist) If Active Blind Spot Assist detects a risk of a side impact in the monitoring range, a course-correcting brake application is carried out. This is designed to help you avoid a collision. The course-correcting brake application is available in the speed range between approximately 30 km/h and 200 km/h. & WARNING Risk of accident despite brake application of Active Blind Spot Assist A course-correcting brake application cannot always prevent a collision. # Always steer, brake or accelerate yourself, especially if Active Blind Spot Assist warns you or makes a course-correcting brake application. # Always maintain a safe distance at the sides. 262 Driving and parking If a course-correcting brake application occurs, the red warning lamp ashes in the outside mirror and a warning tone sounds. In addition, display 1 indicating the danger of a side collision appears in the Instrument Display. In rare cases, the system may make an inappropriate brake application. This brake application may be interrupted at any time if you steer slightly in the opposite direction or accelerate. System limits System Note the system limitations of Active Blind Spot Assist; you may otherwise not recognise the dangers (/ page 259). Either a course-correcting brake application appropriate to the driving situation, or none at all, may occur in the following situations: R Vehicles or obstacles, e.g. crash barriers, are located on both sides of your vehicle. R A vehicle approaches too closely on the side. R You have adopted a sporty driving style with high cornering speeds. R You brake or accelerate signi cantly. R R R R A driving safety system intervenes, e.g. ESP® or Active Brake Assist. ESP® is deactivated. A loss of tyre pressure or a defective tyre is detected. You are driving with a trailer and the electrical connection to the trailer hitch has been correctly established. Activ ctivating/deactiv ating/deactivating ating Blind Spot Spot Assist Assist or Activ ctivee Blind Spot Spot Assist Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Assistance # Activate or deactivate Blind Spot Assist. or # Activate or deactivate Act. Blind Spot Assist. Activ ctivee Lane Keeping Keeping Assist Function of Activ Activee Lane Keeping Keeping Assist Active Lane Keeping Assist monitors the area in front of your vehicle by means of the multifunction camera (/ page 229). It serves to protect you against unintentionally leaving your lane. You will be warned by vibration pulses in the steering wheel and guided by a course-correcting brake application back into your lane. Active Lane Keeping Assist is available in the speed range between 60 km/h and 200 km/h. Active Lane Keeping Assist can neither reduce the risk of an accident if you fail to adapt your driving style nor override the laws of physics. It cannot take into account road, weather or tra c conditions. Active Lane Keeping Assist is only an aid. You are responsible for maintaining a safe distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good time and for staying in lane. The status of Active Lane Keeping Assist is displayed in the on-board computer: R à (green): Active Lane Keeping Assist is active and operating. R à (grey): Active Lane Keeping Assist is active but not operating. R ·: Active Lane Keeping Assist is deactivated or there is a malfunction. Driving and parking 263 If a lane-correcting brake application occurs, display 1 appears in the Instrument Display. The system does not apply the brake if you activate the turn signal indicator. Vehicles with with Driving Driving Assistance Assistance Pack Packag age: e: if the system detects an obstacle, such as another vehicle in the adjacent lane, it will apply the brake regardless of the turn signal indicator. You are warned by vibrations in the steering wheel in the following circumstances: R Active Lane Keeping Assist detects a lane marking. R A front wheel drives over this lane marking. Conditions for for a course-corr course-correcting ecting brak brakee application (vehicles (vehicles without without Driving Driving Assistance Assistance Pack Packag age) e) Depending on the setting, a course-correcting brake application occurs in the following situations (/ page 265). % The availability of this setting is dependent on the country. If the function is activated in countries in which this setting is not not available, a lane-correcting brake application is initiated in the following situations: Lane markings were detected on both sides of the lane. The front wheel drives over a continuous lane marking. Standard setting R Lane markings were detected on both sides of the lane. The front wheel drives over a continuous lane marking. R A lane marking and the edge of a rm road surface were detected. The front wheel drives over a lane marking on the edge of the rm road surface. R A lane marking and an oncoming vehicle were detected. The front wheel drives over the lane marking. Sensitive setting R All situations described under the Standard setting. R A continuous lane marking was detected and driven over with the front wheel. % A brake application may be interrupted at any time if you steer slightly in the opposite direction. Conditions for for a course-corr course-correcting ecting brak brakee application (vehicles (vehicles with with Driving Driving Assistance Assistance Pack Packag age) e) Depending on the setting, a course-correcting brake application occurs in the following situations (/ page 265). % The availability of this setting is dependent on the country. If the function is activated in countries in which this setting is not not available, a lane-correcting brake application is initiated in all situations described under Sensitive. Standard setting R A lane marking and an approaching vehicle, an overtaking vehicle or vehicles driving parallel to your vehicle were detected in the adjacent 264 Driving and parking lane. The front wheel drives over the lane marking. Sensitive setting R The situations described under the Standard setting. R A continuous lane marking was detected and driven over with the front wheel. % A brake application may be interrupted at any time if you steer slightly in the opposite direction. System limits System No lane-correcting brake application occurs in the following situations: R You clearly and actively steer, brake or accelerate. R If a driving safety system intervenes, such as ESP®, Active Brake Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist. R You have adopted a sporty driving style with high cornering speeds or high rates of acceleration. R When ESP® is deactivated. R R When driving with a trailer, the electrical connection to the trailer has been correctly established. If a loss of tyre pressure or a defective tyre is detected and displayed. If you deactivate the Active Lane Keeping Assist warning and the lane markings cannot be clearly detected, it is possible that no lane-correcting brake application takes place (/ page 265). The system may be impaired or may not function particularly in the following situations: R If there is poor visibility, e.g. due to insu cient illumination of the road, highly variable shade conditions, rain, snow, fog or heavy spray. R If there is glare, e.g. from oncoming tra c, the sun or re ections. R If the windscreen in the area of the multifunction camera is dirty, or if the camera is misted up, damaged or covered. R If there are no lane markings, or several unclear lane markings are present for one lane, e.g. around roadworks. R R R R R If the lane markings are worn, dark or covered. If the distance to the vehicle in front is too short and thus the lane markings cannot be detected. If the lane markings change quickly, e.g. lanes branch o , cross one another or merge. If the carriageway is very narrow and winding. Vehicles with with Driving Driving Assistance Assistance Pack Packag age: e: if the radar sensors in the rear bumper are dirty or covered in snow and an obstacle is detected in your lane, no lane-correcting brake application takes place. Activ ctivating/deactiv ating/deactivating ating Activ Activee Lane Keeping Keeping Assist Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Quick access 5 Active Lane Keeping Assist # Activate or deactivate the function. Driving and parking 265 Setting Activ Setting Activee Lane Keeping Keeping Assist Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Assistance 5 Active Lane Keeping Assist Setting the Setting the sensitivity % The availability of this function is dependent on the country. # Select Standard, Sensitive or Off. Activ ctivating ating or deactivating deactivating the the haptic haptic war warning ning Select Warning. Activate or deactivate the function. # AIR BODY BODY CONTR CONTROL OL AIR BODY BODY CONTR CONTROL OL function * NO NOTE TE Mercedes-AMG vehicles # Observe the notes in the Supplement. You could otherwise fail to recognise dangers. AIR BODY CONTROL is an air suspension system with variable damping for improved driving com- fort. The all-round level control system ensures the best possible suspension and constant ground clearance, even with a laden vehicle. When driving at speed, the vehicle is lowered automatically to improve driving safety and to reduce fuel consumption. You also have the option of manually adjusting the vehicle level. AIR BODY CONTROL includes the following components and functions: R air suspension with variable spring rate R automatic level control system R speed-dependent lowering to reduce fuel consumption R manually selectable high-level setting for greater ground clearance R ADS PLUS (Adaptive Damping System with constant damping force adjustment) R DYNAMIC SELECT switch and level button Suspension setting setting and vehicle vehicle level level per driv drivee proprogram gr am Drive program A: R The suspension setting is comfortable. R R R The vehicle is set to the normal level. When driving at speeds of approximately 125 km/h or above, the vehicle is lowered. When driving at speeds below approximately 80 km/h, the vehicle is raised again. Drive program ;: R The suspension setting is comfortable. R The vehicle is set to low level -1. R The vehicle is not lowered any further if you are travelling at higher speeds. Drive program C: The suspension setting is rmer. R The vehicle is set to low level -1. R The vehicle is not lowered any further if you are travelling at higher speeds. R Drive program B: The suspension setting is even rmer. R The vehicle is set to low level -1. R The vehicle is not lowered any further if you are travelling at higher speeds. R 266 Driving and parking Drive program F: The suspension setting is suitable for o -road terrain. R The vehicle is set to the normal level. R When driving at speeds of 125 km/h or above the vehicle is lowered. R When driving at speeds below 80 km/h, the vehicle is raised again. R Drive program G: R The suspension setting is suitable for o -road terrain. R The vehicle is set to high level +1. R When driving at speeds of 35 km/h or above the vehicle is lowered to the normal level. R When driving at speeds below 20 km/h, the vehicle is raised again. Individual suspension settings can be called up in drive program = (/ page 197). Setting Se tting the the vehicle vehicle level level & WARNING Risk of accident because vehicle level is too high Driving characteristics may be impaired. The vehicle can dri outwards, for example, when steering or cornering. # Choose a vehicle level which is suited to the driving style and the road surface conditions. & WARNING Risk of entrapment from vehicle lowering When lowering the vehicle, other people could become trapped if their limbs are between the vehicle body and the tyres or underneath the vehicle. # Make sure no one is underneath the vehicle or in the immediate vicinity of the wheel arches when the vehicle is being lowered. & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped due to the vehicle lowering Vehicles with with AIR BODY BODY CONTR CONTROL OL or level level control contr ol system: system: when you unload luggage or leave the vehicle, the vehicle rst rises slightly and then returns to the set level shortly a erwards. You or anyone else in the vicinity of the wheel arches or the underbody could thus become trapped. The vehicle can also be lowered a er being locked. # When leaving the vehicle, make sure that nobody is in the vicinity of the wheel arches or the underbody. * NOTE Damage due to vehicle lowering Parts of the body could be damaged when the vehicle is lowered. # Make sure that there are no obstacles such as kerbs underneath or in the Driving and parking 267 immediate vicinity of the body when the vehicle is being lowered. Raising the the vehicle vehicle * NOTE Mercedes-AMG vehicles # Observe the notes in the Supplement. You could otherwise fail to recognise dangers. Req equir uirements: ements: R The vehicle has been started. R All vehicles vehicles excep exceptt All-T All-Terr errain ain vehicles: vehicles: the vehicle must not be moving faster than 60 km/h. R All-T All-Terr errain ain vehicles: vehicles: the vehicle must not be moving faster than 35 km/h. The vehicle is automatically lowered again in the following situations: R All vehicles vehicles excep exceptt All-T All-Terr errain ain vehicles: vehicles: when driving faster than 80 km/h. R All vehicles vehicles excep exceptt All-T All-Terr errain ain vehicles: vehicles: when driving between 60 km/h and 80 km/h for approximately three minutes. R All-T All-Terr errain ain vehicles: vehicles: when driving faster than 35 km/h. R A er changing a drive program using the DYNAMIC SELECT switch. The vehicle is adjusted to the height of the last active drive program. Press button 1. Indicator lamp 2 lights up. The vehicle is set to the high level. Your selection is saved. % In the G drive program, the vehicle cannot be raised further by using button 1. # Lowering Lower ing the the vehicle vehicle # Press button 1. Indicator lamp 2 goes out. The vehicle is adjusted to the height of the active drive program. Operation Oper ation with with a trailer trailer or bicycle bicycle rack rack 268 Driving and parking Requirements: R The electrical connection to the transport equipment, such as a trailer or a bicycle rack, is established correctly. All vehicles except All-Terrain vehicles: R Up to approximately 30 km/h: the high level can be selected regardless of the drive program. R From approx. 30 km/h: the vehicle is adjusted to normal level, regardless of drive program. All-Terrain vehicles: Up to approximately 35 km/h: the high level can be selected regardless of the drive program. R From approximately 35 km/h: the vehicle is set to the normal level regardless of the drive program. R Below approximately 20 km/h in the G drive program, the vehicle is raised back up to the high level. R Rever ersing sing camera Function of the the rever reversing sing camera If you have activated the function in the multimedia system (/ page 275), the image from the reversing camera is displayed in the media display when reverse gear is selected. Dynamic guide lines show the path the vehicle will take with the current steering angle. This helps you to orient yourself and to avoid obstacles when reversing. The reversing camera is only an aid. It is not a substitute for your attention to the surroundings. The responsibility for safe manoeuvring and parking remains with you. Make sure that there are no persons, animals or objects etc., in the manoeuvring area while manoeuvring and parking. The guide lines in the media display show the distances to your vehicle. The distances displayed only apply to road level. Depending on the vehicle equipment, you can select from the following views: R Normal view R Wide-angle view R Trailer view The area behind the vehicle is displayed as a mirror image, as in the inside rearview mirror. Vehicles without without Par Parking king Assist Assist PARK PARKTR TRONIC ONIC The following camera views are available in the multimedia system: Normal view 1 Driven surface depending on the current steering angle (dynamic) 2 Guide lines at a distance of approximately 0.5 m, 1.0 m, 1.5 m and 3.0 m from the rear area 3 Lane marking the course the tyres will take with the current steering angle (dynamic) Driving and parking 269 4 Bumper 5 Guide line at a distance of approximately 0.3 m from the rear area Trailer view (vehicles with a trailer hitch) 1 Locating aid 2 Guide line at a distance of approximately Wide-angle view 0.3 m from the ball head of the trailer hitch 3 Ball head of the trailer hitch Vehicles with with Par Parking king Assist Assist PARK PARKTR TRONIC ONIC The following camera views are available in the multimedia system: Normal view 1 Yellow warning display: obstacles at a dis- tance between approximately 0.7 m and 1.0 m 2 Orange warning display: obstacles at a distance between approximately 0.4 m and 0.7 m 3 Guide lines at a distance of approximately 0.5 m, 1.0 m, 1.5 m and 3.0 m from the rear area 4 Yellow lanes marking the course the tyres will take with the current steering angle (dynamic) 270 Driving and parking 5 Driven surface depending on the current 2 Red guide line at a distance of approximately steering angle (dynamic) 6 Guide line at a distance of approximately 0.3 m from the rear area The colour of warning display 1/2 changes dynamically and is based on the distance to the detected obstacle: R Blue: no obstacles detected at a distance less than 1.0 m R Yellow ellow:: obstacles at a distance between approximately 0.7 m and 1.0 m R Or Orang ange: e: obstacles at a distance between approximately 0.4 m and 0.7 m R Red: obstacles at a very short distance of approximately 0.4 m or less 0.3 m from the ball head of the trailer hitch 3 Ball head of the trailer hitch System malfunction System If the reversing camera is not operational, the System inoperative message appears in the media display. Wide-angle view 1 Display of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC % Vehicles with with Activ Activee Par Parking king Assist: Assist: when Active Parking Assist is active, lane markings 4 are displayed in green. Trailer view (vehicles with a trailer hitch) 1 Yellow guide line, locating aid System limits System The reversing camera will not function or will only partially function in the following situations: R The tailgate is open. R The weather conditions are poor, e.g. heavy rain, snow, fog, storm or spray. R The light conditions are poor, e.g. at night. R Cameras, or vehicle components in which the cameras are tted, are damaged, dirty or covered. Observe the information on vehicle sensors and cameras (/ page 229). % Do not use the reversing camera in these types of situations. You could otherwise injure others or collide with objects when parking the vehicle. Driving and parking 271 % The contrast of the display may be impaired by direct sunlight or by other light sources, e.g. when driving out of a garage. In this case, pay particular attention. % Have the display repaired or replaced if, for example, pixel errors considerably restrict its use. animals or objects etc., in the manoeuvring area while manoeuvring and parking. The system evaluates images from the following cameras: R Reversing camera R Front camera R Two side cameras in the outside mirrors 360° Camera View iewss of the the 360° Camera Function of the the 360° Camera The 360° Camera is a system that consists of four cameras which cover the immediate surroundings of the vehicle. The system assists you when you are parking or at exits with reduced visibility, for example. The views of the 360° Camera are always available when driving forwards up to a speed of approx. 16 km/h and when reversing. The 360° Camera is only an aid and may show a distorted view of obstacles, show them incorrectly or not show them at all. It is not a substitute for your attention to the surroundings. The responsibility for safe manoeuvring and parking remains with you. Make sure that there are no persons, 1 Wide-angle view, front 2 Top view with image from the front camera 3 Top view with images from the side cameras in the outside mirrors 4 Wide-angle view, rear 5 Top view with image from the reversing cam- era 6 Top view with trailer view (vehicles with a trailer hitch) Function of the the guide lines Guide lines are also displayed in the camera images of the top views. These are based on the current steering angle and show the distance to objects and other vehicles. 272 Driving and parking 1 Guide lines at a distance of approximately 0.5 m, 1.0 m, 1.5 m and 3.0 m from the rear area 2 Yellow lanes marking the course the tyres will take with the current steering angle (dynamic) 3 Driven surface depending on the current steering angle (dynamic) 4 Guide line at a distance of approximately 0.3 m from the rear area % When Active Parking Assist is active, paths 2 are displayed in green. The guide lines show the distances to your vehicle. The distances apply to road level. In trailer mode, the guide lines are shown at the level of the trailer hitch. In all views, the Parking Assist PARKTRONIC warning display is also shown (/ page 275). The colour of warning display changes dynamically and is based on the distance to the detected obstacle: R Blue: no obstacles detected at a distance less than 1.0 m R Yellow ellow:: obstacles at a distance between approximately 0.7 m and 1.0 m R Or Orang ange: e: obstacles at a distance between approximately 0.4 m and 0.7 m R Red: obstacles at a very short distance of approximately 0.4 m or less % When Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is operational and no object is detected, the warning display is shown here in blue. Wide-angle view, view, front front 1 Warning display of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC Driving and parking 273 Top view view with with image image from from the the front front camera 1 Warning display of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC (/ page 275, 285) 2 Your vehicle from above 3 Lane indicating the route the vehicle will take at the current steering angle Top view view with with images images from from the the side cameras cameras in the outside mirrors mirrors The front and rear sides of the vehicle can be seen in this view. Top view view trailer trailer view view — no trailer trailer connected connected If you select trailer view and no trailer is coupled to the vehicle, the following display appears: 1 Locating aid 2 Guide line at a distance of approximately 0.3 m from the ball head of the trailer hitch 3 Ball head of the trailer hitch Top view view trailer trailer view view — trailer trailer connected connected When the electrical connection is established between the vehicle and the trailer, the display changes to the side camera view. This view supports manoeuvring procedures with a trailer. 274 Driving and parking R R R System limits System If the system is not ready for operation, the System inoperative message appears in the media display. The 360° Camera will not function or will only partially function in the following situations: R You are driving forwards at a speed greater than approximately 16 km/h. R The doors are open. R An outside mirror is not completely folded out. R The boot lid is open. R The weather conditions are poor, e.g. heavy rain, snow, fog, storm or spray. The light conditions are poor, e.g. at night. The camera lens is obstructed, dirty or misted up. If cameras or vehicle components in which the cameras are tted are damaged. In this event, have the cameras, their positions and their setting checked at a quali ed specialist workshop. % Do not use the 360° Camera under such circumstances. You could otherwise injure others or collide with objects when parking the vehicle. For technical reasons, the standard height of the vehicle may be altered if the vehicle is carrying a heavy load and can result in inaccuracies in the guide lines and in the display of the generated images. The eld of vision and other functions of the camera system may be restricted due to additional attachments on the vehicle (e.g. licence plate bracket, bicycle rack). % The contrast of the display may be impaired by abrupt, direct sunlight or by other light sources, e.g. when driving out of a garage. In this case, pay particular attention. % Have the display repaired or replaced if, for example, pixel errors considerably restrict its use. See the notes on cleaning the 360° Camera (/ page 385). Calling up the the view view of the the 360° Camera Camera using reverse rever se gear gear Req equir uirements: ements: R The Auto reversing camera function is activated in the multimedia system (/ page 275). # # # Engage reverse gear. Select the desired view in the multimedia system (/ page 271). If, a er shi ing to reverse gear, the image of the reversing camera is not shown: switch o the vehicle, press and hold the c button, switch on the vehicle and engage reverse gear again. Driving and parking 275 Switching rever Switching reversing sing camera camera automatic automatic mode on/o The reversing camera is only an aid. It is not a substitute for your attention to the surroundings. The responsibility for safe manoeuvring and parking remains with you. Make sure that no persons, animals or objects etc. are in the manoeuvring range. Pay attention to your surroundings and be ready to brake at all times. Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Assistance 5 Camera & parking # Switch Auto reversing camera on or o . Par arking king Assist Assist PARK PARKTR TRONIC ONIC Function of Par Parking king Assist Assist PARK PARKTR TRONIC ONIC Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is an electronic parking assistance system which monitors the area surrounding your vehicle and shows you the distance between the vehicle and a detected obstacle visually and audibly. Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is only an aid. It is not a substitute for your attention to the surround- ings. The responsibility for safe manoeuvring and parking remains with you. Make sure that there are no persons, animals or objects in the manoeuvring area while manoeuvring and parking in/exiting parking spaces. The passive side impact protection also warns you of obstacles to the side. During the parking procedure or manoeuvring, objects are detected as the vehicle drives past. If you steer in the direction of a detected obstacle and there is a risk of a lateral collision, a warning is issued. In order for an object on the side to be detected, the sensors in the front and rear bumper must rst detect the object while you are driving past it. In order for front or rear obstacles to the side to be displayed, the vehicle must rst travel a distance of at least half a vehicle length. Once the vehicle has travelled one vehicle length, obstacles on all sides can be shown. Displayss in the Display the media display Vehicles with 360° Camera Vehicles without 360° Camera 276 Driving and parking As soon as Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is operational, the respective areas of the display are shown in blue. 1 Operational, front and rear 2 Operational, all around 3 Obstacles detected at the front le and on the right-hand side The colour of the display changes depending on the distance to the detected obstacle: R Blue: > 1 m (no obstacles detected) R Yellow ellow:: approximately 1 m - 0.7 m R Or Orang ange: e: approximately 0.7 m - 0.4 m R Red: < 0.4 m Vehicles with with 360° Camera: Camera: the boundary line shi s dynamically depending on the position and distance of the obstacles detected. Depending on the distance to the obstacle detected, an intermittent warning tone also sounds. You can set the timing of the warnings in the multimedia system (/ page 279). Standard setting: R Front and sides: < 0.4 m R Rear ear:: < 1 m Warn early all-round: R Fr Front ont:: < 1 m R Sides: < 0.7 m R Rear ear:: < 1 m A continuous warning tone sounds from a distance of approximately 0.2 m, regardless of the selected setting. Vehicles with 360° Camera Vehicles without 360° Camera If an obstacle in the vehicle path is detected and the Camera & parking menu is not open in the media display, pop-up window 1 appears: R vehicles without without Activ Activee Par Parking king Assist: Assist: at speeds below 12 km/h R vehicles with with Activ Activee Par Parking king Assist: Assist: at speeds below 18 km/h Driving and parking 277 R R Pedestrians or animals approaching the vehicle from the side. Objects placed next to the vehicle. Problems Pr oblems with with Par Parking king Assist Assist PARK PARKTR TRONIC ONIC Obstacles on the sides are not shown in the following situations, for example: R You park the vehicle and switch it o . R You open the doors. Optionally, obstacles detected by Parking Assist PARKTRONIC from a distance of approximately 1.0 m in front 2 and 0.7 m on the side 3 can also be displayed in the head-up display. System limits System Parking Assist PARKTRONIC does not necessarily take into account the following obstacles: R Obstacles below the detection range, e.g. persons, animals or objects. R Obstacles above the detection range, e.g. overhanging loads, overhangs or loading ramps of lorries. A er an engine start, obstacles must be detected again by driving past them before a warning can be issued. Observe the information on vehicle sensors and cameras; the system otherwise cannot function properly (/ page 229). Vehicles with with trailer trailer hitch: hitch: Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is deactivated for the rear zone when you establish an electrical connection between your vehicle and a trailer. 1 Vehicles with 360° Camera 2 Vehicles without 360° Camera If the Parking Assist PARKTRONIC display lights up red for approximately three seconds then goes out, and the é symbol appears in the instrument cluster, the system may have been deactivated due to signal interference. Start the vehicle again and check if Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is working at a di erent location. 278 Driving and parking If the é symbol appears in the instrument cluster and a warning tone sounds, it may be due to one of the following causes: R The sensors sensors are are dirty dir ty:: clean the sensors and observe the notes on care of vehicle parts (/ page 385). R Par arking king Assist Assist PARK PARKTR TRONIC ONIC has been deactivat ated ed due to to a malfunction: restart the vehicle. If the problem persists, consult a quali ed specialist workshop. Activ ctivating/deactiv ating/deactivating ating Par Parking king Assist PARK ARKTR TRONIC ONIC * NOTE NOTE Risk of an accident from objects at close range Parking Assist PARKTRONIC may not detect certain objects at close range. # When parking or manoeuvring the vehicle, pay particular attention to any objects which are above or below the sensors, e.g. owerpots or drawbars. The vehicle or other objects could otherwise be damaged. Vehicles without without AIR BODY BODY CONTR CONTROL: OL: press the é button in the centre console. % Vehicles with with AIR BODY BODY CONTR CONTROL: OL: you can activate or deactivate Parking Assist PARKTRONIC in the multimedia system (/ page 278). If the indicator lamp in the é button is not lit, Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is active. If the indicator lamp is lit or the é symbol appears in the Instrument Display, Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is not active. % Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is automatically activated when the vehicle is started. # Activ ctivating/deactiv ating/deactivating ating Par Parking king Assist PARK ARKTR TRONIC ONIC using the the multimedia system system * NOTE NOTE Risk of an accident from objects at close range Parking Assist PARKTRONIC may not detect certain objects at close range. # When parking or manoeuvring the vehicle, pay particular attention to any objects which are above or below the sensors, e.g. owerpots or drawbars. The vehicle or other objects could otherwise be damaged. Req equir uirements: ements: R The camera menu is open. R Or: Active Parking Assist is active. R Or: the PARKTRONIC pop-up window appears. # Tap = on the media display. If the indicator lamp is lit, Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is active. If the indicator lamp is not lit or the é symbol appears in the instrument cluster, Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is not active. % Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is automatically activated when the vehicle is started. Alternatively, Parking Assist PARKTRONIC can be activated or deactivated in the quick access menu. Driving and parking 279 Setting Se tting the the war warning ning tones tones of Par Parking king Assist PARK ARKTR TRONIC ONIC Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Assistance 5 Camera & parking when Parking Assist PARKTRONIC sounds a warning tone. # Select Audio fadeout during warning tones. # Switch the function on or o . Adjus djusting ting the the volume volume of the the war warning ning tones tones # Select Warning tone volume. # Set a value. Activ ctivee Par Parking king Assist Adjus djusting ting the the pitch pitch of the the war warning ning tones tones # Select Warning tone pitch. # Set a value. Specifying the the star starting ting point for for the the war warning ning tones tones You can specify whether the Parking Assist PARKTRONIC warning tones should commence when the vehicle is further away from an obstacle. # Select Warn early all-round. # Switch the function on or o . Activ ctivating/deactiv ating/deactivating ating audio fadeout fadeout You can specify whether the volume of a media source in the multimedia system is to be reduced Function of Activ Activee Par Parking king Assist Active Parking Assist is an electronic parking assistance system, which uses ultrasound with the assistance of the reversing camera and 360° Camera. When you are driving forwards up to approximately 35 km/h, the system automatically measures parking spaces on both sides of the vehicle. Active Parking Assist o ers the following functions: Vehicles with reversing camera R Parking in parking spaces parallel to the road Vehicles with 360° Camera R Parking in parking spaces parallel to the road R Parking in parking spaces perpendicular to the road (optionally either forwards or reverse) R R Parking in parking spaces that can only be detected as such due to markings (for example at the roadside) Exiting parking spaces if you have parked using Active Parking Assist As soon as all requirements are met for searching for parking spaces, the Ç display appears in the Instrument Display. When Active Parking Assist has detected parking spaces, the È display appears in the Instrument Display. The arrows show on which side of the road detected parking spaces are located. They are then shown in the media display. Vehicles with with rever reversing sing camera: camera: the parking space can be selected as desired. The vehicle is parked in reverse. Vehicles with with 360° Camera: Camera: the parking space can be selected as desired. Depending on the location of the parking space, the parking direction (rearwards or forwards) can also be selected as desired. 280 Driving and parking When Active Parking Assist is activated, the turn signal indicators are activated based on the calculated path of your vehicle. The parking procedure is assisted by accelerating, braking, steering and gear changes. Active Parking Assist is only an aid. It is not a substitute for your attention to the surroundings. The responsibility for safe manoeuvring and parking remains with you. Make sure that no persons, animals or objects etc. are in the manoeuvring range. Active Parking Assist will be cancelled in the following situations: R Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is deactivated. R You begin steering. R You engage transmission position j. R ESP® intervenes. R You open the driver's door. R A er activating Active Parking Assist, you press the c button again (/ page 281). System limits System If the exterior lighting is malfunctioning, Active Parking Assist is not available. Objects located above or below the detection range of the sensors, e.g. overhanging loads, overhangs or loading ramps of goods vehicles, or the borders of parking spaces, are not detected during measurement of the parking space. These are also then not taken into account when calculating the parking procedure. In some circumstances, Active Parking Assist may therefore guide you into the parking space incorrectly. & WARNING Risk of accident due to objects located above or below the detection range of Active Parking Assist If there are objects above or below the detection range, the following situations may arise: R Active Parking Assist may steer too early. R The vehicle may not stop in front of these objects. There is a danger of collision! # In these situations, do not use Active Parking Assist. Extreme weather conditions, such as snow or heavy rain, may lead to a parking space being measured inaccurately. Parking spaces that are partially occupied by trailer drawbars might not be identi ed as such or be measured incorrectly. Only use Active Parking Assist on level, high-grip ground. Do not use Active Parking Assist in the following situations: R In extreme weather conditions such as ice, packed snow or in heavy rain. R When transporting a load that protrudes beyond the vehicle. R On steep uphill or downhill gradients of more than approximately 15%. R When snow chains are tted. R When a trailer or bicycle rack is attached. R Directly a er a tyre change or when spare tyres are tted. R If the tyre pressure is too low or too high. Driving and parking 281 R If the suspension is out of alignment, e.g. a er bottoming out on a kerb. # Press button 1. Active Parking Assist may also display parking spaces that are not suitable for parking, such as: R Parking spaces where parking is prohibited. R Parking spaces on unsuitable surfaces. The turn signal indicator is switched on automatically when the parking procedure begins. You are responsible for selecting the turn signal indicator in accordance with the tra c conditions. If necessary, select the turn signal indicator accordingly. & WARNING Risk of accident due to vehicle swinging out while parking or pulling out of a parking space Par arking king with with Activ Activee Par Parking king Assist Parking spaces detected by the system are shown in the media display. When the vehicle is stationary, indicated vehicle path 2 into currently selected parking space 3 also appears. # If a parking space is displayed: stop the vehicle. # If necessary, select another parking space. # Vehicles with with 360° Camera: Camera: if necessary, change the parking direction. # To star startt the the parking parking procedur procedure: e: con rm selected parking space 3. While parking or exiting a parking space, the vehicle swings out and can drive onto areas of the oncoming lane. This could cause you to collide with objects or other road users. # Pay attention to objects and other road users. # Where necessary, stop the vehicle or cancel the parking procedure with Active Parking Assist. # If, for example, the Please engage reverse gear message appears in the media display: 282 Driving and parking select the corresponding transmission position. The vehicle drives into the selected parking space. % During the parking procedure with Active Parking Assist, the lane markings are displayed in green in the camera image. On completion of the parking procedure, the Parking Assist finished, take control of vehicle message appears. Further manoeuvring may still be necessary. # Secure the vehicle against rolling away. When required by legal requirements or local conditions: turn the wheels towards the kerb. % You can stop the vehicle and change the transmission position during the parking procedure. The system then calculates a new vehicle path. If no new vehicle path is available, the transmission position can be changed again, or the process can be cancelled. Exiting a parking parking space with with Activ Activee Par Parking king Assist Req equir uirements: ements: R The vehicle is equipped with a 360° Camera. R The vehicle has been parked with Active Parking Assist. Please note that you are responsible for the vehicle and surroundings during the entire parking procedure. # Start the vehicle. # Press button 1. The media display shows the view of Active Parking Assist. # Select Exit space 2. or # # If the vehicle has been parked perpendicular to the direction of travel: select direction of travel 3. If, for example, the Please engage forward gear message appears in the media display: select the corresponding transmission position. The vehicle moves out of the parking space and is brought to a standstill by Active Parking Assist (at an angle to the direction of travel). The Ø Parking Assist finished, take control of vehicle message appears. Driving and parking 283 Take control of the vehicle and complete the parking process. % The vehicle path shown on the media display may di er from the actual vehicle path. The turn signal indicator is switched on automatically when the exiting procedure begins. You are responsible for selecting the turn signal indicator in accordance with the tra c conditions. If necessary, select the turn signal indicator accordingly. # Pausing Activ Activee Par Parking king Assist You can interrupt the parking or exiting procedure of Active Parking Assist by performing one of the following actions, for example: # depressing the brake pedal # opening the front passenger door, a rear door, the boot or the bonnet # applying the electric parking brake or activating the HOLD function # To resume resume the the parking parking or exiting exiting procedur procedure: e: gently depress the accelerator pedal. % If the electric parking brake was applied before Active Parking Assist was activated, depress the accelerator pedal lightly to start the parking or exiting procedure. Check the area around your vehicle again before resuming a paused parking procedure. Make sure that persons, animals or objects are no longer in the manoeuvring range. Also observe the system limitations of Active Parking Assist. Aut utomatic omatic braking braking function of Activ Activee Par Parking king Assist Persons or objects detected in the manoeuvring range could cause the vehicle to brake sharply and interrupt the parking or exiting procedure. The vehicle will then be held at a standstill. If you depress the accelerator pedal, the parking or exiting procedure is resumed. Check the area around your vehicle again before resuming the parking or exiting procedure. Make sure that persons, animals or objects are no longer in the manoeuvring range. Also observe the system limitations of Active Parking Assist. Manoeuvring Manoeuvr ing assistant assistant Function of Driv Drivee Away Away Assist Drive Away Assist can reduce the severity of an impact when pulling away. If an obstacle is detected in the direction of travel, the vehicle's speed is brie y reduced to approx. 2 km/h. If a critical situation is detected, the É symbol appears in the media display. Drive Away Assist can be deactivated or activated in the Manoeuvring assistance menu (/ page 285). % You can cancel an intervention by Drive Away Assist at any time by deactivating Parking Assist PARKTRONIC (/ page 278). & WARNING Risk of accident caused by limited detection performance of Drive Away Assist Drive Away Assist cannot always clearly identify objects and tra c situations. # Always pay careful attention to the tra c situation; do not rely on Drive Away Assist alone. 284 Driving and parking # Be prepared to brake or swerve as necessary, provided the tra c situation permits and that it is safe to take evasive action. Drive Away Assist is only an aid. It is not a substitute for your attention to the surroundings. The responsibility for safe manoeuvring and parking remains with you. Make sure that no persons, animals or objects etc. are in the manoeuvring range. A risk of collision may occur in the following situations, for example: R If the accelerator and brake pedals are interchanged. R If an incorrect transmission position is engaged. Drive Away Assist is active under the following conditions: R If Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is activated. R If you shi the transmission position to k or h when the vehicle is stationary. R R If the detected obstacle is less than approx. 1.0 m away. If the manoeuvring assistance function is activated in the multimedia system. System limits System The performance of Drive Away Assist is limited on inclines. When driving with a trailer, Drive Away Assist is not available. % Also observe the system limits of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC (/ page 275). Function of Cross Cross Tr Traa c Alert % Cross Tra c Alert is only available for vehicles with Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist. Cross Tra c Alert can warn drivers of any crossing tra c when reversing and manoeuvring out of a parking space. The radar sensors in the bumper also monitor the area adjacent to the vehicle. If a critical situation is detected, the L symbol appears in the media display and the vehicle can be braked automatically. If the radar sensors are obstructed by vehicles or other objects, detection is not possible. Depending on the country, Cross Tra c Alert can be deactivated or activated in the Manoeuvring assistance menu (/ page 285). % Also observe the instructions on Blind Spot Assist and Active Blind Spot Assist (/ page 259). System limits System Cross Tra c Alert is not available on inclines. Cross Tra c Alert is not available when driving with a trailer. Manoeuvring brak Manoeuvring brakee function The manoeuvring brake function can prevent collisions with pedestrians when the vehicle is reversing at slow speeds. If the reversing camera detects a person in the vehicle path, the vehicle can be braked to a standstill. The manoeuvring brake function can intervene under the following conditions: R The vehicle is reversing at a speed slower than 10 km/h. Driving and parking 285 R The camera image is shown in the media display (/ page 275). You can activate and deactivate the manoeuvring brake function in the Manoeuvring assistance menu (/ page 285). If the manoeuvring brake function is triggered, the following symbol appears in red in the selected view in the Camera & parking menu: % If the manoeuvring brake function is not available, the same symbol appears in grey. The manoeuvring brake function is only an aid. It is not a substitute for your attention to the surroundings. The responsibility for safe manoeuvring and parking remains with you. Make sure that no persons, animals or objects etc. are in the manoeuvring range. & WARNING Risk of accident caused by limited detection by the manoeuvring brake function The manoeuvring brake function cannot always clearly detect people. Other obstacles are not detected by the function. In these cases, the function may brake unnecessarily or not brake at all. # Always pay careful attention to the tra c situation; do not rely on the manoeuvring brake function alone. # Be ready to brake. System limits System Observe the system limits of the following functions: R Active Parking Assist (/ page 279) R 360° Camera (/ page 271) R Reversing camera (/ page 268) The manoeuvring brake function is not available in the following situations: R on inclines R if transport equipment, for example a trailer or bicycle rack, is attached to the trailer hitch and the electrical connection has been correctly established Activ ctivating/deactiv ating/deactivating ating manoeuvring manoeuvring assistance assistance Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Assistance 5 Camera & parking # Activate/deactivate Manoeuvring assistance. Trailer Manoeuvring Manoeuvring Assist Function of Trailer Trailer Manoeuvring Manoeuvring Assist & WARNING Risk of accident due to unsuitable trailers Trailers with a steered axle or a h wheel cannot be used with Trailer Manoeuvring Assist. Due to this, the trailer cannot be manoeuvred in the desired direction and you can cause a collision or the trailer can overturn. 286 Driving and parking # Only use Trailer Manoeuvring Assist with trailers with xed drawbars and axles. * NOTE Damage due to overhanging loads in front or drawbar installations The vehicle and the trailer may be damaged during manoeuvring due to overhanging loads at the front of the trailer or drawbar installations. # Pay attention to overhanging loads or drawbar installations while manoeuvring. Trailer Manoeuvring Assist assists you when reversing with a trailer. Using the reversing camera, it monitors the articulation angle between the vehicle and trailer and adjusts it to a speci ed value. Trailer Manoeuvring Assist also limits your speed. Trailer Manoeuvring Assist is only an aid. It is not a substitute for your attention to the surroundings. The responsibility for safe manoeuvring and parking remains with you. Make sure that there are no persons, animals or objects in the manoeu- vring area while manoeuvring and parking in/exiting parking spaces. You can either enter the articulation angle value directly via the multimedia system or use a straightening manoeuvre. When carrying out a straightening manoeuvre, the system calculates the articulation angle automatically and straightens the vehicle/trailer combination to the trailer's current direction. Observe the notes on towing a trailer (/ page 287). System limits System Observe the system limits of the following functions: R Active Parking Assist (/ page 279) R 360° Camera (/ page 271) R Reversing camera (/ page 268) The system may be impaired or may not function in the following situations: R The gradient is greater than approximately 15%. Using Trailer Trailer Manoeuvring Manoeuvring Assist Req equir uirements: ements: R The vehicle has been started and is stationary. R A trailer has been detected. R The gradient is less than approximately 15%. R The tailgate is closed. R The electric parking brake is not applied. R The driver's seat belt is fastened. Driving and parking 287 Using Trailer Trailer Manoeuvring Manoeuvring Assist or To activate the straightening manoeuvre: select º. The system calculates the articulation angle in such a way that the direction of the trailer at the time of activation is maintained. There is a short countersteering movement of the trailer while the vehicle is reversed, which then guides it back to the desired line. In this way, the vehicle is aligned straight with the trailer and, at the same time, the direction of the trailer is maintained. # Accelerate and brake as required. % The maximum articulation angle depends on the length of the trailer. This is calculated by the system by driving the vehicle forwards, including cornering. Before the length of the trailer has been calculated, the maximum articulation angle is approximately 23°. The longer the trailer is, the higher the maximum articulation angle (max. approximately 60°). % Pay attention to your surroundings and be ready to brake at all times. # # # # Engage reverse gear k. Press button 1. The camera image is shown in the media display. To adjust the articulation angle: select ¸. Swipe le or right on the media display or touchpad to change the articulation angle. Trailer hitch Notes on trailer trailer operation operation * NOTE Mercedes-AMG vehicles # Observe the notes in the Supplement. You could otherwise fail to recognise dangers. Observe the following notes on the tongue weight: Do not use a tongue weight that exceeds or falls below the permissible tongue weight R Use a tongue weight as close as possible to the maximum tongue weight R Do not exceed the following values: Permissible towing capacity R Permissible rear axle load of the towing vehicle R Permissible gross weight of the towing vehicle R Permissible gross weight of the trailer R Maximum permissible speed of the trailer R 288 Driving and parking Ensure the following before starting a journey: R The tyre pressure on the rear axle of the towing vehicle is set for a maximum load R The lighting of the connected trailer is operational R Vehicles without without LED headlamps headlamps or MULTIMULTIBEAM LED headlamps: headlamps: the headlamps have been set correctly In the event of increased rear axle load, the car/ trailer combination must not exceed a maximum speed of 100 km/h for reasons concerning the operating permit. This also applies in countries in which the permissible maximum speed for car/ trailer combinations is above 100 km/h. % When you are reversing with a trailer, remember to use the Trailer Manoeuvering Assist function (/ page 285). Extending Ext ending and retr retracting acting the the ball neck neck fully fully electrielectrically & WARNING Risk of accident due to the ball neck not being engaged If the ball neck is not engaged, the trailer may come loose. # Make sure that the ball neck securely engages and locks into place. * NOTE Damage to the all-electric trailer hitch due to additional pressure The all-electric trailer hitch could be mechanically damaged by applying additional pressure when the ball neck is being extended or retracted. # Do not make the ball neck extend/ retract faster by applying additional pressure. * NOTE Increased risk of damage to property due to folded-out ball neck # When the trailer is not coupled or the bicycle rack is attached, fold in the ball neck or, in the case of a fully electric trailer hitch, retract the ball neck. * NOTE Damage to the vehicle due to incorrect use of the trailer hitch When a trailer hitch is used to recover a vehicle, the vehicle may be damaged in the process. # Use the trailer hitch only for pulling a trailer or attaching approved carrier systems (e.g. a bicycle rack). Req equir uirements: ements: R The vehicle is secured against rolling away. R The swivel range is clear. R The trailer cables or adapter plugs have been removed. Driving and parking 289 Extending Ext ending the the ball neck neck fully fully electrically electrically # Pull button 2. Indicator lamp 1 will ash and the message Trailer coupling extending… will appear on the instrument display. The ball neck will extend fully electrically. # Wait until the ball neck has locked in place. When indicator lamp 1 is continuously lit, the ball neck is securely locked in place. If the ball neck is not securely locked in place, indicator lamp 1 will ash and the message Check trailer hitch lock will appear on the instrument display. Retr tracting acting the the ball neck neck fully fully electrically electrically # Pull button 2. Indicator lamp 1 will ash and the message Trailer coupling extending… will appear on the instrument display. The ball neck will retract fully electrically. # Wait until the ball neck has locked in place. When indicator lamp 1 goes out, the ball neck is securely locked in place. If the ball neck is not securely locked in place, indicator lamp 1 will ash and the message Check trailer hitch lock will appear on the instrument display. Observe the information about the displays on the instrument cluster: R Indicator and warning lamps (/ page 517) R Display messages (/ page 449) 290 Driving and parking Extending Ext ending and retr retracting acting the the ball neck neck fully fully electrielectrically (multimedia system) cally system) & WARNING Risk of accident due to the ball neck not being engaged If the ball neck is not engaged, the trailer may come loose. # Always engage the ball neck as described. * NOTE Damage to the all-electric trailer hitch due to additional pressure The all-electric trailer hitch could be mechanically damaged by applying additional pressure when the ball neck is being extended or retracted. # Do not make the ball neck extend/ retract faster by applying additional pressure. Req equir uirements: ements: R The vehicle is secured against rolling away. R The swivel range is clear. R The trailer cables or adapter plugs have been removed. Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Quick access Extending Ext ending the the ball neck neck fully fully electrically electrically # Select Ü. The Trailer coupling extending… display message will appear on the multifunction display. The ball neck will extend fully electrically. # Wait until the ball neck has locked in place. If the ball neck is not securely locked in place, the Check trailer hitch lock message will appear on the multifunction display. Retr tracting acting the the ball neck neck fully fully electrically electrically # Select Ü. The Trailer coupling extending… display message will appear on the multifunction display. The ball neck will retract fully electrically. # Wait until the ball neck has locked in place. If the ball neck is not securely locked in place, the Check trailer hitch lock message will appear on the multifunction display. Coupling up/uncoupling a trailer trailer & WARNING Risk of injury from the vehicle level being changed Vehicles with with level level control control system: system: the vehicle level may be changed unintentionally, e.g. by other persons. You may become trapped if you couple up or uncouple a trailer while the vehicle level is changing. In addition, other people could become trapped if their limbs are between the vehicle body and the tyres or underneath the vehicle. When coupling up or uncoupling a trailer, make sure that: # The doors or tailgate are not opened or closed. # You do not initiate the level control system and do not operate the DYNAMIC SELECT switch. Driving and parking 291 # Do not lock or unlock the vehicle. Req equir uirements: ements: R The ball neck is extended and engaged in a securely locked position. R All-T All-Terr errain ain vehicles: vehicles: couple up the trailer in the Comfort drive program A. (/ page 197) R All-T All-Terr errain ain vehicles: vehicles: ensure the vehicle is at the normal level. (/ page 266) Trailers with a 7-pin plug can be connected to the vehicle with the following adapters: R Adapter plug R Adapter cable The trailer will be correctly detected by the vehicle only if the following conditions are met: R The trailer is connected correctly. R The trailer lighting system is in working order. The functions of the following systems will be a ected by a correctly connected trailer: R ESP® trailer stabilisation R Trailer Manoeuvering Assist R R R R R R R R R Active Lane Keeping Assist Parking Assist PARKTRONIC Active Parking Assist Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist Drive Away Assist Cross Tra c Alert Reversing camera 360° camera AIR BODY CONTROL # Position the trailer on a level surface behind the vehicle and couple it up to the vehicle. # Open the socket cap. Insert the plug with lug 1 in groove 3 on the socket. Turn bayonet coupling 2 to the right as far as it will go. Let the cap engage. Secure the cable to the trailer with cable ties (only if you are using an adapter cable). Make sure that the cable is always slack for ease of movement during cornering. Coupling up a trailer trailer * NOTE NOTE Damage to the starter battery due to full discharge Charging the trailer battery using the power supply of the trailer can damage the starter battery. # Do not use the vehicle's power supply to charge the trailer battery. # Remove the cover cap from the ball head and store it in a safe place. # # # # # 292 Driving and parking Under the following conditions, a message may appear on the instrument display even if the trailer has been connected correctly: R LEDs have been installed in the trailer lighting system. R The current has fallen below the trailer lighting system's minimum current (50 mA). * NOTE Damage when uncoupling in a state of overrun * NOTE Damage to the rear bumper from installing adapter cables or adapter plugs Uncoupling in a state of overrun can damage the vehicle. # Do not uncouple trailers with an engaged overrun brake. % Accessories can be connected to the permanent power supply up to 180 W and to the power supply that is switched on via the ignition lock. & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when disconnecting the trailer cable The following parts could be damaged when swiveling the ball neck fully electrically: R Bumper R Adapter cable R Adapter plug Uncoupling a trailer trailer & WARNING Risk of being crushed and becoming trapped when uncoupling a trailer When uncoupling a trailer with an engaged inertia-activated brake, your hand may become trapped between the vehicle and the trailer drawbar. # Do not uncouple trailers with an engaged overrun brake. Vehicles with with level level control control system: system: The vehicle may lower when the trailer cable is disconnected. This could result in you or other people becoming trapped if your or their limbs are between the vehicle body and the tyres or underneath the vehicle. # Make sure that nobody is underneath the vehicle or in the immediate vicinity of the wheel arches when you disconnect the trailer cable. # # # # # Always remove the adapter cable or adapter plug before swiveling the ball neck fully electrically. Secure the trailer against rolling away. Disconnect the electrical connection between the vehicle and the trailer. Uncouple the trailer. Place the cover cap on the ball head. Driving and parking 293 Bicycle Bicy cle rac rackk function R & WARNING Risk of an accident if the bicycle rack is used incorrectly R The bicycle rack may become detached from the vehicle in the following cases: R the permissible load capacity of the trailer hitch is exceeded. R the bicycle rack is used incorrectly. R the bicycle rack is secured to the ball neck beneath the ball head. Observe the following for your own safety and that of other road users: R always adhere to the permissible load capacity of the trailer hitch. R always observe the permissible rear axle load of the towing vehicle. R use the bicycle rack only to transport bicycles. R R always mount the bicycle rack properly by attaching to the ball head and the ball neck guide pin, if possible. when transporting four bicycles, always use bicycle racks which have additional support on the ball neck guide pin. use only bicycle racks approved by Mercedes-Benz. always observe the bicycle rack operating instructions. neck or, in the case of a fully electric trailer hitch, retract the ball neck. * NOTE Damage to, or cracks on, the trailer hitch due to unsuitable bicycle racks or bicycle racks being used incorrectly # use only bicycle racks approved by Mercedes-Benz. * NOTE Increased risk of damage to property due to folded-out ball neck # When the trailer is not coupled or the bicycle rack is attached, fold in the ball Trailer hitch (example with additional guide pin) Depending on the bicycle rack's design, di erent numbers of bicycles can be transported. 294 Driving and parking The following bicycle rack designs are possible: R When mounted by attaching to ball head 1, the maximum load capacity is 75 kg. You can transport up to three bicycles. R When mounted on ball head 1 and guide pin 2, the maximum load capacity is 100 kg. You can transport up to four bicycles. The maximum load capacity is calculated from the weight of the bicycle rack and the bicycle rack load. Observe the notes on driving with a roof load, trailer or fully laden vehicle (/ page 182). When using a bicycle rack, set the tyre pressure for increased load on the rear axle of the vehicle. Further information on the tyre pressure can be found in the tyre pressure table (/ page 413). Notes on loading The larger the distance between the load's centre of gravity and the ball head, the greater the load on the trailer hitch. Observe the following notes: mount heavy bicycles as close to the vehicle as possible R always distribute the load on the bicycle rack as evenly as possible across the vehicle's longitudinal axis R Mercedes-Benz recommends removing all detachable parts from bicycles (e.g. baskets, child seats, rechargeable batteries) before loading them onto the bicycle rack. This will improve the aerodynamic resistance and centre of gravity of the bicycle rack. Always secure the bicycles to prevent them from moving around and check them at regular intervals to ensure that they are secure. Do not use tarpaulins or other covers. The driving characteristics and rear view may be impaired. In addition, aerodynamic resistance and the load on the trailer hitch will increase. Load distribution on the bicycle rack 1 Vertical distance between centre of gravity and ball head 2 Horizontal distance between centre of gravity and ball head 3 The centre of gravity is on the vehicle's centre axis Observe the following information when loading the bicycle rack: Driving and parking 295 Loading the the bicycle bicycle rack rack 3 bicycles bicycles 4 bicycles bicycles Up to 75 kg Up to 100 kg Max. distance 1 420 mm 420 mm Max. distance 2 300 mm 400 mm Total weight of bicycle rack and load When transporting four bicycles or a total weight between 75 kg and 100 kg, always use bicycle racks with additional support on the trailer hitch guide pin. Vehicle towing towing instr instructions uctions The vehicle is not suitable for the use of tow bar systems that are used for at towing or dinghy towing, for example. Attaching and using tow bar systems can result in damage to the vehicle. When you are towing a vehicle with tow bar systems, safe driving characteristics cannot be guar- anteed for the towing vehicle or the towed vehicle. The vehicle-trailer combination may swerve from side to side. Observe the following information: R Permitted towing methods (/ page 402) R The notes on towing the vehicle with both axles on the ground (/ page 403) 296 Instrument display and on-board computer Notes on the the instr instrument ument display display and on-board computer comput er & WARNING Risk of accident if the instrument display fails If the instrument display has failed or is malfunctioning, function restrictions in systems relevant to safety cannot be detected. The operating safety of your vehicle may be impaired. # Drive on carefully. # Have the vehicle checked immediately at a quali ed specialist workshop. If the operating safety of your vehicle is impaired, park the vehicle immediately and safely. Contact a quali ed specialist workshop. Plug-in hybr hybrid: id: & WARNING Risk of accident if the instrument display fails In the event of a failure or malfunction of the instrument display, you will not recognise limi- tations in the functions of systems relevant to safety. This may impair operating safety. # Park the vehicle safely as soon as possible and notify a quali ed specialist workshop. & WARNING Risk of distraction due to information systems and communications equipment If you operate information systems and communications equipment integrated in the vehicle when driving, you could be distracted from the tra c situation. This could also cause you to lose control of the vehicle. # Only operate this equipment when the tra c situation permits. # If you cannot be sure of this, stop the vehicle in accordance with the tra c conditions and operate the equipment with the vehicle stationary. * NOTE Mercedes-AMG vehicles # Observe the notes in the Supplement. You could otherwise fail to recognise dangers. You must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operating the on-board computer. The on-board computer shows only display messages and warnings from speci c systems on the instrument display. You must therefore ensure that your vehicle is always reliable. If the operating safety of your vehicle is impaired, park the vehicle immediately and in accordance with the tra c conditions. Contact a quali ed specialist workshop. Instrument display and on-board computer 297 Over Ov ervie view w of instr instrument ument display 1 Speedometer The segments on the speedometer indicate the statuses of the following systems: cruise control/limiter/Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC 2 Index points 3 Outside temperature 4 Time 5 Area for additional values (example: rev coun- ter): rev counter/navigation/ECO display/ consumption/G-meter/date The fuel supply will be interrupted to protect the engine when the red mark on the rev counter (overrevving range) is reached. Plug-in hybrid: electric motor power availability display or power meter 6 Coolant temperature display During normal operation, the coolant temperature display is permitted to rise to 120°C. Vehicles with 48 V on-board electrical system: POWER and CHARGE displays (electrical drive 298 Instrument display and on-board computer 7 8 9 A support and recuperation power of the electric motor) Plug-in hybrid: current state of charge of the high-voltage battery Selected drive program Selected transmission position Centre display area of the instrument display (example: standard display for a trip): assistance/telephone/navigation/trip/media/ radio/styles and displays/service/possible settings for head-up display Fuel level and fuel ller ap location indicator Overvie Over view w of buttons buttons on the the steer steering ing wheel Depending on the equipment, the layout and the design of the control elements on the steering wheel may di er. 5 ò Main menu, MBUX multimedia system 6 Touch Control, MBUX multimedia system To navigate: swipe To con rm: press a 7 G Back button, MBUX multimedia system 8 Control panel for the MBUX multimedia system £ LINGUATRONIC (/ page 305) 9 To adjust the brightness of the instrument lighting 1 Control panel for cruise control/limiter or Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC (/ page 239) 2 G Back button, on-board computer 3 Touch Control, on-board computer To navigate: swipe To con rm: press a 4 ò Main menu, on-board computer Operating Oper ating the the on-board on-board comput computer er Observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operating the on-board computer. Instrument display and on-board computer 299 R R R R R R The on-board computer is operated using the le hand Touch Control and the le -hand back/home button. When the on-board computer is being operated, di erent acoustic signals will sound as operating feedback, e.g. when the end of a list is reached or when you are scrolling through a list. % To operate the Touch Control in the most e ective way, use the tip of your thumb if possible. The following menus are available: R Assistance R Telephone Navigation Trip Radio Media Service Vehicles with with an instr instrument ument display display in the the widescreen widescr een cockpit: cockpit: Design % You can nd information about the possible settings and selections on the menus in the Digital Owner's Manual. The menus can be called up from the menu bar on the instrument display. # To call up the the menu bar: press the le -hand back button until the menu bar is displayed. % Vehicles without without Activ Activee Distance Distance Assist Assist DISTR DIS TRONIC: ONIC: press the ò button to call up the menu bar of the on-board computer. # To scroll scroll on the the menu bar: bar: swipe le or right on the le -hand Touch Control. # # # To call up a menu, submenu or possible setsettings on the the menu, or con rm a selection or setting: se tting: press the le -hand Touch Control. To scroll scroll thr through ough displays displays or lists lists on the the menu, or select display display content, content, a function, an entry entr y or a display: display: swipe upwards or downwards on the le -hand Touch Control. To exit exit a submenu: press the le -hand back button. Selecting the the head-up display # To switch switch on the the head-up display: display: switch on the head-up display via the multimedia system or activate it on the menu bar by swiping upwards on the le -hand Touch Control. The head-up display menu will be selected on the head-up display. # To switch switch to to the the head-up display: display: press the le -hand Touch Control or swipe upwards on the le -hand Touch Control. # To set set the the thr three ee display display rang ranges es of the the head-up display:: swipe upwards or downwards on the display le -hand Touch Control. 300 Instrument display and on-board computer Full-scr ull-screen een menus You can display the following menus full-screen on the instrument display: R Assistance R Trip R Navigation # # On the corresponding menu, use the le -hand Touch Control to scroll to the end of the list. Press the le -hand Touch Control. The selected menu will be displayed fullscreen. Function of the the power power meter meter (plug-in hybr hybrid) id) R R R Area 2 - 3 shows the regained energy. When the power meter needle is at position 1, the vehicle is switched o . The combustion engine and the electric motor are switched o . Power range 3 – 4 shows the combined output of the hybrid system. Function of the the electric electric motor motor power power availability availability displayy (plug-in hybr displa hybrid) id) 1 Combustion engine and electric motor switched o 2 Position in the display range of the recovered energy 3 Start of the display range of the recuperated energy 4 End of the display range of the combined out- put of the hybrid system The power meter has the following functions: R The power meter displays the output obtained from the hybrid system. 1 Start of the POWER display range 2 End of the POWER display range 3 Maximum recuperated energy Instrument display and on-board computer 301 4 Start of the display range of the recuperated energy 5 Current state of charge of the high-voltage battery R R R R In electric mode, the area 1 - 2 shows what percentage of the electrical drive is currently being used. The combustion engine is switched on at a percentage of 100%. If the combustion engine is running, boost mode shows the electrical power assistance of the drive. The area 34 shows the recuperation and charging behaviour using the combustion engine. From point 3, the maximum recuperated energy has been reached. The current state of charge of high-voltage battery 5 is displayed. % Due to various system limits, the displayed value in the area 3 4 may temporarily differ slightly from the actual value. Displaying the Displaying the power power meter meter (plug-in hybr hybrid) id) On-board computer: 4 Content # Select Power meter. Over Ov ervie view w of displays displays on the the instr instrument ument display Displays on the instrument display: u Active Parking Assist activated (/ page 281) é Parking Assist PARKTRONIC deactivated (/ page 278) h Cruise control (/ page 238) È Limiter (/ page 239) ç Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC (/ page 241) ê Active Brake Assist (/ page 257) à Active Steering Assist (/ page 250) ¬ Active Stop-and-Go Assist (/ page 248) à Active Lane Keeping Assist (/ page 262) õ PLUG‑IN HYBRID operation activated ñ Operating mode, other operating mode displays è Electric range ° Haptic accelerator pedal (/ page 190, 195, 193) ò Sound generator inoperative (/ page 462) è ECO start/stop function (/ page 188) ë HOLD function (/ page 235) _ Adaptive Highbeam Assist (/ page 147) Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus (/ page 148) ð Maximum permissible speed exceeded (for certain countries only) Vehicles with with Tr Traa c Sign Assist: detected instructions and tra c signs (/ page 257). For an overview of the indicator and warning lamps, see (/ page 517). 302 Instrument display and on-board computer Head-up display Function of the the head-up display Displayy content Displa content R * NOTE Mercedes-AMG vehicles # Depending on the vehicle's equipment, di erent content can be shown in the three areas of the head-up display (/ page 302). Wet road surface Objects on the display cover Polarisation in sunglasses % In extreme sunlight, sections of the display may appear washed out. You can correct this by switching the head-up display o and on again. Observe the notes in the Supplement. You could otherwise fail to recognise dangers. The head-up display projects the following information into the driver's eld of vision above the cockpit, for example: R The vehicle speed R Information from the navigation system R Information from the driving systems and driving safety systems R Some warning messages R R Setting the Setting the head-up display display using the the on-board comput com puter er 1 2 3 4 Navigation instructions Current speed Detected instructions and tra c signs Set speed in the driving system (e.g. cruise control) System limits System The visibility of the displays will be a ected by the following conditions: R Seat position R Image position setting R Light conditions On-board computer: 4 HEAD-UP DISPLAY The following head-up display settings or displays can be selected or shown: R Position R Brightness R Messages R Assistance status R Telephone R Audio R LINGUATRONIC Instrument display and on-board computer 303 # # # # To select the the Settings Settings menu: swipe to the right on the le -hand Touch Control. The Settings menu 5 will be selected. To call up the the Settings Settings menu: press the le hand Touch Control. To adjust adjust the the position: swipe upwards or downwards on the le -hand Touch Control. To adjust adjust the the brightness: brightness: swipe to the le or right on the le -hand Touch Control. Setting messages, Setting messages, assistance assistance status, status, telephone, telephone, audio and LINGUA LINGUATR TRONIC ONIC # Press the le -hand Touch Control. The list of setting options will be displayed. # Swipe upwards or downwards on the le -hand Touch Control and select a setting by pressing the le -hand Touch Control. Selecting what the the head-up display display shows 4 Right display area Tra c Sign Assist Assistant display 5 To adjust the position, brightness and lower display area 6 Index points 7 Lower display area (example: le display area) (Example) 1 Switching the head-up display on/o 2 Le display area Navigation system Average consumption G-meter 3 Central display area Speedometer Set speed in the driver assistance system, e.g. cruise control Warnings from driver assistance systems, e.g. distance warning Display areas 2 to 4 that are not required can be hidden. % In audio mode, the station name or track will be shown temporarily when the audio source is being actively operated. In addition, the latest calls will be displayed when the telephone list on the instrument display is actively operated. # Swipe upwards on the le -hand Touch Control. # Press the le -hand Touch Control. 304 Instrument display and on-board computer Switching Switc hing the the head-up display display on/o via the the multimedia syst system em Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Quick access # Select HUD. The head-up-display is activated. LINGUATRONIC 305 Conducting a dialogue Notes on operating operating safety safety For your own safety, always observe the following points when operating mobile communications equipment and especially your voice control system: R Observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are driving. R If you use the voice control system in an emergency your voice can change and your telephone call, e.g. an emergency call, can thereby be unnecessarily delayed. R Familiarise yourself with the voice control system functions before starting the journey. Operation Oper ation Overvie Over view w of operating operating the the multifunction steer steering ing wheel LINGUATRONIC is operational approximately thirty seconds a er the vehicle is switched on. 1 Press £: starts the dialogue 2 Press 8: switches sound on or o (ends the dialogue) Swipe up or down: increases or decreases the volume 3 Press ~: rejects or ends a call (ends dialogue) For the dialogue with LINGUATRONIC, you can use complete sentences of colloquial language as voice commands, such as, for example, "Please show me the list of the last calls" or "How warm is it outside?". It is not necessary to rst change to the relevant application such as "Telephone" or "Vehicle function". # To activat activatee or continue dialogue by by using a keyw ke ywor ord: d: say "Hello Mercedes" to activate LINGUATRONIC. Voice activation must be switched on in the multimedia system (/ page 307). For this, it is not necessary to press up the £ rocker switch on the multifunction steering wheel. Voice activation can also be directly combined with a voice command, e.g. "Hi Mercedes, how fast can I drive?". or # Press the £ rocker switch up on the multifunction steering wheel. You can say a voice command a er an acoustic signal. 306 LINGUATRONIC # # # # # # # # To correct correct an entry: entry: say the "Correction" voice command. To select an entry entr y from from the the selection list: list: say the line number or the contents. To browse browse the the selection list: list: say the "Next" or "Back" voice command. To interr interrup uptt the the dialogue: say the "Pause" voice command. The dialogue can be continued with the "Hello Mercedes" voice command or by pressing up the £ rocker switch on the multifunction steering wheel. To jump jump to to the the preceding preceding dialogue: say the "Back" voice command. To jump jump back back to to the the top top dialogue level: level: say the "Home" voice command. To cancel the the dialogue: say the "Close" voice command or press the 8 or ~ button on the multifunction steering wheel. To interr interrup uptt a voice voice output: output: speak a new voice command when the system is still answering. The voice output is shortened and the conclusion is reached more quickly. % The Voice barge-in option must be switched on in the multimedia system for this (/ page 307). Over Ov ervie view w of operable operable functions in LINGUA LINGUATR TRONIC ONIC You can use the LINGUATRONIC voice control system to operate the following functions depending on the vehicle equipment: R Telephone R Text message and e-mail R Navigation R Address book R Radio R Media R TV R Vehicle functions Full functionality is only available for you with activation of online voice control (/ page 307). Infor Inf ormation mation on the the language language setting setting You can change the language of LINGUATRONIC via the system language settings. If the set system language is not supported by LINGUATRONIC, English will be selected. LINGUATRONIC is available for you in the following languages: R English R English R French R Italian R Dutch R Polish R Portuguese R Russian R Swedish R Spanish R Czech R Turkish LINGUATRONIC 307 Setting Se tting LINGUA LINGUATR TRONIC ONIC (multimedia system) system) Req equir uirements: ements: R For online voice voice control: control: your vehicle is connected with your Mercedes me user account . R There is an Internet connection . R For online use of contacts: contacts: online voice control is activated. Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Voice assistant 5 System Switching voice Switching voice activation activation of LINGUA LINGUATR TRONIC ONIC on or o # Select Voice activation "Hi Mercedes". Depending on the previous status, the function is activated or deactivated. When the function is active, the "Hi Mercedes" voice command can activate the dialogue. Activ ctivating ating or deactivating deactivating online voice voice control control Activate Online recognition. # % Online voice control is activated at the factory. # # Select Online recognition subscription. You will be connected with the Mercedes me Portal. Activate online voice control in the Mercedes me Portal. Activ ctivating ating contacts contacts for for online use # Select Contact upload for online recognition. When the function is active, contacts will be found more easily and accurately using voice input. The quality of the enunciation of contact names by the system will also be improved. Switching on voice Switching voice interr interrup uption tion # Select Voice barge-in. If the function is active, a command can be interjected during voice output of the system. Using LINGUA LINGUATR TRONIC ONIC e ectively ectively LINGUATR LINGUA TRONIC ONIC audible help functions Using the corresponding voice commands you receive the following information and assistance in the following cases: R For optimum optimum operation: operation: call up the Digital Owner's Manual with "Open the operating instructions for LINGUATRONIC for me", for example. The full extent of the Digital Owner's Manual is available when the vehicle is stationary. R Curr Current ent application: on the multifunction steering wheel, press the £ rocker switch up and say the "Help" voice command. You will receive suggestions and information about operation of LINGUATRONIC for the current application. R Continued dialogue: say the "Help" voice command during a voice dialogue. For every step of the dialogue you receive matching information. R Speci c function: call up the voice command for the desired function, e.g. with "Hello 308 LINGUATRONIC Mercedes, I need help with the radio" or a er pressing the £ rocker switch on the multifunction steering wheel up, say the "Help for the telephone" voice command, for example. Notes on optimal optimal use of LINGUA LINGUATR TRONIC ONIC Notes on how to improve recognition: R Activate online voice control (/ page 307). R Say the voice commands coherently and clearly, but do not exaggerate the words. R Avoid loud noises that cause interference while making a voice command entry, e.g. the entertainment in the rear-passenger compartment. R For telephone telephone or address address book entries: entries: Only create sensible address book entries in the system/mobile phone, e.g. enter surname and rst name in the correct eld. Do not use any abbreviations, unnecessary spaces or special characters. R For radio radio or TV T V progr programme amme names: say the "Read out station list" voice command and say the desired station name in the way the voice output reads aloud to you. % To improve recognition, depending on the outside temperature, either the blowers for ventilation or heating are reduced when LINGUATRONIC is started. Notes on online voice voice control control Online voice control improves voice recognition and makes additional results available as a result of external information, e.g. information about POIs and about the weather. Therefore, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you activate online voice control. You will need a Mercedes me user account for this. If you do not yet have a user account you have to create one and connect it with your vehicle . Then call up your Mercedes me user account. The Mercedes me services are shown and can be activated . In addition, online voice control must be activated (/ page 307). Essential voice voice commands Notes on the the voice voice commands Aside from the exact voice commands (see the "Voice command" column in the following tables) to call up speci c functions, in most cases LINGUATRONIC also understands a great many paraphrases from daily usage. Examples of these are listed in the "Colloquial examples" column. For some languages however these examples are only available to a limited extent. % Content in angle brackets, e.g. or , is a placeholder which has to be completed by you with the desired term. The voice command "Set as intermediate destination" could, for example, be completed with: "Set "Buckingham Palace" as intermediate destination". LINGUATRONIC 309 Over Ov ervie view w of switch switch voice voice commands Switch voice commands can be used to open certain applications. Switchh voice Switc voice commands Voice command Colloquial Colloq uial exam example ple Function Function Switch to navigation I would like to go to navigation Switches to navigation. Switch to address book I would like to switch to the address book Switches to the address book. Switch to telephone I would like to switch to the phone Switches to the telephone. Switch to messages Can you switch to messages please? Switches to the text message application. Switch to e-mail I would like to go to the e-mail application Switches to the e-mail application. Switch to radio I would like to switch to the radio Switches to radio. Switch to TV I would like to switch to the TV Switches to TV. Switch to media I would like to switch to the media application Switches to media. 310 LINGUATRONIC Voice command Colloquial Colloq uial exam example ple Function Function Switch to comfort I would like to go to the comfort application Switches to the comfort settings. Switch to vehicle info I would like to go to the vehicle application Switches to vehicle information. Switch to settings I would like to go to the settings menu Switches to the menu with the setting options. % It is not necessary to rst call up a menu in order to operate a function it contains with LINGUATRONIC. You can operate the function directly using voice input, e.g. call a contact or enter a destination for navigation. You can nd further information in the overview tables for voice commands. Over Ov ervie view w of navig navigation ation voice voice commands Using the navigation voice commands you can enter POIs and conventional addresses or navi- gate to your own contacts. You can also carry out important navigation settings directly. The following list o ers just a small selection of the possible navigation commands. You will receive additional suggestions if you say "Help for navigation". LINGUATRONIC 311 Navig vigation ation voice voice commands Voice command Colloquial Colloq uial exam example ple Function Function Navigate to

I would like to navigate to "Cornwell Road, Cambridge". Starts route guidance to the desired address. Navigate to Drive/bring me to the contact address of John Smith Starts route guidance to a contact from the address book. 312 LINGUATRONIC Voice command Colloquial Colloq uial exam example ple Function Function Navigate to <3 word address> The example is for the German language: Drive to Tapfer.Gebäude.Verliehen Starts route guidance to a 3 word address from what3words. The example mentioned navigates you to the Brandenburg Gate. Observe the following information: R 3 word addresses are language dependent. R Searching for a destination using 3 word addresses is not possible in all countries and in all languages. Additional information on 3 word addresses from what3words can be found in the Navigation section under "Entering the destination as a 3 word address". LINGUATRONIC 313 Voice command Colloquial Colloq uial exam example ple Function Function The Brandenburg Gate, for example, has the following 3 word addresses: R German: tapfer er.g .gebäude.v ebäude.ver erliehen liehen R English: that.lands.winning R French: pos postteaux.bobineur.ombr neur .ombrant ant Home I would like to go home/I want to drive to my home address Starts route guidance to the home address. Work I would like to navigate to work Starts route guidance to work. Enter POI Take me to a POI Enters a POI, e.g. Brandenburg Gate. Navigate to Navigate to "McDonald's" Starts route guidance to a POI. Navigate to the online POI Navigate to online POI "McDonald's Searches online for a POI and starts route guidance. 314 LINGUATRONIC Voice command Colloquial Colloq uial exam example ple Function Function Start route guidance Begin route guidance/Can you start route guidance? Starts route guidance to a destination. Cancel route guidance Can you quit route guidance? Cancels route guidance. Restart route guidance I would like to resume route guidance Continues route guidance a er a break. Set

as intermediate destination Set "Lower Thames Street in London" as the intermediate destination. Selects an intermediate destination for the route. Set as intermediate destination Set "John Smith" as intermediate destination Selects an intermediate destination from the contacts for the route. Set as intermediate destination I would like to set "Wetherspoon's in London" as an intermediate destination. Selects a POI as an intermediate destination for the route. Enter address in I would like to enter a new address in "France". Selects a destination in another country. Enter postcode I would like to drive to a certain postcode Enters a postcode. Last destinations Show the previous destinations Selects a destination from the previous destinations. LINGUATRONIC 315 Voice command Colloquial Colloq uial exam example ple Function Function Show alternative routes Search for alternative routes Shows one of the alternative routes calculated. Driving recommendations on Switch on driving recommendations Switches on voice output for route guidance. Driving recommendations off Mute the driving instructions Switches o voice output for route guidance. Show traffic map Switch on traffic jam info Displays tra c information on the map. Hide traffic map Switch off the traffic jam messages Hides the tra c information. POI icons on Show me point of interest icons on the map please Displays the POI symbols on the map. Hide POI icons I would like to hide all POI symbols Hides the POI symbols. Over Ov ervie view w of telephone telephone voice voice commands You can use the telephone voice commands to make phone calls or search through the address book. The following list o ers just a small selection of the possible telephone commands. You will receive additional suggestions if you say "Help for phone". 316 LINGUATRONIC Telephone voice voice commands Voice command Colloquial Colloq uial exam example ple Function Function Call I would like you to dial 0171xxxxxxx Makes a telephone call by entering the telephone number directly. Call Call Jane Smith on her mobile Makes a telephone call directly by entering a name from the address book. Call Mercedes-Benz emergency call centre Could you call the Mercedes-Benz emergency centre? Triggers an emergency call to the Mercedes-Benz emergency call centre. Call Mercedes me I’d like you to call the MB breakdown assistance please Places a call with Mercedes-Benz breakdown assistance. Latest calls Show me the list of missed calls Shows the list of missed calls. Latest calls Show me the last calls The list shows all outgoing, incoming and missed calls. Incoming calls Show me the calls received Shows the list of incoming calls. Outgoing calls Show me the list of outgoing calls Shows the list of outgoing calls. Search for Could you open the contact "John Smith"? Opens the contact data of a contact in the address book. Redial Redial/Call last phone number Makes a call to the last telephone number dialled. Change phone Could you please switch to the second phone? Switches to the favoured telephone. LINGUATRONIC 317 Over Ov ervie view w of radio radio and TV T V voice voice commands Radio and TV voice commands can also be used when the radio or TV application runs in the back- ground and another application is visible in the foreground. The following list o ers just a small selection of the possible radio or TV voice com- mands. You will receive additional suggestions if you say "Help for radio" or "Help for TV". Radio and TV T V voice voice commands Voice command Colloquial Colloq uial exam example ple Function Function Station I would like to select station "Cool FM" Selects the radio station mentioned. Frequency Go to station/radio frequency "eighty seven point five megahertz". Enters a radio frequency, e.g. for the FM range. Next TV channel Change to the next TV channel Calls up the next TV channel in a list. Previous radio station Switch to the last radio station Switches to the previous radio station. Storing TV channels Save the TV channel name Saves the current TV channel in the favourites list. Save radio station Save the radio station, please Saves a station name for a radio station. Show station list Please show me the list of all radio stations Shows the list of radio stations that can be received. Read out TV channel list Read the TV program list to me To listen to the names of all receivable TV channels. 318 LINGUATRONIC Voice command Colloquial Colloq uial exam example ple Function Function Read out radio station list Please read out the radio programme To have the list of available stations for the currently selected radio application read aloud. Traffic information on Switch on the traffic info Switches on tra c announcements. Traffic information off I'd like to switch off traffic info Switches o tra c announcements. Radio info on I want you to turn on additional radio station text Switches on information about the current station. Radio info off I want you to turn off additional radio station text Switches o information about the current station. Over Ov ervie view w of media player player voice voice commands Media player voice commands can also be used when the media player application runs in the background and another application is visible in the foreground. The following list o ers just a small selection of the possible media player voice commands. You will receive additional suggestions if you say "Help for media" or "Help for player". LINGUATRONIC 319 Media player player voice voice commands Voice command Colloquial Colloq uial exam example ple Function Function Play Play "Yellow Submarine" The names of all available tracks, albums, artists, composers or genres are accepted during the search. In the case of a clear search result the track found is played back immediately. Play track Play song "So What" The available tracks are played back. Play album Play album "A Night at the Opera" The available albums are played back. Play artist I want to listen to the artist "Madonna" The available artists are played back. Play composer I'd like to hear the composer "Ludwig van Beethoven" The available composers are played back. Play music genre I'd like to hear the music genre "Bebop" The available music genres are played back. Search for track I would like to search for the song "Sailing" The names of all available tracks are accepted during the search. A selection list appears from which you can select the desired music. If you wish to play all the tracks in a selection list, say "Play all tracks". Search for album Search for album "A Night at the Opera" The names of all available albums are accepted during the search. A selection list appears from which you can select the desired music. If you wish to play all the tracks in a selection list, say "Play all tracks". 320 LINGUATRONIC Voice command Colloquial Colloq uial exam example ple Function Function Search for artist I would like to search for the artist "Elton John" The names of all available artists are accepted during the search. A selection list appears from which you can select the desired music. If you wish to play all the tracks in a selection list, say "Play all tracks". Search for composer Search for composer "Beethoven" The names of all available composers are accepted during the search. A selection list appears from which you can select the desired music. If you wish to play all the tracks in a selection list, say "Play all tracks". Search for music genre Search for music genre "Classical" The names of all available music genres are accepted during the search. A selection list appears from which you can select the desired music. If you wish to play all the tracks in a selection list, say "Play all tracks". Next track I would like to listen to the next track Plays back the next track. Previous track I'd like to hear the last track Plays back the previous track. Repeat this track I'd like to listen to this track again The current track is played back from the beginning. Play similar music I'd like to hear similar music Plays back similar tracks. Play random music Play me a random track Plays back random tracks. Random playback on Turn random playback on Switches to random mode. LINGUATRONIC 321 Voice command Colloquial Colloq uial exam example ple Function Function Random track list off Switch off shuffle mode Switches o random mode. What am I listening to? Which music is currently playing? The information about the track currently playing is read aloud. Over Ov ervie view w of message message voice voice commands Messages can be created, edited and listened to using the message voice commands. The follow- ing list o ers just a small selection of the possible message commands. You will receive additional suggestions if you say "Help for messaging". Messagee voice Messag voice commands Voice command Colloquial Colloq uial exam example ple Function Function Text message to I would like to write a new text to "John Smith's mobile number". Dra s a text message. All address book names are available. Text message to I would like you to write a new text to "list entry John Smith". Dra s a text message to the person mentioned. The content of the text can be spoken immediately if online voice control has been activated. Read out new text messages I would like you to read out the new text messages Reads out new text messages. E-mail to I would like to write a new e-mail to "John Smith, office" Dra s an e-mail. 322 LINGUATRONIC Voice command Colloquial Colloq uial exam example ple Function Function E-mail to I would like to write an e-mail to "John Smith, private" with the following text: "Running late". Writes an email to the person mentioned. The content of the text can be spoken immediately if online voice control has been activated. Forward e-mail to I would like you to forward this email to "John Smith" Forwards the selected or open e-mail. Read out new e-mails I would like you to read out the new email Reads out the new e-mails. Over Ov ervie view w of vehicle vehicle voice voice commands You can use the vehicle voice commands to directly call up the corresponding menus for the vehicle settings and operate vehicle functions. The following list o ers just a small selection of the possible vehicle voice commands. You will receive additional suggestions if you say "Help for vehicle settings" or "Help for vehicle functions". % If no seat or side is mentioned for commands that relate to a seat or side of vehicle then all actions are carried out automatically for the driver's seat. % The functions that can be operated depend on the vehicle equipment. LINGUATRONIC 323 Vehicle voice voice commands Voice command Colloquial Colloq uial exam example ple Function Function Temperature colder I would like to reduce the temperature Lowers the temperature of the air conditioning system. Air recirculation on I would like to activate the air circulation Switches on air recirculation mode for the air conditioning system. Automatic climate control driver on I would like to switch on the automatic climate control for the driver's seat Switches on automatic climate control for the driver's or front passenger side. Ambient light blue I would like to change the interior lighting to blue Switches the ambiance light, e.g. to blue. Wave refreshment driver on I would like to switch on the wave refreshment for the driver's seat Switches on the wave refreshment for the driver's or front passenger seat. Refreshment driver's seat off Switch the driver's side refreshment off Switches o the refreshment function for the driver's or front passenger seat. Seat heating driver on I would like to switch on the seat heating for the driver's seat Switches on the seat heating for the driver's or front passenger seat. Seat heating front passenger level 2 Seat heating front-passenger on level 2 Sets the seat heating for the driver's or front passenger seat to level 2. 324 LINGUATRONIC Voice command Colloquial Colloq uial exam example ple Function Function Current speed limit I would like to hear the speed limit Calls up the current speed limit. Outside temperature I would like to find out what the temperature outside is like Calls up the outside temperature. Average consumption What is the current average consumption? Calls up average consumption. Vehicle data Can you please display the vehicle data menu? Calls up the vehicle data. Range Tell me the current range Calls up the current range data. Assistance menu Show me the driver assistance settings Displays the assistance settings. Climate control menu I would like to see the climate control menu Displays the climate control settings. Light menu I would like to change the light settings Displays the light settings. Seats menu I would like to switch to seat menu Displays the seat adjustment settings. LINGUATRONIC 325 Voice command Colloquial Colloq uial exam example ple Function Function Refreshment menu I would like to switch to the refreshment settings menu Displays the refreshment settings. Next service Tell me my next service appointment Calls up the next service due date. 326 MBUX multimedia system Overvie Over view w and operation operation Notes on the the MBUX multimedia system system & WARNING Risk of distraction due to information systems and communications equipment images in this Owner's Manual. For example, route guidance with augmented reality is not available in all equipment variants. Over Ov ervie view w of the the MBUX multimedia syst system em If you operate information systems and communications equipment integrated in the vehicle when driving, you could be distracted from the tra c situation. This could also cause you to lose control of the vehicle. # Only operate this equipment when the tra c situation permits. # If you cannot be sure of this, stop the vehicle in accordance with the tra c conditions and operate the equipment with the vehicle stationary. You must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operating the multimedia system. Depending on the equipment, the scope of function and product designation of your MBUX multimedia system may di er from the description and Equipment with touchpad 1 Touch Control and control panel for the MBUX multimedia system 2 Media display with touch functionality 3 Control panel for telephone, navigation, radio/media, vehicle functions/system settings and favourites/themes 4 Touchpad 5 Controller Turn: adjusts the volume Press: switches sound on or o For Mercedes-AMG vehicles with AMG Performance exhaust system: • Turn: adjusts the volume • Press brie y: switches the mute function on/o • Press and hold: switches the multimedia system on/o 6 Ü Switches the MBUX multimedia system or media display on or o For Mercedes-AMG vehicles with AMG Performance exhaust system: ö button • Sets the sound characteristic of the AMG Performance exhaust system MBUX multimedia system 327 Equipment with touchpad with controller 1 Touch Control and control panel for the MBUX multimedia system 2 Media display with touch functionality 3 Control panel for telephone, navigation, radio/media, vehicle functions/system settings and favourites/themes 4 Touchpad with controller 5 Controller Turn: adjusts the volume Press: switches sound on or o For Mercedes-AMG vehicles with AMG Performance exhaust system: • Turn: adjusts the volume • Press brie y: switches the mute function on/o • Press and hold: switches the multimedia system on/o 6 Ü Switches the MBUX multimedia system or media display on or o For Mercedes-AMG vehicles with AMG Performance exhaust system: ö button • Sets the sound characteristic of the AMG Performance exhaust system % The equipment with touchpad and controller is not available in all countries. Further operating options: R Conducting a voice dialogue with LINGUATRONIC. R Operating functions contact-free with the MBUX Interior Assistant. % You can nd further information about operation as well as about applications and services in the Digital Owner's Manual. Anti-the prot Anti-the protection ection This device is equipped with technical provisions to protect it against the . More detailed information about anti-the protection can be obtained at a quali ed specialist workshop. 328 MBUX multimedia system Home screen screen over overview view 1 Depending on the display, calls up the rst 2 3 4 5 6 three applications or the home screen Calls up the pro le Calls up the global search SOS NOT READY (only when the MercedesBenz emergency call system is not available) Mercedes me connect active Transmission of vehicle position active 7 Signal strength of the mobile phone network, 8 9 A B C network display, battery status of the mobile phone connected, time Calls up the Noti cations Centre Calls up an application using the symbol Application and current information Quick-access, e.g. enter home address Index points and selected display area D Calls up the air conditioning menu E Calls up SUGGESTIONS, THEMES and FAVOURITES MBUX multimedia system 329 % If Mercedes me connect 5 is active , the vehicle is linked with Mercedes me connect. Vehicle data is then transmitted to the backend system. What data is transmitted depends on which services are activated. Further details can be found in the Mercedes me connect terms and conditions and data protection information. The function is countrydependent. If transmission of vehicle position 6 is active , Mercedes me connect services have been activated for this vehicle which access the vehicle's geoposition. In which instances the geoposition is transmitted depends on the particular services. Further details can be found in the Mercedes me connect terms and conditions and data protection information. The function is country-dependent. Operating Oper ating the the MBUX multimedia system system Using Touc Touchh Control Control 1 © Shows the home screen 2 Touch Control =9Ì: swipe in the direction of the arrow (navigate) a Press (con rm) 3 G Returns to the previous display 4 6 Makes or accepts a call ~ Rejects or ends a call 5 Increase volume: swipe upwards Reduce volume: swipe down 8 Switch o the sound: press 6 £ Starts LINGUATRONIC ß Calls up favourites (press brie y) or adds favourites and themes (press and hold) % To operate Touch Control 2 in the most e ective way, use the tip of your thumb if possible. Navigation through the menus is carried out with Touch Control 2 with single- nger swipes. # To select a menu option: option: swipe and press. # To move move the the digital digital map: swipe in any direction. Using the the touc touchscr hscreen een # Select menu options, symbols or characters by pressing brie y. # To navig navigat atee in menus: swipe up, down, le or right. # To use handwriting handwriting to to enter enter char charact acter ers: s: write the character with one nger on the touchscreen. 330 MBUX multimedia system To zoom in and out of the the map: move two ngers together or apart. # To call up the the global menu: press and hold on the touchscreen until the OPTIONS menu appears. % For more information on operation, please refer to the Digital Owner's Manual. # Using the the touc touchpad hpad and controller controller 1 2 3 4 Equipment with touchpad G Returns to the previous display ~ Calls up the audio control menu © Calls up the home screen Touchpad 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Equipment with touchpad with controller G Returns to the previous display Controller © Calls up the home screen Touchpad © Calls up the home screen ~ Calls up the audio control menu G Returns to the previous display MBUX multimedia system 331 % The equipment with touchpad and controller is not available in all countries. # Perform the operation according to the equipment. Operating the touchpad (examples): R To select a menu option, swipe and press. R If handwriting recognition is active, write a character on the touchpad. R Swipe down or up with two ngers. The Noti cations Centre is opened or closed. R Move two ngers apart or together on the map. The map scale is increased or decreased. Operating the controller Turn 3 anti-clockwise or clockwise. R Slide 1 le or right. R Slide 4 up or down. R Slide 2 diagonally. R Press 7 brie y or press and hold. R Calling up applications using buttons buttons Functions of LINGUA LINGUATR TRONIC ONIC & WARNING Risk of distraction due to information systems and communications equipment 1 2 3 4 5 # # % button calls up the telephone z button calls up navigation | button calls up radio or media y button calls up vehicle functions ß button Press brie y: calls up favourites Press and hold: adds a favourite or creates a new theme Alternatively, tap © on the touchscreen. Call up the application (/ page 328). If you operate information systems and communications equipment integrated in the vehicle when driving, you could be distracted from the tra c situation. This could also cause you to lose control of the vehicle. # Only operate this equipment when the tra c situation permits. # If you cannot be sure of this, stop the vehicle in accordance with the tra c conditions and operate the equipment with the vehicle stationary. For your own safety, always observe the following points when operating mobile communications equipment and especially your voice control system: R Observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are driving. 332 MBUX multimedia system If you use the voice control system in an emergency your voice can change and your telephone call, e.g. an emergency call, can thereby be unnecessarily delayed. R Familiarise yourself with the voice control system functions before starting the journey. With LINGUATRONIC, various applications in the MBUX multimedia system are operable using voice input. LINGUATRONIC is operational approximately thirty seconds a er the ignition is switched on and is available for the driver's seat and front passenger seat. The following multimedia system applications can be operated: R Telephone R Text message and e-mail R Navigation R Address book R Radio R Media R TV R Vehicle functions R Star arting ting LINGUA LINGUATR TRONIC ONIC Over Ov ervie view w of the the MBUX Inter Interior ior Assistant Assistant & WARNING Risk of injury from the camera's laser radiation This product uses a classi cation 1 laser system. If the housing is opened or damaged, laser radiation may damage your retina. # Do not open the housing. # Always have maintenance work and repairs carried out by a quali ed specialist workshop. # Press 1. or # Say "Hello Mercedes". This device is a class 1 laser product in accordance with DIN EN 60825-1:2014 The camera is located in the overhead control panel. If the vehicle is tted with the MBUX Interior Assistant, selected functions of the multimedia system can be operated contact-free. The MBUX Interior Assistant can di erentiate between driver and front passenger interactions and detects speci c hand positions (poses). MBUX multimedia system 333 System limits, display System display messages messages and notes notes for for recti cation The system may be impaired or may not function in the following situations: R The camera in the overhead control panel may heat up due to operating conditions. As a result the camera may switch o temporarily, particularly during longer periods of operation and at high outside temperatures. Do not touch or cover the camera and wait until the camera has cooled down and is available again. R R The camera is covered, dirty, misted up or scratched. Wait until the camera has cooled down before cleaning the camera lens. Clean the outside of the camera lens with a dry or damp cotton cloth. Do not use micro bre cloths. Do not not remove the cover when cleaning. Recognition can be impaired by re ective clothing, an adverse colour of clothing or by accessories, for example. R R Clothing being worn (hat, shawl, scarf) may be limiting the detection area of the camera. Keep the camera's eld of vision clear. The camera is not operational. Consult a Mercedes-Benz service centre. The MBUX Inter Interior ior Assistant Assistant supports suppor ts the the follo following wing inter interactions: actions: Inter Int eraction action area area Inter Int eraction action Descrip Descr iption tion In front of the media display or above the touchpad Proximity to the control element The Interior Assistant recognises the approach of the hand towards a control element. Depending on the active application, the display will be adjusted in the media display. Some functions di erentiate between driver and front passenger. No speci c hand position is required. Above the centre console De ned pose A favourite is called up with a de ned pose. 334 MBUX multimedia system Inter Int eraction action area area Inter Int eraction action Descrip Descr iption tion Below the inside rearview mirror Brief up and down movements With brief vertical up and down movements below the inside rearview mirror the reading light for the driver or the front passenger is switched on and o . Above the front passenger seat Stretching out a hand above the front passenger seat By stretching out a hand above the front passenger seat the search light is switched on. If you withdraw a hand from this area, the search light is switched o again. Switching Switc hing the the reading reading light and search search light and on or o Req equir uirements: ements: R For the the reading reading light: light: the function is available when it is dark. R The hand movement takes place in the interaction area below the inside rearview mirror. R For the the search search light: light: the function is available when it is dark. R The hand movement takes place in the interaction area above the front passenger seat. R The seat belt on the front passenger seat must not be inserted in the seat belt buckle. Switching Switc hing the the reading reading light on and o # Brie y move a hand up or down beneath the inside rearview mirror. The reading light is switched on or o for the driver or the front passenger. Switching Switc hing the the search search light on and o # To switch switch on: reach across the front passenger seat with a hand. The search light is switched on for the driver. MBUX multimedia system 335 # To switch switch o : take a hand back away from the front passenger seat. The search light is switched o again. Information Infor mation on pr proo les, themes, sugges suggestions tions and favour fav ourit ites es For electrically adjustable seats observe the following notes. & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped during adjustment of the driver's seat a er calling up a driver pro le Selecting a user pro le may trigger an adjustment of the driver's seat to the position saved under the user pro le. You or other vehicle occupants could be injured in the process. # Make sure that when the position of the driver's seat is being adjusted via the multimedia system, no people or body parts are in the seat's range of movement. If there is a risk of someone becoming trapped, stop the adjustment process immediately: # a) Tap the warning message on the media display. or # b) Press a memory function position button or a seat adjustment switch on the driver's door. The adjustment process will be stopped. The driver's seat is equipped with an access preventer. If the driver's door is open, the driver's seat will not be set a er calling up the driver's pro le. Pro les store your vehicle settings and settings for the multimedia system. If the vehicle is used by several drivers, the driver can select their own pro le without changing the stored pro le settings of other drivers. % Information on pro les from Mercedes me connect can be found in the Digital Operator's Manual. Vehicle settings are, for example, driver's seat, steering wheel and mirror settings, climate control and ambient lighting. For the settings of the multimedia system, you can select, for example, radio stations, previous destinations as well as themes, suggestions and favourites. For recurring driving situations, such as long drives on the motorway, you can save your preferred settings in a theme in the vehicle. In a theme you can save the display of the digital map, your preferred radio station and preferred drive program, for example. The vehicle can learn the habits of the driver. It then o ers suggestions for the most probable navigation destinations, media sources, radio stations or contacts. The pre-requirements for that are the selection of a pro le, your consent to the recording of data and su cient collected data. Favourites provide quick access to applications that are used o en. You can select favourites from categories or add them directly to an application. 336 MBUX multimedia system Con guring guring pr proo les, themes and sugges suggestions tions Multimedia system: 4 © 5 f Profiles Creating Cr eating a new new pr proo le # Select W Create profile . # Select an avatar. # Enter the name and con rm with a. # Select Continue r . # Select Current settings. # Select Save. # Activate Bluetooth® and select Connect phone, to connect a mobile phone with the user pro le . # Select Finished. Selecting pr proo le op options tions # Select Ä for a pro le. The following functions are available: R Editing, resetting or deleting a pro le R Resetting themes or favourites R Con guring suggestions Con guring guring sugg sugges estions tions # Select Ä for a pro le. # Select Suggestions settings. # Switch Allow destination suggestions, Allow music suggestions and Allow contact suggestions on or o . # To deactivat deactivatee the the learning learning function for for one day:: activate Deact. learn. for 24h. day For 24 hours no new actions will be trained and no data recorded for the active pro le. Suggestions will continue to be shown. Example: if the option is switched on and a route to a new destination has been calculated, this destination would not be taken into account for the learning function. Creating Cr eating new new themes themes # Select ©. # Select THEMES. # # # # # # # # # Select W Set theme. The settings which are saved in the theme are shown. Select Continue r. Select Audio and Navigation (Navigation) and store the active settings in the theme. Select Continue r. Select an entry screen. Select Continue r. Select an image. Enter the names into the entry eld and conrm with a. Select Save. System Syst em settings settings Overvie Over view w of the the syst system em settings settings menu In the system settings menu, you can make settings in the following menus and control elements: R Display Styles MBUX multimedia system 337 R R R R R R R Instrument lighting Display brightness Edge lighting Day/night design Control elements Keyboard language and handwriting recognition Sensitivity of the touchpad Sensitivity of the Touch Controls LINGUATRONIC Sound Entertainment Navigation and tra c announcements Telephone Voice ampli cation to the rear Connectivity Wi-Fi, Bluetooth®, NFC Time & date Language Units for distance - R - R R R So ware updates Data import/export PIN protection System Reset Infor Inf ormation mation on import important ant system system updates updates Important system updates may be necessary for the security of your multimedia system's data. Install these updates, or else the security of your multimedia system cannot be ensured. A system update consists of three steps: R Downloading or copying of the data required for installation R Installation of the downloaded system update R Activation of the downloaded system update by restarting the system % If automatic so ware updates are activated, the system updates will be downloaded automatically. The multimedia system provides a message when a system update is available. You have the following selection options: R Accept and install The system update will be downloaded in the background. R Information Information about the pending system update is displayed. R Later The system update can be downloaded manually at a later time. Deep system system updates updates Deep system updates access vehicle or system settings and can therefore only be carried out when the vehicle is stationary and the ignition is switched o . If the download of a deep system update is completed and the downloaded system update is ready for installation, you will be informed of this a er the next ignition cycle, for example. % Park the vehicle safely in a suitable location before starting the installation. 338 MBUX multimedia system Requirements for the installation: The ignition is switched o . R Notes and warnings have been read and accepted. R The electric parking brake is applied. R If all requirements have been ful lled, the downloaded system update is installed. The multimedia system cannot be operated while the downloaded system update is being installed and vehicle functions are restricted. If errors should occur during the installation, the multimedia system automatically attempts to restore the previous version. If restoration of the previous version is not possible, a symbol appears on the media display. Consult a quali ed specialist workshop to resolve the problem. Setting Se tting up a Wi-F Wi-Fii hotspot hotspot Req equir uirements: ements: R To set set up the the Wi-F Wi-Fii connection of the the multimedia system system with with ext exter ernal nal hotspo hotspots: ts: there is no communication module installed. R The device to be connected supports at least one of the types of connection described. Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Wi-Fi & Bluetooth 5 System Activ ctivating/deactiv ating/deactivating ating Wi-Fi Wi-Fi # Select Wi-Fi. Connecting the the multimedia system system with with an ext exterernal hotspo hotspott using Wi-Fi Wi-Fi The type of connection established must be selected on the multimedia system and on the device to be connected. % The connection procedure may di er depending on the device. Follow the instructions that are shown in the display. Further information can be found in the manufacturer's operating instructions. # Select Internet settings. # Select Connect via Wi-Fi. # Select Add hotspot. Connecting using a QR code # Select the options r of the desired Wi-Fi network. # Select Connect using a QR code. # Scan the displayed QR code with the device to be connected. The Wi-Fi connection is established. Connecting using a security security key Select the options r of the desired Wi-Fi network. # Select Connect using security key. # Have the security key displayed on the device to be connected (see the manufacturer's operating instructions). # Enter this security key on the multimedia system. # Con rm the entry with ¡. # Connecting using a WPS PIN # Select the options r of the desired Wi-Fi network. MBUX multimedia system 339 # # # Select Connect using WPS PIN input. The multimedia system generates an eightdigit PIN. Enter this PIN on the device to be connected. Con rm the entry. Connecting using a button button # Select the options r of the desired Wi-Fi network. # Select Connect via WPS PBC. # Select "Connect via WPS PBC" in the options on the device to be connected (see the manufacturer's operating instructions). # Press the WPS button on the device to be connected. # Select Continue in the multimedia system. Activ ctivating ating automatic automatic connection Select Connect via Wi-Fi. # Select the options r of the desired Wi-Fi network. # Activate Permanent Internet connection. # Connecting with with a known known Wi-Fi Wi-Fi Select Connect via Wi-Fi. # Select a Wi-Fi network. The connection is established again. # # Con guring guring the multimedia system system as a Wi-F Wi-Fii hothotspot for spot for ext exter ernal nal devices devices The type of connection established depends on the device to be connected. The function must be supported by the multimedia system and by the device to be connected. The type of connection established must be selected on the multimedia system and on the device to be connected. # Select Vehicle hotspot. # Select Connect device to vehicle hotspot. Connecting using WPS PIN gener generation ation Select Connect using WPS PIN generation. # Enter the PIN shown in the media display on the device to be connected and con rm. # Connecting using WPS PIN entry # Select Connect using WPS PIN input. Enter the PIN that is shown on the external device's display on the multimedia system. Connecting using a button button # Select Connect via WPS PBC. # Press the push button on the device to be connected (see the manufacturer's operating instructions). # Select Continue. Connecting using a security security key Select Connect device to vehicle hotspot. A security key is displayed. # Select the vehicle from the device to be connected. The vehicle is displayed with the DIRECT-MBUX XXXXX network name. # Enter the security key which is shown in the media display on the device to be connected. # Con rm the entry. # Connecting using NFC # Select Connect via NFC. # Activate NFC on the mobile device (see the manufacturer's operating instructions). 340 MBUX multimedia system # # Hold the device to be connected at the vehicle's NFC interface. Select Finished. The mobile device is now connected to the multimedia system hotspot via NFC. Generating a new Generating new security security key # Select Vehicle hotspot. # Select Generate security key. A connection will be established with the newly created security key. # To save save a security security key: key: select Save. When a new security key is saved, all existing Wi-Fi connections are then disconnected. If the Wi-Fi connections are being re-established, the new security key must be entered. System Syst em language Notes on the the system system language This function allows you to determine the language for the menu displays and the navigation announcements. The selected language a ects the characters available for entry. The navigation announcements are not available in all languages. If a language is not available, the navigation announcements will be in English. Setting Se tting the the system system language Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 System 5 ® Language # Set the language. % If you are using Arabic map data, the text information can also be shown in Arabic on the navigation map. To do so, select as the language from the language list. Navigation announcements are then also made in Arabic. Rese esetting tting the the multimedia system system (rese (resett function) & WARNING Risk of accidents due to failure of multimedia display functions While the multimedia system is being reset, its functions such as the reversing camera are not available. # Only reset the multimedia system when the vehicle is stationary. Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 System 5 Reset Personal data is deleted, for example: R Station presets R Connected mobile phones R Vehicles with rear telephony: handset connection R Individual user pro les % The guest pro le is reset when the settings are restored to the factory settings. % Vehicles with rear telephony: The handset must be in the cradle while the system is reset. A prompt appears again asking whether you really wish to reset. # Select Yes. The multimedia system is reset to the factory settings. If you have set a PIN for your system, this will also be reset. MBUX multimedia system 341 Plug-in hybr hybrid id settings settings Con guring guring se settings ttings for for plug-in hybr hybrid id vehicles vehicles Multimedia system: 4 © 5 EQ Setting Se tting the the char charging ging process process # Select Departure time. The following charging times can be selected: R Once R Week profile # Select a setting. Setting Se tting a single departur depar turee time # Select Departure time. # Select Edit single time. # Set a departure time. Setting Se tting the the week week pr proo le # Select Departure time. # Select Edit week profile. # Add new time # # Set the desired departure times, e.g. every day at 8 a.m. Select a. Setting Se tting the the maximum char charging ging current current Select Maximum charge current. # Select Maximum, 8 amps or 6 amps. When the battery is charged, the charging current is limited to the selected amperage. % For safety reasons, only use the charging cable supplied with the vehicle or an original Mercedes-Benz charging cable. MercedesBenz thoroughly tests these original charging cables for their suitability for the high-voltage charging of your vehicle. Purchase these parts from your Mercedes-Benz Service Centre and obtain advice there. # Activ ctivating ating or deactivating deactivating rout route-based e-based operating operating mode str strat ategy egy # Select Electric in city. Depending on the previous status, the function is activated or deactivated. Calling up the the energy energy ow display Multimedia system: 4 © 5 EQ # Select Energy flow. The visualisation of the energy ow in the vehicle is displayed. In addition to the energy ow, information on the status of the hybrid system and the current state of charge of the high-voltage battery is also displayed. 342 MBUX multimedia system Functions of the the energy energy ow display 1 2 3 4 5 State of charge of the high-voltage battery Combustion engine Energy ow High-voltage battery Status of the route-based operating-mode strategy (/ page 194) The active components of the hybrid system are highlighted in the energy ow display. The energy ow between the individual components is shown in colour. The energy ow is shown in di erent colours depending on the operating status: R Whit White: e: constant energy ow R Red: high energy ow (boost e ect) R Gr Green: een: low-emission energy ow in the case of recuperation, electric mode and when charging the high-voltage battery Navig vigation ation Notes on navig navigation ation Rout outee guidance with with augmented augmented reality reality & WARNING Risk of accident and injury as a result of distraction, incorrect depiction or wrong interpretation of the display The camera image of the augmented reality display is not suitable as a guide for driving. # Always keep an eye on the actual tra c situation. # Avoid extended observation of the camera image. & WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to imprecise positioning of additional information The additional information from the augmented reality display may be inaccurate and is not a substitute for observing and assessing the actual driving situation. # Always keep an eye on the actual tra c situation when carrying out all driving manoeuvres. Switching Switc hing navig navigation ation on Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Navigation (Navigation) # Alternatively: press the z button. The map displays the current vehicle position. The navigation menu is shown. The navigation menu is hidden if route guidance is active. # To show: show: tap on the touchscreen. The menu is hidden automatically. MBUX multimedia system 343 Navig vigation ation over overview view Example: digital map with navigation menu 1 Enters a POI or address and additional desti- nation entry options 2 Cancels active route guidance 3 Repeats a navigation announcement and switch navigation announcements on or o 4 ON ROUTE menu with Route overview, Alter- native routes and Report traffic incident (Car-to-X) TRAFFIC menu with Traffic announcements, Area announcements and Live Traffic Subscription Info Displays Route list POSITION menu with Store position, Compass and Qibla 5 Quick access for Traffic, Parking and Motorway information as well as options for View, Announcements and Route via Advanced 344 MBUX multimedia system Enter Ent ering ing a destination destination Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Navigation 1 2 3 4 5 5 ª Where to? Country in which the vehicle is located Enters a POI or address List with additional destination entry options Deletes an entry a Con rms an entry 6 7 8 9 Switches to handwriting recognition Enters a space Switches to voice input Sets the written language A Switches to digits, special characters and symbols B Switches to upper-case or lower-case letters # Enter the destination in 2. The entries can be made in any order. MBUX multimedia system 345 The following entries can be made, for example: Town, street, house number R Street, town R Postcode R POI name or POI category, e.g. Parking R Contact name R Select a search result in list 3. Calculate the route (/ page 345). % You can nd further information about destination entry, e.g. 3 word addresses, in the Digital Owner's Manual. # # Changing country # Select the country indicator in 1. # Enter the country indicator. # Select the country in 3. Using online search % Requirements: the media display shows an Internet connection with a double-arrow symbol in the status line. Destination entry uses online map services. If the on-board search nds no suitable destinations or if you change countries, the online search is available. For the destination you can enter an address, a POI or a three-word address. # Enter the destination in input line 2. The search results are displayed. # Select the destination in the list. The detailed view for the route is displayed. or # Select country indicator 1. # Select the provider for the online service from the countries list. # Enter the destination in input line 2. # Select the destination in the list. Calculating a rout routee and using settings settings for for route route guidance Req equir uirements: ements: R The destination has been entered. R The destination address is shown. Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Navigation 1 ¥ No route yet. ¦ A route has been mapped. # Select ¥. The route to the destination is calculated. Route guidance begins. or # # Select ¦. Select Set as intermediate dest.. The destination address is set as the next intermediate destination. 346 MBUX multimedia system or # Select Start new route guidance. The destination address is set as the new destination. The previous destination and the intermediate destinations are deleted. Route guidance to the new destination begins. Selecting rout routee settings settings # Select Z. # Select Advanced. # Select Route. # Select the route type. # Take tra c information into consideration with Dynamic route guidance r. # Select route options with Avoid options. # Activate Suggest alternative route. Alternative routes are calculated for every route. # Activate Activate commuter route. If the requirements are met, the multimedia system automatically detects that the vehicle is on a commuter route. Route guidance begins without voice output. Activ ctivating ating rout routee guidance with with augmented augmented reality reality # During route guidance, tap on the camera symbol on the media display. The camera image will be shown instead of the navigation map before a turning manoeuvre and will show additional information. # To retur returnn to to the the navig navigation ation map: tap on the camera symbol again. Displaying additional infor Displaying information mation in the the camera image # Select Z. # Select Advanced. # Select Augmented Reality. # Activate Street names and House numbers. During route guidance, street names and house numbers are shown in the camera image. Using map functions Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Navigation Setting Se tting the the map scale # To zoom in: tap twice quickly with one nger on the media display. # To zoom out: out: tap with two ngers on the media display. Moving Mo ving the the map # Move one nger in any direction on the touchscreen. # To rese resett the the map to to the the current current vehicle vehicle position: press \ brie y. Selecting map orient orientation ation Tap repeatedly on the Ä compass symbol on the map. The view changes in the sequence 3D, 2D heading up to 2D north up. # Switching motorwa Switching motorwayy infor information mation on/o # Select Z. MBUX multimedia system 347 # Switch Motorway information on or o . Using services ser vices Req equir uirements: ements: R There is an Internet connection. R Mercedes me connect is available. R You have set up a user account in the Mercedes me Portal. R The vehicle is connected to a user account and you have accepted the conditions of use for the service. Further information can be found at: https:// www.mercedes.me R The service is available and has been activated. R The following additional conditions apply to the Parking service: The navigation services option is available, subscribed to and activated in the Mercedes me Portal. The parking service is within the scope of the navigation service. Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Navigation Displaying the Displaying the tr traa c situation with with Live Live Tr Traa c Infor Inf ormation mation # Select Z. # Activate Traffic. # Select Advanced. # Select View. # Select Map elements. # Switch on Traffic incidents, Free-flowing traffic and Delay. If tra c information has been received, then tra c incidents such as roadworks, road blocks, local area reports (e.g. fog) and warning messages are displayed. The tra c delay is displayed for the current route. Tra c delays lasting one minute or longer are taken into consideration. Displaying hazard Displaying hazard war warnings nings with with Car-t Car-to-X o-X-Commu-Communication If hazard warnings are available these can be shown as symbols on the map. The display depends on the settings for the Traffic and Traffic incidents options. # Set the options. If Traffic is switched o and Traffic incidents is switched on, the symbols are shown on the prospective route. Displaying Displa ying weat weather her infor information mation and other other map contents contents # Select Z. # Select Advanced. # Select View. # Select Map elements. # Scroll up and show the ONLINE MAP CONTENTS category. # Switch on a service, e.g. Weather. Current weather information is displayed on the navigation map, e.g. temperature or cloud cover. 348 MBUX multimedia system Par arking king service ser vice * NOTE NOTE Damage to the vehicle due to not observing the maximum permitted headroom clearance If the vehicle height is greater than the maximum permitted headroom clearance, the roof and other parts of the vehicle may be damaged. # Observe the signposted headroom clearance. # If the vehicle height is greater than the permitted headroom clearance, do not enter. # Observe the changed vehicle height with add-on roof equipment. * NOTE Before selecting the parking option The data is based on information provided by the respective service provider. Mercedes Benz accepts no liability for the accuracy of the information provided relating to the multi-storey car park/parking area. # Always observe the local Information and conditions. % This service is not available in all countries. # Select Z and activate Parking. # Tap on j in the map. # Select a parking option. The map shows the parking options in the vicinity. The following information is displayed (if available): R Destination address, distance from current vehicle position and arrival time R Information on the multi-storey car park/car park, for example: Opening times Parking charges Current occupancy Maximum parking time Maximum access height The maximum access height shown by the parking service does not replace # the need for observation of the actual circumstances. R Available payment options (Mercedes pay, coins, bank notes, cards) R Details on parking tari s R Number of available parking spaces R Payment method (e.g. at the parking meter) R Services/facilities at the parking option R Telephone number Calculate the route (/ page 345). Notes on the the dashcam * NOTE Before using the dashcam You are legally responsible for operation and use of the dashcam functions. The legal requirements relating to operation and use of the dashcam can vary depending on the country in which the dashcam is operated. Therefore, observe the legal requirements, in partic- MBUX multimedia system 349 ular the data protection regulations, in your country. For this reason, before using the dashcam inform yourself about the regulation details for the respective country. This function is not permitted in all countries. # Observe the country-speci c regulations. Selecting a USB device device for for a video recor recording ding with the dashcam Req equir uirements: ements: R At least one USB device is connected with the multimedia system . Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Mercedes me & Apps 5 Dashcam # Select the USB device. % When USB devices contain multiple partitions, recorded video les are not always displayed in the recording list. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use USB devices with one partition. Star arting ting or stopping stopping video recor recording ding with with the the dashcam Req equir uirements: ements: R A USB device is connected with the multimedia system . R The vehicle is switched on. Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Mercedes me & Apps 5 Dashcam # If several USB devices are connected with the multimedia system, select a USB device (/ page 349). # Select the Individual recording or Loop recording recording mode. If Individual recording is selected and the memory is full the recording stops. If Loop recording has been selected, several short video les are recorded. When the memory limit is reached, the oldest video le is deleted and recording is continued automatically. # To start start:: select Start recording. The length of the recording is shown. The Please do not remove the storage medium. message appears. The video le is stored on the USB device. # To end: select End recording. A report may appear in the following cases: R For the Individual recording recording mode: the memory is full or there are only a few minutes recording time available. The video recording stops or will be stopped imminently. Change the USB device or delete a video le. R If a video recording has started and a national border is detected, the National border crossed. Please observe the countryspecific regulations regarding video recording. message appears. This function is not available in all countries. R The camera is not functional, the Camera unavailable message appears. 350 MBUX multimedia system Have the camera checked in a Mercedes-Benz service centre. Telephone Telephony Notes on telephony telephony & WARNING Risk of distraction from operating integrated communication equipment while the vehicle is in motion If you operate communication equipment integrated in the vehicle when driving, you could be distracted from the tra c situation. This could also cause you to lose control of the vehicle. # Only operate this equipment when the tra c situation permits. # If you cannot be sure of this, stop the vehicle whilst paying attention to road and tra c conditions and operate the equipment with the vehicle stationary. & WARNING Risk of an accident from operating mobile communication equipment while the vehicle is in motion Mobile communications devices distract the driver from the tra c situation. This could also cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle. # As the driver, only operate mobile communications devices when the vehicle is stationary. # As a vehicle occupant, only use mobile communications devices in the areas intended for this purpose, e.g. in the rear passenger compartment. You must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operating mobile communication equipment in the vehicle. & WARNING Risk of injury due to objects being stowed incorrectly If objects in the vehicle interior are stowed incorrectly, they can slide or be thrown around and hit vehicle occupants. In addition, cup holders, open stowage spaces and mobile phone receptacles cannot always retain all objects within. There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction. # Always stow objects so that they cannot be thrown around in such situations. # Always make sure that objects do not protrude from stowage spaces, luggage nets or stowage nets. # Close the lockable stowage spaces before starting a journey. # Always stow and secure heavy, hard, pointed, sharp-edged, fragile or bulky objects in the boot/load compartment. Observe the additional information on stowing mobile communications devices correctly: R Loading the vehicle (/ page 123) Bluetooth Bluet ooth® connection: MBUX multimedia system 351 The menu view and the available functions in the telephone menu are in part dependent on the Bluetooth® pro le of the connected mobile phone. Full functionality is only available if the mobile phone supports both of the following Bluetooth® pro les: R PBAP (Phone Book Access Pro le) The contacts on the mobile phone are shown automatically on the multimedia system. R MAP (Message Access Pro le) The mobile phone message functions can be used on the multimedia system. Irrespective of this, Bluetooth® audio functionality can by used with any mobile radio unit. For information on the range of functions of the mobile radio unit to be connected, see the manufacturer's operating instructions. Netw twor orkk connection: The following cases can lead to the call being disconnected while the vehicle is in motion: R You switch into a transmission/reception station, in which no communication channel is free. R The SIM card used is not compatible with the network available R A mobile phone with "Twincard" is logged into the network with the second SIM card at the same time The multimedia system supports calls in HD Voice® for improved speech quality. A requirement for this is that the mobile phone and the mobile phone network provider of the person you are calling support HD Voice® . Depending on the quality of the connection, the voice quality may uctuate. Further information can be obtained from a Mercedes-Benz service centre or at: https:// www.mercedes-benz.com/connect 352 MBUX multimedia system Telephone menu over overview view 1 Bluetooth® device name of the currently con2 3 4 5 nected mobile phone/of the mobile phone Bluetooth® device name of the currently connected mobile phone/of the mobile phone (two phone mode) Battery status of the connected mobile phone Signal strength of the mobile phone network Options 6 7 8 9 Device manager Messages Numerical pad Contact search Telephon elephonyy operating operating modes over overview view Depending on your equipment, the following telephony operating modes are available: R A mobile phone is connected to the multimedia system via Bluetooth®. MBUX multimedia system 353 R R Two mobile phones are connected with the multimedia system via Bluetooth® (two phone mode). You can use all the functions of the multimedia system with the mobile phone in the foreground. You can receive incoming calls and messages with the mobile phone in the background. You can interchange the mobile phone in the foreground and background. A mobile phone is connected as the car phone. Connecting a mobile phone Req equir uirements: ements: R Bluetooth® is activated on the mobile phone (see the manufacturer's operating instructions). R Bluetooth® is activated on the multimedia system. Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Phone Searching for Searching for a mobile phone Select í. # Select Connect new device. R # Connecting a mobile phone Authorisation follows using secure simple pairing. # Select a mobile phone. A code is displayed in the multimedia system and on the mobile phone. # If both codes match, con rm the code on the mobile phone. Functions in the the telephon telephonyy menu In the telephony menu you have the following functions, for example: R Making calls, e.g.: R Accept a call k End call i Create conferen. call Accepting or rejecting a waiting call R Managing contacts, e.g.: Downloading mobile phone contacts Managing the format of a contact's name Saving a contact as a favourite Receiving and sending messages, e.g.: Using the read-aloud function Dictating a new message Mercedes Mer cedes me app Mercedes me calls Mercedes Making a call via the the over overhead head control control panel % Mercedes me calls are not possible in every country. Find out at a Mercedes-Benz service centre if these functions are available in your country. 354 MBUX multimedia system Making an emergency emergency call # To open the cover of SOS button 2 , press it brie y. # Press and hold SOS button 3 for at least one second. If a Mercedes me call is active, an emergency call can still be triggered. This has priority over all other active calls. 1 me button for service or information calls 2 SOS button cover 3 SOS button (emergency call system) Making a Mercedes Mercedes me call # Press me button 1. Information Infor mation about the the Mercedes Mercedes me call using the the me button button A call to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre has been initiated via the me button in the overhead control panel or the multimedia system (/ page 353). Using the voice dialogue system you access the desired service: R Accident and Breakdown Management R Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre for general information about the vehicle You can nd information on the following topics: R Activation of Mercedes me connect R Operating the vehicle R R Nearest Mercedes-Benz service centre Other products and services from MercedesBenz Data is transferred during the connection to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre (/ page 356). Calling the the Mercedes-Benz Mercedes-Benz Customer Customer Centre using the the multimedia system system Req equir uirements: ements: R Access to a mobile phone network is available. R The contract partner's mobile network coverage is available in the respective region. R The vehicle must be switched on so that vehicle data can be transferred automatically. Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Phone 5 g # Call Mercedes me connect. A er con rmation, the multimedia system sends the required vehicle data. The data transfer is shown in the media display. MBUX multimedia system 355 Then, you can select a service and be connected to a specialist at the Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre. Calling the the Mercedes-Benz Mercedes-Benz Customer Customer Centre Centre a er automatic accident or breakdo automatic breakdown wn detection detection Req equir uirements: ements: R The vehicle has detected an accident or breakdown situation. R The vehicle is stationary. R The hazard warning lights are switched on. % This function is not available in all countries. The vehicle can detect accident or breakdown situations under certain circumstances. In the event an accident or breakdown is detected, the emergency guide shows safety notes in the multimedia system display. A er quitting the emergency guide display on the multimedia system, a prompt appears asking whether you would like to get support from the Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre. # Select Call. R A er your agreement, or if the Mercedes me connect service "Accident and Breakdown Management" is active, the vehicle data is transferred automatically (/ page 358). R The Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre takes your call and organises the breakdown and accident assistance. You may be charged for these services. % Depending on the severity of the accident, an automatic emergency call can be initiated. This has priority over all other active calls. % In addition, if the Mercedes me connect service "Telediagnostics" is active, a similar prompt can appear a er a delay in the event of a breakdown. If you are already in contact with the Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre or have already received support, this prompt can be ignored or declined. % If you answer the prompt for support from the Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre with Later, the message will be hidden and appear again later. The prompt triggered by the Mercedes me connect service "Telediagnostics", can either be con rmed or declined. A er being declined, this will not be shown again. Arranging a service Arranging ser vice appointment via a Mercedes Mercedes me call If you have activated the maintenance management service, relevant vehicle data is transferred automatically to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre. You will then receive individual recommendations regarding the maintenance of your vehicle. Regardless of whether you have consented to the maintenance management service, the multimedia system reminds you a er a certain amount of time that a service is due. A prompt appears asking if you would like to make an appointment. # To arrang arrangee a service ser vice appointment: appointment: select Call. A er your agreement, the vehicle data is transferred and the Mercedes-Benz customer centre takes your preferred appointment date. The information is then sent to your desired service outlet. 356 MBUX multimedia system This will contact you to con rm the appointment and if necessary consult about the details. % If you select Later a er the service message appears, the message is hidden and reappears at a later time. Giving consent to to data data transf transfer er during during a Mercedes Mercedes me call Req equir uirements: ements: R There is an active Mercedes me call via the multimedia system or the me button in the overhead control panel (/ page 353). % The prompt to con rm data transfer does not appear in all countries. If the Accident and Breakdown Management services are not activated on Mercedes me, the Do you want to transmit vehicle data and the vehicle's position to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre in order to improve the processing of your request? message is shown. # Select Yes. Relevant identi cation data is transmitted automatically. More information on Mercedes me: https:// www.mercedes.me Transf ansferr erred ed data data during during a Mercedes Mercedes me call When you make a service call via Mercedes me, data is transmitted. This enables targeted advice and a smooth service. The following requirements must be ful lled for the transfer of the data: R The vehicle is switched on. R The required data transfer technology is supported by the mobile phone network provider. R The quality of the mobile connection is su cient. Multi-stage transfer depends on the following factors: R Reason for the initiation of the call R The available mobile phone transmission technology. R The activated Mercedes me connect services. R The service selected in the voice control system. % A prompt for consent to the data transmission only occurs if the corresponding Mercedes me connect service is not activated. Dataa transf Dat transfer er if Mercedes Mercedes me connect services ser vices are not are not activat activated ed If no Mercedes me connect services are activated and the data protection prompt has been conrmed the following data is transmitted: R Vehicle identi cation number R Time of the call R Reason for the initiation of the call R Con rmation of the data protection prompt R Country indicator of the vehicle R Set language for the multimedia system R Telephone number of the communication platform installed in the vehicle If a call is made for a service appointment via the service reminder, the following data is also transmitted: R Current mileage and maintenance data MBUX multimedia system 357 If a call is made a er automatic accident or breakdown detection using the multimedia system, the following data is also transmitted: R Current mileage and maintenance data R Current vehicle location If Accident and Breakdown Management is called via the voice control system and no service has been activated, but the data protection query has been con rmed, the following data can also be called up from the vehicle by the Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre: R Current vehicle location If the data protection prompt has been rejected, the following data is transmitted to enable targeted advice and an e cient service: R Reason for the initiation of the call R Rejection of the data protection prompt R Country indicator of the vehicle R Set language for the multimedia system R Telephone number of the communication platform installed in the vehicle Data transf Data transfer er if Mercedes Mercedes me connect services ser vices aree activat ar activated ed Only if the respective service is activated will additional incident-speci c data be transmitted in the second stage to enable an optimal service. An overview of the data transmitted can be found in the respective terms of use for Mercedes me connect services. These can be obtained in the Mercedes me portal: https:// me.secure.mercedes-benz.com Dataa processing Dat processing The data transmitted within the scope of the call is deleted from the processing system a er the call is nished, in so far as this data is not being used for other activated Mercedes me connect services. The incident-speci c data is processed and stored in the Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre and, if required to process the incident, forwarded to the service partner authorised by the Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre. Please take note of the data protection information on the Mercedes me Internet page https://www.mercedes.me or in the recorded message immediately a er calling the Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre. % The recorded message is not available in every country. Mercedes Mer cedes me connect Information Infor mation on Mercedes Mercedes me connect % Mercedes me connect or individual Mercedes me connect services are not available in every country. Find out at a Mercedes-Benz service centre if these functions are available in your country. Mercedes me connect consists of multiple services. You can use the following services via the multimedia system and the overhead control panel, for example: R Accident and Breakdown Management (me button or situation-dependent display in the multimedia system) R Mercedes-Benz emergency call system (automatic emergency call and SOS button) 358 MBUX multimedia system The Mercedes me connect Accident and Breakdown Management and the Mercedes-Benz emergency call centre are available to you around the clock. The me button and the SOS button can be found on the vehicle's overhead control panel (/ page 353). You can also call the Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre using the multimedia system (/ page 354). Please note that Mercedes me connect is a Mercedes-Benz service. In emergencies, rst call the national emergency services using the standard national emergency service telephone numbers. In emergencies, you can also use the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system (/ page 362). Observe the conditions of use for Mercedes me connect and other services. These can be obtained in the Mercedes me Portal: https:// me.secure.mercedes-benz.com Further information about Mercedes me connect, the provided service scope and operation: https://moba.i.daimler.com/markets/ece-row/ baix/cars/connectme/en_GB/#emotions/ Startseite.html Information Infor mation on Mercedes Mercedes me connect Accident Accident and Breakdo Breakdown wn Management Management The Accident and Breakdown Management can include the following functions: R Supplement to the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system (/ page 362) If necessary, the contact person at the Mercedes-Benz emergency call centre forwards the call to Mercedes me connect Accident and Breakdown Management. Forwarding the call is however not possible in all countries. R Breakdown assistance by a technician on location and/or the towing away of the vehicle to the nearest Mercedes-Benz service centre You may be charged for these services. R Addition to the emergency guide a er automatic accident or breakdown detection (/ page 355) In the event of a breakdown or accident, further vehicle data is sent which enables optimal R support by the Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre and the authorised service partner or breakdown assistance. Addition to the Mercedes me connect service Telediagnostics With the Telediagnostics function, speci c wear and failure reports are recorded by the service provider, in so far as these can be clearly interpreted and are available through the monitoring of components that are subject to diagnostics. If your vehicle detects a breakdown or threat of a breakdown, you may be prompted via the multimedia system to contact the MercedesBenz Customer Centre for further help. This prompt in the multimedia system only appears when the vehicle is stationary. % These services are subject to technical restrictions such as the mobile phone coverage, mobile network quality and the ability of the processing systems to interpret the transferred data. In some circumstances, this can result in delays or the failure of the information to appear in the multimedia system. MBUX multimedia system 359 More information about Mercedes me connect services can be obtained in the Mercedes me Portal: https://me.secure.mercedes-benz.com You can nd out which data is transferred when using the services in the currently valid Mercedes me connect terms of use and the data protection information for Mercedes me connect. You can nd these in your Mercedes me user account. For more information consult a Mercedes-Benz service centre or visit the Mercedes me portal: https://me.secure.mercedes-benz.com % Make sure you always keep the Mercedes me apps updated. You can call up the menu using Mercedes me & Apps in the multimedia system. In the Mercedes me & Apps menu, the following options can be available: R Connecting the vehicle with the Mercedes me user account R Deleting a connection between a Mercedes me user account and the vehicle R Calling up the Mercedes me services R Calling up apps such as, In-Car O ce or the web browser depending on availability Over Ov ervie view w of the the Mercedes Mercedes me & Apps menu Over Ov ervie view w of In-Car O ce When you log in with a user account to the Mercedes me Portal, then services and o ers from Mercedes-Benz will be available to you. Using In-Car O ce, you can connect your online services with the multimedia system. Data transf Data transferr erred ed during during Mercedes Mercedes me connect call services ser vices The data transferred during a Mercedes me connect call depends on: R The reason for initiation of the call R The service that is selected in the voice control system R The activated Mercedes me connect services Requirements for In-Car O ce: Your mobile phone is connected with the multimedia system (/ page 353). R You have a user account for the Mercedes me Portal. R The In-Car O ce service is activated in the Mercedes me Portal. R You have a user account with an online service, e.g. with O ce 365 or Gmail, and have connected the user account with In-Car O ce. R In-Car O ce functions R Display pending appointments in the calendar Reading out calendar entries Calling stored telephone numbers Navigating to appointments with navigable destinations Deleting a calendar entry R Display and selection of tasks and calls to complete Reading aloud 360 MBUX multimedia system Calling stored telephone numbers Deleting Noting calls Declining incoming calls and saving as a task in the Tasks & calls menu Marking entry in Tasks & calls as completed O - R R 1 URL entry 2 Bookmarks R Managing e-mails Showing/reading e-mails Writing and forwarding e-mails Web browser browser over overview view The web browser is started using the Mercedes me & Apps menu. % You can start the In-Car O ce function using the Mercedes me & Apps menu. Please note that certain functions are only available when the vehicle is stationary. 3 Web page, back 4 Web page, forwards 5 To refresh/stop 6 Options MBUX multimedia system 361 % Websites cannot be shown while the vehicle is in motion. Over Ov ervie view w of smartphone smar tphone integr integration ation With Smartphone Integration, you can use certain functions on your mobile phone via the multimedia system display. Only one mobile phone at a time can be connected via Smartphone Integration to the multimedia system. Also for use with two phone mode with smartphone integration, only one additional mobile phone can be connected using Bluetooth® with the multimedia system. The full range of functions for Smartphone Integration is only possible with an Internet connection. The appropriate application must be downloaded on the mobile phone to use Smartphone Integration. The mobile phone must be switched on and connected to a USB port with the ç symbol on the multimedia system using a suitable cable. Apps for Smartphone Integration R Apple CarPlay® R Android Auto % For safety reasons, the rst activation of Smartphone Integration on the multimedia system must be carried out when the vehicle is stationary and the parking brake is applied. You can start Apple CarPlay® or Android Auto from the device manager. % Mercedes-Benz recommends disconnecting the connecting cable only when the vehicle is stationary. Over Ov ervie view w of transf transferr erred ed vehicle vehicle data When using Smartphone Integration, certain vehicle data is transferred to the mobile phone. This enables you to get the best out of selected mobile phone services. Vehicle data is not directly accessible. The following system information is transmitted: R So ware release of the multimedia system R System ID (anonymised) The transfer of this data is used to optimise communication between the vehicle and the mobile phone. To do this, and to assign several vehicles to the mobile phone, a vehicle identi er is randomly generated. This has no connection to the vehicle identi cation number (VIN) and is deleted when the multimedia system is reset (/ page 340). The following driving status data is transmitted: R Transmission position engaged R Distinction between parked, standstill, rolling and driving R Day/night mode of the instrument cluster R Drive type The transfer of this data is used to alter how content is displayed to correspond to the driving situation. The following position data is transmitted: R Coordinates R Speed R Compass direction R Acceleration direction 362 MBUX multimedia system This data is used by the mobile phone to improve the accuracy of the navigation (e.g. for continuation in a tunnel). Mercedes-Benz Mer cedes-Benz emergency emergency call system system Information Infor mation on the the Mercedes-Benz Mercedes-Benz emergency emergency call system system The Mercedes-Benz emergency call system only functions in areas where mobile phone coverage is available from the relevant contract partner. Insu cient network coverage from the relevant contract partner may result in an emergency call not being transmitted. The vehicle must be switched on before an automatic emergency call can be made. % The Mercedes-Benz emergency call system is activated at the factory. Using the MercedesBenz emergency call system is free of charge. Over Ov ervie view w of the the Mercedes-Benz Mercedes-Benz emergency emergency call system system The Mercedes-Benz emergency call system can help to decisively reduce the time between an accident and the arrival of emergency services at the site of the accident. It helps locate an accident site in places that are di cult to access. The emergency call can be made automatically (/ page 362) or manually (/ page 363). Only make emergency calls if you or others are in need of rescue. Do not make an emergency call in the event of a breakdown or a similar situation. You can nd more information on the regional availability of eCall at: https://www.mercedesbenz-mobile.com/extra/ecall/ Messages Messag es on the the display The following messages appear in the display: R SOS NOT READY: the vehicle is not switched on or the emergency call system is malfunctioning . This does not necessarily indicate complete failure of the emergency call system. Emergency calls call still be transmitted. R The display only refers to the vehicle and does not take account of the availability of mobile phone networks and the Mercedes-Benz emergency call centre. The functional readiness of the emergency call system on the vehicle can be seen when the SOS NOT READY display disappears once the vehicle is switched on. G: The icon appears in the display during an active emergency call. % If there is a malfunction in the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system (e.g. a fault with the speaker, microphone, airbag, SOS button), a corresponding message appears on the display in the instrument cluster. Trigg igger ering ing an automatic automatic Mercedes‑Benz Mercedes‑Benz emergency call Req equir uirements: ements: R The vehicle is switched on. R The starter battery is su ciently charged. MBUX multimedia system 363 The Mercedes‑Benz emergency call system triggers an emergency call automatically in the following cases: R A er activation of the restraint systems such as airbags or seat belt tensioners a er an accident The emergency call has been made: A voice connection is made to the Mercedes‑Benz emergency call centre. R A message with accident data is transmitted to the Mercedes‑Benz emergency call centre. The Mercedes‑Benz emergency call centre can transmit the vehicle position data to one of the public emergency services call centres. R Under certain circumstances data is also transmitted in the voice channel to the Mercedes‑Benz emergency call centre. This allows measures for rescue, recovery or towing to a Mercedes‑Benz Service Centre to be initiated quickly. R The SOS button in the overhead control panel ashes until the emergency call is nished. It is not possible to immediately end an automatic emergency call. If the Mercedes‑Benz emergency call system cannot connect to the Mercedes‑Benz emergency call centre, the emergency call is automatically sent to the public emergency services call centre. If no connection can be made to the public emergency services, a corresponding message appears in the display. # Dial the emergency number 112 on your mobile phone. If an emergency call has been initiated: R Remain in the vehicle if the road and tra c conditions permit you to do so until a voice connection is established with the emergency call centre operator. R Based on the call, the operator decides whether it is necessary to call rescue teams and/or the police to the accident site. R If no vehicle occupant answers, an ambulance is sent to the vehicle immediately. Trigg igger ering ing a manual Mercedes-Benz Mercedes-Benz emergency emergency call To use the the SOS button button in the the over overhead head control tr ol panel: press and hold the SOS button for at least one second (/ page 353). # To use voice voice control: control: use the LINGUATRONIC voice commands . The emergency call has been made: R A voice connection is made to the MercedesBenz emergency call centre. R A message with accident data is transmitted to the Mercedes-Benz emergency call centre. The Mercedes-Benz emergency call centre can transmit the vehicle position data to one of the public emergency services call centres. R Under certain circumstances data is also transmitted in the voice channel to the Mercedes-Benz emergency call centre. This allows measures for rescue, recovery or towing to a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre to be initiated quickly. R Remain in the vehicle if the road and tra c conditions permit you to do so until a voice # 364 MBUX multimedia system R connection is established with the emergency call centre operator. Based on the call, the operator decides whether it is necessary to call rescue teams and/or the police to the accident site. If the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system cannot connect to the Mercedes-Benz emergency call centre, the emergency call is automatically sent to the public emergency services call centre. If no connection can be made to the public emergency services, a corresponding message appears in the media display. # Dial the emergency number 112 on your mobile phone. Ending an unintentionall unintentionallyy trigg trigger ered ed manual Mercedes-Benz Mer cedes-Benz emergency emergency call # Using the the multifunction steer steering ing wheel: select ~. Dataa transf Dat transfer er of the the Mercedes-Benz Mercedes-Benz emergency emergency call system system In the event of an automatic or manual emergency call the following data is transmitted, for example: R Vehicle's GPS position data R GPS position data on the route (a few hundred metres before the incident) R Direction of travel R Vehicle identi cation number R Vehicle drive type R Number of people determined to be in the vehicle R Whether Mercedes me connect is available or not R Whether the emergency call was initiated manually or automatically R Time of the accident R Language setting on the multimedia system For accident clari cation purposes, the following measures can be taken up to an hour a er the emergency call has been initiated: R The current vehicle position can be determined. R A voice connection to the vehicle occupants can be established. % For Russia: various functions, e.g. receiving tra c information, cannot be performed for up to two hours a er sending an emergency call. Self diagnosis function of the the emerg emergency ency call syssystem Your car veri es the operability of the emergency call system each time the vehicle is ON. In case of system failure, you will be informed with text message on the instrument cluster and with red indicator SOS NOT READY on the display. Please, make sure, that during 30 seconds a er switching vehicle ON the red indicator SOS NOT READY in the upper right corner of display is MBUX multimedia system 365 switched OFF, this means the emergency call system passed diagnostics successfully. # Star arting/ending ting/ending ERA-GL ERA -GLON ONASS ASS tes testt mode Req equir uirements: ements: R The starter battery is su ciently charged. R The vehicle is switched on. R The vehicle has been stationary for at least one minute. % The test mode is currently available in the following countries, for example: R Russia R Belarus R Kazakhstan R Armenia R Kyrgyzstan # To star startt the the tes testt mode: press and hold the ~ button on the multifunction steering wheel for at least ve seconds. The test mode is started and automatically ends a er the language test has been performed. To stop stop manual tes testt mode: switch o the vehicle. The test mode is ended. 366 MBUX multimedia system Radio, media & TV Overvie Over view w of the the symbols and functions in the the media menu Symbol Designation Function Function 6 Play Select to start or continue playback. 8 Rest Select to pause the playback. : Repeat a track Select to repeat the current track or the active playlist. Select once: the active playlist is repeated. R Select twice: the current track is repeated. R Select three times: the function is deactivated. R 9 Random playback Select to play back the tracks in random order. û/ü Skip forwards/back Select to skip to the next or to the previous track. ß Options Select to show additional options. 5 Categories Select to show or search through available categories (e.g. playback lists, albums, artists, etc.). ª Search Select to search in the active menu. You can search for artists, genres or moods, for example. MBUX multimedia system 367 Symbol Designation Function Function Z Settings Select to make settings. © Home Select to return to the home screen. j Messaging Select to call up messaging. 2 Full screen Select to switch to full screen mode. The following functions and settings are available in the media menu: R Connecting external data storage media with the multimedia system (e.g. using USB or Bluetooth®) R R R Playing back audio or video les Streaming online music Looking at TV programmes in the TV menu 368 MBUX multimedia system Additional functions in the the TV T V menu Symbol Designation Function Function Z Settings Select to make settings in the TV menu. The following functions can be switched on/o or con gured: R Channel x R Country-speci c character set R Audio language R Subtitles R Teletext R Picture format Õ EPG Select to show current programme information for the channel. 4 Channel list Select to show a list of available channels with the current programme. Aut uthor horising ising a Bluetooth Bluetooth® audio device device for for media playback pla yback R Req equir uirements: ements: Bluetooth® is activated on the multimedia system and audio equipment. R R The audio equipment supports the Bluetooth® audio pro les A2DP and AVRCP. The audio equipment is "visible" for other devices. Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Media Bluetooth® 5 Bluetooth 5 ª With audio, you can play back music les from an external data storage medium, e.g. your smartphone, using the MBUX multimedia system. MBUX multimedia system 369 # To play back audio les using the multimedia system, authorise the external data storage medium on the MBUX multimedia system. Bluetooth® Bluetooth Aut uthor horising ising a new new audio device device Select Connect new device. # Select an audio device. Authorisation starts. A code is displayed on the multimedia system and on the mobile phone. # If the codes are identical, con rm on the audio equipment. # Select Only as Bluetooth audio device. The Bluetooth® audio equipment is connected with the multimedia system. # Bluetooth® Bluetooth Connecting previousl previouslyy author authorised ised audio equipment equipment # Select a Bluetooth® audio device from the list. The connection is being established. Receiving TV T V channels channels in HD quality quality * NOTE Damage to the CI+ module and Smart Card The CI+ module is designed for use in the home. The CI+ module can overheat and be damaged by continuous exposure to high outside temperatures. # Make sure that the CI+ module is not subject to high temperatures for extended periods of time. If the CI+ module is damaged, no encrypted channels can be received. % The CI+ module is not available in all countries. A CI+ module (Common Interface Module), which is not included in the scope of delivery, is used to decrypt HD programmes according to the CI+ standard. In some countries, an additional smart card is required, which is inserted into the CI+ module (see the manufacturer's operating manual). The CI+ module is connected in the CI+ box in the glove compartment. # To insert inser t the the smart smar t card card in the the CI+ module: if required (country-dependent), insert the smart card into the CI+ module slot. % The CI+ box is designed for operation at temperatures between 0 °C and 65 °C. At operating temperatures that are higher or too low a message appears in the multimedia system and the CI+ module is switched o automatically. If the CI+ module is switched o , no encrypted channels can be received. 370 MBUX multimedia system Over Ov ervie view w of the the symbols and functions in the the radio radio menu Symbol Designation Function Function © Home Select to return to the home screen. j Messaging Select to call up messaging. û/ü Skip forwards/back Select to skip to the next or to the previous station. Z Settings Select to have further options shown. Settings can be made to the following additional functions, for example: R Navigation and tra c announcements R Frequency x function R Radio additional text R Emergency warnings The setting options are country-dependent. 2 Full screen Select to switch to the DAB slide show. This function is not available in all countries. 8 Silent function Select to switch o the sound. f Store radio stations Select to save a station in the presets. MBUX multimedia system 371 Symbol Designation Function Function 4 Station list Select to have the station list shown. ª Search Select to search in the active menu. You can search for artists, genres or moods, for example. Additional functions of TuneIn TuneIn radio radio % A relatively large volume of data can be transmitted when using TuneIn Radio. Symbol Designation Function Function Z Settings The following additional settings are available in the TuneIn Radio menu: R Selecting stream R Logging on to or out of the TuneIn account ß Favourites Select during playback to save the station currently set as a favourite. 372 MBUX multimedia system Symbol Designation Function Function 6/8 Play/Pause Select to start, stop or continue playback. 5 Browse Select to choose a category and then a radio station. Depending on the frequency band selected, di erent functions are available to you. Select the desired frequency band in the radio menu head runner. Calling up TuneIn TuneIn Radio Radio Req equir uirements: ements: R A Mercedes me account is available. R The vehicle is connected with the Mercedes me account. R The TuneIn Radio service is activated in the Mercedes me Portal. R The data volume is available. Depending on the country, data volume may need to be purchased. R A fast Internet connection for data transmission free of interference. % Data volume can be purchased directl directlyy from from a mobile phone netw networ orkk provider provider via the Mercedes me Portal. % The functions and services are countrydependent. For more information, consult a Mercedes-Benz service centre. Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Radio # Select TuneIn Radio. The TuneIn menu appears. The last station set starts playing. % The connection quality depends on the local mobile phone reception. Sound settings settings Over Ov ervie view w of functions in the the sound menu The setting options and functions available depend on the sound system tted. You can nd out which sound system is tted in your vehicle in the Digital Owner's Manual. Standar andardd sound system system and Adv Advanced anced sound syssystem The following functions are available: R Equaliser Treble, mid-range and bass R Balance and fader R Volume Automatic adjustment MBUX multimedia system 373 Burmester Burmest er® surr surround ound sound system system and Burmest Bur mester er® high-end 3D surround surround sound system system The following functions are available: R Equaliser: Treble, mid-range and bass R Balance and fader R Sound focus R VIP seat (Burmester® high-end 3D surround sound system only) R Sound pro les R Volume: Automatic adjustment 374 Maintenance and care ASSYST PLUS ASSYST PLUS service ser vice interv interval al display Function of the the ASSYS ASSYSTT PLUS PLUS service ser vice interv interval al display You can obtain information concerning the servicing of your vehicle from a quali ed specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz service centre. The ASSYST PLUS service interval display on the instrument display informs you of the time or distance remaining before the next service due date. You can hide this service display using the back button G on the le -hand side of the steering wheel. Depending on how the vehicle is used, the ASSYST PLUS service interval display may shorten the service interval, e.g. in the following cases: R Mainly short-distance driving R When the engine is o en le idling for long periods R In the event of frequent cold start phases R Vehicles with with a diesel particulat par ticulatee lt lter: er: in the event of frequently interrupted regeneration of the diesel particulate lter Displaying Displa ying the the service ser vice due date Mercedes-Benz recommends avoiding such operating conditions. On-board computer: 4 Service 5 ASSYST PLUS The next service due date is displayed. # To exit exit the the display: press the back button G on the le -hand side of the steering wheel. Bear in mind the following related topic: R Operating the on-board computer (/ page 298). Infor Inf ormation mation on regular regular maintenance maintenance work work * NOTE Premature wear through failure to observe service due dates Maintenance work which is not carried out at the right time or incompletely can lead to increased wear and damage to the vehicle. # # Adhere to the prescribed service intervals. Always have the prescribed maintenance work carried out at a quali ed specialist workshop. Notes on special service ser vice req requir uirements ements The prescribed service interval is based on normal operation of the vehicle. Have the maintenance work carried out more o en than prescribed if operating conditions are di cult or the vehicle is subject to increased stress. The ASSYST PLUS service interval display is only an aid. The driver of the vehicle bears responsibility as regards to whether maintenance work needs to be performed more o en than speci ed based on the actual operating conditions and/or loads. Examples of arduous operating conditions: R Regular city driving with frequent intermediate stops R Mainly short-distance driving Maintenance and care 375 R R R Frequent operation in mountainous terrain or on poor road surfaces When the engine is o en le idling for long periods Operation in particularly dusty conditions and/or if air-recirculation mode is frequently used In these or similar operating conditions, have the interior air lter, air lter, engine oil and oil lter, for example, changed more frequently. The tyres must be checked more frequently if the vehicle is operated under increased loads. Further information can be obtained at a quali ed specialist workshop. Batter Batt eryy disconnection periods periods The ASSYST PLUS service interval display can calculate the service due date only when the battery is connected. # Display and note down the service due date on the instrument display before disconnecting the battery (/ page 374). Engine compar compartment tment Activ ctivee bonnet bonnet (pedestr (pedestrian ian prot protection) ection) Operation of the Operation the active active bonnet bonnet (pedestr (pedestrian ian prot protecection) In certain accident situations, the actuation of the active bonnet reduces the risk of injury to pedestrians. The rear area of the bonnet is raised by approximately 80 mm. A er being triggered, the active bonnet remains in the raised position. Limited visibility due to the raised bonnet cannot be ruled out. A er the active bonnet has been actuated, pedestrian protection may be limited. Have the full functionality of the active bonnet restored immediately in a quali ed specialist workshop. If necessary, adjust your seat position and drive carefully to a quali ed specialist workshop. If a safe continued journey is not possible, contact a quali ed specialist workshop. Opening and closing the the bonnet & WARNING Risk of accident due to driving with the bonnet unlocked The bonnet may open and block your view. # Never release the bonnet when driving. # Before every trip, ensure that the engine bonnet is locked. & WARNING Risk of accident and injury when opening and closing the bonnet The bonnet may suddenly drop into the end position. There is a risk of injury for anyone in the engine bonnet's range of movement. # Do not open or close the bonnet if there is a person in the bonnet's range of movement. 376 Maintenance and care & WARNING Risk of burns when opening the bonnet If you open the bonnet in the event of an overheated engine or re in the engine compartment, the following situations may occur: R You may come into contact with hot gases. R You may come into contact with other escaping hot operating uids. # # Before opening the bonnet, allow the engine to cool down. In the event of a re in the engine compartment, keep the bonnet closed and call the re service. & WARNING Risk of injury due to moving parts Components in the engine compartment may continue to run or start unexpectedly even when the drive system is switched o . Observe the following if you must open the bonnet: # # # # Switch o the vehicle. Never touch the danger zones surrounding moving components, e.g. the rotation area of the fan. Remove jewellery and watches. Keep items of clothing and hair away from moving parts. & WARNING Risk of injury from touching components under voltage The ignition system and the fuel injection system operate at high voltage. You could receive an electric shock. # Never touch ignition system or fuel injection system components when the vehicle is switched on. The live components include the following, for example: R Ignition coils R Fuel injectors R Electric lines to the ignition coils and the fuel injectors & WARNING Risk of burns from hot component parts in the engine compartment Certain component parts in the engine compartment can be very hot, e.g. the engine, the cooler and parts of the exhaust system. # Allow the engine to cool down and only touch component parts described in the following. & WARNING Risk of injury from using the windscreen wipers when the bonnet is open If the windscreen wipers start moving when the bonnet is open, you could be trapped by the wiper linkage. # Always switch o the windscreen wipers and the vehicle rst if you need to open the bonnet. Maintenance and care 377 Opening the the bonnet # If the bonnet can still be li ed slightly, open the bonnet again and close it with a little more force until it engages correctly. Engine oil Checking Chec king the the engine oil level level using the the oil dipstick dipstick & WARNING Risk of burns from hot component parts in the engine compartment # # To release the bonnet, pull on handle 1. Push handle 1 of the bonnet catch upwards and li the bonnet until it opens automatically. Closing the the bonnet # Lower the bonnet to a height of around 20 cm and then allow it to fall, applying a little force as you let it go. Certain component parts in the engine compartment can be very hot, e.g. the engine, the cooler and parts of the exhaust system. # Allow the engine to cool down and only touch component parts described in the following. Req equir uirements: ements: R The engine has an oil dipstick. If not, the engine oil level can be checked only with the on-board computer (/ page 378) . Depending on the engine, the oil dipstick may be installed in the engine compartment in di erent locations. 378 Maintenance and care The waiting time before checking the oil level when the engine is at normal operating temperature is ve minutes. # # # Slowly slide oil dipstick 1 into the guide tube to the stop, and pull it out again a er approximately three seconds. R Oil level is correct: oil level is between 2 and 3. R Oil level too low: oil level is at 3 or below. R Oil level too high: oil level is above 2. If the oil level is too low, top up with 1 litre of engine oil. If the oil level is too high, drain o excess engine oil. Consult a quali ed specialist workshop. 30 minutes with a normal driving style and even longer with an active driving style. On-board computer: 4 Service 5 Engine oil level One of the following messages will appear on the instrument display: R Engine oil level Measuring now: measurement of the oil level is not yet possible. # R Checking Chec king the the engine oil level level using the the on-board computer comput er # # Park the vehicle on a level surface. Pull oil dipstick 1 out and wipe o . Req equir uirements: ements: R The engine has been warmed up. R The vehicle is parked on a level surface. R The engine is running at idle speed. R The bonnet is closed. The engine oil level is determined during driving. Determining the engine oil level can take up to Repeat the request a er a maximum of 30 minutes' driving. Engine oil level OK and the bar display for indicating the oil level on the instrument display is green and is between "min" and "max": the oil level is correct. R Engine oil level Add 1,0 l and the bar display for indicating the oil level on the instrument display is orange and is below "min": # Add 1 l of engine oil. Reduce engine oil level and the bar display for indicating the oil level on the instrument display is orange and is above "max": R Maintenance and care 379 # R # R Drain o any excess engine oil that has been added. To do so, consult a quali ed specialist workshop. For engine oil level turn on ignition Switch on the vehicle to check the engine oil level. Engine oil level System inoperative: The oil level sensor is defective or not connected. R Consult a quali ed specialist workshop. Engine oil level System currently unavail. # Close the bonnet. # Topping up engine oil & WARNING Risk of burns from hot component parts in the engine compartment Certain component parts in the engine compartment can be very hot, e.g. the engine, the cooler and parts of the exhaust system. # Allow the engine to cool down and only touch component parts described in the following. & WARNING Risk of re and injury from engine oil If engine oil comes into contact with hot component parts in the engine compartment, it may ignite. # Make sure that no engine oil is spilled next to the ller opening. # Allow the engine to cool o and thoroughly clean the engine oil from component parts before starting the vehicle. * NOTE Engine damage caused by an incorrect oil lter, incorrect oil or additives # # # Do not use engine oils or oil lters which do not correspond to the speci cations explicitly prescribed for the service intervals. Follow the instructions on the service interval display for changing the engine oil and observe the prescribed change intervals. Do not use additives. * NOTE Damage caused by topping up too much engine oil Too much engine oil can damage the engine or the catalytic converter. # Have excess engine oil removed at a quali ed specialist workshop. % Depending on driving style, the vehicle consumes up to 0.8 litre of oil per 1000 km. The oil consumption may be higher than this when the vehicle is new or if you frequently drive at high engine speeds. 380 Maintenance and care Checking Chec king the the coolant level level & WARNING Risk of burns from hot component parts in the engine compartment Certain component parts in the engine compartment can be very hot, e.g. the engine, the cooler and parts of the exhaust system. # Allow the engine to cool down and only touch component parts described in the following. & WARNING Risk of scalding from hot coolant # # # # Turn cap 1 anti-clockwise and remove it. Top up the engine oil. Replace cap 1 and turn it clockwise until it engages. Check the oil level again (/ page 377). If you open the cap, you could be scalded. # Let the motor cool down before opening the cap. # When opening the cap, wear protective gloves and safety glasses. # Open the cap slowly to release pressure. # # # # Park the vehicle on a level surface. Check the coolant temperature display in the instrument cluster. The coolant temperature must be below 70°C. Slowly turn cap 1 anti-clockwise to release overpressure. Continue turning cap 1 anti-clockwise and remove it. Maintenance and care 381 The coolant level is correct in the following cases: R If the engine is cold, the coolant is up to marker bar 2. R If the engine is warm, the coolant is up to 1.5 cm over the marker bar 2. If necessary, top up with coolant that has been approved for Mercedes-Benz. % Further information on coolant (/ page 441) # & WARNING ‑ Risk of re and injury due to windscreen washer concentrate Windscreen washer concentrate is highly ammable. It could ignite if it comes into contact with hot engine component parts or the exhaust system. # Make sure that no windscreen washer concentrate spills out next to the ller opening. Topping up the the windscreen windscreen washer washer system system & WARNING Risk of burns from hot component parts in the engine compartment Certain component parts in the engine compartment can be very hot, e.g. the engine, the cooler and parts of the exhaust system. # Allow the engine to cool down and only touch component parts described in the following. Remove cap 1 by the tab. Top up the washer uid. % Further information about the windscreen washer uid (/ page 442) # # 382 Maintenance and care Keeping the the air-w air-wat ater er duct free free # Keep the area between the bonnet and the windscreen free of deposits, e.g. ice, snow and leaves. Cleaning and care Infor Inf ormation mation on washing washing the the vehicle vehicle in a car wash wash & WARNING Risk of an accident due to reduced braking power a er washing the vehicle Braking e ciency is reduced a er washing the vehicle. # A er the vehicle has been washed, brake carefully while paying attention to the tra c conditions until braking power has been fully restored. * NOTE Damage from automatic braking If one of the following functions is switched on, the vehicle brakes automatically in certain situations: R Active Brake Assist R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC R HOLD function R Active Parking Assist To avoid damage to the vehicle, deactivate these systems in the following or similar situations: # during towing # in a car wash * NOTE Damage due to unsuitable car wash # Before driving into a car wash make sure that the car wash is suitable for the vehicle dimensions. # # Ensure there is su cient ground clearance between the underbody and the guide rails of the car wash. Ensure that the clearance width of the car wash, in particular the width of the guide rails, is su cient. To avoid damage to your vehicle when using a car wash, ensure the following beforehand: R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is deactivated. R The HOLD function is switched o . R The 360° Camera or the reversing camera is switched o . R The side windows and sliding sunroof are completely closed. R The blower for the ventilation/heating is switched o . R The windscreen wiper switch is in position g. R The key is at a minimum distance of 3 m away from the vehicle. Otherwise the tailgate could open unintentionally. Maintenance and care 383 R In automatic car washes with conveyor systems: Neutral i is engaged. If you would like to leave the vehicle while it is being washed, make sure the key is located in the vehicle. The park position j is otherwise automatically engaged. % If, a er the car wash, you remove the wax from the windscreen and wiper rubbers, this will prevent smearing and reduce wiper noise. Infor Inf ormation mation on using a high-pressur high-pressuree cleaner & WARNING Risk of an accident when using high-pressure cleaners with round-spray nozzles The water jet can cause externally invisible damage. Components damaged in this way may unexpectedly fail. # Do not use a high-pressure cleaner with round-spray nozzles. # Have damaged tyres or chassis parts replaced immediately. To avoid damage to your vehicle, observe the following when using a high-pressure cleaner: R The key is at a minimum distance of 3 m away from the vehicle. Otherwise the tailgate could open unintentionally. R Maintain a distance of at least 30 cm to the vehicle. R Vehicles with with decorativ decorativee foil: foil: Parts of your vehicle are covered with a decorative foil. Maintain a distance of at least 70 cm between the foil-covered parts of the vehicle and the nozzle of the high-pressure cleaner. Move the high-pressure cleaner nozzle around whilst cleaning. The water temperature of the highpressure cleaner must not exceed 60°C. R Observe the information on the correct distance in the equipment manufacturer's operating instructions. R Do not direct the nozzle of the high-pressure cleaner directly at sensitive parts, such as tyres, gaps, electrical components, batteries, light sources and ventilation slits. Washing the the vehicle vehicle by by hand * NOTE Engine damage due to water ingress # Take care not to point the water jet directly towards the air inlet grille below the bonnet. observe the legal requirements, e.g. in a number of countries, washing by hand is only permitted in specially designated wash bays. # Use a mild cleaning agent, e.g. car shampoo. # Wash the vehicle with lukewarm water using a so car sponge. When doing so, do not expose the vehicle to direct sunlight. # Carefully hose the vehicle o with water and dry using a chamois. % Observe the notes on the care of car parts (/ page 385). 384 Maintenance and care Notes on paintwor paintwork/matt k/matt nish paintw paintwor orkk care To avoid damaging the paintwork and interfering with the driving assistance systems, please observe the following notes: Paint Insect remains: soak with insect remover and rinse o the treated areas a erwards. R Bird droppings: soak with water and rinse o a erwards. R Tree resin, oils, fuels and greases: remove by rubbing gently with a cloth soaked in petroleum ether or lighter uid. R Coolant and brake uid: remove with a damp cloth and clean water. R Tar stains: use tar remover. R Wax: use silicone remover. R Do not attach stickers, lms or similar materials. Only have lm attached to the bumper at a quali ed specialist workshop. R Remove dirt immediately, where possible. R Matt nish R Only use care products approved for Mercedes-Benz. R Do not attach stickers, lms or similar materials. Only have lm attached to the bumper at a quali ed specialist workshop. R Do not polish the vehicle and light-alloy wheels. R Only use car washes that correspond to the latest engineering standards. R Do not use car wash programmes with a nal hot wax treatment. R Do not use paint cleaners, bu ng or polishing products, gloss preservers, e.g. wax. In the event of paintwork damage: Always have paintwork repairs carried out at a quali ed specialist workshop. R Make sure the radar sensors function (/ page 229). R Notes on cleaning decorativ decorativee foils foils Observe the notes on matt nish care in the chapter "Notes on paintwork/matt nish paintwork care" (/ page 384). They also apply to matt decorative foils. Observe the notes on cleaning decorative foils to avoid vehicle damage. Cleaning For cleaning, use plenty of water and a mild cleaning agent without additives or abrasive substances, e.g. a car shampoo approved for Mercedes-Benz. R Remove dirt immediately, where possible, whilst avoiding rubbing too hard. There is otherwise a risk of damaging the decorative foil irreparably. R If there is dirt on the nish or if the decorative foil is dull: use the Paint Cleaner recommended and approved for Mercedes-Benz. R Insect remains: soak with insect remover and rinse o the treated areas a erwards. R Bird droppings: soak with water and rinse o a erwards. R Maintenance and care 385 R To prevent water stains, dry a foil-wrapped vehicle with a so , absorbent cloth a er every car wash. Avoiding damage damage to to the the decorativ decorativee foil foil R The service life and colouring of decorative foils are impaired by: sunlight temperature, e.g. hot air blower weather conditions stone chippings and dirt chemical cleaning agents oily products R Do not use polish on matt decorative foil. Polishing will have the e ect of shining the foilwrapped surface. R Do not treat matt or structured decorative foils with wax. Permanent stains may occur. Scratches, corrosive deposits, areas a ected by corrosion and damage caused by incorrect care cannot always be completely repaired. In such cases, visit a quali ed specialist workshop. You can obtain more information on care and cleaning products from the manufacturer. In the case of foil-wrapped surfaces, optical di erences may occur between the surfaces that were not protected by a decorative foil a er removing a decorative foil. % Have work or repairs to decorative foils carried out at a quali ed specialist workshop, e.g. in a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Notes on care care of car parts par ts & WARNING Risk of entrapment if the windscreen wipers are switched on while the windscreen is being cleaned If the windscreen wipers are set in motion while you are cleaning the windscreen or wiper blades, you can be trapped by the wiper arm. # Always switch o the windscreen wipers and the vehicle before cleaning the windscreen or wiper blades. & WARNING Risk of burns from the tailpipe and tailpipe trims The exhaust tailpipe and tailpipe trims can become very hot. If you come into contact with these parts of the vehicle, you could burn yourself. # Always be particularly careful around the tailpipe and the tailpipe trims and supervise children especially closely in this area. # Allow vehicle parts to cool down before touching them. To avoid damage to the vehicle, observe the notes on cleaning and care of the following vehicle parts: Wheels and rims rims Use water and acid-free alloy wheel cleaners. R Do not use acidic alloy wheel cleaners to remove brake dust. This could damage wheel bolts and brake components. R To avoid corrosion of the brake disks and brakepads, drive the vehicle for a few minutes R 386 Maintenance and care a er cleaning before parking it. The brake disks and brakepads warm up and dry out. Windows R Clean the windows inside and outside with a damp cloth and with a cleaning agent recommended for Mercedes-Benz. R Do not use dry cloths or abrasive or solventbased cleaning agents to clean the inside of windows. % A er changing the wiper blades or treating the vehicle with wax, clean the windscreen thoroughly with cleaning agents recommended for Mercedes-Benz. Failure to observe the application instructions may result in damage, smear marks or dazzling spots. % Remove external fogging or dirt on the windscreen in front of the multifunction camera. Otherwise, driving systems and driving safety systems may be impaired or not available (/ page 229). Wiper blades Move the wiper arms into the replacement position (/ page 153). R With the wiper arms folded out, clean the wiper blades with a damp cloth. % Make sure that the wiper blades are coated. The coating can leave residues on a cloth. Do not rub the wiper blades excessively or clean them too o en. Rever ersing sing camera camera and 360° Camera R To open the rear camera cover, switch on the vehicle. R Use clean water and a so cloth to clean the camera lens. R Do not use a high-pressure cleaner. Exter Ext erior ior lighting R Clean the lenses with a wet sponge and mild cleaning agent, e.g. car shampoo. R Only use cleaning agents or cleaning cloths that are suitable for plastic lenses. Tailpipes R Clean with a cleaning agent recommended for Mercedes-Benz, especially in the winter and a er washing the vehicle. R Do not use acidic cleaning agents. Vehicle socket socket (high-volt (high-voltag agee batter battery) y) Use clean water and a so cloth to clean the vehicle socket. R Do not use high-pressure cleaners or cleaning agents, such as soap. Trailer Tr ailer hitch Observe the notes on care in the trailer hitch manufacturer's operator manual. R Do not clean the ball neck with a high-pressure cleaner or solvent. R Remove traces of rust on the ball, for example, with a wire brush. R Remove dirt with a lint-free cloth. R A er cleaning, lightly oil or grease the ball head. R R Sensors Clean the sensors in the front and rear bumpers with a so cloth and car shampoo (/ page 229). R When using a high-pressure cleaner, maintain a minimum distance of 30 cm. R R Maintenance and care 387 % Before using trailers with anti-torsional coupling, observe the manufacturer's operator manual. Notes on care care of the the inter interior ior & WARNING Risk of injury from plastic parts breaking o a er the use of solvent-based care products Care and cleaning products containing solvents can cause surfaces in the cockpit to become porous. When the airbags are deployed, plastic parts may break away. # Do not use any care or cleaning products containing solvents to clean the cockpit. & WARNING Risk of injury or fatal injuries from bleached seat belts Bleaching or dyeing seat belts can severely weaken them. This can, for example, cause seat belts to tear or fail in an accident. # Never bleach or dye seat belts. To avoid damage to the vehicle, observe the following notes on cleaning and care: R Seat belts R Clean with lukewarm and soapy water. R Do not use chemical cleaning agents. R Do not dry by heating them to over 80°C or exposing them to direct sunlight. R Display Switch o the display and let it cool down. R Clean the surface carefully with a micro bre cloth and a suitable display care product (TFTLCD). R Do not use any other agents. R Head-up display R Clean with a so , non-static, lint-free cloth. R Do not use cleaning agents. Plastic trim Plastic trim R Clean with a damp micro bre cloth. R For heavy soiling: Use a cleaner recommended for Mercedes-Benz. Do not attach stickers, lms or similar materials. Do not allow cosmetics, insect repellent or sun cream to come in contact with the plastic trim. Real wood wood and trim trim elements R Clean with a micro bre cloth. R Black piano-lacquer look: Clean with a damp cloth and soapy water. R For heavy soiling: Use a cleaner recommended for Mercedes-Benz. R Do not use solvent-based cleaning agents, polishes or waxes. Roof lining Clean with a brush or dry shampoo. R Carpet Car pet R Use a carpet and textile cleaning agent recommended for Mercedes-Benz. 388 Maintenance and care Steer eering ing wheel made of genuine genuine leather leather or DINAMICA * NO NOTE TE Damage caused by wrong cleaners # R R R R R Do not use solvent-based cleaning agents such as tar remover or wheel cleaner; neither should you use polishes or waxes. Otherwise you may damage the nish. Clean with a damp cloth and 1% soapy water solution and then wipe with a dry cloth. For heavy soiling: Use a cleaner recommended for Mercedes-Benz. Leather care: Use a leather care agent that has been recommended for Mercedes-Benz. Do not allow the leather to become too damp. Do not use a micro bre cloth. % Leather is a natural product. It has natural surface properties, such as di erences in structure, marks caused by growth and injury or subtle colour di erences. These surface properties are characteristics of leather and not material faults. What's more, leather is subject to a natural ageing process during which the surface properties change. Genuine leather leather seat covers covers Clean with a damp cloth and then wipe with a dry cloth. R Leather care: Use a leather care agent that has been recommended for Mercedes-Benz. R Do not allow the leather to become too damp. R Do not use a micro bre cloth. R % Regular cleaning and care of the leather reduces soiling, wear marks and ageing damage and thus signi cantly extends its life span. Clothing that can leave stains, e.g. jeans, can leave discolouration on the leather. DINAMICA DINAMIC A seat covers covers Clean with a damp cloth. R Do not use a micro bre cloth. R Imitation leather Imitation leather seat covers covers R Clean with a damp cloth and 1% soapy water. R Do not use a micro bre cloth. Fabr abric ic seat covers covers R Clean with a damp micro bre cloth and 1% soapy water and allow to dry. Breakdown assistance 389 Emergency Emergency Remo emoving ving the the safety safety vest vest The safety vests are located in the stowage compartments in the driver's and front passenger door. # Pull out the safety vest bag by the loop. # Open the safety vest bag and pull out the safety vest. % There are also safety vest compartments in the rear door stowage compartments in which safety vests can be stored. 1 Maximum number of washes 2 Maximum wash temperature 3 4 5 6 7 Do not bleach Do not iron Do not tumble dry Do not dry clean Class 2 safety vest The requirements de ned by the legal standard are only ful lled if the safety vest is the correct size and is fully closed. Replace the safety vest in the following cases: R the re ective strips are damaged or dirty R the maximum permissible number of washes is exceeded R the uorescence has faded War arning ning triangle triangle Remo emoving ving the the war warning ning triangle triangle # Remove warning triangle 1. 390 Breakdown assistance Setting Se tting up the the war warning ning triangle triangle Firs irst-aid t-aid kit (so -sided) ov over erview view Remo emoving ving the the re extinguisher & WARNING Risk of accident due to an incorrectly secured re extinguisher in the driver's footwell # # A re extinguisher may impede pedal travel or block a depressed pedal. This jeopardises the operating and road safety of the vehicle. The re extinguisher can be ung around and injure the driver or other vehicle occupants. # Always store and secure the re extinguisher in the bracket. # Do not remove the re extinguisher while driving. Fold side re ectors 1 upwards to form a triangle and attach at the top using upper pressstud 2. Fold legs 3 down and out to the side. First-aid kit (so sided) 1 is in the load compartment in the le -hand stowage net. % In vehicles with a Burmester® surround sound system, the rst-aid kit (so sided) is located in the boot when the vehicle is delivered. Breakdown assistance 391 Tyr yres es without without run- at char haract acter eristics: istics: # Do not drive with a at tyre. # Change the at tyre immediately with an emergency spare wheel or spare wheel. Alternatively, consult a quali ed specialist workshop. # # # Le -hand dr driv ivee vehicle: vehicle: pull tab 1 upwards. Right-hand driv drivee vehicle: vehicle: pull tab 1 downwards. Remove re extinguisher 2. Flat tyre Notes on at tyr tyres es & WARNING Risk of accident due to a at tyre A at tyre severely a ects the driving characteristics as well as the steering and braking of the vehicle. Tyr yres es with with run- at char haract acter eris istics: tics: # Observe the information and warning notes on MOExtended tyres (run- at tyres). In the event of a at tyre, the following options are available depending on your vehicle's equipment: R Vehicles with with MOExtended MOExtended tyres: tyres: it is possible to continue the journey for a short period of time. Make sure you observe the notes on MOExtended tyres (run- at tyres) (/ page 391). R Vehicles with with a TIREFIT kit: you can repair the tyre so that it is possible to continue the journey for a short period of time. To do this, use the TIREFIT kit (/ page 393). R R Vehicles with with Mercedes Mercedes me connect: you can make a call for breakdown assistance via the overhead control panel in the case of a breakdown (/ page 353). All vehicles: vehicles: change the wheel (/ page 421). Notes on MOExtended MOExtended tyres tyres (r (runun- at tyr tyres) es) & WARNING Risk of accident when driving in limp-home mode Driving in emergency mode impairs the handling characteristics of the vehicle. # Do not exceed the permissible maximum speed of the MOExtended tyres. # Avoid any abrupt steering and driving manoeuvres as well as driving over obstacles (kerbs, pot holes, o -road). This applies, in particular, to a loaded vehicle. # Stop driving in the emergency mode if you notice: R banging noise 392 Breakdown assistance R R R R # # vehicle vibration smoke which smells like rubber continuous ESP® intervention cracks in the tyre sidewalls A er driving in emergency mode, have the rims checked by a quali ed specialist workshop with regard to their further use. The defective tyre must be replaced in every case. With MOExtended tyres (run- at tyres), you can continue to drive your vehicle even if there is a total loss of pressure in one or more tyres. However, the tyre a ected must not show any clearly visible damage. You can recognise MOExtended tyres by the MOExtended marking which appears on the side wall of the tyre. Vehicles with with tyre tyre pressur pressuree loss war warning ning system: system: MOExtended tyres may only be used in conjunction with an activated tyre pressure loss warning system. Vehicles with with tyre tyre pressur pressuree monitor monitoring ing syst system: em: MOExtended tyres may only be used in conjunction with an activated tyre pressure monitoring system. If a pressure loss warning message appears in the driver's display, proceed as follows: R Check the tyre for damage. R If driving on, observe the following notes. TIREFIT kit stor storag agee location The TIREFIT kit is located under the load compartment oor. Driving distance Driving distance possible in emergency emergency mode a er the pressur pressuree loss war warning: ning: Load condition Driving Dr iving distance distance possible in emergency emergency mode Partially laden 80 km Fully laden 30 km The driving distance possible in emergency mode may vary depending on the driving style. Observe the maximum permissible speed of 80 km/h. If a tyre has gone at and cannot be replaced with an MOExtended tyre, you can use a standard tyre as a temporary measure. 1 Tyre sealant bottle 2 Tyre in ation compressor Depending on the model, the TIREFIT kit may also be located in other places under the load compartment oor. % You can nd information on the power category (LK) and/or electrical data on the back of the tyre in ation compressor: R LK2 – 12 V/15 A, 180 W, 0.8 kg Breakdown assistance 393 At a distance of approximately 1 m to the tyre in ation compressor and approximately 1.6 m above the ground, the following sound pressure levels apply: R Emission sound pressure level LPA 83 dB (A) R Sound power level LWA 91 dB (A) The tyre in ation compressor is maintenancefree. If there is a malfunction, please contact a quali ed specialist workshop. Using the the TIREFIT kit Req equir uirements: ements: R Tyre sealant bottle and tyre in ation compressor (/ page 392) R TIREFIT sticker R Gloves You can use TIREFIT tyre sealant to seal perforation damage of up to 4 mm, particularly those in the tyre contact surface. You can use TIREFIT in outside temperatures down to -20 °C. & WARNING Risk of accident when using tyre sealant The tyre sealant may be unable to seal the tyre properly, especially in the following cases: R there are large cuts or punctures in the tyre (larger than damage previously mentioned) R the wheel rims have been damaged R a er journeys with very low tyre pressure or with at tyres # # Do not continue driving. Consult a quali ed specialist workshop. & WARNING Risk of injury and poisoning from tyre sealant Tyre sealant is hazardous to health and causes irritation. Do not allow it to come into contact with your skin, eyes or clothing, and do not swallow it. Do not inhale any vapours. Keep the tyre sealant away from children. Observe the following if you come into contact with the tyre sealant: # Rinse o the tyre sealant from your skin using water immediately. # If tyre sealant gets into your eyes, thoroughly rinse them using clean water immediately. # If tyre sealant has been swallowed, thoroughly rinse out your mouth immediately and drink plenty of water. Do not induce vomiting and seek medical attention immediately. # Change out of clothing which has come into contact with tyre sealant immediately. # If an allergic reaction occurs, seek medical attention immediately. * NOTE Overheating due to the tyre in ation compressor running too long # Do not run the tyre in ation compressor for longer than ten minutes without interruption. 394 Breakdown assistance Comply with the manufacturer's safety notes on the sticker on the tyre in ation compressor. Have the tyre sealant bottle replaced in a quali ed specialist workshop every ve years. # Do not remove any foreign objects which have entered the tyre. # # # # # # A x part 1 of the TIREFIT sticker to the instrument cluster within the driver's eld of vision. A x part 2 of the TIREFIT sticker near the valve on the wheel with the defective tyre. # # Pull plug 4 with the cable and hose 5 out of the tyre in ation compressor housing. Push the plug of hose 5 into ange 6 of tyre sealant bottle 1 until the plug engages. Place tyre sealant bottle 1 head downwards into recess 2 of the tyre in ation compressor. # # Remove the valve cap from valve 7 on the faulty tyre. Screw lling hose 8 onto valve 7. Insert plug 4 into a 12 V socket in your vehicle. Switch on the vehicle. Switch on the tyre in ation compressor using On/O switch 3. The tyre is in ated. First, tyre sealant is pumped into the tyre. The pressure may brie y rise to approximately 500 kPa (5.0 bar/73 psi). Do not not switch switch o the tyre tyre in ation com compr pressor essor during dur ing this this phase! Breakdown assistance 395 # Let the tyre in ation compressor run for a maximum of ten minutes. The tyre should then have attained a tyre pressure of at least 200 kPa (2.0 bar/29 psi). If tyre sealant leaks out, make sure you clean the a ected area as quickly as possible. It is preferable to use clean water. If you get tyre sealant on your clothing, have it cleaned as soon as possible with perchloroethylene. If, a er ten minutes, minutes, a tyre tyre pressur pressuree of 200 kPa (2.0 bar/29 psi) has not not been attained: attained: # Switch o the tyre in ation compressor. # Unscrew the lling hose from the valve of the defective tyre. Please note that tyre sealant may leak out when unscrewing the lling hose. # Drive forwards or in reverse very slowly for approximately 10 m. # Pump up the tyre again. A er a maximum of ten minutes the tyre pressure must be at least 200 kPa (2.0 bar/ 29 psi). & WARNING Risk of accident due to the speci ed tyre pressure not being attained If the speci ed tyre pressure is not attained a er the speci ed time, the tyre is too badly damaged. The tyre sealant cannot repair the tyre in this instance. The braking and driving characteristics may be greatly impaired. # Do not continue driving. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop. If, a er ten minutes, minutes, a tyre tyre pressur pressuree of 200 kPa (2.0 bar/29 psi) has been attained: attained: # Switch o the tyre in ation compressor. # Unscrew the lling hose from the valve of the defective tyre. & WARNING Risk of accident from driving with sealed tyres A tyre temporarily sealed with tyre sealant impairs the handling characteristics and is not suitable for higher speeds. # Adapt your driving style accordingly and drive carefully. # Do not exceed the maximum speed limit with a tyre that has been repaired using tyre sealant. # Observe the maximum permissible speed for a tyre sealed with tyre sealant 80 km/h. * NOTE Staining from leaking tyre sealant A er use, excess tyre sealant may leak out from the lling hose. # Therefore, place the lling hose in the plastic bag that contained the TIREFIT kit. 396 Breakdown assistance + ENVIRONMENTAL ENVIRONMENT AL NOTE NOTE Environmental pollution caused by environmentally irresponsible disposal Tyre sealant contains pollutants. # Have the tyre sealant bottle disposed of professionally, e.g. at a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. # # # Stow the tyre sealant bottle and the tyre in ation compressor. Pull away immediately. Stop driving a er approximately ten minutes and check the tyre pressure using the tyre in ation compressor. The tyre pressure must now be at least 130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi). & WARNING Risk of accident due to the speci ed tyre pressure not being attained If the speci ed tyre pressure is not reached, the tyre is too badly damaged. The tyre sealant cannot repair the tyre in this instance. The braking and driving characteristics may be greatly impaired. # Do not continue driving. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop. # Countries Countr ies that that have have Mercedes-Benz Mercedes-Benz Service24h: Ser vice24h: you will nd a sticker with the telephone number, e.g. on the B‑pillar on the driver's side. # Correct the tyre pressure if it is still at least 130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi). See the tyre pressure table on the fuel ller ap for values. # To increase increase the the tyre tyre pressur pressure: e: switch on the tyre in ation compressor. # # # # To reduce reduce the the tyre tyre pressur pressure: e: press pressure release button 1 next to manometer 2. When the tyre pressure is correct, unscrew the lling hose from the valve of the sealed tyre. Screw the valve cap onto the valve of the sealed tyre. Pull the tyre sealant bottle out of the tyre in ation compressor. The lling hose stays on the tyre sealant bottle. Drive to the nearest quali ed specialist workshop and have the tyre, tyre sealant bottle and lling hose replaced there. Batter Batt eryy (vehicle) (vehicle) Notes on the the 12 V battery battery & WARNING Risk of an accident due to work carried out incorrectly on the battery Work carried out incorrectly on the battery can, for example, lead to a short circuit. This Breakdown assistance 397 can restrict functions relevant for safety systems and impair the operating safety of your vehicle. You could lose control of the vehicle in the following situations in particular: R when braking R in the event of abrupt steering manoeuvres and/or when the vehicle's speed is not adapted to the road conditions # # # R R In the event of a short circuit or a similar incident, contact a quali ed specialist workshop immediately. Do not drive on. Always have work on the battery carried out at a quali ed specialist workshop. Further information on ABS (/ page 231) Further information on ESP® (/ page 232) For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use batteries which have been tested and approved for your vehicle by MercedesBenz. All vehicles vehicles excep exceptt vehicles vehicles with with a lithium-ion lithium-ion battery & WARNING Risk of explosion due to electrostatic charge Electrostatic charge can ignite the highly explosive gas mixture in the battery. # To discharge any electrostatic charge that may have built up, touch the metal vehicle body before handling the battery. The highly ammable gas mixture is created while the battery is charging and during starting assistance. & WARNING Danger of chemical burns from the battery acid Battery acid is caustic. # Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing. # Do not lean over the battery. # Do not inhale battery gases. # Keep children away from the battery. # Immediately rinse battery acid o thoroughly with plenty of clean water and seek medical attention immediately. All vehicles vehicles + ENVIRONMENT ENVIR ONMENTAL AL NOTE NOTE Environmental damage due to improper disposal of batteries Batteries contain pollutants. It is illegal to dispose of them with the household rubbish. # Dispose of batteries in an environmentally responsible manner. Take discharged batteries to a quali ed specialist workshop or to a collection point for used batteries. 398 Breakdown assistance If you have to disconnect the 12 V battery, contact a quali ed specialist workshop. Comply with safety notes and take protective measures when handling batteries. Risk of explosion. Fire, naked ames and smoking are prohibited when handling the battery. Avoid creating sparks. Electrolyte or battery acid is corrosive. Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing. Wear suitable protective clothing, in particular gloves, an apron and a face mask. Immediately rinse electrolyte or acid splashes o with clean water. Consult a doctor if necessary. Wear safety glasses. Keep children away. Observe this Owner's Manual. Observe the following if you do not intend to use the vehicle over an extended period of time: R Activate standby mode. R Alternatively: connect the battery to a battery charger approved by Mercedes-Benz or consult a quali ed specialist workshop to disconnect the battery. Notes on star starting ting assistance assistance and char charging ging the the 12 V battery battery All vehicles vehicles When charging the battery and during starting assistance, always use the jump-start connection point in the engine compartment. * NOTE Damage to the battery from overvoltage When charging using a battery charger without a restriction of the maximum charging voltage, the battery or the on-board electronics can be damaged. # Only use battery chargers with a maximum charging voltage of 14.8 V. & WARNING Risk of explosion due to hydrogen gas igniting If, when charging a battery, there is a short circuit or sparks start to form, there is a danger of hydrogen gas igniting. # Take care that the positive clamp connected to a battery does not come into contact with vehicle parts. # Never place metal objects or tools on a battery. # When connecting and disconnecting the battery, always observe the sequence of battery clamps described. Breakdown assistance 399 # # # Take care to only connect battery terminals of identical polarity when receiving starting assistance. Observe the sequence described for connecting and disconnecting the jump leads when receiving starting assistance. Do not connect or disconnect the battery terminals while the engine is running. & WARNING Risk of explosion due to explosive mixture of gases An explosive mixture of gases can escape from the battery during charging and starting assistance. # Fire, naked ames, smoking and creating sparks must be avoided. # Make sure there is adequate ventilation. # Do not stand over the battery. & WARNING Risk of explosion from a frozen battery A discharged battery may freeze at temperatures slightly above or below freezing point. During starting assistance or battery charging, battery gas can be released. # Always allow a battery to thaw before charging it or performing starting assistance. If the indicator/warning lamps in the instrument cluster do not light up at low temperatures, it is very likely that the discharged battery has frozen. In this case you may neither jump-start the vehicle nor charge the battery. The service life of a battery that has been thawed may be dramatically shortened. The starting characteristics may be impaired, especially at low temperatures. It is recommended that you have a thawed battery checked at a quali ed specialist workshop. Vehicles with with plug-in hybr hybrid: id: If your vehicle has been started with starting assistance, it may not be possible to use the electric drive for approximately 30 minutes. Starting assistance is not considered to be a normal operating condition. All vehicles vehicles * NOTE NOTE Damage caused by numerous or extended attempts to start the engine Numerous or extended attempts to start the engine may damage the catalytic converter due to non-combusted fuel. # Avoid numerous and extended attempts to start the engine. Observe the following points during starting assistance and when charging the battery: R Only use undamaged jump lead/charging cables with a su cient cross-section and insulated terminal clamps. R Non-insulated parts of the terminal clamps must not come into contact with other metal 400 Breakdown assistance R R R R parts while the jump lead/charging cable is connected to the battery/jump-start connection point. The jump lead/charging cable must not come into contact with any parts which may move when the engine is running. Always make sure that neither you nor the battery is electrostatically charged. Keep away from re and naked ames. Do not lean over the battery. Observe the additional following points when charging the battery: R Only use battery chargers tested and approved for Mercedes-Benz. R Read the battery charger's operating instructions before charging the battery. Observe the additional following points during starting assistance: R Starting assistance may only be provided using vehicles, batteries or other jump start devices with a nominal voltage of 12 V. R The vehicles must not touch. R Vehicles with with a petr petrol ol engine: jump-start the vehicle only when the engine and exhaust system are cold. Star arting ting assistance assistance and char charging ging the the 12 V battery battery Req equir uirements: ements: R The vehicle is secured with the electric parking brake. R Vehicles with with automatic automatic transmission: transmission: the transmission is in position j. R The vehicle and all electrical consumers are switched o . R The bonnet is open. Example: engine compartment # # Slide cover 1 of positive contact 2 on the jump-starting connection point in the direction of the arrow. Connect positive contact 2 on your vehicle to the positive terminal of the donor battery using the jump lead/charging cable. Always Breakdown assistance 401 # # # # # # begin with positive contact 2 on your own vehicle rst. During Dur ing star starting ting assistance: assistance: start the engine of the donor vehicle and run at idle speed. Connect the negative terminal of the donor battery and earth point 3 of your own vehicle by using the jump lead/charging cable. Begin with the donor battery rst. During Dur ing star starting ting assistance: assistance: start the engine of your own vehicle. During Dur ing the the char charging ging process: process: start the charging process. During Dur ing star starting ting assistance: assistance: let the engines run for several minutes. During Dur ing star starting ting assistance: assistance: before disconnecting the jump lead, switch on an electrical consumer on your own vehicle, e.g. the rear window heater or lighting. When the starting assistance/charging process is complete, perform the following steps: # First, remove the jump lead/charging cable from earth point 3 and the negative terminal # of the donor battery, then from positive contact 2 and the positive terminal of the donor battery. Begin each time with the contacts on your own vehicle rst. A er removing the jump lead/charging cable, close cover 1 of positive contact 2. If your vehicle has been started with starting assistance, it may not be possible to use the electric drive for approximately 30 minutes. Further information can be obtained at a quali ed specialist workshop. Replacing the the 12 V battery battery # Observe the notes on the 12 V battery (/ page 396). Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the 12 V battery replaced at a quali ed specialist workshop, e.g. at a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Observe the following notes if you want to replace the battery yourself: R Always replace a faulty battery with a battery which meets the speci c vehicle requirements. The vehicle is equipped with an AGM technology battery (Absorbent Glass Mat) or a lithium-ion battery. Full vehicle functionality is only guaranteed with an AGM battery or lithium-ion battery. For safety reasons, MercedesBenz recommends that you only use batteries which have been tested and approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz. R Carry over detachable parts, such as vent hoses, elbow ttings or terminal covers from the battery being replaced. R Make sure that the vent hose is always connected to the original opening on the side of the battery. Fit any existing or supplied cell caps. Otherwise, gases or battery acid could escape. R Make sure that detachable parts are reconnected in the same way. 402 Breakdown assistance Tow -st -star arting ting or towing towing away Per ermitt mitted ed towing towing methods methods (non plug-in hybr hybrid) id) * NOTE Damage from automatic braking If one of the following functions is switched on, the vehicle brakes automatically in certain situations: R Active Brake Assist R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC R HOLD function R Active Parking Assist To avoid damage to the vehicle, deactivate these systems in the following or similar situations: # during towing # in a car wash Mercedes-Benz recommends transporting your vehicle in the case of a breakdown, rather than towing it away. For towing, use a tow rope or tow bar with both axles on the ground. Do not use tow bar systems. * NOTE Damage to the vehicle due to towing away incorrectly 4MATIC 4MA TIC vehicles vehicles Observe the instructions and notes on towing away. Both axles on the ground Yes, maximum 50 km at 50 km/h Front axle raised No Rear axle raised No # Vehicles with with rear rear wheel drive drive Per ermitt mitted ed towing towing methods methods Per ermitt mitted ed towing towing methods methods Both axles on the ground Yes, maximum 50 km at 50 km/h Front axle raised No Towing with with a raised raised axle: towing should be performed by a towing company. Rear axle raised Yes, if the steering wheel is xed in the centre position with a steering wheel lock Per ermitt mitted ed towing towing methods methods (plug-in hybr hybrid) id) Mercedes-Benz recommends transporting your vehicle in the case of a breakdown, rather than towing it away. For towing, use a tow rope or tow bar with both axles on the ground. Do not use tow bar systems. Breakdown assistance 403 * NOTE Damage to the vehicle due to towing away incorrectly # Observe the instructions and notes on towing away. Observe the information on towing and transporting the vehicle in the vehicle Owner's Manual. Per ermitt mitted ed towing towing methods methods Both axles on the ground Yes, maximum 50 km at 50 km/h Front axle raised Yes, maximum 50 km at 50 km/h Rear axle raised Yes, if the steering wheel is xed in the centre position with a steering wheel lock. In the following situations, only transporting the vehicle is permitted: R the display is not working or R the v Towing not permitted See Owner's Manual display message appears Exception: Excep tion: if the vehicle is located in a danger zone, it can be recovered from the danger zone despite the display message or the display not working. It must not be towed further than 50 m with both axles on the ground. A towing speed of 10 km/h must not be exceeded. Beyond these limits, only transporting is permitted. Towing the the vehicle vehicle with with both both axles on the the ground ground # # Observe the notes on the permitted towing methods (/ page 402). Make sure that the battery is connected and charged. Observe the following points when the battery is discharged: R the engine cannot be started R the electric parking brake cannot be released or applied R vehicles with with automatic automatic transmission: transmission: the automatic transmission cannot be shi ed to position i or j % Vehicles with with automatic automatic transmission: transmission: if the automatic transmission cannot be shi ed to position i or if the display does not show anything, transport the vehicle (/ page 405). A towing vehicle with li ing equipment is required for vehicle transportation. * NOTE NOTE Damage due to towing away at excessively high speeds or over long distances The drivetrain could be damaged when towing at excessively high speeds or over long distances. # A towing speed of 50 km/h must not be exceeded. # A towing distance of 50 km must not be exceeded. 404 Breakdown assistance & WARNING Risk of accident when towing a vehicle which is too heavy If the vehicle to be tow-started or towed away is heavier than the permissible gross mass of your vehicle, the following situations can occur: R the towing eye may become detached. R the vehicle/trailer combination may swerve or overturn. # Before tow-starting or towing away, check if the vehicle to be tow-started or towed away exceeds the permissible gross mass. If a vehicle must be tow-started or towed away, its permissible gross mass must not exceed the permissible gross mass of the towing vehicle. # Information on the permissible gross mass of the vehicle can be found on the vehicle identication plate (/ page 431). # Vehicles with with automatic automatic transmission: transmission: do not open the driver's door or front passenger # # door; the automatic transmission otherwise automatically shi s to position j. Fit the towing eye (/ page 406). Fasten the towing device. * NOTE Damage due to incorrect connection of the tow bar # # # # # # # Only connect the tow rope or tow bar to the towing eyes. Deactivate the automatic locking mechanism (/ page 85). Do not activate the HOLD function. Deactivate tow-away protection (/ page 103). Deactivate Active Brake Assist (/ page 257). Vehicles with with automatic automatic transmission: transmission: shi the automatic transmission to position i. Release the electric parking brake. & WARNING Risk of accident due to limited safety-related functions during the towing process Safety-related functions are limited or no longer available in the following situations: R the vehicle is switched o . R the brake system or power steering system is malfunctioning. R the energy supply or the on-board electrical system is malfunctioning. When your vehicle is towed away, signi cantly more e ort may be required to steer and brake than is normally required. # Use a tow bar. # Make sure that the steering wheel can move freely before towing the vehicle away. Breakdown assistance 405 * NOTE Damage due to excessive tractive power If you pull away sharply, the tractive power may be too high and the vehicles could be damaged. # Pull away slowly and smoothly. # # # Loading the the vehicle vehicle for for transport transport Hybrid Hybr id vehicles: vehicles: transportation of vehicles should only be carried out by professional recovery companies. # Observe the notes on towing away (/ page 403). # Connect the towing device to the towing eye in order to load the vehicle. % You can also attach the tow bar to the trailer hitch. # Vehicles with with automatic automatic transmission: transmission: shi the automatic transmission to position i. % Vehicles with with automatic automatic transmission: transmission: the automatic transmission may be locked in posi- # tion j in the event of damage to the electrical system. To shi to i, provide the onboard electrical system with power (/ page 400). Load the vehicle onto the transporter. Vehicles with with automatic automatic transmission: transmission: shi the automatic transmission to position j. Use the electric parking brake to secure the vehicle against rolling away. Only secure the vehicle by the wheels. Vehicles with with ADS PLUS PLUS (Adap (Adaptiv tivee Damping Damping SysSystem PLUS) PLUS) & WARNING Risk of an accident when transporting vehicles with Adaptive Damping System PLUS When transporting vehicles with Adaptive Damping System PLUS, the vehicle/trailer combination may begin to rock and start to skid. # Load the vehicle correctly onto the transporter. # # Secure the vehicle on all four wheels with suitable tensioning straps. Do not exceed the maximum permissible speed of 60 km/h when transporting. * NOTE Damage to the vehicle from securing it incorrectly # # # A er loading, the vehicle must be secured on all four wheels. Otherwise, the vehicle could be damaged. A minimum distance of 20 cm upwards and 10 cm downwards must be kept to the transport platform. Secure the vehicle on all four wheels a er loading. 406 Breakdown assistance 4MATIC vehicles/v 4MATIC vehicles/vehicles ehicles with with automatic automatic transtransmission # Make sure that the front and rear axles come to rest on the same transportation vehicle. * NOTE Damage to the drive train due to incorrect positioning of the vehicle # Do not position the vehicle above the connection point of the transport vehicle. Towing eye eye stor storag agee location Fitting and remo removing ving the the towing towing eye Towing eye 1 is attached to the edge of the load compartment under the load compartment oor. Vehicles with with folding folding bench bench seat: seat: the towing eye is located under a cover. # # Press the mark on cover 1 inwards and remove. Screw in the towing eye clockwise as far as it will go and tighten. Vehicles with with a trailer trailer hitch: hitch: vehicles with a trailer hitch do not have a rear bracket for the towing eye. Fasten the tow bar to the trailer hitch. Breakdown assistance 407 # Make sure that cover 1 engages in the bumper when you remove the towing eye. * NOTE Damage to the vehicle due to incorrect use of the towing eye or trailer hitch When a towing eye or trailer hitch is used to recover a vehicle, the vehicle may be damaged in the process. # Only use the towing eye or trailer hitch to tow away or tow start the vehicle. # Do not use the towing eye or trailer hitch to tow the vehicle during recovery. Tow -st -star arting ting the the vehicle vehicle Vehicles with with automatic automatic transmission transmission * NOTE NOTE Damage to the automatic transmission due to tow-starting The automatic transmission may be damaged in the process of tow-starting vehicles with automatic transmission. # # Vehicles with automatic transmission must not be tow-started. Vehicles with an automatic transmission must not be tow-started. Electrical Electr ical fuses Notes on electrical electrical fuses & WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to overloaded lines If you manipulate or bridge a faulty fuse or if you replace it with a fuse with a higher amperage, the electric line could be overloaded. This could result in a re. # Always replace faulty fuses with specied new fuses containing the correct amperage. * NOTE Damage due to incorrect fuses Electrical components or systems may be damaged by incorrect fuses, or their functionality may be signi cantly impaired. # Only use fuses that have been approved by Mercedes-Benz and which have the correct fuse rating. Blown fuses must be replaced with fuses of the same rating, which you can recognise by the colour and the label. The fuse ratings and further information to be observed can be found in the fuse assignment diagram. Fuse assignment diagram: diagram: on the fuse box in the load compartment (/ page 409). * NOTE NOTE Damage or malfunctions caused by moisture Moisture may cause damage to the electrical system or cause it to malfunction. # When the fuse box is open, make sure that no moisture can enter the fuse box. 408 Breakdown assistance # When closing the fuse box, make sure that the seal of the lid is positioned correctly on the fuse box. If the newly inserted fuse also blows, have the cause traced and recti ed at a quali ed specialist workshop. Ensure the following before replacing a fuse: R The vehicle is secured against rolling away. R All electrical consumers are switched o . R the vehicle is switched o . The electrical fuses are located in various fuse boxes: R Fuse box in the engine compartment on the driver's side (/ page 408) R Fuse box on the driver's side of the cockpit (/ page 409) R Fuse box in the front passenger footwell (/ page 409) R Fuse box in the load compartment on the right-hand side of the vehicle, when viewed in the direction of travel (/ page 409) Opening and closing the the fuse box box in the the engine compar com partment tment Req equir uirements: ements: R A dry cloth and a screwdriver are available. Observe the notes on electrical fuses (/ page 407). Opening & WARNING Risk of injury from using the windscreen wipers when the bonnet is open If the windscreen wipers start moving when the bonnet is open, you could be trapped by the wiper linkage. # Always switch o the windscreen wipers and the vehicle rst if you need to open the bonnet. # # Turn clips 2 on cover 1 a quarter-turn to anti-clockwise. Pull cover 1 upwards in the direction of the arrow. Breakdown assistance 409 # # # # # Insert lid 3 into the bracket at the rear of the fuse box. Fold down lid 3 of the fuse box and tighten screws 4. Insert cover 1 on both sides. Turn clips 2 on cover 1 a quarter-turn clockwise. Close the bonnet. Opening and closing the the fuse box box in the the cockpit cockpit R # # Remove any existing moisture from the fuse box using a dry cloth. Loosen screws 4 and remove fuse box lid 3 from the top. Closing Check whether the seal is positioned correctly in cap 3. # Observe the notes on electrical fuses (/ page 407). The fuse box is on the driver's side on the side of the cockpit under a cover. # To open and close it, consult a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. # # To open: open cover 1 in the direction of the arrow and remove it. To close: reinsert cover 1. Opening and closing the the fuse box box in the the front front passenger foo passenger footw twell ell Opening and closing the the fuse box box in the the load compar tment partment Observe the notes on electrical fuses (/ page 407). Observe the notes on electrical fuses (/ page 407). 410 Breakdown assistance # Li up the side panel. # Pull up cover 2 on the fuse box. Remove cover 1. # The fuse assignment diagram is in a recess on the side of the fuse box. Wheels and tyres 411 Notes on noise or unusual handling char charact acter erisistics Make sure there are no vibrations, noises or unusual handling characteristics when the vehicle is in motion. This may indicate that the wheels or tyres are damaged. Hidden tyre damage could also be causing the unusual handling characteristics. If you suspect that a tyre is defective, reduce your speed immediately and have the tyres and wheels checked at a quali ed specialist workshop. Notes on regularl regularlyy inspecting wheels and tyres tyres & WARNING Risk of injury due to damaged tyres Damaged tyres can cause tyre pressure loss. # Check the tyres regularly for signs of damage and replace any damaged tyres immediately. & WARNING Risk of aquaplaning due to insu cient tyre tread Insu cient tyre tread will result in reduced tyre grip. The risk of aquaplaning is increased on wet roads, especially when the speed of the vehicle is not adapted to suit the conditions. # Thus, you should regularly check the tread depth and the condition of the tread across the entire width of all tyres. Minimum tread depth for: R Summer tyres: 3 mm R M+S tyres: 4 mm # For safety reasons, replace the tyres before the legally-prescribed limit for the minimum tread depth is reached. Carry out the following checks on all wheels regularly, at least once a month or as required, for example, prior to a long journey or driving o road: R Check the tyre pressure (/ page 412). R R R Visually inspect wheels and tyres for damage. Check the valve caps. Visual check of the tyre tread depth and the tyre contact surface across the entire width. The minimum tread depth for summer tyres is 3 mm and for winter tyres 4 mm. Notes on snow snow chains chains & WARNING Risk of accident due to incorrectly tted snow chains If you have tted snow chains to the front wheels, they may drag against the vehicle body or chassis components. # Never t snow chains to the front wheels. # Only t snow chains on the rear wheels in pairs. 412 Wheels and tyres * NOTE Damage to components of the vehicle body or chassis due to tted snow chains If you t snow chains to the front wheels of 4MATIC vehicles, you may damage components of the vehicle body or chassis. # Only t snow chains to the rear wheels of 4MATIC vehicles. Observe the following notes when using snow chains: R Snow chains are only permissible for certain wheel/tyre combinations. You can obtain information about this from a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. R For safety reasons, only use snow chains that have been speci cally approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz, or snow chains with the same quality standard. R If snow chains are tted, the maximum permissible speed is 50 km/h. R R Vehicles with with Activ Activee Par Parking king Assist: Assist: do not use Active Parking Assist when snow chains are tted. Vehicles with with level level control: control: if snow chains are tted, only drive at raised vehicle level (/ page 266). % You can permanently limit the maximum speed for driving with winter tyres (/ page 241). % You can deactivate ESP® to pull away (/ page 234). This allows the wheels to spin, achieving an increased driving force. Tyr yree pressure pressure Notes on tyre tyre pressure pressure & WARNING Risk of accident due to insu cient or excessive tyre pressure Underin ated or overin ated tyres pose in particular the following risks: R The tyres can burst. R R # R R R R # The tyres can wear excessively and/or unevenly. The driving characteristics as well as the steering and braking characteristics may be greatly impaired. Comply with the recommended tyre pressure and check the tyre pressure of all tyres, including the spare wheel, regularly: monthly when the load changes before embarking on a longer journey if operating conditions change, e.g. o road driving Adjust the tyre pressure, if necessary. Tyre pressure which is too high or too low can: Shorten the service life of the tyres. R Cause increased tyre damage. R Adversely a ect driving characteristics and thus driving safety, e.g. due to aquaplaning. R Wheels and tyres 413 & WARNING Risk of accident due to repeated pressure drop in the tyres The wheels, valves or tyres could be damaged. Too low a tyre pressure can lead to the tyres bursting. # Examine the tyres for foreign objects. # Check whether the tyre has a puncture or the valve has a leak. # If you are unable to rectify the damage, contact a quali ed specialist workshop. Information on the recommended tyre pressure for the vehicle's factory- tted tyres can be found on the tyre pressure table on the inside of the fuel ller ap (/ page 413). Use a suitable pressure gauge to check the tyre pressure. The outer appearance of a tyre does not permit any reliable conclusion about the tyre pressure. Only correct tyre pressures when the tyres are cold. Conditions for cold tyres: R The vehicle has been parked with the tyres out of direct sunlight for at least three hours. R The vehicle has travelled less than 1.6 km. The vehicle's tyres heat up when driving. As the temperature of the tyres increases, so too does the tyre pressure. Vehicles with with a tyre tyre pressur pressuree monitor monitoring ing system: system: you can also check the tyre pressure using the on-board computer. Notes on trailer Notes trailer operation operation Always in ate the rear axle tyres to the recommended tyre pressures on the tyre pressure table for increased load. Tyr yree pressur pressuree table table The tyre pressure table is on the inside of the fuel ller ap. If one or more tyre sizes precede a tyre pressure, the following tyre pressure information is only valid for those tyre sizes and their respective load condition. If the preceding tyre sizes are complemented by the + symbol, the tyre pressure information following shows alternative tyre pressures. Fuel consumption may then increase slightly. 414 Wheels and tyres The load conditions "partially laden" and "fully laden" are de ned in the table for di erent numbers of passengers and amounts of luggage. The actual number of seats may di er from this. Tyr yree pressur pressuree monitor monitoring ing system system Function of the the tyre tyre pressur pressuree monitor monitoring ing system system The system checks the tyre pressure and the tyre temperature of the tyres tted to the vehicle by means of a tyre pressure sensor. The tyre pressure and the tyre temperature appear in the on-board computer (/ page 414). If there is a substantial pressure loss or if the tyre temperature is excessive, you will be warned with display messages (/ page 507) or the h warning lamp in the instrument cluster (/ page 532). The tyre pressure monitoring system is only an aid. It is the driver's responsibility to set the tyre pressure to the recommended cold tyre pressure suitable for the operating situation. In most cases, the tyre pressure monitoring system will automatically update the new reference values a er you have changed the tyre pressure. You can, however, also update the reference values by restarting the tyre pressure monitoring system manually (/ page 415). System limits System The system may be impaired or may not function particularly in the following situations: R incorrect reference values were taught in R sudden pressure loss caused by a foreign object penetrating the tyre, for example R there is a malfunction caused by another radio signal source Checking the Checking the tyre tyre pressur pressuree with with the the tyre tyre pressure pressure monitor monit oring ing system system Req equir uirements: ements: R The vehicle is switched on. On-board computer: 4 Service 5 Tyres One of the following displays appears: R Current tyre pressure and tyre temperature of the individual wheels: R R # Tyre pressures will be displayed after a few minutes of driving Tyre pressure monitor active: the teach-in process of the system is not yet complete. The tyre pressures are already being monitored. Compare the tyre pressure with the recommended tyre pressure for the current operating condition (/ page 413). Additionally, observe the notes on cold tyres (/ page 412). Wheels and tyres 415 % The values displayed in the on-board computer may deviate from those of the tyre pressure gauge as they refer to sea level. At high elevations, the tyre pressure values indicated by a pressure gauge are higher than those shown by the on-board computer. In this case, do not reduce the tyre pressure. Rest estar arting ting the the tyre tyre pressur pressuree monitor monitoring ing system system Req equir uirements: ements: R The recommended tyre pressure is correctly set for the respective operating status on all of the wheels (/ page 412). Restart the tyre pressure monitoring system in the following situations: R The tyre pressure has changed. R The wheels or tyres have been changed or newly tted. On-board computer: 4 Service 5 Tyres # Swipe downwards on Touch Control on the le -hand side of the steering wheel. The Use current pressures as new reference values? message is shown in the Instrument Display. # To restart, press Touch Control on the le hand side of the steering wheel. The Tyre press. monitor restarted message is shown in the Instrument Display. Current warning messages are deleted and the yellow h warning lamp goes out. A er you have been driving for a few minutes, the system checks whether the current tyre pressures are within the speci ed range. The current tyre pressures are then accepted as reference values and monitored. Be sure to also pay attention to the following related topic: R Notes on tyre pressure (/ page 412) Tyr yree pressur pressuree loss war warning ning system system Function of the the tyre tyre pressur pressuree loss war warning ning system system The tyre pressure loss warning system warns the driver by means of display messages when there is a severe tyre pressure loss. System limits System The system may be impaired or may not function particularly in the following situations: R incorrect reference values were taught in R sudden pressure loss caused by a foreign object penetrating the tyre, for example R an even pressure loss on more than one tyre occurs The system has a restricted or delayed function particularly in the following situations: R poor ground conditions, e.g. snow or gravel R driving with snow chains R when adopting a very sporty driving style with high cornering speeds or sudden acceleration R driving with a very heavy or large trailer R driving with a high load 416 Wheels and tyres The tyre pressure loss warning system is only an aid. It is the driver's responsibility to set the tyre pressure to the recommended cold tyre pressure suitable for the operating situation and to check it. Be sure to also observe the following further related subjects: R Notes on tyre pressure (/ page 412) R Display messages about the tyres (/ page 507) Rest estar arting ting the the tyre tyre pressur pressuree loss war warning ning system system Req equir uirements: ements: R The recommended tyre pressure is correctly set for the respective operating status on all wheels. Restart the tyre pressure loss warning system in the following situations: R The tyre pressure has changed. R The wheels or tyres have been changed or newly tted. On-board computer: 4 Service 5 Tyres # Swipe downwards on Touch Control on the le -hand side of the steering wheel. The Run Flat Indicator active Restart message is shown in the display. # To begin restart, press Touch Control on the le -hand side of the steering wheel. The Tyre pressure now OK? message is shown in the display. # Select Yes. # To con rm restart, press Touch Control on the le -hand side of the steering wheel. The Run Flat Indicator restarted message is shown in the display. A er you have driven for a few minutes, the tyre pressure loss warning system monitors the set tyre pressures of all the tyres. Be sure to also pay attention to the following related topic: R Notes on tyre pressure (/ page 412) Wheel change change Notes on selecting, tting and replacing replacing tyres tyres * NOTE Mercedes-AMG vehicles # Observe the notes in the Supplement. You could otherwise fail to recognise dangers. & WARNING Risk of accident due to incorrect wheel and tyre dimensions If wheels and tyres of the wrong size are tted, the service brakes or components in the brake system and in the wheel suspension may be damaged. # Always replace wheels and tyres with those that ful l the speci cations of the original part. For wheels, pay attention to the following: R Designation R Type Wheels and tyres 417 For tyres, pay attention to the following: R Designation R Manufacturer R Type & WARNING Risk of injury through exceeding the speci ed tyre load-bearing capacity or the permissible speed rating Exceeding the load-bearing capacity of the tyres can lead to tyre damage and could cause the tyres to explode. # Therefore, only use tyre types and sizes approved for your vehicle model. # Observe the tyre load-bearing capacity rating and speed rating required for your vehicle. * NOTE Vehicle and tyre damage through tyre types and sizes that have not been approved For safety reasons, only use tyres, wheels and accessories which have been specially approved by Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle. These tyres are specially adapted to the active safety systems, such as ABS, ESP® and 4MATIC, and marked as follows: R MO = Mercedes-Benz Original R MOE = Mercedes-Benz Original Extended (run- at tyres only for certain wheels) R MO1 = Mercedes-Benz Original (only certain AMG tyres) Otherwise, certain properties, such as handling characteristics, vehicle noise emissions, consumption, etc. could be adversely a ected. Furthermore, other tyre sizes could result in the tyres rubbing against the body and axle components when loaded. This could result in damage to the tyre or the vehicle. Only use tyres, wheels and accessories that have been checked and recommended by Mercedes-Benz. * NOTE Risk to driving safety from retreaded tyres Retreaded tyres are neither tested nor recommended by Mercedes-Benz, since previous damage cannot always be detected on retreaded tyres. For this reason driving safety cannot be guaranteed. # Do not use used tyres if you have no information about their previous usage. * NOTE Possible wheel and tyre damage when driving over obstacles Large wheels have a smaller section width. As the section width decreases, the risk of wheels and tyres being damaged when driving over obstacles increases. 418 Wheels and tyres # # # Avoid obstacles or drive especially carefully. Reduce your speed when driving over kerbs, speed bumps, manhole covers and potholes. Avoid particularly high kerbs. * NOTE Possible wheel and tyre damage when parking on kerbs or in potholes Parking on kerbs or in potholes may damage the wheels and tyres. # If possible, park only on at surfaces. # Avoid kerbs and potholes when parking. * NOTE Damage to electronic component parts from the use of tyre- tting tools Vehicles with with a tyre tyre pressur pressuree monitor monitoring ing syssystem: electronic component parts are located in the wheel. Tyre- tting tools should not be applied in the area of the valve. The tools could damage the electronic component parts. # Have the tyres changed at a quali ed specialist workshop only. * NOTE Damage to summer tyres at low ambient temperatures At low ambient temperatures, tears could form when driving with summer tyres, causing permanent damage to the tyre. # At temperatures below 7 °C use i M+S tyres. Accessory parts which are not approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz, or which are not used correctly, can impair the operating safety. Before purchasing and using non-approved accessories, visit a quali ed specialist workshop and enquire about: R Suitability R Legal stipulations R Factory recommendations & WARNING Risk of accident with high performance tyres The special tyre tread in combination with the optimised tyre compound means that the risk of skidding and hydroplaning on wet roads is increased. In addition, the tyre grip is greatly reduced at a low outside temperature and tyre running temperature. # Switch on the ESP® and adapt your driving style accordingly. # Use i M+S tyres at outside temperatures of less than 10 °C. # Only use the tyres for their intended purpose. Observe the following when selecting, tting and replacing tyres: R Country-speci c requirements for tyre approval that de ne a speci c tyre type for your vehicle. Wheels and tyres 419 R R R R R R Furthermore, the use of certain tyre types in certain regions and areas of operation can be highly bene cial. Only use tyres and wheels of the same type (summer tyres, winter tyres, MOExtended tyres) and the same make. Only t wheels of the same size on one axle (le and right). It is only permissible to t a di erent wheel size in the event of a at tyre in order to drive to the specialist workshop. Do not make any modi cations to the brake system, the wheels or the tyres. The use of shims or brake dust shields is not permitted and may invalidate the vehicle's general operating permit. Vehicles with with a tyre tyre pressur pressuree monitor monitoring ing syssystem: all tted wheels must be equipped with functioning sensors for the tyre pressure monitoring system. At temperatures below 7 °C use winter tyres or all-season tyres marked i M+S for all wheels. R R R R R Winter tyres provide the best possible grip in wintry road conditions. For M+S tyres, only use tyres with the same tread. Observe the maximum permissible speed for the M+S tyres tted. If the tyre's maximum speed is below that of the vehicle, this must be indicated by an appropriate label in the driver's eld of vision. Run in new tyres at moderate speeds for the rst 100 km. Replace the tyres a er six years at the latest, regardless of wear. When replacing replacing with with tyres tyres that that do not not featur featuree run- at char haract acter eris istics: tics: vehicles with MOExtended tyres are not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory. Equip the vehicle with a TIREFIT kit a er replacing with tyres that do not feature run- at characteristics, e.g. winter tyres. % You can permanently limit the maximum speed for driving with winter tyres (/ page 241). For more information on wheels and tyres, contact a quali ed specialist workshop. Be sure to also observe the following further related subjects: R Notes on tyre pressure (/ page 412) R Tyre pressure table (/ page 413) R Notes on the emergency spare wheel (/ page 426) Notes on interc interchanging hanging wheels & WARNING Risk of injury through di erent wheel sizes Interchanging the front and rear wheels can severely impair the driving characteristics. The disk brakes or wheel suspension components may also be damaged. # Only interchange the front and rear wheels if the wheels and tyres have the same dimensions. 420 Wheels and tyres Interchanging the front and rear wheels if the wheels or tyres have di erent dimensions can render the general operating permit invalid. The wear patterns on the front and rear wheels di er: R front wheels wear more on the tyre shoulder R rear wheels wear more in the centre of the tyre Do not drive with tyres that have too little tread depth. This signi cantly reduces traction on wet roads (aquaplaning). On vehicles with the same front and rear wheel size, you can interchange the wheels every 5,000 to 10,000 km, depending on the wear. Ensure the direction of rotation is maintained for the wheels. Observe the instructions and safety notes on "Changing a wheel" when doing so (/ page 421). Notes on stor storing ing wheels R When storing wheels, observe the following notes: R A er removing wheels, store them in a cool, dry and preferably dark place. R Protect the tyres from contact with oil, grease or fuel. R Over Ov ervie view w of the the tyre-c tyre-chang hangee tool tool kit * NOTE Mercedes-AMG vehicles # Observe the notes in the Supplement. You could otherwise fail to recognise dangers. Apart from some country-speci c variants, vehicles are not equipped with a tyre-change tool kit. For more information on which tyre-changing tools are required and approved for performing a wheel change on your vehicle, consult a quali ed specialist workshop. You require the following tools, for example, to change a wheel: R Jack R Chock Wheel wrench Centring pin % The jack weighs approximately 3.4 kg. The maximum load capacity of the jack can be found on the sticker a xed to the jack. The jack is maintenance-free. If there is a malfunction, please contact a quali ed specialist workshop. The tyre-change tool kit is in tool bag 1 under the load compartment oor. % Depending on the vehicle equipment, the tool bag may be located in other positions under the load compartment oor. Wheels and tyres 421 R R The tool bag contains: R Jack R Gloves R Wheel wrench R Centring pin R Folding chock R Ratchet for jack Prepar Pr eparing ing the the vehicle vehicle for for a wheel change change Req equir uirements: ements: The vehicle is not on a slope. R The vehicle is on solid, non-slippery and level ground. The required tyre-change tool kit is available. % If your vehicle is not equipped with the tyrechange tool kit, consult a quali ed specialist workshop to nd out about suitable tools. # Apply the electric parking brake manually. # Move the front wheels to the straight-ahead position. # Shi the transmission to position j. # Vehicles with with level level control control system: system: set the normal vehicle level (/ page 266). # Switch o the vehicle. # Make sure that the vehicle cannot be started. # Place chocks or other suitable items under the front and rear of the wheel that is diagonally opposite the wheel you wish to change. # If necessary, remove the wheel trim/hub caps (/ page 421). # Raise the vehicle (/ page 422). Remo emoving ving and tting the wheel trim/hub trim/hub caps Req equir uirements: ements: R The vehicle is prepared for a wheel change (/ page 421). Plastic hub cap Plastic # To remov remove: e: turn the centre cover of the hub cap anti-clockwise and remove the hub cap. # To t: make sure that the centre cover of the hub cap is turned anti-clockwise. # Position the hub cap and turn the centre cover clockwise until the hub cap engages physically and audibly. 422 Wheels and tyres Aluminium hub cap Raising the the vehicle vehicle when changing changing a wheel Req equir uirements: ements: R There are no persons in the vehicle. R The vehicle has been prepared for a wheel change (/ page 421). R The wheel trims and hub caps have been removed (/ page 421). To remov remove: e: position socket 2 from the tyrechange tool kit on hub cap 1. # Position wheel spanner 3 on socket 2. # Using wheel spanner 3, turn hub cap 1 anti-clockwise and remove it. # To t: follow the instructions above in reverse order. % Speci ed tight tightening ening torq torque: ue: 25 Nm. # Important notes on using the jack: R Use only a vehicle-speci c jack that has been approved by Mercedes-Benz to raise the vehicle. R The jack is only designed for raising and holding the vehicle for a short time while a wheel is being changed and not for maintenance work under the vehicle. R The jack must be placed on a rm, at and non-slip surface. If necessary, use a large, at, load-bearing, non-slip underlay. R The foot of the jack must be positioned vertically under the jack support point. Rules of conduct when the vehicle is raised: R Never place your hands or feet under the vehicle. R Never lie under the vehicle. Wheels and tyres 423 R R Do not start the vehicle and do not release the electric parking brake. Do not open or close any doors or the tailgate. the jack must be positioned vertically under the jacking point of the vehicle. * NOTE Vehicle damage from the jack Position of jack support points * NOTE Mercedes-AMG vehicles # Using the wheel wrench, loosen the wheel bolts on the wheel you wish to change by about one full turn. Do not unscrew the screws completely. # Observe the notes in the Supplement. You could otherwise fail to recognise dangers. & WARNING Risk of injury from incorrect positioning of the jack If you do not position the jack correctly at the appropriate jacking point of the vehicle, the jack could tip with the vehicle raised. # Only position the jack at the appropriate jacking point of the vehicle. The base of If you do not position the jack correctly at the appropriate jack support point of the vehicle, the jack could tip over with the vehicle raised. # The jack is designed exclusively for jacking up the vehicle at the jack support points. # Take the ratchet out of the tyre-change tool kit and place it on the hexagon nut of the jack so that the letters "AUF" are visible. 424 Wheels and tyres Remo emoving ving a wheel Req equir uirements: ements: R The vehicle is raised (/ page 422). * NO NOTE TE Mercedes-AMG vehicles # Observe the notes in the Supplement. You could otherwise fail to recognise dangers. When changing a wheel, avoid applying any force to the brake discs, as this could impair the level of comfort when braking. # # # # Position support 2 of jack 4 on jack support point 1. Turn ratchet 3 clockwise until support 2 sits completely on jack support point 1 and the base of the jack lies evenly on the ground. Turn ratchet 3 until the tyre is raised a maximum of 3 cm from the ground. Loosen and remove the wheel (/ page 424). * NOTE Damage to threading from dirt on wheel bolts # # Do not place wheel bolts in sand or on a dirty surface. Unscrew the uppermost wheel bolt completely. # # # Screw centring pin 1 into the thread instead of the wheel bolt. Unscrew the remaining wheel bolts completely. Remove the wheel. Fitting a new new wheel * NOTE Mercedes-AMG vehicles # Observe the notes in the Supplement. You could otherwise fail to recognise dangers. Wheels and tyres 425 & WARNING Risk of accident from losing a wheel Oiled or greased wheel bolts can cause the wheel bolts to come loose, as too can damaged wheel bolts or wheel hub threads. # Never oil or grease the threads. # In the event of damage to the threads, contact a quali ed specialist workshop immediately. # Have the damaged wheel bolts or damaged hub threads replaced. # Do not continue driving. # Observe the information on the choice of tyres (/ page 416). For tyres with a speci ed direction of rotation, an arrow on the side wall of the tyre indicates the correct direction of rotation. Observe the direction of rotation when tting. # Slide the wheel to be mounted onto the centring pin and push it on. & WARNING Risk of injury from tightening wheel bolts and nuts If you tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nuts when the vehicle is raised, the jack could tip. # Only tighten wheel bolts or wheel nuts when the vehicle is on the ground. # # # # # # Be sure to observe the instructions and safety notes on "Changing a wheel" (/ page 416). For safety reasons, only use wheel bolts which have been approved by Mercedes-Benz and for the wheel in question. Tighten the wheel bolts evenly in a diagonal pattern in the order indicated until they are nger-tight. Unscrew and remove the centring pin. Tighten the last wheel bolt until it is ngertight. Lower the vehicle (/ page 425). Lower Low ering ing the the vehicle vehicle a er a wheel change change Req equir uirements: ements: R The new wheel has been tted (/ page 424). # To lower lower the the vehicle: vehicle: place the ratchet onto the hexagon nut of the jack so that the letters "AB" are visible and turn anti-clockwise. # Tighten the wheel bolts evenly in a diagonal pattern in the order indicated 1 to 5 with an initial maximum force of 80 Nm. Tighten the wheel bolts evenly in a diagonal pattern in the order indicated 1 to 5 with the speci ed tightening torque of 150 Nm. # 426 Wheels and tyres & WARNING Risk of accident due to incorrect tightening torque The wheels could come loose if the wheel bolts or wheel nuts are not tightened to the prescribed torque. # Ensure that the wheel bolts or wheel nuts are tightened to the prescribed tightening torque. # If you are not sure, do not move the vehicle. Contact a quali ed specialist workshop and have the tightening torque checked immediately. # Check the tyre pressure of the newly tted wheel and adjust it if necessary. % The following does not apply if the new wheel is an emergency spare wheel. # Vehicles with with tyre tyre pressur pressuree loss war warning ning syssystem: restart the tyre pressure loss warning system (/ page 416). # Vehicles with with a tyre tyre pressur pressuree monitor monitoring ing syssystem: restart the tyre pressure monitoring system (/ page 415). Emergency Emerg ency spare spare wheel Notes on the the emergency emergency spare spare wheel & WARNING Risk of accident caused by incorrect wheel and tyre dimensions The wheel or tyre size and the tyre type of the emergency spare wheel or spare wheel and the wheel to be replaced may di er. The emergency spare wheel or spare wheel can signi cantly impair driving characteristics of the vehicle. To prevent hazardous situations: # Drive carefully. # Never t more than one emergency spare wheel or spare wheel that di ers in size. # Only use an emergency spare wheel or spare wheel brie y. # Do not deactivate ESP®. # Have the emergency spare wheel or spare wheel of a di erent size replaced at the nearest quali ed specialist work- shop. The new wheel must have the correct dimensions. % The emergency spare wheel is secured in the emergency spare wheel bag in the load compartment. Observe the following notes on tting an emergency spare wheel: R The maximum permissible speed with an emergency spare wheel tted is 80 km/h. R Do not t the emergency spare wheel with snow chains. R Replace the emergency spare wheel a er six years at the latest, regardless of wear. R Check the tyre pressure of the emergency spare wheel tted. Correct the pressure as necessary. % The speci ed tyre pressure is stated on the label of the emergency spare wheel. Wheels and tyres 427 % Vehicles with with a tyre tyre pressur pressuree loss war warning ning system: syst em: if an emergency spare wheel is tted, the tyre pressure loss warning system cannot function reliably. Only restart the system again when the emergency spare wheel has been replaced with a new wheel. Vehicles with with a tyre tyre pressur pressuree monitor monitoring ing syssystem: if an emergency spare wheel is tted, the tyre pressure monitoring system cannot function reliably. For a few minutes a er an emergency spare wheel is tted, the system may still display the tyre pressure of the removed wheel. Only restart the system again when the emergency spare wheel has been replaced with a new wheel. Be sure to also observe the following further related subjects: R Notes on tyre pressure (/ page 412) R Tyre pressure table (/ page 413) R Notes on tting tyres (/ page 416) R Fitting an emergency spare wheel (/ page 421) 428 Technical data Notes on tec technical hnical data * NO NOTE TE Mercedes-AMG vehicles # Observe the notes in the Supplement. You could otherwise fail to recognise dangers. The technical data was determined in accordance with EU Directives. The data stated only applies to vehicles with standard equipment. You can obtain further information from a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Onlyy for Onl for certain certain countries: countries: you can nd vehiclespeci c vehicle data in the COC documents (CERTIFICATE OF CONFORMITY). These documents are delivered with your vehicle. On-boardd electronics On-boar electronics Notes on tam tamper pering ing with with the the engine electronics electronics * NOTE Premature wear through improper maintenance Improper maintenance may cause vehicle components to wear more quickly and the vehicle's operating permit may be invalidated. # Always have work on the engine electronics and related components carried out at a quali ed specialist workshop. Two-wa o-wayy radios radios Notes on tting tw two-wa o-wayy radios radios & WARNING Risk of accident due to improper work on two-way radios If two-way radios are manipulated or retro tted incorrectly, the electromagnetic radiation from the two-way radios can interfere with the vehicle electronics and jeopardise the operating safety of the vehicle. # You should have all work on electrical and electronic components carried out at a quali ed specialist workshop. & WARNING Risk of accident due to improper operation of two-way radios If you use two-way radios in the vehicle improperly, their electromagnetic radiation can disrupt the vehicle's electronics. This is the case in the following situations, in particular: R The two-way radio is not connected to an exterior aerial. R The exterior aerial is tted incorrectly or is not a low-re ection aerial. This could jeopardise the operating safety of the vehicle. # Have the low-re ection exterior aerial tted at a quali ed specialist workshop. # When operating two-way radios in the vehicle, always connect them to the lowre ection exterior aerial. Technical data 429 On the rear wings, it is recommended that you t the aerial on the side of the vehicle closest to the centre of the road. Use Technical Speci cation ISO/TS 21609 (Road Vehicles – "EMCs for installation of a ermarket radio frequency transmitting equipment") when retro tting two-way radios. Comply with the legal requirements for detachable parts. If your vehicle has ttings for two-way radio equipment, use the power supply and aerial connectors provided in the pre-installation. Observe the manufacturer's supplements when tting. * NOTE Invalidation of the operating permit due to failure to comply with the instructions for installation and use The operating permit may be invalidated if the instructions for installation and use of two-way radios are not observed. # Only use approved frequency bands. # Observe the maximum permissible output power in these frequency bands. # Only use approved aerial positions. 1 Front roof area 2 Rear roof area 3 Rear wings On vehicles with a panoramic sliding sunroof, tting an aerial to the front or rear roof area is not permitted. Two-wa o-wayy radio radio transmission transmission output The maximum transmission output (PEAK) at the base of the aerial must not exceed the values in the following table. 430 Technical data Freq equency uency band and maximum transmission transmission output Freq equency uency band Maximum transmistransmission output Short wave 3 - 54 MHz 100 W 4 m frequency band 74 - 88 MHz 30 W 2 m frequency band 144 - 174 MHz 50 W Terrestrial Trunked Radio (TETRA) 380 - 460 MHz 10 W 70 cm frequency band 420 - 450 MHz 35 W Two-way radio (2G/3G/4G) 10 W The following can be used in the vehicle without restrictions: R two-way radios with a maximum transmission output of up to 100 mW R RF transmitters with transmitter frequencies in the 380 - 410 MHz frequency band and a maximum transmission output of up to 2 W (TETRA) R mobile phones (2G/3G/4G) There are no restrictions when positioning the aerial on the outside of the vehicle for the following frequency bands: R Terrestrial Trunked Radio (TETRA) R 70 cm frequency band R 2G/3G/4G Regulat egulator oryy radio radio identi cation and notes notes Regulat egulator oryy radio radio identi cation of small compocomponents Manufacturer information about radio-based vehicle components can be found using the key phrase "Regulatory radio identi cation" in the Dig- ital Operator's Manual in the vehicle, on the internet and in the app. Regulat egulator oryy radio radio identi cation – Indonesia Manufacturer information about radio-based vehicle components can be found using the key phrase "Regulatory radio identi cation – Indonesia" in the Digital Operator's Manual in the vehicle, on the internet and in the app. % These are not small components. Information about small components can be found using the key phrase "Regulatory radio identi cation of small components". Furt urther her com component-speci ponent-speci c inf infor ormation mation Further component-speci c information can be found using the key phrase "further componentspeci c information" in the Digital Owner's Manual in the vehicle, on the internet and in the app. Technical data 431 Vehicle identi cation plat plate, e, VIN and engine number over overview view Vehicle identi cation plate 1 2 3 4 5 Vehicle identi cation plate (example: Kuwait) Vehicle manufacturer Place of manufacture Manufacturing date Vehicle model VIN 1 2 3 4 Vehicle identi cation plate (example: all other countries) Vehicle manufacturer EU general operating permit number (only for certain countries) VIN (vehicle identi cation number) Maximum permissible gross vehicle weight (kg) 432 Technical data 5 Maximum permissible gross weight of vehicle combination (kg) (only for speci c countries) 6 Maximum permissible front axle load (kg) 7 Maximum permissible rear axle load (kg) 8 Paint code VIN below below the the front front right-hand right-hand seat VIN at the the lower lower edge edge of the the windscreen windscreen % The data shown in the illustration is example data. 1 VIN (vehicle identi cation number) as label The VIN as a label at the lower edge of the windscreen is only available in some countries. 1 Imprinted VIN (vehicle identi cation number) 2 Floor covering Engine number The engine number is stamped into the crankcase. Further information can be obtained at a quali ed specialist workshop. Technical data 433 Operating uids Operating Notes on operating operating uids * NOTE Mercedes-AMG vehicles # Observe the notes in the Supplement. You could otherwise fail to recognise dangers. & WARNING Risk of injury from operating uids harmful to your health Operating uids may be poisonous and harmful to your health. # Observe the text on the original containers when using, storing or disposing of operating uids. # Always store operating uids sealed in their original containers. # Always keep children away from operating uids. + ENVIRONMENTAL ENVIRONMENT AL NOTE NOTE Pollution of the environment due to irresponsible disposal of operating uids Incorrect disposal of operating uids can cause considerable damage to the environment. # Dispose of operating uids in an environmentally responsible manner. Operating uids include the following: fuels R DeNOx agent AdBlue® for exhaust gas a ertreatment R lubricants R coolant R brake uid R windscreen washer uid R climate control system refrigerant R Only use products approved by Mercedes-Benz. Damage caused by the use of products that have not been approved is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz warranty or goodwill gestures. The operating uids approved by Mercedes-Benz can be identi ed by the following inscriptions on the container: R MB-Freigabe (e.g. MB-Freigabe 229.51) R MB-Approval (e.g. MB-Approval 229.51) Further information on approved operating uids: R in the Mercedes-Benz Speci cations for Operating Fluids by entering the designation at https://bevo.mercedes-benz.com in the Mercedes-Benz BeVo App R At a quali ed specialist workshop & WARNING Risk of re or explosion from fuel Fuels are highly ammable. # Fire, naked ames, smoking and creating sparks must be avoided. # Before and during refuelling, switch o the vehicle and, if tted, the stationary heater. 434 Technical data & WARNING Risk of injury from fuels Fuels are poisonous and hazardous to your health. # Do not swallow fuel or let it come into contact with skin, eyes or clothing. # Do not inhale fuel vapour. # Keep children away from fuel. # Keep doors and windows closed during the refuelling process. If you or other people come into contact with fuel, observe the following: # Immediately rinse fuel o your skin with soap and water. # If fuel comes into contact with your eyes, immediately rinse them thoroughly with clean water. Seek medical attention immediately. # If you swallow fuel, seek medical attention immediately. Do not induce vomiting. # Change immediately out of clothing that has come into contact with fuel. Flexible-fuel vehicles can be refuelled with the following fuel types: R unleaded petrol R E85 fuel R a mixture of E85 fuel and unleaded petrol Flexible-fuel vehicles can be identi ed by the Ethanol Et hanol up to to E85 sticker on the inside of the fuel ller ap. Depending on the country, the fuels you can use in your vehicle may di er from the information in the Owner's Manual. The fuels that have been approved for your vehicle can be found on the instruction label on the inside of the fuel ller ap. Fuel Information Infor mation on fuel quality quality for for vehicles vehicles with with a petpetrol engine Observe the notes on operating uids (/ page 433). * NOTE Damage caused by the wrong fuel Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could result in damage to the fuel system, the engine and the emission control system. # Only refuel using unleaded, sulphur-free spark-ignition engine fuel that conforms to European EN 228, or an equivalent speci cation. Fuel of this speci cation may contain up to 10% ethanol by volume. Your vehicle is suitable for use with E10 fuel. # See the information label in fuel ller ap for other compatible fuels . Never refuel with one of the following fuels: R Diesel R Regular petrol with an octane number lower than 91 RON R Petrol with more than 3% methanol by volume, e.g. M15, M30 R Petrol with additives containing metal Technical data 435 If you have accidentally refuelled with the wrong fuel: # Do not switch on the vehicle. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop. The following compatibility indications for fuel apply to your vehicle: 1 For petrol with maximum 5% ethanol by vol- ume 2 For petrol with maximum 10% ethanol by vol- ume The compatibility indications for fuel on the vehicle according to the European standard EN 16942 can be found on the information label in the fuel ller ap or on the fuel dispenser or pump nozzle suitable for your vehicle throughout Europe. If the available fuel is not su ciently low in sulphur, this can produce unpleasant odours. The recommended octane number for your vehicle can be found on the information label in the fuel ller ap. As a temporary measure, if the recommended fuel is not available, you may also refuel with regular unleaded petrol with at least 91 RON. This may reduce engine output and increase fuel consumption. Never refuel using petrol with a lower RON. Further information on fuel can be obtained at a lling station or a quali ed specialist workshop. Information Infor mation on additives additives in petr petrol ol Observe the notes on operating uids (/ page 433). * NOTE Damage from use of unsuitable additives Even small amounts of the wrong additive may lead to malfunctions occurring. # Only add cleaning additives recommended by Mercedes-Benz to the fuel. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use brandname fuels with additives. In some countries, the fuel available may not have su cient additives. Residue could build up in the fuel injection system as a result. In this case, in consultation with a Mercedes-Benz service centre, mix the fuel with the cleaning additive recommended by Mercedes-Benz. Observe the notes and mixing ratios indicated on the tank. Information Infor mation on fuel quality quality for for vehicles vehicles with with a diesel engine General notes General notes Observe the notes on operating uids (/ page 433). 436 Technical data & WARNING Risk of re from fuel mixture If you mix diesel fuel with petrol, the ash point of the fuel mixture is lower than that of pure diesel fuel. # Never refuel using petrol in diesel engines. # Never mix petrol with diesel fuel. * NOTE Damage caused by the wrong fuel Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could result in damage to the fuel system, the engine and the emission control system. # Vehicles with with a diesel particulat par ticulatee lt lter: er: Only refuel using sulphur-free diesel fuel that conforms to European standard EN 590, or an equivalent speci cation. In countries without sulphur-free diesel fuel, refuel using only low-sulphur diesel fuel with a sulphur content less than 50 ppm. # Vehicles without without diesel particulat par ticulatee lt lter: er: Only refuel using diesel fuel with a sulphur content less than 500 ppm. Never refuel with one of the following fuels: R Petrol R Marine diesel R Heating oil R Pure fatty acid methyl ester (bio-diesel) or vegetable oil R Para n or kerosene If you have accidentally refuelled with the wrong fuel: # Do not switch on the vehicle. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop. The following compatibility indication for fuel applies to your vehicle: 1 For diesel fuel with a maximum of 7% by vol- ume bio-diesel (fatty acid methyl ester) According to European standard EN 16942 you can nd the compatibility indications at the following locations: R On the vehicle on the information label on the fuel ller ap (/ page 203) R On the fuel dispenser or pump nozzle suitable for your vehicle throughout Europe Information Infor mation on low low outside tem temper peratur atures es Refuel your vehicle with as much winter diesel fuel as possible at the beginning of winter. Technical data 437 Before changing over to winter diesel fuel, the fuel tank should be empty, if possible. When rst refuelling with winter diesel fuel, keep the fuel level low, e.g. to reserve level. The fuel tank can be lled as usual when next refuelling. Further information on fuel can be obtained at a lling station or a quali ed specialist workshop. Tank content content and fuel reserv reservee (plug-in hybr hybrid) id) The total capacity of the fuel tank may vary, depending on the vehicle equipment. Total Tot al capacity and reserv reservee fuel tank tank Model Total Total capacity E 300 e 50.0 litres All other models 50.0 litres or 60.0 litres Model All models of which which reserv reservee fuel 7.0 litres Tank content content and fuel reserv reservee (not (not for for plug-in hybr ybrid) id) The total capacity of the fuel tank may vary, depending on the vehicle equipment. Total Tot al capacity and reserv reservee fuel tank tank Model Total Total capacity E 300 66.0 litres E 450 4MATIC E 450 4MATIC All-Terrain 66.0 litres or 80.0 litres All other models 50.0 litres or 66.0 litres Model of which which reserv reservee fuel E 450 4MATIC E 450 4MATIC All-Terrain 7.0 litres or 12.0 litres All other models 7.0 litres AdBlue® (v (vehicles ehicles with with a diesel engine only) only) Notes on AdBlue AdBlue® Observe the notes on operating uids (/ page 433). AdBlue® is a water-soluble uid for the NOx exhaust gas a ertreatment of diesel engines. It may be improper or punishable in some countries to operate a vehicle that uses no AdBlue® or one that does not comply with the speci cations of these operating instructions. * NOTE NOTE Malfunctions due to the dilution of AdBlue® or the use of additive-enhanced AdBlue® The function of the NOx exhaust gas a ertreatment can be impaired by the use of unsuitable denoxi cation agents. # Only use AdBlue® in accordance with ISO 22241. # Do not dilute AdBlue® with water. # Do not use additive-enhanced AdBlue®. 438 Technical data * NOTE Damage and malfunctions due to impurities in AdBlue® AdBlue®: Consequences of impurities in R increased emission values R damage to the catalytic converter R NOx exhaust gas a ertreatment malfunctions # Avoid impurities in AdBlue®. AdBlue® residues crystallise a er a period of time, and contaminate the surfaces with which they come into contact. Clean the dirty surfaces with water as soon as possible. When you open the AdBlue® tank, small amounts of ammonia vapour may escape. Do not inhale any ammonia vapours that may be released. Only ll the AdBlue® tank in well-ventilated areas. AdBlue® lling capacity and consumption consumption Nott for No for plug-in hybr hybrid id Model All models Total Total capacity 23.5 litres Plug-in hybr hybrid id Model All models Total Total capacity 23.5 litres AdBlue® consump consumption tion The average AdBlue® consumption is between 1% and 5% of fuel consumption. Like fuel consumption, AdBlue® consumption is highly dependent upon driving style and operating conditions. For this reason, your vehicle's actual consumption gures under day-to-day operating conditions may di er from the consumption gures calculated. The frequency at which you will have to top up AdBlue® will also vary. Have the AdBlue® supply checked at a quali ed specialist workshop before making journeys outside of Europe. Before a longer stay outside of Europe, consult a quali ed specialist workshop. AdBlue® rang angee and ll lev level el The AdBlue® ll level and range can be displayed via the on-board computer. The AdBlue® range shown depends strongly on the driving style and operating conditions. The actual range can therefore deviate from the range currently displayed in the on-board computer. The information supplied in the operator's manual regarding the reserve quantity at the rst display warning and on the minimum top-up quantity when the fuel tank is empty is also to be understood as guide values. Engine oil Notes on engine oil Observe the notes on operating uids (/ page 433). Technical data 439 Mercedes-Benz recommends having the oil changed at a quali ed specialist workshop. Only use engine oils approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz. Petr trol ol engines: for certain countries, di erent engine oils can be used in conjunction with reduced maintenance intervals. Further information on di erent engine oils can be obtained at a quali ed specialist workshop. * NOTE Engine damage caused by an incorrect oil lter, incorrect oil or additives # # # # Do not use engine oils or oil lters other than those which meet the speci cations necessary for the prescribed service intervals. Do not alter the engine oil or oil lter in order to achieve longer change intervals than prescribed. Do not use additives. Have the engine oil changed a er the prescribed intervals. Quality and capacity of engine oil (plug-in hybr hybrid) id) Engine oil speci cation Petr trol ol engines All models MB-Freigabe MB-Freig abe or MBApproval Approv al 229.5* Petr trol ol engines: Only use SAE 0W-40 or SAE 5W-40 viscosity class engine oils. Engine oil speci cation Diesel engines All models MB-Freigabe MB-Freig abe or MBApproval Approv al 229.52* * recommended for the lowest possible fuel consumption To achieve the lowest possible fuel consumption, it is recommended to use the engine oil speci cations marked in the table for the lowest SAE viscosity class. Observe any possible restrictions of the approved SAE viscosity classes. % If the engine oils listed in the table are not available, you may add a maximum of 1.0 litre of the following engine oils once only. Engine oils for one-time lling only in exceptional cases: R Vehicles with with a petr petrol ol engine: MB-Freigabe or MB-Approval 229.31 or ACEA C3 R Vehicles with with a diesel engine: ACEA C3 Engine oil lling capacity Model Capacity E 300 e 6.8 litres All other models 6.3 litres The speci ed lling capacity refers to an oil change with the oil lter. 440 Technical data Quality and capacity of engine oil (not (not for for plug-in hybr ybrid) id) Engine oil speci cations Petr trol ol engines All models MB-Freigabe MB-Freig abe or MBApproval Approv al 229.51, 229.52, 229.61, 229.71*, 229.72 Engine oil speci cations Diesel engines MB-Freigabe MB-Freig abe or MBApproval Approv al E 400 d 4MATIC E 400 d 4MATIC AllTerrain 229.52, 229.61* All other models 229.52, 229.61, 229.71*, 229.72 * recommended for the lowest possible fuel consumption To achieve the lowest possible fuel consumption, it is recommended to use the engine oil speci ca- tions marked in the table for the lowest SAE viscosity class. Possible restrictions of the approved SAE viscosity classes must be observed. % If the engine oils listed in the table are not available, you may add a maximum of 1.0 litre of the following engine oils once only. Engine oils for one-time lling only in exceptional cases: R Vehicles with with a petr petrol ol engine: MB-Freigabe or MB-Approval 229.31 or ACEA C3 R Vehicles with with a diesel engine: E 400 d 4MATIC, 4MATIC, E 400 d 4MATIC 4MATIC All-TerAll-Terrain: MB-Freigabe or MB-Approval 229.51 or ACEA C3 All other other models: ACEA C3 Engine oil lling capacity Model Capacity E 200 d E 220 d E 220 d 4MATIC E 220 d 4MATIC AllTerrain 6.3 litres E 200 4MATIC E 200 4MATIC All-Terrain 6.0 litres E 300 d 4MATIC 6.5 litres E 400 d 4MATIC E 400 d 4MATIC AllTerrain 7.5 litres E 450 4MATIC E 450 4MATIC All-Terrain 8.5 litres All other models 6.6 litres Technical data 441 The speci ed lling capacity refers to an oil change with the oil lter. Notes on brak brakee uid Observe the notes on operating uids (/ page 433). & WARNING Risk of an accident due to vapour pockets forming in the brake system The brake uid constantly absorbs moisture from the air. This lowers the boiling point of the brake uid. If the boiling point is too low, vapour pockets may form in the brake system when the brakes are applied hard. This impairs the braking e ect. # Have the brake uid renewed at the speci ed intervals. Have the brake uid regularly replaced at a qualied specialist workshop. Only use a brake uid approved by MercedesBenz according to MB-Freigabe or MB-Approval 331.0. Coolant Notes on coolant Observe the notes on operating uids (/ page 433). & WARNING Risk of re‑ and injury from antifreeze If antifreeze comes into contact with hot component parts in the engine compartment, it may ignite. # Allow the engine to cool down before you top up the antifreeze. # Make sure that no antifreeze spills out next to the ller opening. # Thoroughly clean the antifreeze from component parts before starting the vehicle. * NOTE Damage caused by incorrect coolant # Only use coolant that has been premixed with the required antifreeze protection. Information on coolant is available at the following locations: R In the Mercedes-Benz Speci cation for Operating Fluids 320.1 At https://bevo.mercedes-benz.com In the Mercedes-Benz BeVo App R At a quali ed specialist workshop * NOTE Overheating at high outside temperatures If an inappropriate coolant is used, the engine cooling system is not su ciently protected against overheating and corrosion at high outside temperatures. # Only use coolant approved by MercedesBenz. # Observe the instructions in the Mercedes-Benz Speci cations for Operating Fluids 320.1. Have the coolant regularly replaced at a quali ed specialist workshop. 442 Technical data Proportion of antifreeze concentrate in the engine cooling system: R A minimum of 50% (antifreeze protection down to about -37°C) R A maximum of 55% (antifreeze protection down to -45°C) Notes on windscreen windscreen washer washer uid Observe the notes on operating uids (/ page 433). & WARNING ‑ Risk of re and injury due to windscreen washer concentrate Windscreen washer concentrate is highly ammable. It could ignite if it comes into contact with hot engine component parts or the exhaust system. # Make sure that no windscreen washer concentrate spills out next to the ller opening. * NOTE Damage to the exterior lighting due to unsuitable windscreen washer uid Unsuitable windscreen washer uids may damage the plastic surface of the exterior lighting. # Only use windscreen washer uids which are also suitable for use on plastic surfaces, e.g. MB SummerFit or MB WinterFit. * NOTE Blocked spray nozzles caused by mixing windscreen washer uids # Do not mix MB SummerFit and MB WinterFit with other windscreen washer uids. Do not use distilled or de-ionised water. Otherwise, the ll level sensor may be triggered erroneously. Recommended windscreen washer uid: R above freezing point: e.g. MB SummerFit R below freezing point: e.g. MB WinterFit For the correct mixing ratio, refer to the information on the antifreeze container. Mix washer uid with windscreen washer uid all year round. Vehicle data Information Infor mation reg regar arding ding the the vehicle vehicle data The vehicle data speci ed may vary as a result of the following factors: Factors: R tyres R load R condition of the suspension R optional equipment In addition, the following applies to the speci ed vehicle data: R Items of optional equipment increase the unladen weight and reduce the payload. R Vehicle-speci c weight information can be found on the vehicle identi cation plate (/ page 431). Technical data 443 Height when opened and headroom headroom Headroom Headr oom Vehicle dimensions (not (not for for plug-in hybr hybrid) id) Model Headroom Headr oom E 300 de 4MATIC 1951 mm All other models 1945 mm Vehicle dimensions All models 1 Height when opened 2 Headroom Vehicle dimensions (plug-in hybr hybrid) id) Height when opened Model Height when opened Vehicle length 4945 mm Vehicle width including outside mirrors 2065 mm Vehicle width excluding outside mirrors 1852 mm Wheelbase 2939 mm Model Vehicle height Vehicle E 300 de 4MATIC 2077 mm E 300 de 4MATIC 1482 mm All other models 2071 mm All other models 1476 mm Height when opened and headroom headroom Model Height when opened Headroom Headr oom E 200 E 220 d E 300 E 200 d 2055 mm 1929 mm E 200 4MATIC E 220 d 4MATIC E 300 d 4MATIC 2061 mm 1935 mm E 400 d 4MATIC E 450 4MATIC 2062 mm 1936 mm All other models 2098 mm 1972 mm 444 Technical data Vehicle dimensions Vehicle width All models Model Vehicle width including outside mirrors 2065 mm Wheelbase 2939 mm Vehicle length Model Vehicle length Vehicle E 200 4MATIC All-Terrain E 220 d 4MATIC AllTerrain E 400 d 4MATIC AllTerrain E 450 4MATIC All-Terrain 4947 mm All other models 4945 mm Vehicle height Vehicle width Vehicle E 200 4MATIC All-Terrain E 220 d 4MATIC AllTerrain E 400 d 4MATIC AllTerrain E 450 4MATIC All-Terrain 1861 mm All other models 1852 mm Model Vehicle height Vehicle E 200 E 220 d E 300 E 200 d 1460 mm E 200 4MATIC E 220 d 4MATIC E 300 d 4MATIC 1466 mm E 400 d 4MATIC E 450 4MATIC 1467 mm All other models 1497 mm Weights and loads (plug-in hybr hybrid) id) Roof load Model All models Maximum roof roof load 100 kg Technical data 445 Weights and loads (not (not for for plug-in hybr hybrid) id) Maximum batter batteryy capacity and char charging ging times All models Roof load Model All models Maximum roof roof load 100 kg Lithium-ion Maximum energy content 13.5 kWh Range in electric-only mode High-volt High-v oltag agee batter batteryy (plug-in hybr hybrid) id) Notes on the the power power supply supply for for vehicles vehicles with with a high-volt high-v oltag agee battery battery In accordance with European standard EN 17186:2019, vehicle identi ers are located on the vehicle in the following places: R On the inside of the socket ap R On the charging cable connector Type 1 Supply type: AC Standard: EN 62196-2 Style: type 2 Plug type: charging cable socket and vehicle plug For further information on charging the high-voltage battery, refer to the "Charging the high-voltage battery" section (/ page 210). Missing values were not available at the time of going to press. Charge time – mode 3 with 7.4 kW charging capacity Approx. 1 h 30 min Charge time – mode 2 with 3.7 kW charging capacity Approx. 2 h 45 min Charge time – mode 2 with 2.3 kW charging capacity Approx. 5 h Charge time – mode 2 with 1.8 kW charging capacity Approx. 6 h 30 min Charge times – modes 2 and 3 apply to alternating current charging from 10% to 100% of the usable energy content. The time taken to charge the battery depends on the charge status of the battery, the ambient tem- 446 Technical data perature and the charging capacity of the battery. The charging capacity, in turn, depends on the supply voltage, the current intensity and the type of power supply. The nominal voltage range for your vehicle can be found on the information label in the socket cover (/ page 210). Mounting dimensions of the the trailer trailer hitch The overhang dimension and fastening points are valid for a trailer hitch installed at the factory. Notes on the the maximum tongue tongue weight weight and load capacity * NOTE NOTE Damage caused by the trailer coming loose If the tongue weight used is too low, the trailer may come loose. # The tongue weight must not be below 50 kg. # Use a tongue weight that is as close as possible to the maximum permissible tongue weight. Trailer hitch General Gener al notes notes on the the trailer trailer hitch Modi cations to the engine cooling system may be necessary, depending on the vehicle model. The retro tting of a trailer hitch is only permissible if a towing capacity is speci ed in your vehicle documents. Further information can be obtained at a quali ed specialist workshop. Also observe the notes on towing a trailer (/ page 287). * NOTE Damage caused by the bicycle rack coming loose 1 Fastening points 2 Overhang dimension 3 Rear axle centre line When using a bicycle rack, both the maximal tongue weight and the maximal load capacity should be observed. # Do not exceed the permissible load capacity. Technical data 447 When using a bicycle rack, observe the information on the function of the bicycle rack and the additional notes on the maximum load capacity (/ page 293). Technical data on the tongue weight and load capacity (/ page 447, 448). Over Ov erhang hang dimension length Overhang Over hang dimension for for the the trailer trailer hitch hitch (plug-in hybr ybrid) id) The tongue weight is not included in the towing capacity. The overhang dimension is valid for a trailer hitch installed at the factory. Over Ov erhang hang dimension length Model All models Over Ov erhang hang dimension 1253 mm Model All models The overhang dimension is valid for a trailer hitch installed at the factory. 1253 mm Towing capacity, capacity, brak braked ed (at a minimum st star art-o t-o gradeability gr adeability of 12%) Model All models Model All models Trailer load (plug-in hybr hybrid) id) Towing Towing capacity, brak br aked ed 2100 kg Towing capacity, capacity, unbrak unbraked ed Model All models Towing Towing capacity, unbrak unbr aked ed 750 kg Towing Towing capacity 2100 kg Towing capacity, capacity, unbrak unbraked ed Model Overhang Over hang dimension for for the the trailer trailer hitch hitch (not (not for for plug-in hybr hybrid) id) Over Ov erhang hang dimension Towing capacity, capacity, brak braked ed (at a minimum st star art-o t-o gradeability gr adeability of 12%) Towing Towing capacity All models 750 kg Maximum tongue tongue weight weight and load capacity (plugin hybr hybrid) id) Observe the additional notes on load capacity (/ page 293). Tongue weight weight Model Trailer load (not (not for for plug-in hybr hybrid) id) The tongue weight is not included in the towing capacity. All models Maximum tongue tongue weight 84 kg 448 Technical data Missing values were not available at the time of going to press. Load capacity Model Maximum load All models Load capacity Model Maximum load All models Per ermissible missible rear rear axle load (plug-in hybr hybrid) id) Maximum tongue tongue weight weight and load capacity (not for plug-in hybr hybrid) id) Trailer operation operation axle load Model Axle load E 200 d E 220 d 1515 kg E 220 d 4MATIC 1520 kg E 220 d 4MATIC AllTerrain 1500 kg Model Axle load 1700 kg E 300 E 200 4MATIC 1510 kg Observe the additional notes on load capacity (/ page 293). E 300 e E 300 de 1720 kg Tongue weight weight E 400 d 4MATIC 1555 kg E 300 de 4MATIC 1710 kg E 400 d 4MATIC AllTerrain 1545 kg Per ermissible missible rear rear axle load (not (not for for plug-in hybr hybrid) id) E 450 4MATIC 1565 kg Trailer operation operation axle load All other models 1550 kg Model All models Maximum tongue tongue weight 84 kg Missing values were not available at the time of going to press. Model Axle load E 200 1505 kg E 200 4MATIC All-Terrain 1495 kg Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 449 Display messages Display messages Introduction Intr oduction Infor Inf ormation mation about display display messages messages Display messages appear on the instrument display. Display messages with graphic symbols are simpli ed in the Owner's Manual and may di er from the symbols on the instrument display. The instrument display shows high-priority display messages in red. Certain display messages are accompanied by a warning tone. Please act in accordance with the display messages and follow the additional notes in the Owner's Manual. For some display messages, symbols will also be shown: R Õ Further information R ¨ Hide display message With the le -hand Touch Control, you can select the respective symbol by swiping to the le or right. Pressing Õ displays further information on the media display. Press the ¨ symbol to hide the display message. You can hide low-priority display messages by pressing the back button G or the le -hand Touch Control. The display messages will then be stored in the message memory. Rectify the cause of a display message as quickly as possible. High-priority display messages cannot be hidden. The instrument display will show these display messages permanently until the cause of the display message has been recti ed. Calling up saved saved display display messages messages On-board computer: 4 Service 5 1 message If there are no display messages, No messages will appear on the instrument display. # Scroll through the display messages by swiping upwards or downwards on the le -hand Touch Control. # To exit exit the the message message memory: memory: press the back button G. 450 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Occupant safety safety Displayy messages Displa messages 6 Restraint sys. malfunction Consult workshop Possible causes/consequences Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The restraint system is malfunctioning (/ page 44). & WARNING Risk of injury due to malfunctions in the restraint system Components in the restraint system may be activated unintentionally or not deploy as intended in an accident. # Have the restraint system checked and repaired immediately at a quali ed specialist workshop. Plug-in hybr hybrid: id: & DAN ANGER GER Risk of fatal injuries due to restraint system malfunctions Components in the restraint system may be activated unintentionally or not deploy as planned in an accident. In the event of an accident, the high-voltage on-board electrical system may not be deactivated as intended. You may su er an electric shock if you touch the damaged components of the high-voltage on-board electrical system. # Have the restraint system checked and repaired immediately at a quali ed specialist workshop. # A er an accident, switch o the vehicle immediately. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 451 Displayy messages Displa messages 6 Front left malfunction Consult workshop (example) Possible causes/consequences Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The corresponding restraint system is malfunctioning (/ page 44). & WARNING Risk of injury due to malfunctions in the restraint system Components in the restraint system may be activated unintentionally or not deploy as intended in an accident. Have the restraint system checked and repaired immediately at a quali ed specialist workshop. # Plug-in hybr hybrid: id: & DAN ANGER GER Risk of fatal injuries due to restraint system malfunctions Components in the restraint system may be activated unintentionally or not deploy as planned in an accident. In the event of an accident, the high-voltage on-board electrical system may not be deactivated as intended. You may su er an electric shock if you touch the damaged components of the high-voltage on-board electrical system. # Have the restraint system checked and repaired immediately at a quali ed specialist workshop. # A er an accident, switch o the vehicle immediately. 452 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Displayy messages Displa messages 6 Left windowbag malfunction Consult workshop (example) Front-passenger airbag disabled See Owner's Manual Possible causes/consequences Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The corresponding restraint system is malfunctioning (/ page 44). & WARNING Risk of injury or fatal injury due to a malfunction in the windowbag The windowbag might be triggered unintentionally or might not be triggered at all in the event of an accident. Have the windowbag checked and repaired immediately at a quali ed specialist workshop. # * The front passenger airbag has been disabled even though an adult or a person of adult build is on the front passenger seat. If additional forces are applied to the seat, the weight the system detects may be too low. & WARNING ‑ Risk of injury or even fatal injury when the front passenger airbag is disabled If the front passenger airbag is disabled, It will not be deployed in the event of an accident and cannot perform its intended protective function. A person in the front passenger seat could then, for example, come into contact with the vehicle interior, especially if the person is sitting too close to the dashboard. # Be aware of the status of the front passenger airbag both before and during the journey. # # # # Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the tra c conditions. Make sure that no objects are trapped under the front passenger seat. Check the status of automatic front passenger airbag actuation (/ page 54). If necessary, consult a quali ed specialist workshop immediately. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 453 Displayy messages Displa messages Front-passenger airbag enabled See Owner's Manual Possible causes/consequences Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The front passenger airbag will be enabled while the vehicle is in motion in the following situations: R even when a child, a small adult or an object weighing less than the system weight threshold is located on the front passenger seat R even when the front passenger seat is not occupied The system may detect objects or forces that are adding to the weight applied to the seat. & WARNING Risk of injury or death when using a child restraint system while the front passenger airbag is enabled If you secure a child in a child restraint system on the front passenger seat and the front passenger airbag is enabled, the front passenger airbag can deploy in the event of an accident. The child could be struck by the airbag. # Ensure, both before and during the journey, that the status of the front passenger airbag is correct. NEVER use a rearward facing child restraint on a seat protected by an ACTIVE AIRBAG in front of it, DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY to the CHILD can occur. # # # # Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the tra c conditions. Make sure that no objects are trapped under the front passenger seat. Check the status of automatic front passenger airbag actuation (/ page 54). If necessary, consult a quali ed specialist workshop immediately. 454 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Displayy messages Displa messages Possible causes/consequences Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions PRE-SAFE inoperative See Owner's Manual * The PRE‑SAFE® functions are malfunctioning. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop. PRE-SAFE impulse side inoperative See Owner's Manual * The PRE‑SAFE® Impulse Side system is malfunctioning or inoperative a er having already been triggered. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop. Key Displayy messages Displa messages Á Possible causes/consequences Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * Have the key replaced. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop. Replace key Á Change key batteries * The key battery is discharged. # Replace the battery (/ page 81). Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 455 Displayy messages Displa messages Á Key not detected (white display message) Á Key not detected (red display message) Possible causes/consequences Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The key is currently undetected. # Change the location of the key in the vehicle. # If the key is still not recognised, place it in the slot for starting with the key (/ page 178). * The key cannot be detected and may no longer be in the vehicle. The key is no longer in the vehicle and you switch o the vehicle: R You can no longer start the vehicle. R You cannot centrally lock the vehicle. # Ensure that the key is in the vehicle. If the key detection function has a malfunction due to a strong radio signal source: Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the tra c conditions. # Place the key in the slot for starting the engine with the key (/ page 178). # Á Key being initialised Please wait * The vehicle is processing in order to teach in the new key. # Wait until processing is complete. 456 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Displayy messages Displa messages Place the key in the marked space See Owner's Manual Possible causes/consequences Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * Key detection is malfunctioning. # Change the location of the key in the vehicle. # Place the key in the slot for starting the engine with the key (/ page 178). Lights Displayy messages Displa messages : Left dipped beam (example) : Malfunction See Owner's Manual Possible causes/consequences Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The corresponding light source is defective. # Drive on carefully. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop immediately. % LED light sources: the display message for the corresponding light appears only when all the light-emitting diodes in the light are faulty. * The exterior lighting is malfunctioning. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop. * Vehicles with with a trailer trailer hitch: hitch: a fuse may have blown. # Stop the vehicle in accordance with the tra c conditions. # Check the fuses and replace them if necessary (/ page 407). Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 457 Displayy messages Displa messages : Possible causes/consequences Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The light sensor for automatic driving lights is malfunctioning. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop. Automatic driving lights inoperative : * The active headlamps are malfunctioning. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop. : * You are driving without low-beam headlamps. # Turn the light switch to the L or à position. : * You are leaving the vehicle and the lights are still switched on. # Turn the light switch to the à position. Active Light System inoperative Switch on headlamps Switch off lights 458 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Displayy messages Displa messages : Intelligent Light System inoperative Possible causes/consequences Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The Intelligent Light System is malfunctioning. The lighting system continues to function properly without the functions of the Intelligent Light System. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop. Adaptive Highbeam Assist currently unavailable See Owner's Manual * Adaptive Highbeam Assist is temporarily unavailable. The system limits have been reached (/ page 147). Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be available again. The Adaptive Highbeam Assist available again display message will appear. # Drive on # Operate the high beam manually until Adaptive High Beam Assist is available again. Adaptive Highbeam Assist inoperative * Adaptive Highbeam Assist is malfunctioning. # Drive on or # Stop the vehicle in accordance with the tra c conditions and restart the vehicle. # If the display message does not disappear: consult a quali ed specialist workshop. # Until then, operate the high beam manually. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 459 Displayy messages Displa messages Possible causes/consequences Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus currently unavailable See Owner's Manual * Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus is temporarily unavailable. The system limits have been reached (/ page 148). Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be available again. The Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus available again display message will appear. # Drive on # Operate the high beam manually until Adaptive High Beam Assist Plus is available again. Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus inoperative * Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus is malfunctioning. # Drive on or # Stop the vehicle in accordance with the tra c conditions and restart the vehicle. # If the display message does not disappear: consult a quali ed specialist workshop. # Until then, operate the high beam manually. Hazard warning lamps malfunctioning * The hazard warning lamp switch is malfunctioning. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop. 460 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Climatee control Climat control Displayy messages Displa messages & inoperative See Owner's Man. Possible causes/consequences Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The stationary heater is temporarily malfunctioning. # When the vehicle is stationary on a level surface and the engine has cooled down, make up to four attempts to switch on the stationary heater, waiting several minutes between each attempt. # If the stationary heater does not switch on, consult a quali ed specialist workshop. & * The on-board electrical system voltage is too low. The stationary heater has switched itself o . # Drive an extended distance until the battery has reached a su cient charge level again. & * There is too little fuel in the fuel tank. The stationary heater cannot be switched on. # Refuel the vehicle. inoperative Battery low inoperative Refuel vehicle Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 461 Displayy messages Displa messages & Possible causes/consequences Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The high-voltage battery is charging. Pre-entry climate control cannot be switched on. # Wait until the charging process has achieved a minimum charge. inoperative High-voltage battery charging incomplete & * The charge of the high-voltage battery is too low. Pre-entry climate control cannot be switched on. # Charge the high-voltage battery. & * You have attempted to switch on pre-entry climate control more than twice with the engine switched o . # Start the vehicle for ten seconds. Pre-entry climate control is operational again. inoperative Charge HV battery Pre-entry climate control (via key) available again after engine start 462 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Displayy messages Displa messages & Pre-entry climate control (via key) inoperative HVbattery low Possible causes/consequences Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The charge of the high-voltage battery is too low. Pre-entry climate control cannot be switched on. # Charge the high-voltage battery. When the high-voltage battery is su ciently charged, pre-entry climate control will be operational again. Hybrid Hybr id system system Displayy messages Displa messages u Towing not permitted See Owner's Manual Possible causes/consequences Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The drive system is malfunctioning. # Have the vehicle transported only using a transporter or trailer (/ page 402). Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 463 Displayy messages Displa messages ò Acoustic presence indicator inoperative Possible causes/consequences Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The sound generator (acoustic vehicle warning system) is malfunctioning. No driving noises are being produced. The vehicle may not be heard by other road users. # Drive with particular care. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop. è * You cannot pull away while the charging cable is connected. # Disconnect the charging cable from the vehicle. Not possible to unlock charging cable See Owner's Manual * The charging cable connector cannot be removed from the charging station's socket. # Press the EMERGENCY OFF switch on the charging station. Vehicle not currently being charged Charging station fault * A malfunction has occurred in the charging station or the RFID card is not recognised. # Start the charging process at a di erent charging station. or # Have the RFID card checked to ensure it is functioning. Charger cable connected If the charging cable connector cannot be removed a er that: # Request service personnel from the operator of the charging station via the emergency call button attached to the charging station or the emergency call numbers. 464 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Displayy messages Displa messages Possible causes/consequences Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Charging method currently unavailable Please try again or change charging method * A temporary malfunction has occurred in the charging station. # Wait until the malfunction has passed. or # Start the charging process at a di erent charging station. Charging fault Please change charging method See Owner's Manual * A temporary malfunction has occurred in the charging station. # Wait until the malfunction has passed. or # Start the charging process at a di erent charging station. Only electric drive available Power limited * The fuel tank is empty and the combustion engine is switched o . The output of your vehicle is limited because you are driving in electric mode. # Refuel immediately. If there is fuel in the vehicle, there is a fault with the combustion engine. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop. "Electric" drive program currently unavailable * The charge level of the high-voltage battery is not su cient for the Electric drive program. Charge the high-voltage battery (/ page 210). Reduced drive system performance See Owner's Manual * The drive system switches to emergency operation mode due to a malfunction. # Drive on carefully. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 465 Displayy messages Displa messages Possible causes/consequences Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions # Û Battery overheated Stop, everybody out! Outdoors if possible Û Malfunction Consult a quali ed specialist workshop. * The high-voltage battery has overheated. There is a risk of re. # Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the tra c conditions. # If possible, stop the vehicle in the open air and ensure that all vehicle occupants get out. % Supporting vehicle functions may activate automatically, e.g. the air-recirculation mode as part of climate control. # Do not continue driving. # If smoke is present, leave the danger zone and call the re service immediately. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop even if there are no external signs of a re. * The drive system is malfunctioning. A warning tone will also sound. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop. * There is a serious malfunction if the display message and warning tone are repeated at short intervals. You must stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the tra c conditions because the drive system is automatically deactivated. # Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the tra c conditions. # Switch o the vehicle and consult a quali ed specialist workshop. 466 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Displayy messages Displa messages Û Possible causes/consequences Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The drive system is malfunctioning. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop. Malfunction Visit workshop Without changing gear, consult workshop * The drive system cannot be restarted due to a malfunction. If the transmission position is changed using the DIRECT SELECT lever, the drive system will be switched o in park position j or neutral i. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop and do not change the transmission position. Without starting engine again, consult workshop * It is not possible to restart the drive system due to a malfunction. # Do not switch o the drive system; drive on to the nearest quali ed specialist workshop. d * The drive system is malfunctioning. The output of your vehicle is restricted. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop. d * The drive system is malfunctioning. # Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the tra c conditions and switch o the drive system. Do not continue driving. # Do not tow the vehicle, stop towing if necessary. Malfunction Stop Switch engine off Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 467 Displayy messages Displa messages Possible causes/consequences Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions # d Performance severely limited 6 Consult a quali ed specialist workshop. * The drive system is outside the normal operating temperature range, e.g. due to extremely low or high outside temperatures. The output is severely restricted. Once the operating temperature of the drive system returns to normal, the full output will be available again. The display message will disappear. * If the drive system power output is still reduced, there is a fault in the drive system. # Drive on carefully. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop. * Vehicles with with petr petrol ol engines: the pressure in the fuel tank is reduced before the fuel ller ap is opened. The pressure reduction can take up to 15 minutes. Please wait Depressurising tank 6 Tank is depressurised Ready for refuelling * Vehicles with with petr petrol ol engines: the pressure in the fuel tank is released and the fuel ller ap opens. 468 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Displayy messages Displa messages 6 Possible causes/consequences Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * Vehicles with with petr petrol ol engines: There is a malfunction in the fuel system. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop. Tank ventilation Malfunction Consult workshop Vehicle Displayy messages Displa messages d Vehicle is operational Switch off ignition before exiting Possible causes/consequences Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * You are leaving the vehicle in a ready-to-drive state. # Get out of the vehicle, secure it against rolling away and take the key with you. # If you do not leave the vehicle, switch o the electrical consumers, e.g. the seat heating. Otherwise, the 12‑V battery may discharge and starting the engine may be possible only with the help of a second battery (jump start). Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 469 Displayy messages Displa messages ï Operation only possible in transmission position P ï Trailer coupling extending… ï Check trailer hitch lock (white display message) Possible causes/consequences Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The ball neck will not swivel because transmission position h, k or neutral i is selected. # Depress the brake pedal. # Engage park position j. * The ball neck is retracting/extending. Do not attempt to speed up, slow down or initiate the swivel movement using your hand, foot or other aids. During the swivel movement, do not couple a trailer. When the ball neck has reached an operational position, the display message will disappear. * The trailer hitch is not operational during a journey with a trailer. & WARNING Risk of an accident if the ball neck is not locked The trailer may become detached. # Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the tra c conditions. Do not continue driving. # Uncouple the trailer and secure it against rolling away. # Initiate a new swivel movement and do not re-couple the trailer until the warning/indicator lamp goes out. # # Initiate a new swivel movement (/ page 288). When the display message disappears, couple up the trailer and drive on. 470 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Displayy messages Displa messages Possible causes/consequences Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions If the display message does not disappear, the trailer hitch is malfunctioning and the ball neck is not locked. # Do not couple up the trailer. Drive on without the trailer. Note the reduced ground clearance due to the unlocked ball neck. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop. * When the vehicle is stationary with a coupled trailer, the trailer hitch is not operational. # Uncouple the coupled trailer and secure it against rolling away. # If the the ball neck neck has been retr retract acted: ed: initiate a new swivel movement (/ page 288). The ball neck will engage vertically in the locked position and then engage beneath the bumper. # If the the ball neck neck has been ext extended: ended: initiate a new swivel movement (/ page 288). The ball neck will engage beneath the bumper. If the display message does not disappear, the trailer hitch is malfunctioning and the ball neck is not locked. Do not couple up the trailer. Drive on without the trailer. Note the reduced ground clearance due to the unlocked ball neck. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop. # Head-up display currently unavailable See Owner's Manual * The head-up display is temporarily unavailable. Possible causes: R malfunctions in the power supply R signal interference # Stop in accordance with the tra c conditions and switch the vehicle o and on again. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 471 Displayy messages Displa messages Possible causes/consequences Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions # Head-up display inoperative Ù Steering malfunction Increased physical effort See Owner's Manual Ù Steering malfunction Stop immediately See Owner's Manual Active bonnet malfunction See Owner's Manual If the display message still appears, consult a quali ed specialist workshop. * The head-up display has an internal error. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop. * The power steering assistance is malfunctioning. & WARNING Risk of an accident due to altered steering characteristics If the power assistance of the steering fails partially or completely, you will need to use more force to steer. # If safe steering is possible, drive on carefully. # Visit or consult a quali ed specialist workshop immediately. * The steering is malfunctioning. Steering capability is signi cantly impaired. & WARNING Risk of accident if steering capability is impaired If the steering does not function as intended, the vehicle's operating safety is jeopardised. # Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and tra c conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop. * The active bonnet (pedestrian protection) is malfunctioning or inoperative a er having already been triggered. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop. 472 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Displayy messages Displa messages C ? Possible causes/consequences Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * At least one door is open. # Close all doors. * The bonnet is open. & WARNING Risk of accident due to driving with the bonnet unlocked The bonnet may open and block your view. Never release the bonnet when driving. # Before every trip, ensure that the engine bonnet is locked. # # # A Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the tra c conditions. Close the bonnet. * The tailgate is open. & DAN ANGER GER Risk of poisoning from exhaust gases Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases, such as carbon monoxide. Exhaust gases can enter the vehicle interior if the tailgate is open when the vehicle is running, especially if the vehicle is in motion. # Always switch o the vehicle before opening the tailgate. # Never drive with the tailgate open. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 473 Displayy messages Displa messages Possible causes/consequences Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions # Close the tailgate. _ * The seat backrest of the corresponding seat is not engaged. # Fold the seat backrest back until it engages. ¥ * The washer uid level in the washer uid reservoir has dropped below the minimum. # Top up the washer uid (/ page 381). Wiper malfunctioning * The windscreen wiper is malfunctioning. # Restart the vehicle. Rear left seat backrest not locked (Example) Top up washer fluid If the display message still appears: Consult a quali ed specialist workshop. # 474 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Engine Displayy messages Displa messages Possible causes/consequences Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions To switch off the engine, press the Start/Stop button for at least 3 seconds or 3 times. * You have pressed the start/stop button while the vehicle is in motion. # Information about switching o the vehicle while driving (/ page 178). Cannot start engine See Owner's Manual * The vehicle cannot be started. # Switch the vehicle o and switch it back on # If the display message still appears, consult a quali ed specialist workshop. + Top up coolant See Owner’s Manual * The coolant level is too low. * NOTE Engine damage due to insu cient coolant # # # Avoid long journeys with insu cient coolant. Add coolant (/ page 380). Have the engine cooling system checked at a quali ed specialist workshop. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 475 Displayy messages Displa messages ÿ Coolant Stop vehicle Switch engine off Possible causes/consequences Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The coolant is too hot. # Stop immediately in accordance with the tra c conditions and switch o the vehicle. & WARNING Risk of burns when opening the bonnet If you open the bonnet in the event of an overheated engine or re in the engine compartment, the following situations may occur: R You may come into contact with hot gases. R You may come into contact with other escaping hot operating uids. # # # # # ÿ Before opening the bonnet, allow the engine to cool down. In the event of a re in the engine compartment, keep the bonnet closed and call the re service. Wait until the engine has cooled down. Make sure that the air supply to the radiator is not obstructed. Avoiding high loads on the engine, drive to the nearest quali ed specialist workshop. In doing so, ensure that the coolant temperature display remains below 120°C. * There is a malfunction in the engine cooling system. # Avoiding high loads on the engine, drive to the nearest quali ed specialist workshop. In doing so, ensure that the coolant temperature display remains below 120°C. 476 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Displayy messages Displa messages 8 Possible causes/consequences Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The fuel supply has dropped into the reserve range. # Refuel. Reserve fuel level ! * Vehicles with with diesel engines: the fuel lter is dirty or the water in the fuel lter needs to be drained. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop. ¸ * Vehicles with with diesel engines: the engine air lter is dirty and must be replaced. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop. Clean the fuel filter Replace air cleaner Transmission Displayy messages Displa messages Only select Park (P) when vehicle is stationary Possible causes/consequences Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * It is possible to select the park position j only if the vehicle is stationary. # Depress the brake pedal to stop. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 477 Displayy messages Displa messages Possible causes/consequences Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions # Shi the transmission to park position j when the vehicle is stationary. Apply brake to deselect Park (P) position * You have attempted to shi the transmission out of park position j and into another transmission position. # Depress the brake pedal. # Select transmission position h, k or neutral i. To shift out of P or N, depress brake and start engine * You have attempted to shi the transmission out of park position j or neutral i and into another transmission position. # Depress the brake pedal. # Start the vehicle. # Change the transmission position. Apply brake to select D or R * You have attempted to select transmission position h or k. # Depress the brake pedal. # Select transmission position h or k. Apply brake to select R * You have attempted to select transmission position k. # Depress the brake pedal. # Select transmission position k. Risk of vehicle rolling Driver door open and transmission not in P * The driver's door is not fully closed and transmission position h, k or neutral i is selected. The vehicle may roll away. 478 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Displayy messages Displa messages Possible causes/consequences Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions # Select park position j when switching o the vehicle. N permanently active Risk of vehicle rolling * Neutral i has been selected while the vehicle is rolling or while you are driving. # Depress the brake pedal to stop. # Shi the transmission to park position j while the vehicle is stationary. # To continue driving, select transmission position h or k. Without changing gear, consult workshop * The transmission is malfunctioning. It is no longer possible to change the transmission position. # If transmission position h is selected, consult a quali ed specialist workshop and do not change the transmission position. # For all other transmission positions, park the vehicle safely. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop. Reversing not poss. Consult workshop * The transmission is malfunctioning. It is not possible to select transmission position k. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop. Transmission Malfunction Stop * The transmission is malfunctioning. The transmission shi s to neutral i automatically. # Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the tra c conditions. # Depress the brake pedal. # Engage park position j. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 479 Displayy messages Displa messages Possible causes/consequences Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Stop vehicle Leave engine running Wait Transmission cooling * The transmission is overheating. Pulling away may be temporarily impaired or not possible. # Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the tra c conditions. Do not continue driving. # Leave the engine running. # Wait until the display message disappears before pulling away. Auxiliary battery malfunction (white display message) * Vehicles with with automatic automatic transmission: transmission: The auxiliary battery for the transmission is no longer being charged. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop. # Vehicles with with automatic automatic transmission: transmission: until then, always select park position j before you switch o the vehicle. # Before leaving the vehicle, apply the electric parking brake. Auxiliary battery malfunction (red display message) * Vehicles with with automatic automatic transmission: transmission: The auxiliary battery for the transmission is no longer being charged. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop. # Vehicles with with automatic automatic transmission: transmission: until then, always select park position j before you switch o the vehicle. # Before leaving the vehicle, apply the electric parking brake. 480 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Brak Br akes es Displayy messages Displa messages ! Parking brake See Owner's Manual Possible causes/consequences Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The yellow ! indicator lamp is lit. The electric parking brake is malfunctioning. To apply: apply: # Switch the vehicle o and switch it back on # Apply the electric parking brake manually (/ page 227). If it is not possible to apply the electric parking brake: # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop. # Where necessary, also secure the parked vehicle against rolling away. * The yellow ! indicator lamp and the red ! indicator lamp are lit. The electric parking brake is malfunctioning. To release: release: # Switch the vehicle o and switch it back on # Release the electric parking brake manually (/ page 227). or # Release the electric parking brake automatically (/ page 227). If it is still not possible to release the electric parking brake: # Do not continue driving. Consult a quali ed specialist workshop. * The yellow ! indicator lamp is lit and the red ! indicator lamp is ashing. The electric parking brake is malfunctioning. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 481 Displayy messages Displa messages Possible causes/consequences Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The electric parking brake could not be applied or released. Switch the vehicle o and switch it back on # To apply: apply: Release and then apply the electric parking brake manually (/ page 227). # To release: release: # Apply and then release the electric parking brake manually. If it is not possible to apply the electric parking brake or the red ! indicator lamp continues to ash: # Do not continue driving. Consult a quali ed specialist workshop. # Where necessary, also secure the parked vehicle against rolling away. * The yellow ! indicator lamp is lit and the red ! indicator lamp ashes for approximately ten seconds a er the electric parking brake has been applied or released. It then remains lit or goes out. The electric parking brake is malfunctioning. If the the stat statee of charg chargee is too too low: low: # Charge the 12 V battery. To apply: apply: Switch o the vehicle. The electric parking brake will be applied automatically. # 482 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Displayy messages Displa messages Possible causes/consequences Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions If you do not want the electric parking brake to be applied, e.g. at an automatic car wash or when the vehicle is being towed, leave the vehicle switched on. This does not include having the vehicle towed with the rear axle raised. If the electric parking brake is not applied automatically: # Switch the vehicle o and switch it back on # Release and then apply the electric parking brake manually (/ page 227). If it is still not possible to apply the electric parking brake: # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop. # Where necessary, also secure the parked vehicle against rolling away. To release: release: If the conditions for automatic release are ful lled and the electric parking brake is not released automatically, release the electric parking brake manually (/ page 227). # If it is still not possible to release the electric parking brake: Do not continue driving. Consult a quali ed specialist workshop. # ! Release parking brake * The red ! indicator lamp is ashing. The electric parking brake is applied while you are driving: R A condition for automatic release of the electric parking brake has not been ful lled (/ page 227). R You are performing emergency braking using the electric parking brake (/ page 228). Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 483 Displayy messages Displa messages Possible causes/consequences Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions # # Check the conditions for automatic release of the electric parking brake. Release the electric parking brake manually. ! * The red ! indicator lamp is lit. You have attempted to release the electric parking brake with the vehicle switched o . # Switch on the vehicle. J * There is insu cient brake uid in the brake uid reservoir. Check brake pads See Owner's Manual * The brakepads have reached the wear limit. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop. Turn on the ignition to release the parking brake Check brake fluid level & WARNING Risk of an accident due to low brake uid level If the brake uid level is too low, the braking e ect and the braking characteristics may be impaired. # Stop the vehicle as soon as possible, paying attention to road and tra c conditions. Do not continue driving. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop. # Do not top up the brake uid. 484 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Driving Dr iving systems systems Displayy messages Displa messages ë Possible causes/consequences Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The HOLD function is deactivated because the vehicle is slipping or a condition for activation is not ful lled. # Reactivate the HOLD function later or check the activation conditions for the HOLD function (/ page 235). Off é * ATTENTION ASSIST is malfunctioning. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop. é * ATTENTION ASSIST has detected fatigue or an increasing lack of concentration on the part of the driver (/ page 236). # If necessary, take a break. ATTENTION ASSIST inoperative ATTENTION ASSIST: Take a break! Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 485 Displayy messages Displa messages h Possible causes/consequences Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * Cruise control cannot be activated as not all activation conditions are ful lled. # Observe the activation conditions for cruise control (/ page 239). - - - km/h Cruise control inoperative * Cruise control is malfunctioning. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop. Cruise control and Limiter inoperative * Cruise control and the limiter are malfunctioning. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop. Cruise control off * Cruise control has been deactivated. If there is an additional warning tone, cruise control has been deactivated automatically (/ page 238). È * The limiter can temporarily not be engaged. Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be available again. - - - km/h Limiter passive * If you depress the accelerator pedal beyond the pressure point (kickdown), the limiter is switched to passive mode (/ page 239). Limiter inoperative * The limiter is malfunctioning. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop. 486 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Displayy messages Displa messages ç Possible causes/consequences Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC cannot be activated as not all activation conditions are ful lled. # Comply with the activation conditions of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC (/ page 244). - - - km/h ç * If you depress the accelerator pedal beyond the setting of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC, the system will switch to passive mode (/ page 241). ç * Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC was deactivated. If a warning tone also sounds, Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC has deactivated automatically (/ page 244). suspended Off Active Distance Assist currently unavailable See Owner's Manual * Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is temporarily unavailable. The ambient conditions are outside the system limits (/ page 241). As soon as the ambient conditions are within the system limits, the system will become available again. # Drive on or Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 487 Displayy messages Displa messages Possible causes/consequences Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions # If the display message does not disappear, stop the vehicle in accordance with the tra c conditions and restart the vehicle. Active Distance Assist inoperative * Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is malfunctioning. Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also be malfunctioning. # Drive on or # Stop the vehicle in accordance with the tra c conditions and restart the vehicle. # If the display message does not disappear: consult a quali ed specialist workshop. Active Distance Assist available again * Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is operational again. # Switch on Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC (/ page 244). ð * You have exceeded the maximum permissible speed (for certain countries only). # Drive more slowly. Maximum speed exceeded Speed limit (winter tyres) XXX km/h * You have reached the maximum permissible stored speed for winter tyres. It is not possible to exceed this speed. 488 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Displayy messages Displa messages î Possible causes/consequences Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The Downhill Speed Regulation is malfunctioning. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop. inoperative î * The Downhill Speed Regulation is not available in the currently selected drive program. # Change the drive program (/ page 195). î * The maximum speed of 40 km/h for the Downhill Speed Regulation has been exceeded. # Drive more slowly. Not possible in current drive program Max. speed 40 km/h Active Steering Assist currently unavailable See Owner's Manual * Active Steering Assist is temporarily unavailable. The ambient conditions are outside the system limits (/ page 250). As soon as the ambient conditions are within the system limits, the system will become available again. # Drive on # Check the tyre pressure if necessary. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 489 Displayy messages Displa messages Possible causes/consequences Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Active Steering Assist inoperative * Active Steering Assist is malfunctioning. Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC remains available. # Drive on or # Stop the vehicle in accordance with the tra c conditions and restart the vehicle. # If the display message does not disappear: consult a quali ed specialist workshop. Active Steering Assist currently unavailable due to multiple emergency stops * Active Steering Assist is temporarily unavailable due to multiple emergency stops. # Take over the steering and stop in accordance with the tra c conditions. # Switch the vehicle o and switch it back on Active Steering Assist is available once more. Beginning emergency stop * Your hands are not on the steering wheel. An emergency stop is being initiated (/ page 252). # Put your hands back on the steering wheel. You can cancel the deceleration at any time by performing one of the following actions: R Steering R Braking or accelerating R Deactivating Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC Ø * Active Steering Assist has reached the system limits (/ page 250). You have not steered independently for a considerable period of time. # Take over the steering and drive on in accordance with the tra c conditions. 490 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Displayy messages Displa messages Possible causes/consequences Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Active Stop-and-Go Assist currently unavailable see Owner's Manual * Active Stop-and-Go Assist is temporarily unavailable. Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC and Active Steering Assist are still available. The ambient conditions are outside the system limits (/ page 248). As soon as the ambient conditions are within the system limits, the system will become available again. # Drive on. Active Stop-and-Go Assist inoperative See Owner's Manual * Active Stop-and-Go Assist is malfunctioning. Active Stop-and-Go Assist has been deactivated. Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC and Active Steering Assist are still available. # Drive on. or # Stop the vehicle in accordance with the tra c conditions and restart the vehicle. # If the display message does not disappear, consult a quali ed specialist workshop. Traffic Sign Assist currently unavailable See Owner's Manual * Tra c Sign Assist is temporarily unavailable. Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be available again. # Drive on Traffic Sign Assist inoperative * Tra c Sign Assist is malfunctioning. # Drive on or # Stop the vehicle in accordance with the tra c conditions and restart the vehicle. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 491 Displayy messages Displa messages Possible causes/consequences Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions # If the display message does not disappear: consult a quali ed specialist workshop. Blind Spot Assist currently unavailable See Owner's Manual * Blind Spot Assist is temporarily unavailable. The system limits have been reached (/ page 259). Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be available again. # Drive on or # If the display message does not disappear, stop the vehicle in accordance with the tra c conditions and restart the vehicle. Blind Spot Assist inoperative * Blind Spot Assist is malfunctioning. # Drive on or # Stop the vehicle in accordance with the tra c conditions and restart the vehicle. # If the display message does not disappear: consult a quali ed specialist workshop. Blind Spot Assist not available when towing a trailer See Owner's Manual * When you establish the electrical connection to the trailer, Blind Spot Assist will be unavailable. # Press the le -hand Touch Control and acknowledge the display message. Active Blind Spot Assist currently unavailable See Owner's Manual * Active Blind Spot Assist is temporarily unavailable. The system limits have been reached (/ page 259). 492 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Displayy messages Displa messages Possible causes/consequences Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be available again. # Drive on or # If the display message does not disappear, stop the vehicle in accordance with the tra c conditions and restart the vehicle. Active Blind Spot Assist inoperative * Active Blind Spot Assist is malfunctioning. # Drive on or # Stop the vehicle in accordance with the tra c conditions and restart the vehicle. # If the display message does not disappear: consult a quali ed specialist workshop. Active Blind Spot Assist not available when towing a trailer See Owner's Manual * When you establish the electrical connection to the trailer, Active Blind Spot Assist will be unavailable. # Press the le -hand Touch Control and acknowledge the display message. Active Lane Keeping Assist currently unavailable See Owner's Manual * Active Lane Keeping Assist is temporarily unavailable. The ambient conditions are outside the system limits (/ page 262). As soon as the ambient conditions are within the system limits, the system will become available again. # Drive on Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 493 Displayy messages Displa messages Active Lane Keeping Assist inoperative ¸ à ç Ä temporarily unavailable Sensors dirty Possible causes/consequences Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * Active Lane Keeping Assist is malfunctioning. # Drive on or # Stop the vehicle in accordance with the tra c conditions and restart the vehicle. # If the display message does not disappear: consult a quali ed specialist workshop. * Front and corner radar sensors (herea er "sensors") are malfunctioning. Possible causes: R The sensors are dirty R Heavy rain or snow R Extended country driving without other tra c, e.g. in the desert Driving systems and driving safety systems may be malfunctioning or temporarily unavailable. The brake system, steering and drive system will continue to function normally. # Drive on Once the causes of the problem are no longer present, the driving systems and driving safety systems will be available again and the corresponding symbols will be switched o . If the display message does not disappear: # Stop the vehicle in accordance with the tra c conditions. # Clean all sensor covers from outside (/ page 229). # Restart the vehicle. 494 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Displayy messages Displa messages á Ã Ä Ø Ô temporarily unavailable Camera view restricted Possible causes/consequences Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The view of the multifunction camera is restricted. Possible causes: R Dirt on the windscreen in the eld of vision of the multifunction camera R Heavy rain, snow or fog R Mist on the inside of the windscreen: in certain weather conditions, mist can form on the inside of the windscreen during cold times of year in particular. % This mist on the windscreen will be removed automatically within a short time with the aid of a heater. The restriction is temporary. Driving systems and driving safety systems may be malfunctioning or temporarily unavailable. The brake system, steering and drive system will continue to function normally. # Drive on Once the causes of the problem are no longer present, the driving systems and driving safety systems will be available again and the corresponding symbols will be switched o . If the display message does not disappear: # Stop the vehicle in accordance with the tra c conditions. # Clean the windscreen, especially in the position of the multifunction camera (/ page 229). # Restart the vehicle. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 495 Displayy messages Displa messages ä Fault Drive at max. 80 km/h É Stop vehicle Vehicle too low Possible causes/consequences Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * AIR BODY CONTROL is functioning only to a limited extent. The vehicle's handling characteristics may be a ected. # Drive in a manner appropriate for the current level, but do not exceed 80 km/h. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop. * You have pulled away despite the vehicle level being too low. # Stop the vehicle in accordance with the tra c conditions. The vehicle will be raised to the selected vehicle level. # Wait until the display message disappears before pulling away. If the display message does not disappear and a warning tone also sounds, AIR BODY CONTROL is malfunctioning: # Do not drive at speeds greater than 80 km/h and consult a quali ed specialist workshop immediately. * NOTE The tyres on the front axle or the fenders could be damaged by large steering movements # # # Avoid large steering movements while driving and listen for scraping sounds. If you hear scraping sounds, pull over and stop the vehicle in accordance with the tra c conditions, and set a higher vehicle level if possible. Set a higher vehicle level (/ page 266). Depending on the malfunction, the vehicle will be raised. 496 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Displayy messages Displa messages ¢ Lowering Possible causes/consequences Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The vehicle level will lower for the following reasons: R You have selected a di erent drive program. R You have exceeded the speed limit. R You have changed the vehicle level by pressing the button. É * Your vehicle is adjusting to the level you have selected. É * The vehicle level is too low. The vehicle will be raised to the selected vehicle level. # Wait until the display message disappears before pulling away. É * All vehicles vehicles excep exceptt all-terr all-terrain ain vehicles: vehicles: You are driving too fast for the selected vehicle level. # To adjust the vehicle level, you must not drive at speeds greater than 60 km/h. # To adjust the vehicle level during trailer operation, you must not drive at speeds greater than 30 km/h. Vehicle rising Vehicle rising Please wait Please reduce speed Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 497 Displayy messages Displa messages É Possible causes/consequences Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Compressor is cooling * AllAll-TTerr errain ain vehicles: vehicles: due to frequent level changes within a short space of time, the compressor rst needs to cool down for the selected vehicle level to be set. # Drive on in a manner appropriate for the current level. Make sure that there is su cient ground clearance. When the compressor has cooled down, the vehicle will continue rising to the selected vehicle level. É * AllAll-TTerr errain ain vehicles: vehicles: the display message tells you, in drive program G (O road +), not to drive quicker than 35 km/h. # In drive program G (O road +), do not drive quicker than 35 km/h. É * AllAll-TTerr errain ain vehicles: vehicles: you are driving too quickly for the G drive program (O road +). # In drive program G (O road +), do not drive quicker than 35 km/h. É * All-T All-Terr errain ain vehicles: vehicles: you are driving too quickly for the selected vehicle level. # To adjust the vehicle level, you must not drive at speeds greater than 35 km/h. # To adjust the vehicle level during trailer operation, you must not drive at speeds greater than 30 km/h. Max. speed 35 km/h (white display message) Max. speed 35 km/h (red display message) Please reduce speed 498 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Displayy messages Displa messages Possible causes/consequences Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Not in current drive program * AllAll-TTerr errain ain vehicles: vehicles: you are in the G drive program (O road +). The raised All-Terrain level is active. In the G drive program (O road +), it is not possible to manually adjust the vehicle level. Parking Assist and PARKTRONIC inoperative See Owner's Manual * Active Parking Assist and Parking Assist PARKTRONIC are malfunctioning. Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be available again. # Continue driving while paying attention to the vehicle's surroundings. or # Stop the vehicle in accordance with the tra c conditions and restart the vehicle. # If the display message still appears, consult a quali ed specialist workshop. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 499 Driving Dr iving safety safety systems systems Displayy messages Displa messages ! ÷ currently unavailable See Owner's Manual Possible causes/consequences Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * ABS and ESP® are temporarily unavailable. Other driving systems and driving safety systems (e.g. BAS) may also be temporarily unavailable. The brake system will continue to operate normally. Braking distance may increase in an emergency braking situation. & WARNING Risk of skidding if ABS and ESP® are malfunctioning The wheels may lock during braking and ESP® does not perform any vehicle stabilisation. The steerability and braking characteristics are heavily impaired and the braking distance may increase. In addition, other driving safety systems are switched o . # Drive carefully on a suitable stretch of road, making slight steering movements at a speed above 30 km/h. # If the display message does not disappear, consult a quali ed specialist workshop immediately. Drive carefully. 500 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Displayy messages Displa messages ! ÷ inoperative See Owner's Manual ÷ currently unavailable See Owner's Manual Possible causes/consequences Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * ABS and ESP® are malfunctioning. Other driving systems and driving safety systems (e.g. BAS) may also be malfunctioning. The brake system will continue to operate normally. Braking distance may increase in an emergency braking situation. & WARNING Risk of skidding if ABS and ESP® are malfunctioning The wheels may block during braking and ESP® does not perform any vehicle stabilization. The steerability and braking characteristics are heavily impaired and the braking distance may increase. In addition, other driving safety systems are switched o . # Drive on carefully. # Have ABS and ESP® checked immediately at a quali ed specialist workshop. * ESP® is temporarily unavailable. Other driving systems and driving safety systems (e.g. BAS) may also be malfunctioning. & WARNING Risk of skidding if ESP is malfunctioning® If ESP® is malfunctioning, ESP® cannot carry out vehicle stabilisation. In addition, other driving safety systems are switched o . # Drive carefully on a suitable stretch of road, making slight steering movements at a speed above 30 km/h. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 501 Displayy messages Displa messages Possible causes/consequences Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions # ÷ inoperative See Owner's Manual If the display message does not disappear, consult a quali ed specialist workshop immediately. Drive carefully. * ESP® is malfunctioning. Other driving systems and driving safety systems (e.g. BAS) may also be malfunctioning. The brake system will continue to operate normally. Braking distance may increase in an emergency braking situation. & WARNING Risk of skidding if ESP® is malfunctioning If ESP® is malfunctioning, ESP® cannot carry out vehicle stabilisation. In addition, other driving safety systems are switched o . # Drive on carefully. # Have ESP® checked at a quali ed specialist workshop. 502 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Displayy messages Displa messages T ! ÷ inoperative See Owner's Manual Active Brake Assist Functions currently limited See Owner's Manual Possible causes/consequences Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * EBD, ABS and ESP® are malfunctioning. Other driving systems and driving safety systems (e.g. BAS) may also be malfunctioning. & WARNING Risk of skidding if EBD, ABS and ESP® are malfunctioning The wheels may block during braking and ESP® does not perform any vehicle stabilization. The steerability and braking characteristics are heavily impaired and the braking distance may increase. In addition, other driving safety systems are switched o . # Drive on carefully. # Have the brake system checked immediately at a quali ed specialist workshop. * Vehicles with with the the Driving Driving Assistance Assistance Pack Packag age: e: Active Brake Assist with cross-tra c function, Evasive Steering Assist or PRE‑SAFE® PLUS are temporarily unavailable or only partially available. Vehicles without without the the Driving Driving Assistance Assistance Pack Packag age: e: Active Brake Assist is temporarily unavailable. # Drive on As soon as the ambient conditions are within the system limits, the system will become available again. or # If the display message does not disappear, stop the vehicle in accordance with the tra c conditions and restart the vehicle. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 503 Displayy messages Displa messages Active Brake Assist Functions limited See Owner's Manual Possible causes/consequences Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * For vehicles with the Driving Assistance Package, the following functions may be temporarily unavailable or only partially available: R Active Brake Assist with cross-tra c function R Evasive Steering Assist R PRE‑SAFE® PLUS Vehicles without without the the Driving Driving Assistance Assistance Pack Packag age: e: Active Brake Assist is temporarily unavailable or only partially available. # Drive on or # Stop the vehicle in accordance with the tra c conditions and restart the vehicle. # If the display message does not disappear: consult a quali ed specialist workshop. Mercedes-Benz Mer cedes-Benz emergency emergency call system system Displayy messages Displa messages G Inoperative Possible causes/consequences Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The Mercedes-Benz emergency call system is malfunctioning. The Mercedes me connect system is also malfunctioning. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop. 504 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Displayy messages Displa messages Device detected at diagnostics connection See Owner's Manual Possible causes/consequences Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The vehicle functions for fault detection are restricted. At least one of the main functions of the Mercedes me connect system is malfunctioning. # Observe the notes on the diagnostics connection (/ page 35). # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop. Battery Batt ery Displayy messages Displa messages # 12 V battery See Owner's Manual Possible causes/consequences Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The vehicle is o and the charge level is too low. # Switch o electrical consumers that are not required. To charge the 12 V battery: # Leave the vehicle running for a few minutes, or drive an extended distance. # Plug-in hybr hybrid: id: charge the 12 V battery while stationary, or drive an extended distance. * If the message appears while the vehicle is switched on, this indicates an on-board electrical system malfunction. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 505 Displayy messages Displa messages # See Owner's Manual Possible causes/consequences Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The 12 V battery is not being charged. * NOTE Possible engine damage if you continue driving # # # # # Stop vehicle See Owner's Manual Do not continue driving under any circumstances. Consult a quali ed specialist workshop. Stop immediately in accordance with the tra c conditions and switch o the vehicle. Consult a quali ed specialist workshop. * The 12 V battery is no longer being charged and the state of charge is too low. * NOTE Possible engine damage if you continue driving # # # # # Do not continue driving under any circumstances. Consult a quali ed specialist workshop. Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the tra c conditions. Do not continue driving. Switch o the vehicle. Consult a quali ed specialist workshop. 506 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Displayy messages Displa messages # Stop vehicle Leave engine running Possible causes/consequences Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The 12 V battery charge level is too low. # Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the tra c conditions. Do not continue driving. # Leave the engine running. # If the display message disappears: drive on. # If the display message does not disappear: consult a quali ed specialist workshop. Û * The 48 V on-board electrical system has function restrictions. Comfort functions may be restricted. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop immediately. Ý * The 48 V battery is discharged. You have switched on the vehicle while the 12 V battery was being charged with a suitable charger or while another vehicle was providing starting assistance. The discharged 48 V battery is charged automatically via the voltage converter. A er a few minutes, the Motor can be started again display message will be shown on the instrument display. # Start the vehicle. # Drive the vehicle for a while to charge the 12 V battery and the 48 V battery a er disconnecting the charger from the vehicle. 48 V battery See Owner's Manual Please wait 48 V battery charging If the Motor can be started again display message does not appear a er a few minutes: Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 507 Displayy messages Displa messages Possible causes/consequences Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions # # Try to start the vehicle. If the vehicle does not start, consult a quali ed specialist workshop. Cannot start engine See Owner's Manual * The state of charge of the 48 V battery is too low. You can no longer start the vehicle. # Switch o electrical consumers that are not required. # Connect a suitable charger approved for Mercedes-Benz with su cient charge output to the jump-start connection point of the 12 V battery (/ page 400). The 48 V battery is charged via the voltage converter in the vehicle. Motor can be started again * The 48 V battery has been charged automatically via the voltage converter. # Start the vehicle and drive for a while to charge the 12 V battery and the 48 V battery. Tyr yree pressur pressuree monitor monitor Displayy messages Displa messages Possible causes/consequences Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Tyre press. monitor currently unavailable * There is interference from a powerful radio signal source. As a result, no signals from the tyre pressure sensors are being received. The tyre pressure monitoring system is temporarily unavailable. The tyre pressure monitoring system will restart automatically as soon as the cause has been recti ed. # Drive on. Tyre press. monitor inoperative * The tyre pressure monitoring system is malfunctioning. 508 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Displayy messages Displa messages Possible causes/consequences Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions & WARNING There is a risk of an accident if the tyre pressure monitoring system is malfunctioning The tyre pressure monitoring system cannot issue a warning if there is pressure loss in one or more of the tyres. Tyres with insu cient tyre pressure may impair the driving characteristics as well as steering and braking. # Have the tyre pressure monitoring system checked at a quali ed specialist workshop. Tyre press. monitor inoperative No wheel sensors h Wheel sensor(s) missing h Check tyre(s) * The wheels tted do not have suitable tyre pressure sensors. The tyre pressure monitoring system is deactivated. # Fit wheels with suitable tyre pressure sensors. * There is no signal from the tyre pressure sensor of one or more wheels. No pressure value is displayed for the a ected tyre. # Have the faulty tyre pressure sensor replaced at a quali ed specialist workshop. * The tyre pressure in one or more tyres has dropped signi cantly. The wheel position is displayed. A warning tone also sounds. & WARNING Risk of an accident due to insu cient tyre pressure R R R The tyres can burst. The tyres can wear excessively and/or unevenly. The driving characteristics as well as the steering and braking may be greatly impaired. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 509 Displayy messages Displa messages Possible causes/consequences Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions You could then lose control of the vehicle. # Observe the recommended tyre pressures. # Adjust the tyre pressure if necessary. # # Stop the vehicle in accordance with the tra c conditions. Check the tyre pressure (/ page 412) and the tyres. h * The tyre pressure is too low in at least one of the tyres, or the di erence in tyre pressure between the individual wheels is too great. # Check the tyre pressure and add air, if necessary. # When the tyre pressure is correct, restart the tyre pressure monitoring system (/ page 415). h * The tyre pressure in one or more tyres has dropped suddenly. The wheel position will be displayed. Rectify tyre pressure Warning tyre defect & WARNING Risk of an accident from driving with a at tyre R R The tyres can overheat and be damaged. The driving characteristics as well as the steering and braking characteristics may be greatly impaired. You could then lose control of the vehicle. # Do not drive with a at tyre. 510 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Displayy messages Displa messages Possible causes/consequences Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions # # Do not exceed the maximum permissible driving distance in emergency mode and the maximum permissible speed with a at MOExtended tyre. Observe the notes on at tyres. Notes in the event of a at tyre (/ page 391). # Stop the vehicle in accordance with the tra c conditions. # Check the tyres. Tyre(s) overheated * At least one tyre is overheating. The a ected tyres are displayed in red. At temperatures close to the limit value, the tyres are displayed in yellow. & WARNING Risk of an accident from driving with overheated tyres Overheated tyres can burst. # Reduce speed so that the tyres cool down. Reduce speed * At least one tyre is overheating. The a ected tyres are displayed in red. At temperatures close to the limit value, the tyres are displayed in yellow. & WARNING Risk of an accident from driving with overheated tyres Overheated tyres can burst. # Reduce speed so that the tyres cool down. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 511 Tyr yree pressur pressuree loss war warning ning system system Displayy messages Displa messages Tyre pressure Check tyres Possible causes/consequences Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The tyre pressure loss warning system has detected a signi cant loss of pressure. & WARNING Risk of an accident due to insu cient tyre pressure R R R The tyres can burst. The tyres can wear excessively and/or unevenly. The driving characteristics as well as the steering and braking may be greatly impaired. You could then lose control of the vehicle. Observe the recommended tyre pressures. # Adjust the tyre pressure if necessary. # # # # Stop the vehicle in accordance with the tra c conditions. Check the tyre pressure (/ page 412) and the tyres. When the tyre pressure is correct, restart the tyre pressure loss warning system (/ page 415). Check tyre pressures then restart Run Flat Indicator * The tyre pressure loss warning system generated a display message and has not been restarted since. # When the tyre pressure is correct, restart the tyre pressure loss warning system (/ page 415). Run Flat Indicator inoperative * The tyre pressure loss warning system is malfunctioning. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop. 512 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Exhaustt gas Exhaus gas a ertr er treatment eatment Displayy messages Displa messages Ø Possible causes/consequences Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The AdBlue® level has fallen into the reserve range. # Top up AdBlue® immediately (/ page 208). Refill AdBlue See Owner’s Manual Ø * The low AdBlue® level will lead to limited performance a er the remaining distance displayed has been covered. # Top up AdBlue® immediately (/ page 208). Ø * The low AdBlue® level will lead to limited performance from the speed displayed. A er the remaining distance displayed has been covered, it will no longer be possible to start the vehicle. # Add at least the amount of AdBlue® displayed (/ page 208). Top up AdBlue Emergency op. in XXX miles See Owner's Manual XX,X l Top up AdBlue Emer. op.: max. XXX km/h Start not poss. in XXX km Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 513 Displayy messages Displa messages Ø XX,X l Top up AdBlue Switch on ignition, wait 60 sec. or eng. start not poss. Possible causes/consequences Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The AdBlue® tank is empty. You can no longer start the vehicle. # Add at least the amount of AdBlue® displayed (/ page 208). # Switch on the vehicle and wait for approximately 60 seconds. # Start the vehicle. ¯ * The AdBlue® system is malfunctioning. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop immediately. ¯ * The AdBlue® system is malfunctioning. Performance will be reduced once the remaining distance displayed has been covered. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop immediately. AdBlue system fault See Owner's Manual AdBlue system fault Emergency op. in XXX miles See Owner's Manual 514 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Displayy messages Displa messages ¯ AdBlue system fault Emer. op.: max. XXX km/h Start not poss. in XXX km ¯ AdBlue system fault Engine start not possible Possible causes/consequences Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * Power restriction due to the AdBlue® system fault. A er the distance displayed has been covered, it will no longer be possible to start the vehicle. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop immediately. * The AdBlue® system is malfunctioning. You can no longer start the vehicle. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop immediately. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 515 Engine oil Displayy messages Displa messages 5 Check eng. oil lev. when next refuelling 5 Add 1 litre engine oil when next refuelling Possible causes/consequences Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The engine oil level has dropped to the minimum level. * NOTE Engine damage caused by driving with insu cient engine oil # # Avoid long journeys with insu cient engine oil. Check the engine oil level when next refuelling. Top up the engine oil (/ page 379). Notes on engine oil (/ page 438). * Display message only for certain engines: The engine oil level has dropped to the minimum level. * NOTE Engine damage caused by driving with insu cient engine oil # # Avoid long journeys with insu cient engine oil. When next refuelling, add 1 litre of engine oil (/ page 379). Notes on engine oil (/ page 438). 516 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Displayy messages Displa messages 5 Engine oil level Reduce oil level Possible causes/consequences Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * Display message only for certain engines: The engine oil level is too high. * NOTE Engine damage caused by driving with excess engine oil # # 5 Engine oil level Stop vehicle Switch engine off Avoid long journeys with excess engine oil. Consult a quali ed specialist workshop immediately and have the engine oil level reduced. * Display message only for certain engines: The engine oil level is too low. * NOTE Engine damage caused by driving with insu cient engine oil # # # # # Avoid long journeys with insu cient engine oil. Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the tra c conditions. Do not continue driving. Switch o the vehicle. Add 1 l of engine oil (/ page 379). Check the engine oil level. Notes on engine oil (/ page 438). Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 517 Displayy messages Displa messages 5 Engine oil pressure Stop Switch off engine Possible causes/consequences Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * Display message only for certain engines: The oil pressure is too low. * NOTE Engine damage caused by driving with insu cient oil pressure # # # # 5 Avoid driving with insu cient oil pressure. Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the tra c conditions. Do not continue driving. Switch o the vehicle. Consult a quali ed specialist workshop. * The electrical connection to the oil level sensor has been interrupted or the oil level sensor is faulty. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop. Engine oil level cannot be measured War arning ning and indicator indicator lamps lamps Over Ov ervie view w of indicator indicator and war warning ning lamps lamps Some systems will perform a self-test when the vehicle is switched on. Some indicator and warn- ing lamps may brie y light up or ash. This behaviour is non-critical. These indicator and warning lamps indicate a malfunction only if they light up or ash a er the vehicle has been started or during a journey. 518 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Instr Ins trument ument display ÿ ; % # 8 ! ! Depending on the display setting, the positions of the indicator lamps on the instrument display may di er from the example shown. Indicator Indicat or and war warning ning lamps: lamps: 6 Restraint system (/ page 519) ü Seat belt (/ page 519) _ Reduced power (/ page 520) Ú System error (/ page 520) # Electrical fault (/ page 520) ï Trailer hitch (/ page 521) Ù Power steering (/ page 521) J J L Ó ê ä ! ÷ å Coolant temperature (/ page 523) Engine diagnostics (/ page 523) Vehicles with with a diesel engine: preglow Electrical fault (/ page 523) Reserve fuel with fuel ller ap location indicator (/ page 523) Electric parking brake (red) (/ page 526) Electric parking brake (yellow) (/ page 526) Brakes (yellow) (/ page 526) Brakes (red) (/ page 526) Distance warning (/ page 528) Active Brake Assist (/ page 528) Active Brake Assist (/ page 528) AIR BODY CONTROL (/ page 528) ABS (/ page 529) ESP® (/ page 529) ESP® OFF (/ page 529) h Tyre pressure monitoring system (/ page 532) T Standing lights (/ page 142) L Low beam (/ page 142) K High beam (/ page 144) #! Turn signal lights (/ page 144) R Rear fog light (/ page 142) Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 519 Occupant safety safety War arning/indicat ning/indicator or lamp 6 Restraint system warning lamp Possible causes/consequences Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The restraint system red warning lamp is lit while the vehicle is on. The restraint system is malfunctioning (/ page 44). & WARNING Risk of injury due to malfunctions in the restraint system Components in the restraint system may be activated unintentionally or not deploy as intended in an accident. Have the restraint system checked and repaired immediately at a quali ed specialist workshop. # Plug-in hybr hybrid: id: & DAN ANGER GER Risk of fatal injuries due to restraint system malfunctions Components in the restraint system may be activated unintentionally or not deploy as planned in an accident. In the event of an accident, the high-voltage on-board electrical system may not be deactivated as intended. You may su er an electric shock if you touch the damaged components of the high-voltage on-board electrical system. # Have the restraint system checked and repaired immediately at a quali ed specialist workshop. # A er an accident, switch o the vehicle immediately. # # # Drive on carefully. Note the messages on the instrument display. Consult a quali ed specialist workshop immediately. 520 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps War arning/indicat ning/indicator or lamp ü Seat belt warning lamp ashes ü Seat belt warning lamp lights up Possible causes/consequences Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The red seat belt warning lamp ashes and an intermittent warning tone sounds. The driver or front passenger has not fastened his/her seat belt while the vehicle is in motion. # Fasten your seat belt (/ page 48). There are objects on the front passenger seat. # Remove the objects from the front passenger seat. * The red seat belt warning lamp lights up once the vehicle has started. In addition, an intermittent warning tone may sound. The red seat belt warning lamp reminds the driver and front passenger to fasten their seat belts. # Fasten your seat belt (/ page 48). If you have placed objects on the front passenger seat, the red seat belt warning lamp may remain lit. Hybrid Hybr id system system War arning/indicat ning/indicator or lamp _ Reduced warning lamp power Possible causes/consequences Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The yellow reduced-power warning lamp is on. Drive system power output is reduced. # Note the messages on the instrument display. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 521 War arning/indicat ning/indicator or lamp Ú System error warning lamp # Electrical fault warning lamp Possible causes/consequences Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions *The red system error warning lamp is lit while the vehicle is in a state of operational readiness õ. There is a malfunction in the drive system. # Note the messages on the instrument display. * The red electrical fault warning lamp is lit. There is a fault with the electrics. # Note the messages on the instrument display. Vehicle War arning/indicat ning/indicator or lamp Ù Power steering warning lamp (red) Possible causes/consequences Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The red power steering warning lamp is lit while the vehicle is running. The power assistance or the steering itself is malfunctioning. & WARNING Risk of accident if steering capability is impaired If the steering does not function as intended, the vehicle's operating safety is jeopardised. Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and tra c conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances. # 522 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps War arning/indicat ning/indicator or lamp Possible causes/consequences Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions # # ï Trailer tow hitch warning lamp Consult a quali ed specialist workshop. Note the messages on the instrument display. * The red trailer hitch warning lamp is lit. The trailer hitch is not operational or is swivelling. & WARNING Risk of an accident if the ball neck is not locked The trailer may become detached. Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the tra c conditions. Do not continue driving. # Uncouple the trailer and secure it against rolling away. # Initiate a new swivel movement and do not re-couple the trailer until the warning/indicator lamp goes out. # # Note the messages on the instrument display. If the trailer hitch is swivelling: Wait until the ball neck has reached the operational position. # Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 523 Engine War arning/indicat ning/indicator or lamp Possible causes/consequences Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Coolant warning lamp (red) * The red coolant warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. Possible causes: R The temperature sensor is malfunctioning R The coolant level is too low R The air supply to the radiator is obstructed R The radiator fan is faulty R The engine coolant pump is faulty ÿ If there is an additional warning tone, the coolant temperature has exceeded 120°C. & WARNING Risk of burns when opening the bonnet If you open the bonnet in the event of an overheated engine or re in the engine compartment, the following situations may occur: R You may come into contact with hot gases. R You may come into contact with other escaping hot operating uids. # # # Before opening the bonnet, allow the engine to cool down. In the event of a re in the engine compartment, keep the bonnet closed and call the re service. Stop immediately in accordance with the tra c conditions and switch o the vehicle. Do not continue driving. 524 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps War arning/indicat ning/indicator or lamp Possible causes/consequences Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions # Note the messages on the instrument display. If the the coolant tem temper peratur aturee display display is at the the lower lower end of the the tem temper peratur aturee scale: Consult a quali ed specialist workshop. # If the the coolant tem temper peratur aturee display display is at the the upper end of the the tem temper peratur aturee scale: Exit the vehicle and keep a safe distance from it until the engine has cooled down. # Check the coolant level (/ page 380). # Make sure that the air supply to the radiator is not obstructed. # Avoiding high loads on the engine, drive to the nearest quali ed specialist workshop. In doing so, ensure that the coolant temperature display remains below 120°C. # ÿ Coolant warning lamp (yellow) * The yellow coolant warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. Possible causes: R The temperature sensor is malfunctioning R The charge air, transmission oil or battery cooling is faulty R The radiator shutters are blocked or defective # Avoiding high loads on the engine, drive to the nearest quali ed specialist workshop. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 525 War arning/indicat ning/indicator or lamp ; Engine diagnosis warning lamp Possible causes/consequences Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The yellow engine diagnostics warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. A malfunction has occurred in the engine, the exhaust system or the fuel system. The emissions limit value may have been exceeded and the engine may be running in emergency operation mode. # Have the vehicle checked as soon as possible at a quali ed specialist workshop. Vehicles with with a diesel engine: the fuel tank may have been run dry. # Start the engine three to four times a er refuelling. If the yellow engine diagnosis warning lamp goes out, emergency operation mode is cancelled. The vehicle need not be checked. # * The red electrical fault warning lamp is lit. There is a fault in the electrics. # Note the messages on the instrument display. 8 * The yellow fuel reserve warning lamp lights up while the engine is running. The fuel supply has dropped into the reserve range. # Refuel. Electrical fault warning lamp Fuel reserve warning lamp lights up 526 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Brak Br akes es War arning/indicat ning/indicator or lamp ! Electric parking brake indicator lamp (red) P Possible ossible causes/consequences causes/consequences and M Solutions * The red electric parking brake indicator lamp ashes or is lit. The yellow electric parking brake indicator lamp is also lit in the event of a malfunction. # Note the messages on the instrument display. ! The electric parking brake (yellow) indicator lamp J Brake system warning lamp (yellow) * The yellow brake warning lamp is lit while the vehicle is running. & WARNING Risk of an accident due to a brake system malfunction If the brake system is malfunctioning, braking characteristics may be impaired. # Drive on carefully. # Have the brake system checked immediately at a quali ed specialist workshop. # # Adjust your speed and drive on carefully, leaving a suitable distance to the vehicle in front. If the instrument display shows a display message, observe it. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 527 War arning/indicat ning/indicator or lamp Possible causes/consequences Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions # J Brake system warning lamp (red) Consult a quali ed specialist workshop. * The red brake warning lamp is lit while the vehicle is running. Possible causes: R The brake force boosting is malfunctioning and the braking characteristics may be a ected. R There is insu cient brake uid in the brake uid reservoir. # Note the messages on the instrument display. & WARNING Risk of accident and injury if brake force boosting is malfunctioning If brake force boosting is malfunctioning, increased brake pedal force may be necessary for braking. The braking characteristics may be impaired. The braking distance can increase in emergency braking situations. # Stop in a safe location immediately. Do not continue driving! # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop. & WARNING Risk of an accident due to low brake uid level If the brake uid level is too low, the braking e ect and the braking characteristics may be impaired. # Stop the vehicle as soon as possible, paying attention to road and tra c conditions. Do not continue driving. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop. # Do not top up the brake uid. 528 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Driving Dr iving systems systems War arning/indicat ning/indicator or lamp Possible causes/consequences Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Warning lamp for distance warning function * The red distance warning lamp lights up while the vehicle is in motion. The distance to the vehicle in front is too small for the speed selected. If there is an additional warning tone, you are approaching an obstacle at too high a speed. # Be prepared to brake immediately. # Increase the distance. Ó * The Active Brake Assist warning lamp is on. Due to dirty sensors or a malfunction, the system is not available or the range of functions is restricted. # Note the messages on the instrument display. L Active Brake Assist warning lamp ê Active Brake Assist warning lamp Function of Active Brake Assist (/ page 253). * The Active Brake Assist warning lamp is on. The system is switched o or the range of functions has been automatically restricted. This may be the case if the driver is not wearing a seat belt or another driving system has been activated. # Observe the notes on Active Brake Assist (/ page 253). Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 529 War arning/indicat ning/indicator or lamp ä Suspension warning lamp (yellow) Possible causes/consequences Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The yellow AIR BODY CONTROL warning lamp is lit. A fault has occurred in the AIR BODY CONTROL. # Note the messages on the instrument display. Driving Dr iving safety safety systems systems War arning/indicat ning/indicator or lamp ! ABS warning lamp Possible causes/consequences Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The yellow ABS warning lamp is lit while the vehicle is running. ABS is malfunctioning. If an additional warning tone sounds, EBD is malfunctioning. Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also be malfunctioning. # Note the messages on the instrument display. & WARNING There is a risk of skidding if EBD or ABS is malfunctioning The wheels may lock during braking. The steerability and braking characteristics are heavily impaired and the braking distance may increase. In addition, other driving safety systems are switched o . 530 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps War arning/indicat ning/indicator or lamp Possible causes/consequences Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions # # Drive on carefully. Have the brake system checked immediately at a quali ed specialist workshop. ÷ * The yellow ESP® warning lamp ashes while the vehicle is in motion. One or more wheels have reached their grip limit (/ page 232). # Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions. ÷ * The yellow ESP® warning lamp is lit while the vehicle is running. ESP® is malfunctioning. Other driving systems and driving safety systems (e.g. BAS) may also be malfunctioning. # Note the messages on the instrument display. ESP® warning lamp ashes ESP® warning lamp lights up & WARNING Risk of skidding if ESP® is malfunctioning If ESP® is malfunctioning, ESP® cannot carry out vehicle stabilisation. In addition, other driving safety systems are switched o . # Drive on carefully. # Have ESP® checked at a quali ed specialist workshop. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 531 War arning/indicat ning/indicator or lamp å ESP® OFF warning lamp Possible causes/consequences Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The yellow ESP® OFF warning lamp is lit while the vehicle is running. ESP® is deactivated. Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also be inoperative. & WARNING Risk of skidding when driving with ESP® deactivated ESP® does not act to stabilise the vehicle. The availability of further driving safety systems is also limited. # Drive on carefully. # Deactivate ESP® only for as long as the situation requires. If ESP® cannot be activated, ESP® is malfunctioning. # Have ESP® checked immediately at a quali ed specialist workshop. # Observe the notes on deactivating ESP® (/ page 232). 532 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Tyr yree pressur pressuree monitor monitor War arning/indicat ning/indicator or lamp h Tyre pressure monitoring system warning lamp ashes h Tyre pressure monitoring system warning lamp lights up Possible causes/consequences Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions *The yellow tyre pressure monitor warning lamp (pressure loss/malfunction) ashes for approximately one minute and then remains lit. The tyre pressure monitor is malfunctioning. & WARNING There is a risk of an accident if the tyre pressure monitoring system is malfunctioning The tyre pressure monitoring system cannot issue a warning if there is pressure loss in one or more of the tyres. Tyres with insu cient tyre pressure may impair the driving characteristics as well as steering and braking. # Have the tyre pressure monitoring system checked at a quali ed specialist workshop. * The yellow tyre pressure monitoring system warning lamp (pressure loss/malfunction) is lit. The tyre pressure monitoring system has detected tyre pressure loss in at least one of the tyres. & WARNING Risk of an accident due to insu cient tyre pressure R R R The tyres can burst. The tyres can wear excessively and/or unevenly. The driving characteristics as well as the steering and braking may be greatly impaired. You could then lose control of the vehicle. Observe the recommended tyre pressures. # Adjust the tyre pressure if necessary. # Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 533 War arning/indicat ning/indicator or lamp Possible causes/consequences Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions # # Stop the vehicle in accordance with the tra c conditions. Check the tyre pressure and the tyres. 534 Index 1, 2, 3 ... 4MATIC 4MA TIC Function................................................ 203 12 V battery battery see On-board electrical system battery (12 V) 12 V socket see Socket (12 V) 48 V on-board on-board electrical electrical system system Operating safety...................................... 25 360° Camera Care...................................................... 385 Function................................................ 271 Selecting a view..................................... 274 Switching automatic operation on/o (reversing camera)................................. 275 A A/C function Activating/deactivating (control panel)... 161 Activating/deactivating (MBUX multimedia system)....................................... 162 ABS (Anti-lock (Anti-lock Braking Braking System) System).................... 231 Acceler cceleration ation see Kickdown Accident and Breakdo Breakdown wn Management Management Mercedes me connect........................... 358 Acous coustic tic locking locking ver erii cation signal Activating/deactivating............................ 80 Acous coustic tic presence presence indicator indicator (sound genergenerator) at or) Notes..................................................... 174 Acous coustic tic Vehicle Vehicle Indication Sound generator.................................... 174 Activ ctivee Blind Spot Spot Assist Brake application................................... 261 Function................................................ 259 System limitations.................................. 259 Trailer operation..................................... 261 Activ ctivee bonnet bonnet (pedestr (pedestrian ian protection) protection) Operation.............................................. 375 Activ ctivee Brak Brakee Assist Function/notes...................................... 253 Setting................................................... 257 Activ ctivee Distance Distance Assist Assist DISTR DISTRONIC ONIC Active Emergency Stop Assist................ 252 Calling up a speed................................. Function................................................ Increasing/decreasing speed................. Maximum design speed.......................... Route-based speed adaptation............... Selecting............................................... Storing a speed...................................... Switching o /deactivating..................... Switching on/activating......................... System limitations.................................. Activ ctivee Emergency Emergency Stop Stop Assist...................... Assist Activ ctivee headlamps headlamps......................................... Activ ctivee Lane Keeping Keeping Assist Activating/deactivating.......................... Activating/deactivating the warning....... Function................................................ Setting the sensitivity............................. System limits......................................... Trailer operation..................................... Activ ctivee Par Parking king Assist Automatic braking function.................... Exiting a parking space.......................... Function................................................ Manoeuvring brake function................... 244 241 244 195 247 244 244 244 244 241 252 145 264 265 262 265 262 262 283 282 279 284 Index 535 Parking.................................................. Pausing.................................................. System limitations.................................. Activ ctivee Service Ser vice Syst System em PLUS PLUS see ASSYST PLUS Activ ctivee Speed Limit Assist Display................................................... Function................................................ Activ ctivee Steer Steering ing Assist Activating/deactivating.......................... Active Emergency Stop Assist................ Function................................................ System limits......................................... Activ ctivee Tr Traa c Jam Assist Activating/deactivating.......................... Function................................................ Adap daptiv tivee brak brakee lights.................................... lights Adap daptiv tivee cruise cruise control control see Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC Adap daptiv tivee Highbeam Assist Activating/deactivating.......................... Function................................................ 281 283 279 246 246 252 252 250 250 249 248 236 148 147 Adap daptiv tivee Highbeam Assist Assist Plus Function................................................ 148 Switching on/o .................................... 149 AdBlue® Additives................................................ 437 Capacity................................................ 438 Notes..................................................... 207 Purity..................................................... 437 Topping up............................................. 208 Additional door lock....................................... lock 82 Additiv dditives es AdBlue®................................................. 437 Engine oil............................................... 438 Fuel....................................................... 435 Additiv dditives es (AdBlue (AdBlue®) see AdBlue® Additiv dditives es (engine oil) see Additives Additiv dditives es (fuel) see Fuel ADS PLUS PLUS damping damping system system see AIR BODY CONTROL A er er-sales -sales ser service vice see ASSYST PLUS AIR BODY BODY CONTR CONTROL OL Setting................................................... Suspension............................................ Air conditioning menu Calling up.............................................. Air distr distribution ibution Setting................................................... Setting (MBUX multimedia system)......... Air freshener freshener system system see Fragrance system Air inlet see Air-water duct Air pressure pressure see Tyre pressure Air suspension see AIR BODY CONTROL Air vents vents Adjusting (front)..................................... Adjusting (rear)...................................... Glove box............................................... 266 265 161 160 162 172 173 173 536 Index Air vents vents see Air vents Air-conditioning Air -conditioning system system see Climate control Air-r Air -recir ecirculation culation mode.................................. mode 163 Air-w Air -wat ater er duct Keeping free.......................................... 382 Airbag Activation................................................ 44 Automatic co-driver airbag shuto ............ 53 Front airbag (driver, front passenger)........ 50 Installation locations................................ 50 Knee airbag............................................. 50 Overview.................................................. 50 PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps...... 54 Protection................................................ 51 Reduced protection.................................. 52 Side airbag.............................................. 50 Window airbag......................................... 50 Air ow Setting................................................... 160 Alarm Alar m system system see ATA (anti-the alarm system) All-wheel drive drive see 4MATIC Ambient lighting Setting (MBUX multimedia system)......... 151 Android Andr oid Auto Auto see Smartphone integration Animals Pets in the vehicle.................................... 78 Anti-lockk braking Anti-loc braking system system see ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) Anti-skid chains chains see Snow chains Anti-the Anti-t he prot protection ection Additional door lock................................. 82 Immobiliser............................................ 102 Anti-the Anti-t he prot protection ection see ATA (anti-the alarm system) Anticipator Anticipat oryy occupant protection protection see PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occupant protection) see PRE-SAFE® PLUS (anticipatory occupant protection plus) Apple CarPlay® see Smartphone integration Assistance Assist ance systems systems see Driving safety system ASSYSTT PLUS ASSYS PLUS Battery disconnection periods................ Displaying the service due date.............. Function/notes...................................... Regular maintenance work..................... Special service requirements................. ATA AT A (anti-t (anti-the he alar alarm m system) system) Deactivating the alarm........................... Function................................................ Interior protection function..................... Priming/deactivating interior protection........................................................ Priming/deactivating tow-away protection................................................... Tow-away protection function................. ATTENTION ASSIST Function................................................ Setting................................................... System limitations.................................. 375 374 374 374 374 103 102 103 104 103 103 236 238 236 Index 537 Att ttention ention assistant assistant see ATTENTION ASSIST Aut uthor horised ised work workshop shop see Quali ed specialist workshop Aut utomatic omatic co-driv co-driver er airbag shut shutoo Function of co-driver airbag shuto .......... 53 Aut utomatic omatic distance distance control control see Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC Aut utomatic omatic driving driving lights................................ lights 143 Aut utomatic omatic engine start start see ECO start/stop function Aut utomatic omatic engine stop stop see ECO start/stop function Aut utomatic omatic front front passenger passenger airbag shut shutoo PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps...... 54 Aut utomatic omatic mirror mirror folding folding function Activating/deactivating.......................... 158 Aut utomatic omatic seat adjustment adjustment Setting................................................... 112 Aut utomatic omatic transmission transmission DIRECT SELECT lever............................. 199 Drive program display............................ 197 Drive programs...................................... 195 DYNAMIC SELECT switch....................... Engaging drive position.......................... Engaging reverse gear............................ Kickdown............................................... Manual gear changing............................ Selecting park position........................... Steering wheel gearshi paddles............ Transmission position display................. Transmission positions........................... Axle load Permissible............................................ Trailer operation..................................... B Bad weat weather her light......................................... light Bag hook..................................................... hook Ball neck Extending/retracting.............................. Extending/retracting (MBUX multimedia system)............................................ BAS (Brak (Brakee Assist Assist System) System)........................... Battery Batt ery Remote control (stationary heater)......... 195 201 200 202 201 201 201 199 199 431 448 146 133 288 290 232 171 Battery Battery see High-voltage battery Batter Batt eryy (high-volt (high-voltag agee on-board on-board electrical electrical system) syst em) see High-voltage battery Batter Batt eryy (key) (key) Replacing................................................. 81 Batter Batt eryy (vehicle) (vehicle) Charging (Remote Online)...................... 179 Notes..................................................... 396 Notes (starting assistance and charging)........................................................ 398 Batter Batt eryy operation operation......................................... 174 Belt see Seat belt Bicycle Bicy cle rack rack Load capacity................................ 447, 448 Trailer operation..................................... 293 Blind Spot Spot Assist Activating/deactivating.......................... 262 Function................................................ 259 System limitations.................................. 259 538 Index Blower Blower see Climate control BlueTEC see AdBlue® Bonnet Function (active bonnet)......................... Opening/closing.................................... Boott lid Boo see Tailgate Brak Br akee Assist Assist System System see BAS (Brake Assist System) Brak Br akee uid Notes..................................................... Brak Br akee for force ce dis distr tribution ibution EBD (Electronic Brake force Distribution)....................................................... Brak Br akes es ABS (Anti-lock Braking System).............. Active Brake Assist................................. Adaptive brake lights.............................. BAS (Brake Assist System)..................... Driving tips............................................ 375 375 441 234 231 253 236 232 182 EBD (Electronic Brake force Distribution)....................................................... 234 HOLD function....................................... 235 Limited braking e ect (salt-treated roads).................................................... 182 New/replaced brake linings/brake discs...................................................... 180 Running-in notes.................................... 180 Brak Br akes es see Recuperation Braking Br aking assistance assistance see BAS (Brake Assist System) Breakdo Br eakdown wn Overview of the help functions................. 18 Tow-starting........................................... 407 Towing away.......................................... 403 Transporting the vehicle......................... 405 Wheel change........................................ 421 Breakdo Br eakdown wn see Flat tyre Buttons Butt ons Steering wheel....................................... 298 C Calls Mercedes me......................................... Camera Information............................................ Camera see 360° Camera see Dashcam see Reversing camera Car key see Key Car wash wash see Care Car wash wash (care) (care)............................................ Car-t Car -to-X o-X-Communication -Communication Displaying hazard warnings.................... Care 360° camera......................................... Air-water duct........................................ Automatic car wash............................... Carpet................................................... Decorative foil........................................ Display................................................... 353 229 382 347 385 382 382 387 384 387 Index 539 Exterior lighting...................................... Head-up display..................................... High-pressure cleaner............................ Paint...................................................... Plastic trim............................................ Real wood/trim elements...................... Reversing camera.................................. Roof lining............................................. Seat belt................................................ Seat cover............................................. Sensors................................................. Steering wheel....................................... Tailpipes................................................ Trailer hitch............................................ Vehicle socket for the high-voltage battery................................................... Washing by hand.................................... Wheels/rims.......................................... Windows................................................ Wiper blades.......................................... Carpe Car pett (Care) (Care)............................................... Changing gears gears Manually................................................ Changing hub caps....................................... caps 385 387 383 384 387 387 385 387 387 387 385 387 385 385 385 383 385 385 385 387 201 421 Charging Charging Charge level display............................... Charging cable control panel.................. Ending the charging process (alternating current, mode 2/3).......................... Indicator lamps on vehicle socket........... Notes - charging station (mode 3).......... Notes - mains socket (Mode 2)............... Notes - wallbox (mode 3)........................ Notes on charging the high-voltage battery................................................... Notes on wireless charging.................... On-board electrical system battery (12 V).................................................... Setting the maximum possible charging current (mains socket)...................... Starting the charging process................. Stowing the charging cable.................... USB port................................................ Vehicle socket........................................ Charging Char ging cable Control panel......................................... Stowing................................................. Charging Char ging the the high-volt high-voltag agee battery battery Starting the charging process................. 221 214 220 215 212 211 212 210 139 400 213 217 210 139 215 214 210 217 Chassis level level (AIR BODY BODY CONTR CONTROL) OL) Setting................................................... 266 Child safety safety lock Rear door................................................. 76 Rear side windows................................... 77 Child seat Approval categories................................. 63 Attaching (notes)...................................... 62 Basic instructions.................................... 58 Front passenger seat (notes).................... 74 Front passenger seat (without automatic airbag shuto )................................ 73 ISOFIX/i-Size ( tting)............................... 66 Notes on risks and dangers...................... 59 Recommendations for child restraint systems................................................... 61 Seats suitable for belt-secured child restraint systems..................................... 70 Seats suitable for i‑Size child restraint systems................................................... 66 Seats suitable for ISOFIX child restraint systems..................................... 65 Securing on the co-driver seat.................. 75 Securing on the rear seat......................... 72 Top Tether................................................ 69 540 Index Children Children Avoiding dangers in the vehicle................ Basic instructions.................................... Chock Storage location..................................... Chock see Chock City lighting.................................................. lighting Cleaning see Care Climatee control Climat control Activating/deactivating.......................... Activating/deactivating the A/C function (control panel)................................. Activating/deactivating the A/C function (MBUX multimedia system).............. Activating/deactivating the synchronisation function (control panel)............. Activating/deactivating the synchronisation function (MBUX multimedia system).................................................. Air-recirculation mode............................ Automatic control.................................. Calling up the air conditioning menu....... 59 58 420 146 161 161 162 162 163 163 162 161 Climate style function............................ Demisting the windscreen...................... Demisting windows................................ Front air vents........................................ Glove box air vent.................................. Immediate pre-entry climate control....... Information on the windscreen heater.... Inserting/removing the acon (fragrance system)...................................... Ionisation............................................... Note...................................................... Pre-entry climate control at departure time....................................................... Pre-entry climate control using the key... Rear air vents......................................... Residual heat......................................... Setting (MBUX multimedia system)......... Setting the air distribution...................... Setting the air ow.................................. Setting the climate style......................... Setting the fragrance system.................. Setting the vehicle interior temperature....................................................... Stationary heater/ventilation................. Switching the rear window heater on/o ................................................... 162 160 163 172 173 167 165 164 163 160 166 165 173 163 161 160 160 162 163 160 168 160 THERMATIC control panel...................... 160 THERMOTRONIC control panel............... 160 Ventilating the vehicle (convenience opening).................................................. 95 Climatee sty Climat style le Function................................................ 162 Setting................................................... 162 Co-driv Co-dr iver er airbag shut shutoo see Automatic co-driver airbag shuto Cockpit Coc kpit Overview.............................................. 6, 10 Co ee cup symbol see ATTENTION ASSIST Collision detection detection (parked (parked vehicle) vehicle) Setting................................................... 228 Combination switch..................................... switch 144 Combined luggag luggagee cover cover and net Attaching to the rear seat backrest........ 131 Installing/removing................................ 131 Component-speci Com ponent-speci c inf infor ormation mation................... 430 Comput Com puter er see On-board computer Convenience Conv enience closing...................................... closing 95 Index 541 Convenience opening..................................... Convenience opening 95 Coolant (engine) Level check............................................ 380 Notes..................................................... 441 Cooling see Climate control Copyr Cop yright ight....................................................... 42 Corner Cor nering ing light............................................. light 145 Cross Cr oss tr traa c (w (war arning) ning) see Manoeuvring assistance Cross Cr oss Tr Traa c Alert Alert........................................ 284 Crosswind Cr osswind Assist Function/notes...................................... 233 Cruise Cr uise control control Activating............................................... 239 Buttons.................................................. 239 Calling up a speed................................. 239 Deactivating........................................... 239 Function................................................ 238 Maximum design speed.......................... 195 Requirements:....................................... 239 Selecting............................................... 239 Setting a speed...................................... 239 Storing a speed...................................... 239 System limitations.................................. 238 D Dashcam Notes..................................................... 348 Selecting a USB device.......................... 349 Starting/stopping a video recording....... 349 Dataa acquisition Dat acquisition Vehicle..................................................... 39 Dataa protection Dat protection rights rights Data storage............................................ 42 Dataa stor Dat storage age Data protection rights.............................. 42 Electronic control units............................ 39 Online services........................................ 41 Vehicle..................................................... 39 Deactivating Deactiv ating the the alarm alarm (ATA) (ATA)......................... 103 Dealership Dealer ship see Quali ed specialist workshop Declaration Declar ation of confor conformity mity Electromagnetic compatibility.................. 28 Jack......................................................... 34 Speci c absorption rate........................... 28 TIREFIT kit................................................ 35 Wireless vehicle components................... 28 Decorativ Decor ativee foil foil (cleaning instr instructions) uctions)........... 384 DeNOx DeN Ox agent agent see AdBlue® Destination Des tination entry Entering a POI or address....................... 344 Detecting Det ecting inattentiv inattentiveness eness see ATTENTION ASSIST Diagnostics Diagnos tics connection.................................. connection 35 Diesel Low outside temperatures...................... 435 Notes..................................................... 435 Digital Digit al Owner's Manual............................ Manual 20, 21 Digital Digit al TV see TV Dinghyy towing Dingh towing see Tow-bar system DIRECT SELECT lever lever Engageing reverse gear.......................... 200 Engaging drive position.......................... 201 Engaging neutral.................................... 200 542 Index Engaging park position automatically...... Function................................................ Selecting park position........................... Displayy (care) Displa (care)............................................... Displayy (MBUX multimedia system) Displa system) Home screen......................................... Operating.............................................. Displayy (on-board Displa (on-board comput computer) er) Displays on the instrument display......... Displayy in the Displa the windscreen windscreen see Head-up display Displayy message Displa Calling up (on-board computer).............. Notes..................................................... Displayy messages Displa messages ç - - - km/h..................................... È - - - km/h..................................... h - - - km/h..................................... # 12 V battery See Owner's Manual......................................................... Û 48 V battery See Owner's Manual......................................................... 201 199 201 387 328 329 301 449 449 486 485 485 504 506 ò Acoustic presence indicator inoperative............................................. : Active Light System inoperative..... ¯ AdBlue system fault Emer. op.: max. XXX km/h Start not poss. in XXX km.................................................. ¯ AdBlue system fault Emergency op. in XXX miles See Owner's Manual.... ¯ AdBlue system fault Engine start not possible................................... ¯ AdBlue system fault See Owner's Manual............................................ 5 Add 1 litre engine oil when next refuelling............................................... é ATTENTION ASSIST inoperative..... é ATTENTION ASSIST: Take a break!.................................................... : Automatic driving lights inoperative...................................................... 463 457 514 513 514 513 515 484 484 457 Û Battery overheated Stop, everybody out! Outdoors if possible................ Á Change key batteries.................... è Charger cable connected.............. J Check brake uid level.................. 5 Check eng. oil lev. when next refuelling............................................... ï Check trailer hitch lock (white display message).................................... h Check tyre(s)................................ ! Clean the fuel lter....................... É Compressor is cooling.................. ÿ Coolant Stop vehicle Switch engine o .............................................. ! currently unavailable See Owner's Manual............................................ ÷ currently unavailable See Owner's Manual............................................ 5 Engine oil level cannot be measured....................................................... 465 454 463 483 515 469 508 476 497 475 499 500 517 Index 543 5 Engine oil level Reduce oil level..... 5 Engine oil level Stop vehicle Switch engine o ................................... 5 Engine oil pressure Stop Switch o engine.............................................. ä Fault Drive at max. 80 km/h......... 6 Front le malfunction Consult workshop (example)............................... & inoperative Battery low................. & inoperative Charge HV battery...... & inoperative High-voltage battery charging incomplete............................... & inoperative Refuel vehicle.............. & inoperative See Owner's Man........ ! inoperative See Owner's Manual... ÷ inoperative See Owner's Manual... T inoperative See Owner's Manual... G Inoperative................................... î inoperative.................................... 516 516 517 495 451 460 461 461 460 460 500 501 502 503 488 : Intelligent Light System inoperative........................................................ Á Key being initialised Please wait.... Á Key not detected (red display message)............................................... Á Key not detected (white display message)............................................... : Le dipped beam (example).......... 6 Le windowbag malfunction Consult workshop (example).................. ¢ Lowering....................................... : Malfunction See Owner's Manual......................................................... Û Malfunction Visit workshop........... d Malfunction.................................. Û Malfunction.................................. É Max. speed 35 km/h (red display message)........................................ É Max. speed 35 km/h (white display message)........................................ 458 455 455 455 456 452 496 456 466 466 465 497 497 î Max. speed 40 km/h.................... 488 ð Maximum speed exceeded............ 487 î Not possible in current drive program................................................. 488 Ø .................................................... 512 ç O ................................................ 486 ë O ................................................ 484 ï Operation only possible in transmission position P.......................... 469 ! Parking brake See Owner's Manual.................................................. 480 d Performance severely limited........ 467 É Please reduce speed............. 496, 497 Ý Please wait 48 V battery charging......................................................... 506 6 Please wait Depressurising tank.... 467 & Pre-entry climate control (via key) available again a er engine start..... 461 & Pre-entry climate control (via key) inoperative HV-battery low.............. 462 544 Index _ Rear le seat backrest not locked (Example).................................... h Rectify tyre pressure..................... Ø Re ll AdBlue See Owner’s Manual......................................................... ! Release parking brake................... ¸ Replace air cleaner....................... Á Replace key.................................. 8 Reserve fuel level.......................... 6 Restraint sys. malfunction Consult workshop........................................ # See Owner's Manual..................... Ù Steering malfunction Increased physical e ort See Owner's Manual....... Ù Steering malfunction Stop immediately See Owner's Manual........... d Stop Switch engine o .................. # Stop vehicle Leave engine running....................................................... 473 509 512 482 476 454 476 450 505 471 471 466 506 # Stop vehicle See Owner's Manual......................................................... É Stop vehicle Vehicle too low.......... ç suspended.................................... : Switch o lights............................ : Switch on headlamps.................... 6 Tank is depressurised Ready for refuelling............................................... 6 Tank ventilation Malfunction Consult workshop.................................. á temporarily unavailable Camera view restricted....................................... ¸ temporarily unavailable Sensors dirty....................................................... Ø Top up AdBlue Emergency op. in XXX miles See Owner's Manual.............. + Top up coolant See Owner’s Manual.................................................. ¥ Top up washer uid....................... 505 495 486 457 457 467 468 494 493 512 474 473 u Towing not permitted See Owner's Manual............................................ ï Trailer coupling extending…........... ! Turn on the ignition to release the parking brake................................... d Vehicle is operational Switch o ignition before exiting............................. É Vehicle rising Please wait.............. É Vehicle rising................................ h Warning tyre defect....................... h Wheel sensor(s) missing................ Ø XX,X l Top up AdBlue Switch on ignition, wait 60 sec. or eng. start not poss...................................................... "Electric" drive program currently unavailable............................................. Active Blind Spot Assist currently unavailable See Owner's Manual............ Active Blind Spot Assist inoperative........ 462 469 483 468 496 496 509 508 513 464 491 492 Index 545 Active Blind Spot Assist not available when towing a trailer See Owner's Manual.................................................. Active bonnet malfunction See Owner's Manual............................................ Active Brake Assist Functions currently limited See Owner's Manual......... Active Brake Assist Functions limited See Owner's Manual.............................. Active Distance Assist available again..... Active Distance Assist currently unavailable See Owner's Manual............ Active Distance Assist inoperative.......... Active Lane Keeping Assist currently unavailable See Owner's Manual............ Active Lane Keeping Assist inoperative... Active Steering Assist currently unavailable due to multiple emergency stops........................................... 492 471 502 503 487 486 487 492 493 489 Active Steering Assist currently unavailable See Owner's Manual............ Active Steering Assist inoperative........... Active Stop-and-Go Assist currently unavailable see Owner's Manual............. Active Stop-and-Go Assist inoperative See Owner's Manual.............................. Adaptive Highbeam Assist currently unavailable See Owner's Manual............ Adaptive Highbeam Assist inoperative.... Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus currently unavailable See Owner's Manual... Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus inoperative................................................... Apply brake to deselect Park (P) position........................................................ Apply brake to select D or R................... Apply brake to select R.......................... Auxiliary battery malfunction (red display message)........................................ 488 489 490 490 458 458 459 459 477 477 477 479 Auxiliary battery malfunction (white display message).................................... 479 Beginning emergency stop..................... 489 Blind Spot Assist currently unavailable See Owner's Manual.............................. 491 Blind Spot Assist inoperative.................. 491 Blind Spot Assist not available when towing a trailer See Owner's Manual...... 491 Cannot start engine See Owner's Manual.......................................... 474, 507 Charging fault Please change charging method See Owner's Manual................. 464 Charging method currently unavailable Please try again or change charging method............................................ 464 Check brake pads See Owner's Manual......................................................... 483 Check tyre pressures then restart Run Flat Indicator......................................... 511 Cruise control and Limiter inoperative.... 485 546 Index Cruise control inoperative...................... Cruise control o ................................... Device detected at diagnostics connection See Owner's Manual.................. Front-passenger airbag disabled See Owner's Manual..................................... Front-passenger airbag enabled See Owner's Manual..................................... Hazard warning lamps malfunctioning.... Head-up display currently unavailable See Owner's Manual.............................. Head-up display inoperative................... Limiter inoperative................................. Limiter passive....................................... Motor can be started again.................... N permanently active Risk of vehicle rolling.................................................... Not in current drive program.................. Not possible to unlock charging cable See Owner's Manual.............................. 485 485 504 452 453 459 470 471 485 485 507 478 498 463 Only electric drive available Power limited................................................... Only select Park (P) when vehicle is stationary.............................................. Parking Assist and PARKTRONIC inoperative See Owner's Manual................... Place the key in the marked space See Owner's Manual.............................. PRE-SAFE impulse side inoperative See Owner's Manual.............................. PRE-SAFE inoperative See Owner's Manual.................................................. Reduce speed........................................ Reduced drive system performance See Owner's Manual.............................. Reversing not poss. Consult workshop... Risk of vehicle rolling Driver door open and transmission not in P.............. Run Flat Indicator inoperative................. Speed limit (winter tyres) XXX km/h....... 464 476 498 456 454 454 510 464 478 477 511 487 Stop vehicle Leave engine running Wait Transmission cooling...................... To shi out of P or N, depress brake and start engine..................................... To switch o the engine, press the Start/Stop button for at least 3 seconds or 3 times...................................... Tra c Sign Assist currently unavailable See Owner's Manual........................ Tra c Sign Assist inoperative................. Transmission Malfunction Stop............... Tyre press. monitor currently unavailable......................................................... Tyre press. monitor inoperative.............. Tyre press. monitor inoperative No wheel sensors........................................ Tyre pressure Check tyres...................... Tyre(s) overheated.................................. Vehicle not currently being charged Charging station fault............................. 479 477 474 490 490 478 507 507 508 511 510 463 Index 547 Wiper malfunctioning............................. 473 Without changing gear, consult workshop.............................................. 466, 478 Without starting engine again, consult workshop............................................... 466 Distance Dist ance control control see Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC DISTR DIS TRONIC ONIC see Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC Door Additional door lock................................. 82 Child safety lock (rear door)..................... 76 Locking/unlocking (emergency key)......... 86 Opening (from inside)............................... 83 Power closing function............................. 86 Unlocking (from inside)............................ 83 Door control control panel......................................... panel 16 Downhill Do wnhill driving driving assistance assistance see DSR Drawbar Dra wbar see Tow-bar system Driv Dr ivee Away Away Assist......................................... Assist 283 Driv Dr ivee position Engaging................................................ Driv Dr ivee progr program am display.................................. display Driv Dr ivee progr programs ams see DYNAMIC SELECT Driv Dr iver's er's seat see Seat Driving Dr iving abroad abroad Light adjustment (low beam).................. Driving Dr iving safety safety system system ABS (Anti-lock Braking System).............. Active Brake Assist................................. Adaptive brake lights.............................. BAS (Brake Assist System)..................... Cameras................................................ EBD (Electronic Brake force Distribution)....................................................... ESP® Crosswind Assist.......................... ESP® trailer stabilisation........................ O -road ABS.......................................... Overview................................................ Radar and ultrasonic sensors................. Responsibility......................................... STEER CONTROL................................... 201 197 142 231 253 236 232 229 234 233 233 232 230 229 229 234 Driving Dr iving system system see 360° Camera see Active Blind Spot Assist see Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC see Active Emergency Stop Assist see Active Lane Keeping Assist see Active Parking Assist see Active Speed Limit Assist see Active Steering Assist see AIR BODY CONTROL see ATTENTION ASSIST see Blind Spot Assist see Cruise control see Driving safety system see DSR see HOLD function see Limiter see Parking Assist PARKTRONIC see Reversing camera see Tra c Sign Assist Driving Dr iving tips Driving abroad (low beam light adjustment)..................................................... 142 General driving tips................................ 182 optimised acceleration........................... 181 548 Index Running-in notes.................................... Driving Dr iving tips see Recuperation Drowsiness Drow siness detection detection see ATTENTION ASSIST DSR Activating/deactivating.......................... Changing the target speed..................... Function................................................ Notes..................................................... Dynamic handling control control system system see ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) DYN YNAMIC AMIC SELECT Calling up the fuel consumption indicator...................................................... Con guring drive program I.................... Displaying engine data........................... Displaying vehicle data........................... Drive program display............................ Drive programs...................................... Function................................................ Operating (DYNAMIC SELECT switch)..... Selecting the drive program................... 180 250 250 249 249 198 197 198 198 197 195 195 197 197 E E10.............................................................. 434 E10 Easy entry entr y feature feature Function/notes...................................... 121 Setting................................................... 122 Easy exit exit feature feature Function/notes...................................... 121 Setting................................................... 122 EASY-PAC EASY -PACK K load-securing load-securing kit Inserting brackets.................................. 135 Installing/removing the luggage holder... 135 Installing/removing the telescopic rod... 136 Notes..................................................... 134 EBD (Electronic (Electronic Brak Brakee for force ce Dis Distr tribution) ibution) Function/notes...................................... 234 ECO EC O Assist Function/notes.............................. 190, 193 ECO EC O display Function................................................ 189 ECO EC O star start/st t/stop op function Switching o /on.................................... 189 Electric Electr ic drive drive................................................ 174 Electric parking Electric parking brake brake Applying automatically........................... 226 Applying/releasing manually.................. 227 Emergency braking................................ 228 Releasing automatically.......................... 227 Electrical Electr ical fuses see Fuses Electromagne Electr omagnetic tic compatibility compatibility Declaration of conformity......................... 28 Electronic Electr onic Stability Stability Progr Program am see ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) Emergency Emerg ency Fire extinguisher.................................... 390 First-aid kit (so sided).......................... 390 Overview of the help functions................. 18 Removing the warning triangle............... 389 Safety vest............................................. 389 Setting up the warning triangle............... 390 Emergency Emerg ency braking braking...................................... 228 Emergency Emerg ency braking braking see BAS (Brake Assist System) Emergency Emerg ency call see Mercedes-Benz emergency call system Index 549 Emergency key Emergency Inserting/removing.................................. 81 Locking/unlocking the doors................... 86 Unlocking the tailgate.............................. 92 Emergency Emerg ency operation operation mode Starting the vehicle................................ 178 Emergency Emerg ency shut shutoo see Hybrid system Emergency Emerg ency spare spare wheel Notes..................................................... 426 Energy Ener gy ow display Displaying.............................................. 341 Function/notes...................................... 342 Engine Engine number....................................... 431 Starting (emergency operation mode).... 178 Starting (Remote Online)........................ 179 Engine data Displaying.............................................. 198 Engine electronics electronics Notes..................................................... 428 Engine number............................................. number 431 Engine oil Additives................................................ 438 Capacity........................................ 439, 440 Checking the oil level using the oil dipstick.................................................. 377 Checking the oil level using the onboard computer..................................... 378 MB-Freigabe or MB-Approval.......... 439, 440 Quality........................................... 439, 440 Topping up............................................. 379 ERA-GL ERA -GLON ONASS ASS tes testt mode Starting/ending..................................... 365 Error Err or message see Display message ESC (Electronic (Electronic Stability Stability Control) Control) see ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) ESP® Crosswind Assist.................................... 233 Trailer stabilisation................................. 233 ® ESP (Electr (Electronic onic Stability Stability Progr Program) am) Activating/deactivating.......................... 234 Function/notes...................................... 232 EU type approval approval number............................. number 431 Exter Ext erior ior lighting Care...................................................... 385 Exter Ext erior ior lighting see Lights F Fatigue detection detection see ATTENTION ASSIST Fir iree extinguisher extinguisher.......................................... Firs irst-aid t-aid kit (so sided) sided)................................. Flacon Inserting/removing................................ Flat towing towing see Tow-bar system Flat tyre MOExtended tyres................................. Notes..................................................... TIREFIT kit.............................................. Wheel change........................................ Floor mats mats................................................... Fog light (enhanced)..................................... (enhanced) Foil cover covering ing Radar and ultrasonic sensors................. 390 390 164 391 391 393 421 141 146 229 550 Index Folding bench bench seat Fitting and removing the seat cushion.... 118 Folding back.......................................... 117 Folding out............................................. 116 Notes..................................................... 116 Opening and closing the load compartment oor........................................ 118 Fragr Fr agrance ance see Fragrance system Fragr Fr agrance ance system system Inserting/removing the acon................ 164 Setting................................................... 163 Free Fr ee so ware ware................................................. 42 Freq Fr equencies uencies Mobile phone......................................... 429 Two-way radio........................................ 429 Front Fr ont airbag (driv (driver er,, front front passenger) passenger).............. 50 Front Fr ont passenger passenger seat see Seat Fuel Additives................................................ 435 Diesel.................................................... 435 E10........................................................ 434 Fuel reserve........................................... 437 Low outside temperatures...................... Petrol..................................................... Quality (diesel)....................................... Quality (petrol)....................................... Refuelling............................................... Sulphur content..................................... Tank content.......................................... Fuel consumption consumption indicator indicator Calling up.............................................. Function seat see Door control panel Fuses Before replacing a fuse.......................... Fuse assignment diagram....................... Fuse box in the engine compartment...... Fuse box in the front passenger footwell........................................................ Fuse box in the load compartment......... Fuse box on the dashboard.................... Notes..................................................... 435 434 435 434 203 434 437 198 407 407 408 409 409 409 407 G Garag Gar agee door opener Clearing the memory.............................. 226 Garag Gar agee door openers Opening/closing the door...................... 225 Programming buttons............................. 224 Resolving problems................................ 225 Synchronising the rolling code................ 225 Gearshi Gear shi recommendation ecommendation........................... 202 Genuine parts par ts................................................ 24 Glide mode.................................................. mode 202 Glovee box Glov Air vent.................................................. 173 Gross Gr oss mass.................................................. mass 431 H Handbrake Handbrake see Electric parking brake Handling char charact acter eris istics tics (unusual) (unusual)................ HANDS-FREE ACCESS ACCESS................................... Hazardd war Hazar warning ning lights................................... lights Head res restr traint aint Front (adjusting mechanically)................ Rear (adjusting)...................................... Rear ( tting/removing)........................... Rear (lowering from the front)................. 411 90 144 110 111 111 111 Index 551 Head-up display Adjusting brightness (on-board computer).................................................... 302 Adjusting display elements (on-board computer).............................................. 302 Care...................................................... 387 Function................................................ 302 Menu (on-board computer)..................... 302 Operating the memory function.............. 123 Setting the position (on-board computer).................................................... 302 Switching on/o .................................... 304 Headlampp ashing Headlam ashing........................................ 144 Headlamps Headlam ps see Automatic driving lights Heating see Climate control Help call see Mercedes-Benz emergency call system High beam Activating/deactivating.......................... 144 High beam see Adaptive Highbeam Assist see Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus High-pressuree cleaner (care) High-pressur (care)........................ High-volt High-v oltag agee battery battery Charge level display............................... Charging cable control panel.................. Charging duration.................................. Connection types................................... Ending the charging process (alternating current, mode 2/3).......................... Energy ow display................................. General notes on charging..................... Notes on charging (charging station, mode 3)................................................. Notes on charging (mains socket, mode 2)................................................. Notes on charging (wallbox, mode 3)...... Range.................................................... Setting the maximum possible charging current (mains socket)...................... Stowing the charging cable.................... Type....................................................... Voltage types......................................... Hill Star Startt Assist............................................ Assist HOLD function Function/notes...................................... Switching on/o .................................... 383 221 214 445 445 220 341 210 212 211 212 445 213 210 445 445 236 235 235 Home screen screen (media display) display) Overview................................................ Hooking the the luggag luggagee net............................... net Hybrid Hybr id system system Con guring settings via the multimedia system............................................. Manual switch-o ................................... Hybrid Hybr id system system see Battery operation see Electric drive 328 134 341 175 I i-Size child child seat securing securing system system Fitting...................................................... 66 Seats suitable for attaching...................... 66 Identi cation plate Engine................................................... 431 Vehicle.................................................. 431 Ignition key see Key Immediatee pre-entr Immediat pre-entryy climate climate control control............. 167 Immobiliser.................................................. 102 Immobiliser 552 Index Implied Im plied warr warranty anty Vehicle..................................................... 39 In-Car O ce Features................................................ 359 Indicator Indicat or lamp see Warning/indicator lamp Individual driv drivee progr program am Con guring............................................ 197 Selecting............................................... 197 Inspection see ASSYST PLUS Instr Ins trument ument cluster cluster Function/notes.............................. 296, 297 Instr Ins trument ument display Function/notes...................................... 297 Instrument cluster.................................... 12 Overview of displays............................... 301 Warning/indicator lamps........................ 517 Instr Ins trument ument display display and on-board on-board computer put er Function/notes...................................... 296 Intellig Int elligent ent Light System System Activating/deactivating.......................... 146 Active headlamps................................... 145 Adaptive Highbeam Assist...................... 147 Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus............... 148 Bad weather light................................... 146 City lighting............................................ 146 Cornering light....................................... 145 Fog light (enhanced).............................. 146 Motorway mode..................................... 146 Overview................................................ 145 Intellig Int elligent ent operating-mode operating-mode str strat ategy egy see Route-based operating-mode strategy Inter Int erior ior lighting Adjusting............................................... 150 Ambient lighting..................................... 151 Reading lamp......................................... 150 Switch-o delay time.............................. 151 Inter Int erior ior prot protection ection Function................................................ 103 Priming/deactivating............................. 104 Inter Int erne nett radio radio see TuneIn Ionisation Activating/deactivating (MBUX multimedia system)....................................... 163 iPhone® see Smartphone integration ISOFIX child child seat anchor anchor Seats suitable for attaching...................... 65 ISOFIX child child seat securing securing system system Fitting...................................................... 66 J Jack Declaration of conformity......................... 34 Storage location..................................... 420 Jump-st Jum p-star artt connection General notes........................................ 398 K Key Acoustic locking veri cation signal........... 80 Activating/deactivating pre-entry climate control.......................................... 165 Battery..................................................... 81 Deactivating a function............................ 80 Emergency key......................................... 81 Energy consumption................................ 80 Function overview.................................... 79 Index 553 Key ring attachment................................. 81 Problem................................................... 82 Unlocking setting..................................... 80 KEYLESS-GO Deactivating a function............................ 80 Locking/unlocking the vehicle................. 84 Problem................................................... 85 Unlocking setting..................................... 80 Kickdo Kic kdown wn Using..................................................... 202 Knee airbag.................................................... airbag 50 L Lamp see Interior lighting Lampp (instr Lam (instrument ument display) display) see Warning/indicator lamp Lane detection detection (automatic) (automatic) see Active Lane Keeping Assist Lane Keeping Keeping Assist see Active Lane Keeping Assist Language Notes..................................................... 340 Setting................................................... Level Lev el control control system system see AIR BODY CONTROL Light adjustment adjustment Low beam (driving abroad)..................... Light switch Overview................................................ Lighting see Interior lighting see Lights Lights Active headlamps................................... Adaptive Highbeam Assist...................... Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus............... Automatic driving lights.......................... Bad weather light................................... City lighting............................................ Combination switch............................... Cornering light....................................... Driving abroad (low beam light adjustment)..................................................... Fog light (enhanced).............................. Hazard warning lights............................. Headlamp ashing................................. 340 142 142 145 147 148 143 146 146 144 145 142 146 144 144 High beam............................................. Intelligent Light System.......................... Light switch........................................... Low beam.............................................. Motorway mode..................................... Parking lights......................................... Rear fog light......................................... Responsibility for lighting systems.......... Setting low beam................................... Setting the exterior lighting switch-o delay time.............................................. Standing lights....................................... Switching the Intelligent Light System on/o ................................................... Switching the surround lighting on/o ... Turn signal indicator............................... Limiter Limit er Activating............................................... Buttons.................................................. Calling up a speed................................. Deactivating........................................... Function................................................ Maximum design speed.......................... Passive mode......................................... Permanent setting.................................. 144 145 142 142 146 142 142 142 150 150 142 146 150 144 239 239 239 239 239 195 239 241 554 Index Requirements........................................ 239 Selecting............................................... 239 Setting a speed...................................... 239 Storing a speed.............................. 239, 244 Switching o /deactivating..................... 244 Switching on/activating......................... 244 System limits......................................... 239 Limiting speed see Limiter Limiting the the opening angle (tailg (tailgat ate) e)............... 92 LINGUA LIN GUATR TRONIC ONIC Acoustic aids......................................... 307 Function................................................ 331 Improving voice quality........................... 308 Language setting.................................... 306 Media player voice commands............... 318 Message voice commands..................... 321 Multifunction steering wheel (operation)....................................................... 305 Navigation voice commands................... 310 Notes on the voice commands............... 308 Online voice control............................... 308 Operable functions................................. 306 Operating safety.................................... 305 Radio voice commands.......................... 317 Setting (MBUX multimedia system)......... Starting................................................. Switch voice commands......................... Telephone voice controls........................ Text message voice commands.............. TV voice commands............................... Vehicle voice commands........................ Voice prompting..................................... Livee Tr Liv Traa c Inf Infor ormation mation Switching the tra c information display on................................................... Load compar compartment tment cover cover Extending/retracting.............................. Notes..................................................... Loading Bag hook............................................... Notes..................................................... Roof luggage rack.................................. Tie-down eyes........................................ Loading see EASY-PACK load-securing kit Loading guidelines....................................... guidelines Loads Securing................................................ 307 332 309 315 321 317 322 305 347 130 130 133 123 137 133 123 123 Locking/unloc Loc king/unlocking king Additional door lock................................. 82 Emergency key......................................... 86 KEYLESS-GO............................................ 84 Opening the tailgate................................. 87 Switching the automatic locking feature on/o .............................................. 85 Unlocking/opening the doors from the inside................................................. 83 Low Lo w beam Activating/deactivating.......................... 142 Light adjustment (driving abroad)........... 142 Setting................................................... 150 Lubr ubricant icant additives additives see Additives Lugg uggage age Luggage net........................................... 134 Securing................................................ 123 Lumbar support see Lumbar support (4-way) Lumbar support suppor t (4-way) (4-way)............................... 109 Index 555 M Maintenance Maint enance see ASSYST PLUS Malfunction Restraint system...................................... 44 Manoeuvring Manoeuvr ing aid see Manoeuvring assistance Manoeuvring Manoeuvr ing Assist see Trailer Manoeuvring Assist Manoeuvring Manoeuvr ing assistance assistance Cross Tra c Alert.................................. 284 Drive Away Assist................................... 283 Manoeuvring brake function................... 284 Manoeuvring Manoeuvr ing assistant assistant Activating/deactivating.......................... 285 Manoeuvring Manoeuvr ing brak brakee function......................... function 284 Map Displaying online map contents.............. 347 Displaying weather information.............. 347 Moving................................................... 346 Selecting the map orientation................ 346 Setting the map scale............................ 346 Switching motorway information on/o ................................................... Massagee progr Massag programmes ammes Overview................................................ Resetting the settings............................ Selecting the front seats........................ Maximum design speed................................ speed Maximum design speed see Limiter Maximum permissible permissible gross gross vehicle vehicle weight weight... MBUX Inter Interior ior Assistant Assistant Overview................................................ Switching the reading light on/o (contactless).......................................... Switching the search light on/o (contactless).......................................... MBUX multimedia system system Activating/deactivating standby mode... Con guring drive program I.................... Home screen......................................... Notes..................................................... Operating the touchscreen..................... Overview................................................ Restoring (factory settings).................... 346 113 114 113 195 431 332 334 334 229 197 328 326 329 326 340 Setting collision detection (parked vehicle).................................................. 228 Setting route-based speed adaptation.... 248 Setting the air distribution...................... 162 Setting the fragrance system.................. 163 Setting the stationary heater/ventilation........................................................ 169 Standby mode function.......................... 228 Switching ionisation on/o .................... 163 MBUX multimedia system system see Display (MBUX multimedia system) see MBUX Interior Assistant Media Overview of the functions and symbols... 366 Media mode Connecting Bluetooth® audio equipment...................................................... 368 Medical aids................................................... aids 38 Memoryy function Memor Function................................................ 122 Head-up display..................................... 123 Operating.............................................. 123 Outside mirrors...................................... 123 Seat....................................................... 123 556 Index Steering wheel....................................... Menu (on-board (on-board comput computer) er) Head-up display..................................... Overview................................................ Mercedes Mer cedes me app Information............................................ Mercedes Mer cedes me calls Arranging a service appointment............ Calling the Mercedes-Benz customer centre.................................................... Calling the Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre a er automatic accident or breakdown detection............................. Consenting to data transfer.................... Information............................................ Making a call via the overhead control panel..................................................... Transferred data..................................... Mercedes Mer cedes me connect Accident and Breakdown Management... Information............................................ Transferred data..................................... MercedesMer cedes-AMG AMG vehicles vehicles Notes..................................................... 123 302 298 359 355 354 355 356 354 353 356 358 357 359 174 Mercedes-Benz Mer cedes-Benz emerg emergency ency call system system Automatic emergency call...................... Information............................................ Information about data transfer.............. Manual emergency call.......................... Overview................................................ Self-diagnosis........................................ Starting/ending ERA-GLONASS test mode..................................................... Mercedes-Benz Mer cedes-Benz ser service vice centre see Quali ed specialist workshop Messagee (instr Messag (instrument ument display) display) see Display message Messagee memory......................................... Messag memory Messages Messag es Voice commands (LINGUATRONIC)........ Mirrors Mirr ors see Outside mirrors Mobile phone Frequencies........................................... Notes on wireless charging.................... Transmission output (maximum)............. Mobile phone see Smartphone integration 362 362 364 363 362 364 365 449 321 429 139 429 see Telephone Model type see Vehicle identi cation plate MOExtended MOExt ended tyres tyres........................................ Motorwa Mot orwayy mode........................................... mode Moving Mo ving away see Driving tips MULTIBEAM MUL TIBEAM LED.......................................... LED Multifunction steer steering ing wheel Operation.............................................. Overview of buttons............................... Multifunction steer steering ing wheel see Steering wheel Multimedia system system Activating/deactivating DSR.................. Multimedia system system see MBUX multimedia system 391 146 145 305 298 250 N Navig vigation ation Notes..................................................... 342 Overview................................................ 343 Showing/hiding the menu...................... 342 Index 557 Switching on.......................................... Voice commands (LINGUATRONIC)........ Navig vigation ation see Destination entry see Map see Route Neutr eutral al Engaging................................................ Noise Wheels and tyres................................... Wheels/tyres......................................... O Occupant safety safety see Airbag see Automatic co-driver airbag shuto see Child seat see Pets in the vehicle see PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occupant protection) see PRE-SAFE® Impulse Side see PRE-SAFE® PLUS (anticipatory occupant protection plus) see Restraint system 342 310 200 411 411 see Seat belt O -road -road dr driving iving............................................ 185 O -road -road dr driving iving see O -road driving O road road Score Displaying.............................................. 199 Oil see Engine oil On-boardd comput On-boar computer er Displaying the service due date.............. 374 Head-up display menu............................ 302 Instrument display................................. 301 Menu overview....................................... 298 Operating.............................................. 298 On-boardd diagnostics On-boar diagnostics interf interface ace see Diagnostics connection On-boardd electrical On-boar electrical system system batter batteryy (12 V) Charging................................................ 400 Replacing............................................... 401 Starting assistance................................ 400 On-boardd electronics On-boar electronics Engine electronics................................. 428 Notes..................................................... 428 Two-way radios...................................... 428 Online services ser vices Data storage............................................ 41 Online services ser vices see In-Car O ce Open-source Open-sour ce so ware ware.................................... 42 Opening the the tailg tailgat atee using your your foot foot HANDS-FREE ACCESS............................. 90 Operating Oper ating uids AdBlue®................................................. 437 Additives (fuel)....................................... 435 Brake uid............................................. 441 Coolant (engine).................................... 441 Engine oil............................................... 438 Fuel (diesel)........................................... 435 Fuel (petrol)........................................... 434 Notes..................................................... 433 Windscreen washer uid........................ 442 Operating Oper ating safety safety 48 V on-board electrical system............... 25 Declaration of conformity (electromagnetic compatibility)............................ 28 Declaration of conformity (jack)............... 34 Declaration of conformity (TIREFIT kit)...... 35 558 Index Declaration of conformity (wireless vehicle components)................................ 28 Information.............................................. 25 Operating Oper ating system system see On-board computer Optimised Op timised acceleration acceleration Activating............................................... 181 Output see Power meter Outside mirrors mirrors Anti-dazzle mode (automatic)................. 157 Automatic mirror folding function........... 158 Folding in/out........................................ 156 Operating the memory function.............. 123 Parking position..................................... 157 Setting................................................... 156 Over Ov erhead head control control panel Overview.................................................. 14 Owner's Manual Vehicle equipment................................... 25 Owner's Manual (digital) (digital)........................... 20, 21 P Paint (cleaning instr instructions) uctions)......................... Paint code................................................... code Panel heating Setting................................................... Panor anorama ama sliding sunroof sunroof see Sliding sunroof Par arkk position Engaging................................................ Selecting automatically.......................... Par arking king see Electric parking brake Par arking king aid see Parking Assist PARKTRONIC Par arking king Assist Assist P PARK ARKTR TRONIC ONIC Activating............................................... Adjusting warning tones......................... Deactivating........................................... Function................................................ System limitations.................................. Par arking king assistance assistance systems systems see Active Parking Assist 384 431 115 201 201 278 279 278 275 275 Par arking king brake brake see Electric parking brake Par arking king lights............................................... lights 142 Par arking king option option Selecting............................................... 347 Par arking king position Outside mirrors...................................... 157 Storing the position of the passenger outside mirror using reverse gear........... 158 Par arking king service ser vice Selecting parking options....................... 347 Par arking king up................................................... up 228 Par artitioning titioning net Attaching............................................... 132 PASSEN ASSENGER GER AIR BAG BAG status status display see Automatic front passenger airbag shuto Pedes edestr trian ian protection protection see Active bonnet (pedestrian protection) Per erfume fume see Fragrance system Per erfume fume vial see Fragrance system Index 559 Per eriod iod out of use Activating/deactivating standby mode... 229 Standby mode function.......................... 228 Per ermissible missible axle load.................................... load 431 Per ermissible missible towing towing methods methods......................... 402 Per ermitt mitted ed towing towing methods methods............................ 402 Petr Pe trol ol........................................................... 434 Pets Pe ts in the the vehicle vehicle.......................................... 78 Plastic Plas tic trim trim (Care) (Care)........................................ 387 Plug-in hybr hybrid id operation operation Charging cable control panel.................. 214 Charging the high-voltage battery at a charging station (mode 3)...................... 212 Charging the high-voltage battery at a mains socket (mode 2)........................... 211 Charging the high-voltage battery at a wallbox (mode 3).................................... 212 Con guring settings via the multimedia system............................................. 341 Displaying the power meter.................... 301 Ending the charging process (alternating current, mode 2/3).......................... 220 Energy ow display................................. 342 Haptic accelerator pedal........................ 195 Indicator lamps on vehicle socket........... 215 Manual switch-o of the hybrid system... 175 Notes on charging the high-voltage battery................................................... 210 Notes on plug-in hybrid operation........... 174 Power availability display........................ 300 Power meter.......................................... 300 Route-based operating-mode strategy.... 194 Setting the maximum possible charging current............................................. 213 Starting the charging process................. 217 Stowing the charging cable.................... 210 Power availability availability display Function/notes...................................... 300 Power Pow er closing function Door........................................................ 86 Power Pow er display see Power availability display Power Pow er meter meter Function/notes...................................... 300 Power Pow er supply Switching on (start/stop button)............ 177 Pre-entr Pr e-entryy climate climate control control (immediate) (immediate)........... 167 Pre-entryy climate Pre-entr climate control control at departure depar ture time Function................................................ 166 Setting................................................... 166 Pre-entr Pr e-entryy climate climate control control for for departure depar ture time Activating/deactivating.......................... 167 Pre-entr Pr e-entryy climate climate control control using the the key Function................................................ 165 Setting................................................... 165 Pre-entr Pr e-entryy climate climate control control via the the key Activating/deactivating.......................... 165 PRE-SAFE PRE-S AFE® (anticipat (anticipator oryy occupant protection) protection) Function.................................................. 56 PRE-SAFE® Sound................................... 56 Reversing measures................................. 57 PRE-SAFE PRE-S AFE® Im Impulse pulse Side Activation................................................ 44 Function.................................................. 57 PRE-SAFE PRE-S AFE® PL PLUS US (anticipator (anticipatoryy occupant protection prot ection plus) Function.................................................. 57 Reversing measures................................. 57 560 Index Preventativ Prevent ativee occupant protection protection system system see PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occupant protection) see PRE-SAFE® PLUS (anticipatory occupant protection plus) Proo le Pr Creating a new pro le............................ 336 Notes..................................................... 335 Selecting pro le options......................... 336 Progr Pr ogramme amme see DYNAMIC SELECT Protection Prot ection agains againstt collision see Manoeuvring brake function Protection Prot ection of the the envir environment onment Notes....................................................... 23 Take-back of end-of-life vehicles............... 23 Q QR code Rescue card............................................. 39 Quali ed specialis specialistt work workshop shop......................... 37 R Radar and ultrasonic ultrasonic sensors Damage................................................. 229 Radio Overview of the functions and symbols... 370 Voice commands (LINGUATRONIC)........ 317 Rain closing function Side windows........................................... 94 Rain-closing feature feature Sliding sunroof......................................... 99 REACH REAC H regulation regulation........................................... 38 Reading lamp see Interior lighting Reading light Switching on/o (contactless)............... 334 Real wood wood (Care) (Care).......................................... 387 Rear door (c (child hild safety safety lock) lock)........................... 76 Rear ffog og light Switching on/o .................................... 143 Rear seat see Seat Rear seat belt Status display.......................................... 49 Rear seat belt status status display........................... display 49 Rear window Replacing wiper blade............................ 155 Roller sunblind....................................... 101 Rear window window heater heater...................................... 160 Rear window window wipers Activating/deactivating.......................... 152 Rear ear-vie -view w mirror mirror Anti-dazzle mode (automatic)................. 157 Rear ear-vie -view w mirror mirror see Outside mirrors Recuper ecuperation ation Function................................................ 191 Setting................................................... 192 Recy ecycling cling see Take-back of end-of-life vehicles Reducing agent agent see AdBlue® Refuelling Refuelling the vehicle............................. 203 Index 561 Regis egistr tration ation Vehicle..................................................... 37 Regulat egulator oryy radio radio identi cation Indonesia............................................... 430 Small components................................. 430 Remot emotee control control (stationar (stationaryy heater/v heater/ventientilation) Displays................................................. 170 Problems............................................... 172 Replacing the battery............................. 171 Setting................................................... 169 Remot emotee Online Charging the starter battery................... 179 Cooling/heating the vehicle interior....... 179 Starting the vehicle................................ 179 Rescue card................................................... card 39 Reserve Fuel....................................................... 437 Rese esett function (MBUX multimedia system) system).... 340 Residual heat............................................... heat 163 Rest estor oring ing (fact (factor oryy settings) settings) see Reset function (MBUX multimedia system) Res estr traint aint system system Basic instructions for children.................. 58 Function in an accident............................ 44 Functionality............................................ 43 Malfunction............................................. 44 Protection................................................ 43 Reduced protection.................................. 43 Self-test................................................... 43 Warning lamp........................................... 43 Rever Rev erse se gear gear Engaging................................................ 200 Rever Rev ersing sing camera Care...................................................... 385 Function................................................ 268 Switching automatic operation on/o (360° Camera)...................................... 275 Rims (care) (care).................................................. 385 Roll away away protection protection see HOLD function Roller sunblind Rear window.......................................... 101 Side windows......................................... 101 Sliding sunroof......................................... 97 Roof lining (care) (care).......................................... 387 Roof load............................................. load 444, 445 Roof luggag luggagee rack rack Loading.................................................. 137 Securing................................................ 137 Route Calculating............................................. 345 Selecting options................................... 345 Rout outee guidance with with augmented augmented reality reality Activating............................................... 345 Displaying street names and house numbers................................................ 345 Rout oute-based e-based operating-mode operating-mode str strat ategy egy Function/notes...................................... 194 Rout oute-based e-based speed adaptation adaptation Function................................................ 247 Setting................................................... 248 Run- at char haract acter eristics istics MOExtended tyres................................. 391 Running-in notes notes.......................................... 180 S Safety systems Safety systems see Driving safety system 562 Index Safety vest Safety vest................................................... 389 Searchh light Searc Switching on/o (contactless)............... 334 Seat 4-way lumbar support............................ 109 adjusting (electrically)............................ 109 Adjusting (manually and electrically)....... 106 Adjusting (Seat Comfort)........................ 108 Adjusting the seat backrest angle (rear)..................................................... 129 Automatic adjustment............................ 112 Backrest (rear) locking........................... 129 Con guring settings............................... 112 Correct driver's seat position................. 105 Folding back the backrest (rear)............. 128 Folding the backrest forwards (rear)....... 127 Massage programme overview............... 113 Operating the memory function.............. 123 Panel heating......................................... 115 Resetting the settings............................ 114 Setting options......................................... 16 Workout programme overview................ 113 Seat see Folding bench seat Seat belt Activating/deactivating seat belt adjustment.............................................. 49 Adjusting the height................................. 48 Care...................................................... 387 Fastening................................................. 48 Protection................................................ 45 Rear seat belt status display..................... 49 Reduced protection.................................. 46 Releasing................................................. 49 Seat belt adjustment (function)................ 49 Warning lamp........................................... 49 Seat belt adjustment adjustment Activating/deactivating............................ 49 Function.................................................. 49 Seat belt tensioners tensioners Activation................................................ 44 Seat belt war warning ning see Seat belt Seat cover cover (Care) (Care)......................................... 387 Seat heating Activating/deactivating.......................... 114 Seat ventilation ventilation Switching on/o .................................... 115 Selecting a gear gear see Changing gears Selector Select or lever lever see DIRECT SELECT lever Self-test Self-t est Automatic front passenger airbag shut o ............................................................ 54 Sensorss (care) Sensor (care)............................................. 385 Service Ser vice see ASSYST PLUS Service Ser vice centre see Quali ed specialist workshop Service Ser vice interv interval al display see ASSYST PLUS Setting Se tting a speed............................................ speed 195 Setting Se tting a speed see Cruise control Setting Se tting the the map scale see Map Shi paddles see Steering wheel gearshi paddles Index 563 Shi ing gears Gearshi recommendation..................... 202 Side airbag..................................................... airbag 50 Side windows Automatic function................................... 94 Child safety lock in the rear...................... 77 Closing using the key............................... 95 Convenience closing................................ 95 Convenience opening............................... 95 Opening with the key................................ 95 Opening/closing...................................... 93 Problem................................................... 96 Rain closing function................................ 94 Roller sunblind....................................... 101 Sliding sunroof sunroof Automatic functions................................. 99 Closing.................................................... 97 Closing using the key............................... 95 Opening................................................... 97 Opening with the key................................ 95 Problem................................................. 100 Rain-closing feature................................. 99 Smartphone Smar tphone see Smartphone integration see Telephone Smartphone Smar tphone integr integration ation Overview................................................ Snow Sno w chains chains................................................ Sockett (12 V) Socke Front centre console.............................. So ware ware update System updates..................................... Sound PRE-SAFE® Sound................................... Sound menu Functions overview................................ Sparee wheel Spar see Emergency spare wheel Specialistt work Specialis workshop shop see Quali ed specialist workshop Speci c absorp absorption tion rate rate................................. Speed limit for for winter winter tyres tyres Setting................................................... Standb St andbyy mode Activating/deactivating.......................... Function................................................ 361 411 138 337 56 372 28 241 229 228 Standing lights............................................. lights Star St art-o t-o assist see Optimised acceleration Star St art/st t/stop op button button Parking the vehicle................................. Starting the vehicle................................ Switching on the power supply/vehicle.. Star St art/st t/stop op function see ECO start/stop function Start St arter er battery battery Charging (Remote Online)...................... Star St arting ting see Vehicle Star St arting ting assistance assistance see Jump-start connection Star St arting-o ting-o aid see Hill Start Assist Stationar St ationaryy heater/v heater/ventilation entilation Activating/deactivating (control panel)... Displays (remote control)....................... Problems (remote control)...................... Replacing the battery (remote control)... Setting (MBUX multimedia system)......... 142 222 178 177 179 168 170 172 171 169 564 Index Setting (remote control)......................... STEER CONTR CONTROL OL Function/notes...................................... Steer St eering ing wheel Adjusting (electrically)............................ Adjusting (manually)............................... Buttons.................................................. Care...................................................... Operating the memory function.............. Steering wheel heater............................ Steer St eering ing wheel gear earshi shi paddles paddles.................. Steer St eering ing wheel heater heater Switching on/o .................................... Steer St eering-wheel ing-wheel buttons buttons Overview................................................ Stowag Stow agee areas areas see Loading see Stowage space Stowag Stow agee compar compartments tments see Loading see Stowage space Stowag Stow agee space Armrest................................................. 169 234 120 119 298 387 123 120 201 120 305 126 Centre console...................................... 126 Door...................................................... 126 Glove compartment............................... 126 Str tree eett names and house numbers Displaying.............................................. 345 Sugges Sugg estions tions Con guring............................................ 336 Sulphur content content........................................... 434 Surround Surr ound lighting Switching on/o .................................... 150 Surround Surr ound View View see 360° Camera Suspension Adjusting the chassis level (AIR BODY CONTROL)............................................. 266 Suspension see AIR BODY CONTROL SVHC (substances (substances of ver veryy high concern) concern)........ 38 Switch-o Switc h-o dela delayy time Exterior.................................................. 150 Interior................................................... 151 Synchr Sync hronisation onisation function Activating/deactivating (control panel)... 162 Activating/deactivating (MBUX multimedia system)....................................... 163 System Syst em settings settings Overview of the system settings menu.... 336 Reset function (MBUX multimedia system)....................................................... 340 System Syst em settings settings see Language T Tailg ailgate ate Closing.................................................... 88 Emergency release from the inside........... 93 HANDS-FREE ACCESS............................. 90 Limiting the opening angle....................... 92 Opening................................................... 87 Unlocking (emergency key)...................... 92 Tailpipes (care) (care)............................................. 385 Tak ake-bac e-backk of end-of-life end-of-life vehicles vehicles Protection of the environment.................. 23 Tank content content AdBlue®................................................. 438 Fuel....................................................... 437 Reserve (fuel)......................................... 437 Index 565 Tec echnical hnical data Axle load (trailer operation).................... 448 Component-speci c information............ 430 Fastening points (trailer hitch)................ 446 Information............................................ 428 Mounting dimensions (trailer hitch)........ 446 Notes (trailer hitch)................................ 446 Overhang dimension (trailer hitch).......... 447 Regulatory radio identi cation (Indonesia).................................................... 430 Regulatory radio identi cation of small components.................................. 430 Tongue weight................................ 447, 448 Towing capacity (trailer operation).......... 447 Telephone Connecting a mobile phone (Passkey).... 353 Connecting a mobile phone (Secure Simple Pairing)....................................... 353 Functions in the telephone menu............ 353 Notes..................................................... 350 Notes on wireless charging (mobile phone)................................................... 139 Operating modes................................... 352 Telephone menu overview...................... 352 Voice commands (LINGUATRONIC)........ 315 Wireless charging (mobile phone)........... 140 Telephon elephonyy operating operating modes Bluetooth® Telephony............................. 352 Making calls in the vehicle..................... 352 Tele elevision vision see TV Tem emper perature ature Setting the vehicle interior temperature....................................................... 160 Text Te xt messages messages Voice commands (LINGUATRONIC)........ 321 Themes Fastening............................................... 336 Through-loading Thr ough-loading feature feature see Seat Tie-do ie-down wn eyes eyes.............................................. 133 TIREFIT kit Declaration of conformity......................... 35 Storage location..................................... 392 Using..................................................... 393 To switch switch on the the ignition see Vehicle Toll system system Windscreen............................................ 159 Tongue weight weight...................................... 447, 448 Tool see Vehicle tool kit Top Tether Tether...................................................... 69 Topping up Topping up AdBlue®............................... 208 Touc ouchh Control Control On-board computer................................ 298 Operating.............................................. 329 Touc ouchpad hpad Operating.............................................. 329 Touc ouchscr hscreen een Operating.............................................. 329 Tow-awa Tow -awayy protection protection Function................................................ 103 Priming/deactivating............................. 103 Tow-bar Tow -bar system system............................................ 295 Tow-st Tow -star arting ting................................................. 407 Towing To wing away................................................. away 403 566 Index Towing eye Fitting.................................................... Storage location..................................... Towing To wing methods methods........................................... Traa c inf Tr infor ormation mation Switching on the display......................... Traa c Sign Assist Tr Function/notes...................................... Setting................................................... System limits......................................... Trailer Tr ailer hitch Axle load................................................ Bicycle rack........................................... Care...................................................... Coupling up/uncoupling a trailer............ Extending/retracting the ball neck......... Extending/retracting the ball neck (MBUX multimedia system).................... Fastening points.................................... General notes........................................ Mounting dimensions............................. Notes..................................................... Overhang dimension.............................. Socket................................................... 406 406 402 347 257 259 257 448 293 385 290 288 290 446 446 446 287 447 290 Tongue weight................................ 447, 448 Towing capacity..................................... 447 Trailer Manoeuvring Assist...................... 285 Trailer Manoeuvring Manoeuvring Assist Function................................................ 285 Using..................................................... 286 Trailer Tr ailer operation operation Active Blind Spot Assist.......................... 261 Active Lane Keeping Assist..................... 262 Bicycle rack........................................... 293 Coupling up/uncoupling a trailer............ 290 Extending/retracting the ball neck......... 288 Extending/retracting the ball neck (MBUX multimedia system).................... 290 Notes..................................................... 287 Socket................................................... 290 Trailer Tr ailer stabilisation stabilisation Function/notes...................................... 233 Transmission Tr ansmission Engaging neutral.................................... 200 Transmission Tr ansmission position display....................... display 199 Transpor Tr ansporting ting Vehicle.................................................. 405 Trim Tr im element (Care) (Care)...................................... 387 TuneIn Calling up.............................................. Tur urnn signal indicator indicator Activating/deactivating.......................... TV Information............................................ Voice commands (LINGUATRONIC)........ Two-wa Tw o-wayy radios radios Frequencies........................................... Notes on installation.............................. Transmission output (maximum)............. Type approval approval number (EU)........................... (EU) Tyr yree in ation com compr pressor essor see TIREFIT kit Tyr yree pressure pressure Checking (tyre pressure monitoring system).................................................. Notes..................................................... Restarting the tyre pressure loss warning system...................................... Restarting the tyre pressure monitoring system............................................. TIREFIT kit.............................................. 372 144 369 317 429 428 429 431 414 412 416 415 393 Index 567 Tyre pressure loss warning system (function)............................................... Tyre pressure monitoring system (function)............................................... Tyre pressure table................................. Tyr yree pressur pressuree loss war warning ning system system Function................................................ Restarting.............................................. Tyr yree pressur pressuree monitor monitoring ing syst system em Checking the tyre pressures................... Checking the tyre temperature............... Function................................................ Restarting.............................................. Tyr yree pressur pressuree table table....................................... Tyr yree tem temper perature ature Checking (tyre pressure monitoring system).................................................. Tyre pressure monitoring system (function)............................................... Tyr yree tread tread.................................................... Tyr yre-c e-chang hangee tool tool kit Overview................................................ Tyr yres es Checking............................................... 415 414 413 415 416 414 414 414 415 413 414 414 411 420 411 Checking the tyre pressure (tyre pressure monitoring system)......................... 414 Fitting.................................................... 424 Flat tyre................................................. 391 Interchanging......................................... 419 MOExtended tyres................................. 391 Noise..................................................... 411 Notes on tting...................................... 416 Removing............................................... 424 Replacing....................................... 416, 421 Replacing the wheel trim........................ 421 Restarting the tyre pressure loss warning system...................................... 416 Restarting the tyre pressure monitoring system............................................. 415 Selection............................................... 416 Snow chains.......................................... 411 Storing................................................... 420 TIREFIT kit.............................................. 393 Tyre pressure (Notes)............................. 412 Tyre pressure loss warning system (function)............................................... 415 Tyre pressure monitoring system (function)............................................... 414 Tyre pressure table................................. 413 Unusual handling characteristics............ 411 U Unloc nlocking king see Locking/unlocking Updat pdates es Important system updates...................... 337 USB port Front stowage compartment.................. 126 Rear....................................................... 139 V Vehicle Activating/deactivating standby mode... 229 Additional door lock................................. 82 Collision detection (parked vehicle)........ 228 Correct use.............................................. 37 Data acquisition....................................... 39 Data storage............................................ 39 Diagnostics connection............................ 35 Equipment............................................... 25 Implied warranty...................................... 39 Locking (automatically)............................ 85 Locking/unlocking (emergency key)......... 86 Locking/unlocking (from inside)............... 83 Locking/unlocking (KEYLESS-GO)............ 84 568 Index Lowering................................................ 425 Medical aids............................................ 38 Parking up............................................. 228 QR code rescue card............................... 39 Quali ed specialist workshop................... 37 Raising................................................... 422 REACH regulation.................................... 38 Registration............................................. 37 Standby mode function.......................... 228 Starting (emergency operation mode).... 178 Starting (Remote Online)........................ 179 Starting (start/stop button)................... 178 SVHC (substances of very high concern).. 38 Switching o (start/stop button)............ 222 Switching on (start/stop button)............ 177 Towing................................................... 295 Ventilating (convenience opening)............ 95 Voice commands (LINGUATRONIC)........ 322 Vehicle battery battery see On-board electrical system battery (12 V) Vehicle camera Information............................................ 229 Vehicle data Displaying (DYNAMIC SELECT)............... 198 Notes..................................................... 442 Roof load....................................... 444, 445 Vehicle height........................................ 443 Vehicle length........................................ 443 Vehicle width......................................... 443 Wheelbase............................................. 443 Vehicle dimensions...................................... dimensions 443 Vehicle emergency emergency start start............................... 407 Vehicle identi cation number see VIN Vehicle identi cation plate EU type approval number....................... 431 Maximum gross vehicle weight............... 431 Paint code............................................. 431 Permissible axle load.............................. 431 VIN........................................................ 431 Vehicle inter interior ior Cooling or heating (Remote Online)........ 179 Vehicle key see Key Vehicle maintenance maintenance see ASSYST PLUS Vehicle sensors Information............................................ 229 Vehicle socket Care...................................................... 385 Indicator lamps...................................... 215 Vehicle tool tool kit TIREFIT kit.............................................. 392 Towing eye............................................. 406 Ventilating Convenience opening............................... 95 Ventilation see Climate control Vents see Air vents VIN Identi cation plate................................. 431 Seat....................................................... 431 Windscreen............................................ 431 Vision Demisting windows................................ 163 Windscreen heater................................. 165 Voice control control system system see LINGUATRONIC Voice dialogue system system see LINGUATRONIC Index 569 W War arning ning lamp see Warning/indicator lamp War arning ning system system see ATA (anti-the alarm system) War arning ning triangle triangle Removing............................................... 389 Setting up.............................................. 390 War arning/indicat ning/indicator or lamp ! ABS warning lamp......................... 529 Ó Active Brake Assist warning lamp.. 528 J Brake system warning lamp (red)... 527 J Brake system warning lamp (yellow)....................................................... 526 ÿ Coolant warning lamp (red)........... 523 ÿ Coolant warning lamp (yellow)....... 524 ! Electric parking brake indicator lamp (red).............................................. 526 # Electrical fault warning lamp ...................................................... 521, 525 ; Engine diagnosis warning lamp...... 525 å ESP® OFF warning lamp................ ÷ ESP® warning lamp ashes........... ÷ ESP® warning lamp lights up......... 8 Fuel reserve warning lamp lights up.......................................................... Ù Power steering warning lamp (red)...................................................... _ Reduced warning lamp power....... 6 Restraint system warning lamp...... ü Seat belt warning lamp ashes...... ü Seat belt warning lamp lights up.... ä Suspension warning lamp (yellow)....................................................... Ú System error warning lamp........... ! The electric parking brake (yellow) indicator lamp................................. ï Trailer tow hitch warning lamp....... h Tyre pressure monitoring system warning lamp ashes....................... 531 530 530 525 521 520 519 520 520 529 521 526 522 532 h Tyre pressure monitoring system warning lamp lights up.................... 532 L Warning lamp for distance warning function.................................... 528 Overview................................................ 517 PASSENGER AIR BAG............................... 54 Warr arranty anty........................................................ 39 Washer uid see Windscreen washer uid Washing by by hand (care) (care)................................ 383 Wat ater er tank tank see Air-water duct Weat eather her infor information mation..................................... 347 Web browsers browsers Overview................................................ 360 Wheel change change Fitting a new wheel................................ 424 Lowering the vehicle.............................. 425 Preparation............................................ 421 Raising the vehicle................................. 422 Removing a wheel.................................. 424 Removing/ tting hub caps..................... 421 570 Index Wheel change change see Emergency spare wheel Wheel rotation rotation............................................. 419 Wheels Care...................................................... 385 Checking............................................... 411 Checking the tyre pressure (tyre pressure monitoring system)......................... 414 Fitting.................................................... 424 Flat tyre................................................. 391 Interchanging......................................... 419 MOExtended tyres................................. 391 Noise..................................................... 411 Notes on tting...................................... 416 Removing............................................... 424 Replacing....................................... 416, 421 Replacing the hub cap............................ 421 Restarting the tyre pressure loss warning system...................................... 416 Restarting the tyre pressure monitoring system............................................. 415 Selection............................................... 416 Snow chains.......................................... 411 Storing................................................... 420 TIREFIT kit.............................................. 393 Tyre pressure (Notes)............................. Tyre pressure loss warning system (function)............................................... Tyre pressure monitoring system (function)............................................... Tyre pressure table................................. Unusual handling characteristics............ Wi-Fi Setting................................................... Windo indow w airbag............................................... airbag Windo indow w li er see Side windows Windows Care...................................................... Windows see Side windows Windscr indscreen een Demisting.............................................. Infrared re ective................................... Radio waves........................................... Replacing the wiper blades..................... Windscr indscreen een see Windscreen 412 415 414 413 411 338 50 385 160 159 159 153 Windscr indscreen een heater heater....................................... 165 Windscr indscreen een heater heater see Windscreen heater Windscr indscreen een washer washer uid Notes..................................................... 442 Windscr indscreen een washer washer system system Topping up............................................. 381 Windscr indscreen een wipers Activating/deactivating.......................... 152 Replacing the wiper blades..................... 153 Wint inter er operation operation Snow chains.......................................... 411 Wint inter er tyres tyres Setting the permanent speed limit.......... 241 Wiper blades Care...................................................... 385 Replacing (windscreen).......................... 153 Wir ireless eless char charging ging Function/notes...................................... 139 Mobile phone......................................... 140 Wir ireless eless vehicle vehicle components components Declaration of conformity......................... 28 Speci c absorption rate........................... 28 Index 571 Work orkout out progr program am Overview................................................ 113 Work orkshop shop see Quali ed specialist workshop